FMX Sagem

SAGEM FMX
64 and n x 64 kbit/s Digital Cross-Connect Multiplexer
FMX
P4.3B RELEASE
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM - No 56815140305 - Volume 1
Issue June 1999
No reproduction without the written consent of
reserves the right to change the specifications for improvement. All trademarks are registrated by their owners.
FOREWORD
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change due to technical evolutions. SAGEM SA reserves the right to change the specifications of its products to incorporate design improvements. This Technical Handbook deals with the FMX Digital Cross-connect and Multiplexer. It describes all FMX equipment that can be installed in FMX12, P3 Subscriber or FMX4 shelves. The exact composition of the FMX System is a defined in each contract.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-1
SECURITY FOREWORD
SUBRACK SAFETY ITEM Ground X X X FMX12 P3 Subscriber FMX4
Equipment conformity depends on connection of the protective earth terminal ( ) of the subrack to a sound earthing. Port safety level X X X
The ports are connected by means of L907 type Belden cables The port safety level is given in tables 1.1 and 1.2 in section 1, volume 1 of this technical manual. X
The safety level of the mains voltage is DPV (Dangerous Primary Voltage) or OV (Over Voltage) Authorized personnel X X X
These sub-racks should only be installed by authorized personnel. Fire shield X X
The sub-rack casing acts as a fire shield.
P3 Subscriber sub-racks should only be installed in cabinets, bays or racks with a bottom section that is sealed or else equipped with a V1 or HF1 class air filter (minimum), or which is situated on a none-flammable surface. Connection to an IT network X X X
These sub-racks should not be connected to an IT electrical installation (independent neutral power supply). Phase and neutral mains protection X
Protection against phase-to-neutral-to-ground short-circuits and leaks provided by the electrical installation (16 A and differential protection). This equipment should only be connected to the power supply using the specially provided cable, or any equivalent cable that conforms with harmonized standards and documentation.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-2
HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST
(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition) No. Issue (No., date) Change Description Changed Pages (Volume 1) All pages
0101
July 1998
Creation of document (Volumes 1 and 2) Equipment P4.3 release - Increasing number of equipment Units managed by LT - Error correction Stage 4.3B Upgrade - Addition of the ADPCM card - Modification of the A2S card - Error correction
0202 0203
September 1998 November 1998
All pages All pages
0304
Marsh 1999
All pages
0305
June 1999
All pages (tome 1 only)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-3
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-4
HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ?
This Technical Handbook comprises two volumes.
Volume 1 contains information relative to the entire equipment: Section 1: Section 2: System overview and specifications Equipment description: (shelf and common equipment units) and available configurations Installation and operation of equipment shelves and common sub-assemblies. Equipment operations: description of operator features. Maintenance: fault locating and restoral of operational condition through sub-assembly replacement
Section 3:
Section 4:
Volume 2 contain information relative to optional sub-assemblies (Port Cards...): hardware description and functional description, start-up and operation, on a per card basis (each card is dealt with in an individual section). Use of this information depends on the exact equipment configuration in use. For easier use of this Technical Handbook, Volume 1 contains all preliminary pages describing the organization of the Technical Handbook (content pages and foreword) and a glossary of abbreviations. NOTE : The User's Manual part number is N5681515XXYY where XX and YY represent, respectively, the version number and the edition number.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-5
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-6
PAGE INDEX
Pages
VOLUME 1
FOREWORD/SECURITY FOREWORD HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX (VOLUME 1 AND VOLUME 2) CONTENTS (VOLUME 1) LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
0-1 and 0-2 0-3 0-5 0-7 and 0-8 0-9 to 0-12 0-13 to 0-16 0-17 and 0-18 0-19 to 0-21
SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 2 - DESCRIPTION SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION AND OPERATION SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE GLOSSARY
1-1 to 1-52 2-1 to 2-14 3-1 to 3-242 4-1 to 4-20 G-1 to G-6
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-7
Pages
VOLUME 2
HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX
0-1 0-3 0-5 and 0-6
SECTION 1 - 2MU CARD SECTION 2 - A2S CARD SECTION 3 - V.24/V.11 CARD SECTION 4 - V.24/V.28 CARD SECTION 5 - 3 64 I CARD SECTION 6 - 6PAFC CARD SECTION 7 - 2w2B1Q CARD SECTION 8 - BBTxRx CARD SECTION 9 - 4U TRANSFIX CARD SECTION 10 - 6-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCHAN) SECTION 11 - SUBSCRIBER CARD SECTION 12 - 12-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCH12) SECTION 13 - CONFERENCE CARD (CONF) SECTION 14 - INTELLIGENT ACCESS DEVICE BOARD (IADB) SECTION 15 - ADPCM BOARD (ADPCM)
1-1 to 1-38 2-1 to 2-52 3-1 to 3-52 4-1 to 4-40 5-1 to 5-20 6-1 to 6-18 7-1 to 7-56 8-1 to 8-28 9-1 to 9-44 10-1 to 10-24 11-1 to 11-28 12-1 to 12-22 13-1 to 13-34 14-1 to 14-12 15-1 to 15-18
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-8
CONTENTS
Pages FOREWORD/SECURITY FOREWORD LIST OF CHANGES HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX (VOLUME 1 AND VOLUME 2) CONTENTS (VOLUME 1) LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 - Overview 1.2 - Functional Description 1.2.1 - Common Equipment Units Functions 1.2.2 - Port Cards 1.3 - Equipment Composition 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.1 - System Specifications 1.4.1.1 - Mechanical Specifications 1.4.1.2 - Auxiliary Ports 1.4.1.3 - Power Requirements 1.4.1.4 - Environmental Conditions 1.4.1.5 - Predictable Reliability 1.4.2 - 2MU Card Specifications 1.4.3 - A2S Card Specifications 1.4.4 - V.24/V.11 Card Specifications 1.4.5 - V.24/V.28 Card Specifications 1.4.6 - 3 64 I Card Specifications 1.4.7 - 6PAFC Card Specifications 1.4.8 - 2w2B1Q Card Specifications 1.4.9 - BBTxRx Card Specifications 1.4.10 - Subscr Card Specifications 1.4.11 - Exchan Card Specifications 1.4.12 - Exch12 Card Specifications 1.4.13 - 4U Transfix Card Characteristics 1.4.14 - CONF Card Characteristics 1.4.15 - IADB Card Characteristics 1.4.16 - ADPCM Card Characteristics 1.4.17 - GIE Card Battery Specifications 1.4.18 - GIE - P Card Battery Specifications 0-1 0-3 0-5 0-7 0-9 0-13 0-17 0-19 1-1 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-21 1-27 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-28 1-30 1-32 1-33 1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-38 1-39 1-40 1-41 1-42 1-43 1-43 1-44 1-44 1-45 1-45 1-45
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-9
Pages 1.5 - Reminder of the Frame Structure 1.5.1 - 2 Mbps Frame (to ITU-T recommendation G.704) 1.5.2 - 64 I + Signaling Frame 1.5.3 - 72-144-288 kbps BBTxRx Frame 1.5.4 - U Frames SECTION 2 - DESCRIPTION 2.1 - Rear Connection Shelf Description (P3 Subscriber Shelf) 2.2 - Front Connection Shelf Description (FMX12 shelf) 2.3 - Rear Connection Shelf Description (FMX4 shelf) 2.4 - Sub-set Description 2.4.1 - + 5 V/11 A, - 5 V/2 A, +53 V/0,8 A, -53 V/1,6 A Power Converter (P3) 2.4.2 - 110/220 V mains supply 2.4.3 - 48 V battery connector 2.4.4 - Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE or GIE - P) 2.4.5 - Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card (COB) 2.5 - Configurations 2.5.1 - Shelf Mode of Operation 2.5.2 - Card Combination in Shelves SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION - START-UP AND OPERATION 3.1 - Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX12 Shelf) 3.1.1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation 3.1.2 - Power Distribution and Supply 3.1.3 - Connection Description 3.1.3.1 - Slot/Connector Association 3.1.3.2 - Line Port Signals 3.1.3.3 - J108 Alarm Loop Connector 3.1.3.4 - Auxiliary Interface 3.1.3.5 - P2 Management Interface 3.1.3.6 - P1 Management Interface 3.1.3.7 - TNM Port Interface 3.1.3.8 - J115 Multiport Connector 3.2 - Rear Connection Shelf Installation (P3 Subscriber Shelf) 3.2.1 - 19 Rack-mounting Shelf Installation 3.2.2 - Power Distribution/Supply 3.2.3 - Connection Description 3.2.3.1 - Slot/Card/Adapter Card Association 3.2.3.2 - Line Port Signals 3.2.3.3 - Signals Connected on Slot 15 (GIE or GIE-P) 3.2.3.4 - Signals Connected on Slot 16 (COB) 3.3 - Rear-connection Shelf (FMX4 Shelf) Installation 3.3.1 - Power supply Installation 3.3.2 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation 3.3.3 - Power Distribution and Supply 3.3.4 - Connection Description 3.3.4.1 - Slot/connector Association 3.3.4.2 - Line Port Signals 3.3.4.3 - J601 Alarm Loop Connector 3.3.4.4 - Operating interface 3.3.4.5 - J504 Multiport Connector 3.3.4.6 - J602 TNM Ports 1-46 1-46 1-48 1-49 1-50 2-1 2-3 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-9 2-11 2-11 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-14 2-14 3-1 3-5 3-5 3-9 3-15 3-15 3-17 3-47 3-51 3-54 3-56 3-58 3-67 3-73 3-73 3-75 3-81 3-81 3-86 3-104 3-117 3-123 3-123 3-125 3-129 3-135 3-135 3-137 3-169 3-172 3-176 3-180
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-10
Pages 3.3.4.7 - J603 and J604 P1 and P2 Management Interface Ports 3.3.4.8 - J1 and J2 Secondary Power Supply Ports 3.3.4.9 - J3 and J4 Fan Power Supply Ports 3.4 - Start-up and Configuration 3.4.1 - Shelf Power-up 3.4.2 - Card Configuration 3.4.2.1 - Power Converter P3 Card 3.4.2.2 - -48V battery converter and110/220V mains supply unit 3.4.2.3 - GIE Card 3.4.2.4 - GIE - P Card 3.4.2.5 - COB Card 3.4.3 - Setting Up the Cards 3.4.4 - External Connections 3.4.5 - Card Power-up 3.4.6 - Operation 3.4.6.1 - Introduction 3.4.6.2 - Operating System 3.4.6.3 - CT Operating Software Implementation 3.4.6.4 - RMS Operating Software Implementation 3.4.6.5 - Configuration by Default 3.4.6.6 - Start-up Test 3.5 - Particular Operating Functions 3.5.1 - Connection Function 3.5.2 - Synchronization 3.5.2.1 - Synchronization Sources 3.5.2.2 - Synchronization Mode 3.5.2.3 - Synchronization Setting 3.5.3 - Codes to be Inserted in the TSs 3.5.4 - Performance Management 3.5.5 - Error and Fault Management 3.5.6 - Environment Loop Processing 3.5.7 - Events Memory 3.5.8 - CT Interface 3.5.9 - SEM Message Processing 3.6 - Evolution 3.6.1 - Adding a Port Card 3.6.2 - Modification of a Port Card without Removing it from the Shelf 3.6.3 - Port Card Removal 3.6.4 - GIE or GIE - P Card Downloading 3.6.4.1 - Minimum Downloading Configuration 3.6.4.2 - FMX Connection for Downloading 3.6.4.3 - Software Environment 3.6.4.4 - GIE or GIE - P Card Downloading Procedure SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE 4.1 - Preventive Maintenance 4.2 - Corrective Maintenance 4.2.1 - Principle 4.2.2 - Maintenance Facilities 4.2.2.1 - Front Panel LEDs and Controls 4.2.2.2 - Auxiliary Functions 3-186 3-191 3-191 3-192 3-193 3-194 3-194 3-194 3-195 3-196 3-196 3-198 3-199 3-199 3-200 3-200 3-201 3-204 3-204 3-204 3-205 3-206 3-206 3-208 3-208 3-208 3-209 3-209 3-210 3-214 3-216 3-217 3-217 3-217 3-233 3-233 3-234 3-234 3-234 3-235 3-236 3-237 3-238 4-1 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-11
Pages
4.2.3 - Fault or Error Locating 4.2.3.1 - Major (or Minor) Alarm Troubleshooting 4.2.3.2 - Synchronization Failure 4.2.3.3 - Power Supply Failure 4.2.3.4 - CT Log-on Failure 4.2.3.5 - Alarm Analysis on Common Equipment Units 4.2.3.6 - Alarm Analysis on Port Cards 4.2.4 - Card Replacement Procedure 4.2.4.1 - Replacing a Common Equipment Card 4.2.4.2 - Replacing a Port Card
4-8 4-9 4-10 4-12 4-13 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-19
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-12
LISTE OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1 - FMX System Applications Figure 1.2 - Functional Organization Figure 2.1 - Rear Connection Shelf Front Panel (P3 Subscriber Shelf) Figure 2.2 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX12 shelf) Figure 2.3 - Front view of the rear connection shelf (FMX4 shelf) Figure 2.4 - Power Converter Card Front Panel Figure 2.5 - 110/220V mains supply unit Figure 2.6 - 48 V battery converter unit Figure 2.7 - GIE or GIE - P and COB Card Front Panels Figure 3-1 - FMX 12 Shelf - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19 or ETSI Rack Figure 3-2 - FMX 12 shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Figure 3-3 - Station Power Distribution Principle Figure 3-4 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves Figure 3-5 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelf) Figure 3-6 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves) Figure 3-7 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 Figure 3-8 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable Figure 3-9 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) Figure 3-10 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX 12 Shelf Figure 3-11 - Connection cable for BBTxRx, A2ME, 2w2B1Q cards and for two A2S card ports (Standard Plan) Figure 3-12 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-13 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel) Figure 3-14 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels) Figure 3-15 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-16 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-17 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-18 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 Card Connection Figure 3-19 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card Figure 3-20 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card Figure 3-21 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card Figure 3-22 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card Figure 3-23 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection Figure 3-24 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card Figure 3-25 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection Figure 3-26 - Cable for IADB Card Connection Figure 3-27 - RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-13
Figure 3-28 - Cable for IADB Card Connection (Two V24/V28 ports) Figure 3-29 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable Figure 3-30 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable Figure 3-31 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable Figure 3-32 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable Figure 3-33 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-34 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-35 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-36 - Local CT Connection Cable Figure 3-37 - CT Connection Cable via Modem Figure 3-38 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection Figure 3-39 - P2 Management Interface Cable with standard end Figure 3-40 - Cable for P1 Management Interface connection Figure 3-41 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end Figure 3-42 - Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment Figure 3-43 - Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable Figure 3-44 - Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPACequipment (DTE mode) (Standard Plan) Figure 3-45 - Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment Figure 3-46 - Wiring harness for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment Figure 3-47 - Cable for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment (Standard Plan) Figure 3-48 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-49 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-50 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-51 - Synchronization, SEM and LTB Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-52 - P3 Subscriber Shelf Mounting Part Assembly Figure 3-53 - P3 Subscriber Shelf - 19" Rack-Mounting Shelf Assembly Figure 3-54 - Power and Alarm Bus Bar (PABB) for 19 Rack-mounting Shelf Figure 3-55 - Power Cable equipped with Two 7-way Connectors (19"Unit) Figure 3-56 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution Figure 3-57 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable Figure 3-58 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) Figure 3-59 - Cable Layout on Rear Connection Shelf Figure 3-60 - 2MU, BBTxRx and 2w2B1Q Card Connection Cable Figure 3-61 - 3 64 I (Transmission and Reception) and 4U TRANSFIX Card Connection Cable Figure 3-62 - 3 64 I (Signalling ) Card Connection Cable Figure 3-63 - 6PAFC (Transmission and Reception ) Card Connection Cable Figure 3-64 - 6PAFC (Signalling) Card Connection Cable Figure 3-65 - DCE/DTE Adapter for V24/V28 Card Connection Figure 3-66 - Extension cable for adapter (straight cable) Figure 3-67 - Straight cable for connecting one channel of the V24/V11 card - V36 Figure 3-68 - Subscr and Exchan Card Connection Cable Figure 3-69 - A2S Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-14
Figure 3-70 - Cable for P1 Management Interface connection Figure 3-71 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end Figure 3-72 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection Figure 3-73 - P2 Management Interface cable with standard end Figure 3-74 - Alarm Loops Cable Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3-75 - CT Connection Cable (Modem) Figure 3-76 - Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equiment Figure 3-77 - Cable and adapter for connecting a MEGAPAC equipment Figure 3-78 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Stantard Plan) Figure 3-79 - Synchronization Connection Cable for 2 FMXs Figure 3-80 - Synchronization Connection Cable for 3 FMXs Figure 3-81 - LTB and OQLTB Connection Cable Figure 3.82 - 110/220V Mains Power Supply or -48V Battery Converter Figure 3.83 - FMX 4 - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19"Rack Figure 3.84 - FMX 4 - 19" or ETSI Rack-mounting shelf Figure 3.85 - Station Power Distribution Principle Figure 3.86 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Rack-mounting shelf equipped with a -48V Battery Converter Figure 3.87 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves) Figure 3-88 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves) Figure 3.89 - ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution (PAPA G2 or PAPE G2) Figure 3.90 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable Figure 3.91 -"Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) Figure 3.92 -Connection Location - Rear Connection FMX4 Shelf Figure 3.93 - Cable for connecting BBTxRx Card (Standard Plan) Figure 3.94 - Cable for connecting A2S Card (Standard Plan) Figure 3.95 - 75 ohms adapter cable Figure 3.96 - 75 ohms adapter cable Figure 3.97 -120 ohms adapter Figure 3.98 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3.99 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3.100 - V24/V28 adapter for DTE Connection Figure 3.101 - V24/V28 adapter for DCE Connection Figure 3.102 - Extension cable for adaptater (straight cable) Figure 3.103 - V25/V11 adapter (ISO 2110 connector) Figure 3.104 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection Figure 3.105 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (V35) Card Connection Figure 3.106 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection Figure 3.107 - 3-V35 port adapter Figure 3.108 - Cable for IADB Card Connection Figure 3.109 - RJ45 25-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) Figure 3.110 - Cable for IADB Card Connection (Two V24/V28 ports) Figure 3-111 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-15
Figure 3-112 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable Figure 3-113 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable Figure 3-114 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable Figure 3.115 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3.116 - Cable for Subscr and Exchan Cards Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3.117- Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan) Figure 3.118- Local CT Connection Cable Figure 3.119 Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3.120 Two-shelf synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3.121 Synchronization, SEM and LTB Connection Cable (Standard Plan) Figure 3-122- Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment Figure 3-123- Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable Figure 3-124- Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPAC equipment Figure 3-125- Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment Figure 3-126- Wiring harness for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment Figure 3-127- Cable for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment Figure 3-128- Cable for P1 Management Interface connection Figure 3-129 P1 Management Interface Cable with standard end Figure 3-130- Cable for P2 Management Interface connection Figure 3-131- P2 Management Interface cable with standard end Figure 3-132- Card Layout in the Shelf Figure 3-133- Connection Function Figure 3-134- Connection to FMX for GIE or GIE - P Card downloading Figure 3-135- CT Cable (Local Operation) Figure 3-136- Downloading Adapter for GIE or GIE - P Card
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-16
LISTE OF TABLES
Table 1.1 - FMX System Interfaces Table 1.2 - FMX System Interfaces Table 1.1 - Spare Bit Allocations in Odd-numbered Frame TS 0s Table 1.2 - TS16 Bit Allocations Table 3-1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit Table 3-2 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter Table 3-3 - Slot/Connector Association Table 3-4 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I and IADB Cards Table 3-5 - V24/V11 and V24/V28 Cards Table 3-6 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards Table 3-7 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX Table 3-8 - J108 Connector, Alarm Loops Table 3-9 - GIE or GIE - P Card - J1 Connector Table 3-10 - Connector J122, "F/DEBUG - CT" Interface Table 3-11 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface Table 3-12 - Connector J115, Synchronization, SEM, Line Test Bus Ports Table 3-13 - 19 Rack- Mounting Shelf Assembly Kit Table 3-14 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter Table 3-15 - Slot/Adapter Card Association Table 3-16 - Card/Adapter Card Association Table 3-17 - Adlig adapter Card Connector J1 (1/3) Table 3-18 - Adlig adapter Card Connector J2 (2/3) Table 3-19 - Adlig adapter Card Connector J3 (3/3) Table 3-20 - AdV11 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2 and J3 Table 3-21 - AdV28 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3 and J4 Table 3-22 - Ad2M Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 Table 3-23- AdIADB Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3, J4 and J5 Table 3-24 - List of Cables Table 3-25 - List of Cables Table 3-26 - Connectors J1 and J2, GIE and GIE-P Adapter Card (ADGIE and ADGIEP) Table 3-27 - Connectors J3 and J4, GIE and GIE-P Adapter Card (ADGIE and ADGIEP) Table 3-28 - GIE Card Connector J1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-17
Table 3-29 - Connectors J1 and J2, COB Adapter Card Table 3-30 - Connector J101, -48V Battery Converter Table 3-31 - 19"or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit Table 3-32 - Slot/Connector Association Table 3-33 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, SubScr and Exchan Cards Table 3-34 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards Table 3-35 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards Table 3-36 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards Table 3-37 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards Table 3-38 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards Table 3-39 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards Table 3-40 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards Table 3-41 - J601 Connector, Alarm Loops Table 3-42 - Connectors J1 on GIE or GIE -P Front Panel and J502 ("CT Interface") on Shelf Rear Panel Table 3-43 - Connector J501, "CT/ Modem" interface Table 3-44 - Connector J504, Synchronization, SEM port, Line Test Bus Ports Table 3-45 - Connector J602, TNM Interface Table 3-46 - Connectors J603 and J604, TNM Interface Table 3-47 - Connector J1 and J2, Secondary Power Supply Ports Interface Table 3-48 - GIE Card Link and Switch Options Table 3-49 - GIE - P Card Link and Switch Options Table 3-50 - Start-up Test
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-18
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
2W/4W ADPCM AF AIS AISrem
: 2-wire/4-wire : Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation : Audio Frequency : Alarm Indication Signal : Remote Alarm Indication Signal
BBTxRx BER BER/ FAW
: Baseband Tx/Rx Card : Bit Error Rate : High Frame Alignment Word BER
CE CEU Clk Fail COB CONFB CRC
: (Data) Collection Equipment : Common Equipment Unit : Clock Signal Failure : Conections, timing Circuit and Synchronisation card : CONFERENCE Card : Cyclic Redundancy Check
DCE DM DTE
: Data Circuit-terminating Equipment : Degraded Minute : Data Terminal Equipment
EA, EB EMC ES
: E-wire A, E-wire B : Electro-Magnetic Compatibility : Errored Second
FA FAL
: Frame Alignment : Frame Alignment Loss TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-19
FAW Flt Ind
: Frame Alignment Word : Fault Indication
GIE (GIE - P) GSF GTR
: Management and Auxiliary Interface card : General Synchronization Failure (Jitter Reducer Unlock) : (Gestion Technique management alarms du Rseau) FRANCE TELECOM network
HDB3 HHT
: High Density Bipolar 3 : Hand-Held Terminal
IADB IC Int Clk
: Intelligent Access Device Board : Input Channel : Internal Clock
LO L S Fail Loop
: Local Oscillator : Line Signal Failure : Loopback
MA, MB MFAW MM MMC
: M-wire A, M-wire B : MultiFrame Alignment Word : Machine-Machine (Interface) : Man-Machine Communications
PABX PC PCM PWR Fail
: Private Automatic Branch Exchange : Personal Computer : Pulse Code Modulation : Power Supply Failure
Rem Fail
: Remote Failure
SbMux SELV TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-20
: Subscriber Multiplexer : Safety Extra Low Voltage
SEM
: (Surveillance Et Maintenance): FRANCE TELECOM Monitoring and maintenance protocol : Severely Errored Second : Signalling : Supervisory Redundancy Check : Station Multiplexer
SES SIG SRC StMux
TNV TS
: Telecommunications Network Voltage : Time Slot
UP
: Unavailability Period
Vref
: Reference Voltage
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-21
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-22
SECTION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-1
V OICE
M o b ile C o m m u n ic a tio n s C h a n n el A s s o c ia ted S ign a lin g o r IS D N D igita l P A B X
+E &M
AF
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-2

A n a lo g PABX
Z
2B 1Q (2 B + D)
1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
W ire le ss PABX
2.
04
bp
2 .0 48 M b p s
N e tw ork C o ntro l C e n te r
V 2 4 /V 1 1
D a ta T e rm in a l
V 2 4 /V 2 8
FMX
2 B 1 Q (2 B + D )
s
2.
04
bp
2B
1Q
Subscriber D a ta T ran sm ission U n it
(2
D AT A
+ D )
Figure 1.1 - FMX System Applications
V ID EO
V ide o c o n fe r en cin g S y ste m
NT1 IS DN
1.1 - Overview
Digital cross-connect systems are essential components of the modern transmission network due to the conversion to fully digital transmission and the need for advanced services integration. They must be capable of supporting, cross-connecting, inserting-removing and distributing a wide range of information including: - telephone or audiofrequency channels, - low, medium or high bit rate data channels, - 2048 kbps PCM channels, - ISDN access channels (primary or basis access), - access channels to Subscriber data transmission units for low, medium or high bit rate leased line remoting. The FMX is a Digital Cross-connect and Multiplexer System operating at 64 kbps and n x 64 kbps which meets this need. It offers a wide variety of standard interfaces and provides a wide range of terminals with access to public and private telecommunication networks and meets these multiple requirements. With a flexible and modular structure, the FMX is easily adaptable to any change of network configuration, by means of: - the Craft Terminal (CT), - or the Remote Management System (RMS), used to modify port distribution via local or remote programming via or not others equipments (FOT 155 or RMX). FMX is a microprocessor-based equipment and offers standard card slots capable of housing any port card, resulting in great operational flexibility. High reliability and low power consumption have been achieved through the use of CMOS and gate array circuitry. FMX provides the capability of configuring transmission bit rate and circuit routing depending on particular user needs, and of performing Time Slot (TS) allocation to maximize the use of 2048 kbps circuits. Where applicable, it processes Channel-Associated Signaling together with data and the "Frame Relay" function for remote operation to other network equipment. In addition to the high reliability offered by the redundancy of some Common Equipment Units (CEU) (depending on equipment type), FMX provides network operations and maintenance facilities including selecting the desired cross-connection map from those configured by the operator, processing alarms, monitoring transmission performance, and controlling maintenance operations. FMX is well suited to the construction of many types of multi-services network. A number of applications are schematically shown in Figure 1.1.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-3
1.2 - Functional Description

FMX consists essentially of two types of units: - Common Equipment Units (CEU) supporting the functions used by the whole system: . multiplexing and cross-connect of data and the associated signaling, . internal messaging processing which allows centralized operation of port cards, . n x 4 kbps EOC cross-connect, . the generation of the "Frame Relay" function, which allows remote operation of other network equipment (FMX, ETCD BMD or ETCD MVMD), . synchronization, . centralized equipment operation which includes: - auxiliary functions including connection configuration, timeslot allocation, etc., - equipment maintenance (alarm management, self-test management, remote loopback control), - quality management which generates the 2 Mbps circuit error performance parameters, . equipment remote operation via others equipments (FOT 155 or RMX), - port cards in variable numbers (1 to 12 according to equipment type) providing user services connection; they provide access to standard interfaces mounted in standard card slots: . 2048 kbps ports, . 3-64 kbps ports with 64 kbps signaling, . 6 x AF ports with signaling (two E&M channels per AF channel), . 6-2-wire telephone ports, of the subscriber or exchange type, . 12-2-wire telephone ports, of the exchange type, . V.24/V.11 and V.24/V.28 data transmission ports, . 72, 144, or 288 kbps Baseband Transmitter-Receiver ports, . 2B + D ISDN basic access ports. NOTE : More, FMX takes up the following cards: . CONFERENCE card which permits, in linear networks, data distribution, data collection, data distribution/collection and conference functions. . Intelligent Access Device Board (IADB) card which realises concentrator/ multiplexer, X25 router bridge and "Frame Relay" functions. IADB card is not supervised by the FMX, . Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) card which handles 32 or 16 kbit/s ADPCM code conversion. FMX has been designed for use in a transmission network as a single or multiple output multiplexer, or a digital cross-connect system.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-4
1.2.1 - Common Equipment Units Functions

Data Transfer
The definition of the role of the FMX is dependent on the configuration of the connection function of each card or port. The "connection" function is defined: - at the port level for 2 Mbps interfaces, - and at the card level for other cases. The "connection" function may have one of the following two conditions: multiplexed or crossconnected. When the "connection" function is multiplexed, the port or card retains its tributary or aggregate function according to its type or mode when a connection is created. When the "connection" is cross-connected, the tributary or aggregate function of the port or card is irrelevant to connection creation. Depending on card/port configuration, the FMX can behave as: - a connection network which allows the exchange of information between any two interfaces, - a cross-connect; the FMX receiving at the subscriber end tributary datastreams (channels) with which possible signaling and maintenance information is associated, and forming a single datastream at 2048 kbps ("aggregate"), - a router; the FMX is a multiple output multiaggregate. At the subscriber end it receives datastreams (or channels) ("tributary"), with which possible signaling and maintenance information is associated. It forms one or more 2048 kbps datastreams ("aggregate"). Depending on card/port configuration, the FMX can combine these different modes of operation. Whatever the mode of operation selected on card/port configuration, data transmission is performed in compliance with the allocation defined by the operator.
Signaling Transfer
The unit that processes signaling information manages the half-TS16s that carry ChannelAssociated Signaling, thereby allowing interchange of signaling information.
Synchronization
The FMX can be synchronized (synchronization possible from a nominal source and two standby sources) to one of the following clocks: - one of the clocks at 2048 kpbs from the shelf slots in which the following cards are inserted: a 2w2B1Q card with two ports (clock extracted from port in U network mode), a 2048 kbps card (2MU), or a 4-2048 kbps structured card (A2S), NOTE: The A2S card which handles up to 4 PCM datastreams delivers only one of the 4 receive clocks at a given moment. The port selected as the synchronizing clock must be "activated".
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-5
- the external synchronization interface clock (2048 kHz 50 ppm), matched to 120 and complying with ITU-T recommendation G.703, - internal clock timing possibly controlled by a TCXO ( 5 ppm) (COB card functions used with or without a TCXO). The cards delivering a synchronizing clock may be placed in any slot The FMX operates with a nominal synchronization source and at most two standby sources ranked in decreasing order of priority. The FMX continuously generates a 2048 kHz frequency controlled by the active synchronization source. In normal operation, the active synchronization source is the nominal synchronization source (the internal clock is used when no other declared source is available). The internal clock cannot be selected as backup or nominal synchronization source. However, synchronization may be forced to the internal clock (see CT user manual). In the event of an active synchronization failure, the active synchronization is switched over to the successive standby sources previously defined by the operator. When the alarm having caused switching has been cleared, switching back to the higher level source is performed in various modes: - after a three second time-out: - under control of the operator: NOTE: : : delayed automatic mode, manual mode.
Loopback triggering (LPP) is only managed as an alarm in manual mode.
Selection of the nominal synchronization source, the various standby sources, and the restoration mode is performed via the corresponding configuration parameter options. Furthermore, using the supervision and management system (CT or Remote Management System (RMS)), the operator may set the synchronization from any one of the possible synchronization sources including the internal clock. Synchronization setting is a maintenance selection which inhibits the automatic synchronization controller: - faults linked to the set source are inhibited, - the equipment synchronizes itself from the internal clock and no alarm is activated when a failure occurs on the set source, - the equipment is restored to automatic control with no timeout on the set source selected when the fault disappears.
Operation
FMX operation is performed via the supervision and management system which may be a local or remote Craft Terminal (CT) and/or Remote Management System (RMS). These two systems may be connected simultaneously. CT Connection The CT is a PC application used to manage FMX , BMD DCE or MVMD DCE type equipment. The CT allows the operator to manage either: - the local FMX to which it is connected, via a modem where applicable, or a MEGAPAC network,
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-6
- or a far-end FMX BMD DCE or MVMD DCE belonging to the management network, via the local FMX (the list of equipment configured on the management network is recovered by the CT via a local FMX). NOTE: In most cases, a management network comprises a FMX generally operated in the St Mux mode to which several other FMXs operated in the Sb Mux mode may be connected. The total number of equipment making a local network is limited to 64. The network depth is limited to 10. FMX operation is possible via the CT: - locally via a serial type point-to-point link (possibly remoted by modem or by MEGAPAC equipment), NOTE: From the point of view of the FMX, the CT is called the local CT. From the point of view of the CT, the equipment is called the local FMX.
- or remotely via: . a frame relay connection (operation EOC channel transmitted in an 8 kbps circuit using the TS0 bits of the odd frames of a 2 Mbps datastream or 64 kbps or operation EOC channel carried by one of the TSs of a 2 Mbps aggregate or tributary interface) set up between the local and remote FMX, . GIE - P card P1 and P2 management interfaces via others equipments (FOT 155 or RMX). NOTE: From the point of view of the FMX, the CT is called the remote CT. From the point of view of the CT, the equipment is called the remote FMX
Local CT
The CT is connected via 25-way connector located on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card (V.24/V.28 type F interface) or on the rear of the shelf, depending on the GIE card type (GIE or GIE-P) and shelf type. Shelf Local connection FMX12 connector of the front of the GIE or GIE - P card P3 Subscriber FMX4
connector of the connector of the front front of the GIE or of the GIE or GIE - P card GIE - P card or J502 connector of the rear of the shelf if a GIE P card is in the shelf
The interface, operated in the asynchronous mode (DCE mode) at a bit rate of 9600 kbps (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, without parity) allows local operation to a FMX. FMX (local) F INTERFACE CT (local) GIE or GIE - P CARD
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-7
Local CT (modem connection)

The CT is connected, by modem, to a connector on the connection panel (FMX12 shelf) of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) (P3 Subscriber shelf) or at the rear of the shelf (FMX4 shelf). Shelf Remote CT Interface FMX12 J122 of the connection panel P3 Subscriber J4 of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) FMX4 J501 of the rear shelf
The interface, operated in the asynchronous mode (DCE mode) at a bit rate of 9600 bps, allows FMX remote operation.
FMX (local)
CT (local)
MODEM
MODEM GIE or GIE - P CARD
Local CT (connected by MEGAPAC equipment)

The CT is connected, via MEGAPAC equipment, to a connector on the connection panel (FMX12 shelf) of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) (P3 Subscriber shelf) or at the rear of the shelf (FMX4 shelf). Shelf Remote CT Interface FMX12 J122 of the connection panel P3 Subscriber J4 of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) FMX4 J501 of the rear shelf
The interface, operated in the asynchronous mode (DCE mode) at a bit rate of 9600 bps, allows FMX remote operation.
FMX (local)
CT (local)
MEGAPAC
MEGAPAC GIE or GIE - P CARD
X25
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-8
Remote CT (operation of a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT)
The CT is connected by a 25 pin connector on the front of the GIE or GIE - P card (V24/V8 type F interface) to the connection panel, the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) or the rear of the shelf, depending on the connection type (local or remote) and GIE card (GIE or GIE-P) and shelf type used. Shelf Local connection FMX12 connector of the front of the GIE or GIE - P card P3 Subscriber connector of the front of the GIE or GIE - P card FMX4 connector of the front of the GIE or GIE - P card or J502 connector of the rear of the shelf if a GIE - P card is in the shelf J501 of the rear of the shelf
Remote connection
J122 of the connection panel
J4 of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE)
a frame relay connection The "Frame Relay" function carried out by the COB card is used to operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT.
FMX (local) CONNECTION LOCAL : - DIRECT, - VIA A MODEM, - VIA A MEGAPAC EQUIPMENT. GIE or GIE - P CARD "FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION COB CARD
CT LOCAL
ORDER CHANNEL
FMX NETWORK
FMX (remote) "FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION GIE or GIE - P CARD
ORDER CHANNEL
COB CARD
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-9
Via GIE - P card P1 and P2 management interfaces The P1 and P2 management interfaces function, realized on the GIE - P card, is used to operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the CT via others equipments which have P1 and P2 management interfaces (FOT 155 or RMX).
CT LOCAL
CONNECTION LOCAL: - DIRECT, - VIA A MODEM, - VIA A MEGAPAC EQUIPMENT.
FMX (local)
P1 P2
FMX (remote)
P1 P2
FOT 155
ECC
Optical line (for example)
ECC
FOT 155
P1 P2
FMX NETWORK P1 or "FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION
FMX (remote)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-10
Configuration of MEGAPAC equipment The MEGAPAC equipment used to connect a Craft Terminal (CT) to an FMX should correspond to the following points: - DCE mode configuration, - the asynchronous ports (links with CT and FMX) should be configured without echo, - async port rate = 9600 b/s, - the MEGAPACs must be transparent to the CT and FMX signals (SVC). Example of configuration: An example of configuration of the MEGAPAC equipment is given below:
X25
PS03
PS04
FMX
PAD CT 1
P100
MEGAPAC (DTE mode) P200 T100
PAD
GIE or GIE - P CARD (DTE mode)
PAD CT 2
- P100 port (PAD link to CT 1): . X28F mode, . bitrate = 9600b/s, . no echo, . SVC mode for signal management (cables), . PAD enabled for notification of access conflicts of several CTs to the same equipment (PAD SIGNALS = ENABLE). - T100 port: same configuration as P100 port (CT 2 connection). - P200 port: PAD link to FMX. . X28F mode, . bitrate = 9600b/s, . no echo, . SVC mode for signal management (cables), ; X25 address of FMX: "00241". - PS03 and PS04 ports: these 2 ports are looped and simulate the X25 network. MEGAPAC can be configured to send a welcome message to the two CTs ("France Telecom welcomes you" by example). TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-11
The complete configuration file (in Megawin version 1.67 software format) is given below.
**************************************** REMOVE TEXT UPTO LAST LINE OF THIS MESSAGE **************************************** SET BASE EI00/EI00/40/30/30/15/NO/0/0/NONE/NO/NO < BASE >>SET NMSC/NMS/1 TPI0/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 BMX0/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 PS03/X25/XIO/19.2/TRAN/0/NO/DCE/2/NONE/SABM/30/60/10/7/2/0/0/0/0/NORM/5/20/0/NONE/NONE/0/NONE/0/0/ NO/HEX/128/0/0 PS04/X25/XIO/EXT/TRAN/0/NO/DTE/2/NONE/SABM/30/60/10/7/2/0/0/0/0/NORM/5/20/0/IN/NONE/0/NONE/0/0/NO/H EX/128/0/0 TPI1/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 < BOOT **************************************** SEPARATE HERE **************************************** SET BASE EI00/EI00/40/30/30/15/NO/0/0/NONE/NO/NO < BASE >>SET NMSC/NMS/1 TPI0/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 BMX0/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 PS03/X25/XIO/19.2/TRAN/0/NO/DCE/2/NONE/SABM/30/60/10/7/2/0/0/0/0/NORM/5/20/0/NONE/NONE/0/NONE/0/0/ NO/HEX/128/0/0 PS04/X25/XIO/EXT/TRAN/0/NO/DTE/2/NONE/SABM/30/60/10/7/2/0/0/0/0/NORM/5/20/0/IN/NONE/0/NONE/0/0/NO/H EX/128/0/0 TPI1/TERM/2/TRAN/0/0/NO/0/0/NO/5 < BASE BASE GOTO 0 SET BE00/NONE/0 < EPCI GOTO 0 SET EI00/..../ASYN/CALL+PVC+STAT/MSGS/2/11/1/0/0/0/0/0/D/0/E/0/0/E/D/1/0/0/E/0/0/D/0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 EI01/..../ASYN/CALL+PVC+STAT/MSGS/2/11/1/0/0/0/0/0/D/0/E/0/0/E/D/1/0/0/E/0/0/D/0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 < NMSC GOTO 0 SET NC00/..../CALL+STAT/2/NONE/0/0 < TPI0 GOTO 0 SET P100/..../ASYN+X28F/CALL+SVC+STAT/NAME/2/0/9600/8/1/NONE/00/00/0/0/2/2/0/0/0/0/E/0/D/0/1/D/E/1/0/0/D/0/0/D /0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 <BMX0 GOTO 0 SET P200/..../ASYN+X28F/CALL+SVC+STAT/NONE/2/0/9600/8/1/NONE/00/00/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/E/0/D/0/1/D/D/1/0/0/D/0/0/ D/0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 P201/..../ASYN+X28F/CALL+PVC+STAT/NONE/2/0/9600/8/1/NONE/00/00/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/E/0/D/0/1/D/E/1/0/0/D/0/0/D /0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 < PS03 GOTO 0 SET P3**/..../ASYN/CALL+STAT/NONE/2/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/D/0/CONT/0/0/D/D/1/0/0/D/0/0/D/0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 <PS04 GOTO 0 SET
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-12
P4**/..../ASYN/CALL+STAT/NONE/2/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/D/0/CONT/0/0/D/D/1/0/0/D/0/0/D/0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 <TPI1 GOTO 0 SET T100/..../ASYN+X28F/CALL+SVC+STAT/NAME/2/0/9600/8/1/NONE/00/00/0/0/2/2/0/0/0/0/E/0/D/0/1/D/E/1/0/0/D/0/0/D /0/0/0/0/NONE/0/0/0/0/NONE/0 <SET X25 BE00/0/0099/ P301/0/00241/ P302/0/100/ P1**/0/20*/ TRP0/0/1097/ NC02/0/0096/ P404/0/9*/ P200/0/1234/ < SET NAME CONFIG/BE00/0/D/NONE < SET MAC PS04/IBEG/NONE// ..../DAD/NONE/100/BE00 ..../DAD/NONE/00241/P200 PS04/IEND/NONE// < SET ILAN < SET PASS < SET MENU ^ ^J^ France Telecom welcomes you. < SET HELP < SET PROF 0/1/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/2/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 1/0/D/0/20/D/D/2/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 2/0/D/0/10/E/D/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 3/1/D/2/80/D/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 4/1/D/2/40/D/E/21/4/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 5/1/D/2/0/E/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 6/1/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 7/1/E/2/0/E/E/0/4/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 8/1/E/2/0/E/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 9/1/D/2/0/D/E/0/0/69/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 10/1/D/2/0/D/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 11/0/D/0/3/D/D/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 12/1/D/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/2/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 13/1/D/0/5/E/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 14/0/D/0/5/E/E/8/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 15/1/D/0/5/D/E/21/0/0/D/0/0/D/13/24/13/0/NONE/0/0 20/1/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/21/0/0/E/0/0/D/8/24/18/1/64/3/0 21/1/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/21/0/0/E/0/0/D/8/24/18/2/64/3/0 22/1/D/0/5/E/E/21/0/0/E/0/0/D/13/13/13/0/NONE/0/0 23/1/E/0/5/E/E/21/0/0/E/0/0/D/8/24/18/2/64/3/20 30/0/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/D/E/0/0/0/E/0/0/D/128/24/18/2/2/0/0 90/1/E/64+32+16+8+4+2/0/E/E/2/0/0/D/0/0/D/127/24/18/1/NONE/0/0 91/0/D/0/20/D/D/2/0/0/D/0/0/D/127/24/18/1/NONE/0/0 < PROF(47):
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-13
Remote Management System (RMS) Connection The Remote Management System (RMS) allows the operator to manage all management network equipment. NOTE: In this case, the management network may contain a maximum of 20 sets of equipment and the depth is limited to 10.
For this, the RMS is connected: directly (locally) via an X.25 interface or via the X.25 network (remote connection) to a FMX called a "gateway", via frame relay connections to other management network equipment units or GIE - P card P1 and P2 management interfaces via others equipment (FOT 155 or RMX).
The RMS is connected to a connector on the connection panel, (FMX12 shelf), on the GIE adapter card (P3 Subscriber shelf) or on the rear panel of the shelf (FMX4 shelf). Shelf RMS Interface FMX12 J129 of the connection panel P3 Abonn J1 of the GIE adapter card (AdGIE) FMX4 J602 of the rear of the shelf
The V.24/V.28 synchronous type interface connection has a bit rate of: 9600, 19200, 38400 or 64000 bps in the DTE mode (clocks supplied to the FMX), or 19200 bps in the DCE mode (clocks delivered by the FMX).
The interface allowing management network equipment operation, and which is operated in the HDLC synchronous mode, behaves like a DTE (for the RMS local connection, the interface is configured in the DCE mode by setting a link option on the GIE card or via CT when GIE card has P1 and P2 management interfaces (GIE - P card)).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-14
via frame relay connection The "Frame Relay" function carried out by the COB card is used to operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the RMS.
RMS (local)
X25 NETWORK
Connection to several FMX gateways to manage several networks each including 20 equipments max.
FMX Gateway (local) GIE or GIE - P CARD
"FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION COB CARD
RMS (remote)
ORDER CHANNEL
FMX NETWORK
FMX (remote) GIE or GIE - P CARD
ORDER CHANNEL "FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION COB CARD
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-15
Via GIE - P card P1 and P2 management interfaces The P1 and P2 management interfaces function, realized on the GIE - P card, is used to operate a FMX other than that connected locally to the RMS via others equipments which have P1 and P2 management interfaces (FOT 155 or RMX).
RMS (remote)
X25 NETWORK
Connection to several FMX gateways to manage several networks each including 20 equipments max.
RMS (local)
FMX Gateway (local)
P2 P1
FMX (remote)
P2
FOT 155
P1 ECC
Optical line (for example)
ECC
FOT 155
P1 P2
FMX NETWORK (remote)
P1 or "FRAME RELAY" FUNCTION
FMX (remote)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-16
CT Operation On power-up, the operator has access to a set of off-line controls which, among others, allows a local configuration file (logic configuration) to be prepared for transmission to the FMX during an operator session. Network access opening, which may be protected by a password, provides operator access to network equipment management functions and causes the link with the local equipment to be set up. The CT switches to the receive mode for equipment continuous printout messages. Setting up an operator session provides access to on-line equipment management control orders. The operator may program configuration data composing the logic configuration: - general system parameters (name of FMX, date and time of equipment, equipment role (gateway or non-gateway), equipment mode of operation (Sb Mux or St Mux), X.25 configuration link (DTE or DCE) for a gateway FMX only), - physical description (description of shelf, cards and ports), - description of connections, connection enable/disabling, - description of particular connections (n x 4 kbps EOC, connection and frame relay mode connections) implemented via the spare bits of the frame TS0 with no frame alignment (odd frame TS0) and/or any TS of the 2 Mbps datastream, - selecting idle codes added into data or signaling timeslots (unused TSs, inactive connections, or temporary removal of a card), - allocating alarms initiated by failure conditions detected on the various ports: major alarm, minor alarm, no alarm; disabling or enabling alarms. The operator may also: - for each card or port (depending on type), define the connection function which may be multiplexing (tributary or aggregate) or cross-connecting, - selecting the nominal synchronization source, the successive standby sources and the restore mode, - where applicable, enter an "Administration" and/or "Monitoring" and/or "Operation" password, - etc. Moreover, the operator is provided with in-service access to the following information items at any time: - physical shelf configuration: occupied slots, types of card present, type of shelf, - the physical description characteristics, - alarm assignments and alarm disable/enable status, - the characteristics of each connection, - etc. The operator may select a DCE DCM or MVMD DCE type equipment unit from the table of management network equipment units of the local equipment. A HHT emulation screen allows communication with the DCE DCM or MVMD DCE type equipment (transfers in asynchronous mode at 1200 bps).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-17
Using a CT improves the ergonomics of the MMIs and offers the following additional features: - downloading a configuration stored on the CT, - remotely saving configurations in file form on the CT, - supervising FMX equipment FMX, - managing "off-line" control orders. RMS Operation The RMS uses no password. All equipment services are accessible to the RMS once the connection with the equipment is set up. The RMS has priority over the CT to modify the equipment logic configuration and to perform maintenance operations. When the operator opens a local operation session on the CT, the FMX requests authorization from the RMS. During this local operation phase, the FMX notifies the RMS of any change in functional configuration occurring downstream.. When the local operator is disconnected, the FMX informs the RMS. All the parameters which can be modified using the CT can also be modified by the RMS. NOTE: The reset function (logic configuration data erased except date and time) of the FMX is only accessible via the local CT with the "Administration" password. For applications not implementing protection via password, this function is inaccessible.
P1 and P2 Management Interfaces (GIE - P card), X25 and SEM P1 and P2 Management interfaces (GIE - P card), X25 and SEM cannot be simultanously available when a GIE - P card is used. The management interfaces operating mode is defined via CT. The following configurations are available: - X25 port (DCE mode) + SEM port, - X25 port (DTE mode) + SEM port, - X25 port (DCE mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode), - X25 port (DTE mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode), - X25 port (DCE mode) + P2 port (ingoing contradirectionnal mode), - P1 port (codirectionnal mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode), - P1 port (ingoing contradirectionnal mode) + P2 port (ingoing contradirectionnal mode), - P1 port (ingoing contradirectionnal mode) + P2 port (codirectionnal mode). Passing from an operrating mode to another is made without equipment resetting.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-18
Reliability In the event of a power failure, data saving is possible for more than 300 hours thanks to a battery. Equipment configuration is automatically reprogrammed (interface card and connection description) once power is restored. The operator has access to error and fault messages continuously on the manager (CT or RMS). Loopback may be applied to port cards either manually or remotely. The operator may read access to current loopback status on the Man-Machine Interface.
Protection
The FMX offers the following protection options: Power supply protection All types of shelf, except the FMX4 shelf may be supplied from a protected power supply consisting of two power converter cards which simultaneously supply the necessary power for correct card operation via diode OR circuits. Connection protection 1+1 type connection protection is provided by COB card redundancy. This duplicates all the functions carried out by this card ("Frame Relay", cross-connect and timing circuit functions). NOTE: The FMX4 shelf, which can only accommodate a single COB card, cannot have this type of protection.
2 Mbit/s path protection The 2 Mbit/s path protection function, performed by the A2S card, allows protection of a 2 Mbit/s link for a digital section by duplication of the 2 Mbit/s path between the two ends of the section. This protection is of the "availability" type (for sudden path switching upon detection of certain criteria, without preservation of the integrity of the binary elements). Transmission Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring of 2048 kbps digital circuits is performed without disturbing traffic, and is essential to achieving a high standard of quality of service. Bit error rate (BER) monitoring is performed by the Cyclic Redundancy Check procedure (CRC4) in accordance with the ITU-T recommendation G.704, to compute the following error performance parameters according to the ITU-T recommendation M.2100 and ETSI draft PR-ETS 300-461-2: Errored Seconds (ES), Severely Errored Seconds (SES) and number of residual errored blocks (Background Block Error, BBE). The results of the above computations are accessible to the operator, on the CT or RMS.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-19
Card Type
Interface Type
Bit Rate
No. of Ports per Card
Characteristics
Example of Application
Circuit Type
2MU (1-2 Mbps port)
HDB3
2048 kbps
G.703, G.704
Digital PABX, Primary PCM terminals, High speed terminals, ISDN 30B+D primary rate access Digital PABX, Primary PCM terminals, High speed terminals, ISDN 30B+D primary rate access Data adapter
SELV
A2S (4-2 Mbps structured ports)
HDB3
2048 kbps
G.703, G.704
SELV
3 64 I (3 64 I ports) 6PAFC (6-Programmable AF Channel)
64 kbps with 64 kbps signaling 2W/4W with E&M signaling
64 kbps
Codirectional G.703 2 E&Ms per interface to G.713 (2W) to G.712 and G.714 (4W)
DCE interface to V.24, V.11(V.10), X.24 or V.35
SELV,
Analog 300-3400 Hz
Modem PABX Data adapter Signaling adapter

High-speed terminals Video Codecs computer frontends
TRT (signaling)
V24/V11 (3-V24/V11(V10) ports)
V.24/V.11(V.10) X.24/V.11 V.35
48, 56, n x 64 kbps(1) (1\n\31)
SELV
V24/V28 (4-V24/V28 ports
V.24, V.28
1200 bps to 64 kbps synchronous 600 to 38.4 kbps asynchronous
DTE interface to V.24/V.28/ V.110
PC
SELV
Modems
2w2B1Q (2-2w2B1Q ports)
2B+D ISDN
G.960 and G.961 DE/TM 3004 and DTR/TM 3002 (ETSI)
ISDN subscriber remote units TANGARA station remote units S. unit remote units Remote modem
TRT
BBTxRx (1-BBTxRx port)
BBTxRx(2)
72, 144 or 288 kbs
Baseband
TRT
(1)
(2)
For 2 Mbps operation on card internal datastreams, bit rate for each of the three ports must not exceed 512 kbps. The CT controls switching from 2 to 8 Mbps operation on the internal datastreams (3 x 512 kbps or 3 x 1984 kbps parameter). For operation in the 8 Mbps on internal dastastream mode, the value of the bit rate on the three ports may be programmed above 512 kbps. BBTx/Rx: Baseband Transmitter/Receiver
Table 1.1 - FMX System Interfaces
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-20
1.2.2 - Port Cards

FMX can accept, depending on the type of shelf used, up to twelve port cards depending on particular customer service applications and complying with applicable ITU-T recommendations defining the electrical specifications of interfaces. The various types of port cards currently available are listed in Table 1.1 and Table 1.2. Note: The common equipment units (CEU) are SELV. 1-2048 kbps Port Multiuse Card (2MU) This card features an HDB3 interface complying with the ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.704, which may support a single bit rate link or a multiplex of N x 64 kbps channels. Transmission performance monitoring is performed to supply common equipment units with errored block (blocks are groups of 2048 bits at 2 Mbps) information. This procedure complies with the ITU-T recommendation G.704. Depending on the particular operating environment, the 2MU card may support the following modes of operation: - Aggregate operation: - Tributary operation: TRANSMIC 2 G and G.704/1920 kbps, TRANSMIC 2 G, G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps,G.736 - G.732, international G.732 and TRANSFIX.
4-2048 kbps Structured Port Card (A2S) This card features an HDB3 interface complying with the ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.704, which may support a single bit rate link or a multiplex of N x 64 kbps channels. Transmission performance monitoring is performed to supply common equipment units with errored block (blocks are groups of 2048 bits at 2 Mbps) information. This procedure complies with the ITU-T recommendation G.704. Depending on the particular operating environment, the A2S card may support the following modes of operation: - Aggregate operation: - Tributary operation: TRANSMIC 2 G, G.704/1920 kbps and G.704/1984 kbps, TRANSMIC 2 G, G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps, G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps, G.732, international G.732, TRANSFIX, G.732 with virtual interfaces (IV), G.736 with IV, international G.732 with IV, I431 and transparent TS0.
The A2S card offers, in addition: - the Virtual Interface function which allows to connected several N x 64 kbps links of various originations but with a single destination on a 2 Mbps circuit, - 2 Mbit/s path availability protection.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-21
Card Type
Interface Type
Bit Rate
No. of Ports per Card 6
Characteristics
Example of Application
Circuit Type
Subscrib
2-wire phone line
300-3400 Hz analog 300-3400 Hz analog
To G.711 (A law) Q.552
Exchange-toextension (or coinbox) voice line, Hotline link Exchange-toextension (or coinbox) voice line S. unit remote
TRT
Exchan (Exch12) 4U Transfix
2-wire phone line 2B+D ISDN
6 (or 12) 4
To G.711 (A law) Q.552 G.960 and G.961 DE/TM 3004 et DTR/TM 3002 (ETSI)
TRT
TRT
CONF (Conference)
IADB
2 async serial interfaces,
V.110 digital data at a bitrate below 64 kbit/s and digital data at 64 kbit/s, analog data at 64 kbit/s 9600 bits/s
Broadcast, sink, data broadcast and sink and conference for linear networks
Connecting configuration and statistics consoles, X25, high bitrate Frame relay connection
TBTS
2 X24/V11 synchronous serial interfaces,
up to 2 Mbit/s
2 V28 sync or async serial interfaces and 1 10 baseT Ethernet interface -
up to 64 kbit/s async and 115.2 kbit/s sync
X25, medium bitrate Frame relay or async connection,
Ethernet interface.
ADPCM
2 Mbit/s
Cmpression
NOTE:
The interfaces associated with the common equipment units (CEU) are SELV type.
Table 1.2 - FMX System Interfaces
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-22
3-V.24/V.11(V.10) Port Card (V24/V11) The Card supports three separate standard DCE interfaces. It offers bit rates of 48, 56, and n x 64 kbps (1n31) depending on the 3 x 512 or 3 x 1984 kbps on card internal datastreams parameter. The interface may be operated in V.24/V.11(V10) mode or in X.24/V.11 mode, with or without interchange control signals. The V.24/V11 card may be plugged into the 12 multipurpose slots of the G2,FMX12 and P3 Subscriber shelves and in the 4 multipurpose slots of the FMX4 shelves. The Card offers V.35 DTE compatibility. 3-64 Interface Card (3 64 I) This card provides connection of three co-directional J64 interfaces complying with ITU-T recommendation G.703. A transmission pair and a receive pair which can carry 64 kbps signaling synchronized with data are associated with the three 64 data interfaces. 6-Programmable Audio Frequency Channel Card (6PAFC) The card supports six separate analog interfaces available for 2-wire or 4-wire operation, with two associated E&M channels on each interface. 2-2-wire 2B1Q Port Card (2w2B1Q) The card supports two separate 2B1Q interfaces. Depending on the implementation, this card may support either ISDN mode or TRANSMIC extensions. NOTE: It is recommended to use a COB card equipped with a TCXO. ISDN mode operation When configured in subscriber mode, it provides connection to two 2-wire ISDN Network Termination Units (NT1s) using 2B1Q line code. When configured in network mode, it interfaces with two 2-wire 2B1Q Line Termination Modules on a ISDN PABX. It contains interface circuits, and remote power feed circuits or remote power feed detection circuits, in the subscriber mode and network mode, respectively. NOTE: remote power feed switch on/off is available.
In addition to remote subscriber connections through an ISDN, the Card also provides connection to remote Transmitter-Receiver Base Stations (BSs) used in the SAT TANGARA Digital Cordless Telephone System. In this case, the Card fitted at the exchange (Base Station Controller: BSC) recovers the clock on the 2B1Q interface. TRANSMIC Extension Mode of Operation The 2w2B1Q card provides connection S. unit to the FMX via a line using the 2B1Q coding U interfaces on which a repeater may be inserted. The use of a S. unit allows the remoting of low, medium and high bit rate units of the V24/V11(V10), X24/V11, V.35 or V24/V28 type; the S. unit is declared and configured using the CT via the 2w2B1Q card. Maintenance functions can be provided by the remote power feed supplied through this card. This manual does not describe the use of Subscriber Units, for more information, please refer to their specific documentation. 1-72-144-288 kbps Baseband Transmitter-Receiver Port Card (BBTxRx) This card transfers data on a 64, 128, or 256 kbps path, with overhead bits carrying transmission error performance and maintenance information from end-to-end. Scrambling and descrambling are performed in conformance to the ITU-T recommendation V.36. The BBTxRx Card supports only one interface. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-23
4-V.24/V.28 Port Card (V24/V28) The card provides four separate standard DCE interfaces for connection to 1200 bps to 64 kbps synchronous terminals, or 600 to 38400 bps asynchronous terminals. The four separate interfaces are designed for point-to-point networking. As four timeslots may be allocated to each Card, each link may be transmitted in a particular timeslot, or be combined with one, two or three more links into one timeslot, depending on the network topology and bit rate. The multiplexing procedure used is as described in the ITU-T recommendation V.110, with, for example, four 9600 bps channels or two 19200 bps channels per timeslot. 6 Subscriber Port Card (Subscr) The card supports six separate interfaces providing voice line connections to any extensions, videotex terminals, class 3 facsimile machines, and modems having a standard Z interface. Each interface is the 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect signaling. It is capable of interconnecting three S63 telephone sets in parallel. Each individual interface may be configured for the following alternative modes of operation: - exchange-to-extension mode through a 2 Mbps link, using the corresponding Exchan Card at the far end, - hot line mode in which a direct connection is set up between two extensions, and with calls being initiated by the off-hook condition of either extension; this mode supposes the use of a Subscr Card at the far-end. In both these modes, the subscriber code used is 1- or 2-bit signaling. For exchange-to-extension mode with 2-bit signaling, the Subscr Card can forward charge metering and battery reversal information to local subscribers, and therefore is equally suited to connection of conventional extensions and coinboxes. For remote operating mode, the 6-Subscriber Port Card can be used for message transmission (LF data) during the call phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase" . 6-Exchange Port Card (Exchan) The card supports six separate interfaces providing connection to PABXs having standard Z interfaces. Each interface is the 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect signaling. The subscriber code used is 1-bit signaling code. When used in conjunction with the Subscr Card, the Exchan Card allows setting up of hot line connections. It can forward charge metering and battery reversal information obtained from a PABX to coinboxes. The 6-Exchange Port Card can be used for message transmission (LF data) during the call phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase". 12-Exchange Port Card (Exch12) This card, equipped with 12 independent channels, provides connection of the subscriber exchanges with Z-type interfaces. The telephone interfaces are 2-wire type with standard 48 V powering and loop disconnect signaling. The signaling code used is 2-bit subscriber code. When used in conjunction with the Subscr card, the Exch12 card allows setting subscriber exchange-to-exchange connections and ordinary subscriber connections. The 12-Exchange Port Card can be used for message transmission (LF data) during the call phase, in particular the service: "Identifying the caller in call phase ". TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-24
4-U TRANSFIX Port Card (4U Transfix) This card supports four independent 2B1Q interfaces operated in the TRANSMIC Extension mode. (no ISDN mode). NOTE: It is recommended to use a COB card equipped with a TCXO The 4U Transfix Card provides connection S. Unit to the FMXvia a line using 2B1Q coding U interfaces on which a repeater may be inserted/ The use of a S. unit allows the remoting of low, medium and high bit rate units of the V24/V11(V10), X24/V11, V.35 or V24/V28 type; the S. unit is declared and configured using the CT via the 4U TRANSFIX card. The remote power feed provided by this card allows maintenance functions to be performed. Conference Card (CONF) The CONF card physically occupies an interface card slot but is functionally a common equipment unit connected to the COB card. The CONF card receives a 2 Mbit/s internal frame (CE) from the COB card matrix and sends back a 2 Mbit/s internal frame (CS) after processing. IADB (Intelligent Access Device Board) card This card has: - 2 asynchronous serial interfaces used to connect configuration and statistics consoles, and which are programmed at 9600 bit/s, 8 data bits NPB (No Parity Bit), - 2 X24/V11 synchronous serial interfaces used for X25 and high bitrate (up to 2 Mbit/s) Frame Relay connections, - 2 X24/V11 synchronous serial interfaces used for X25, medium bitrate (up to 64 Mbit/s) Frame Relay or asynchronous (up to 115.2 kbit/s) connections, - a 10 BaseT Ethernet interface. Since the card is not connected to the COB card matrix, the connection is made by external cables to the V24/V11 or V24/V28 cards. ADPCM Card (ADPCM) The ADPCM card physically occupies an interface card slot but is functionally a common equipment unit connected to the COB card. The ADPCM card receives a 2 Mbit/s internal frame (CE) from the COB card matrix and sends back a 2 Mbit/s internal frame (CS) after processing.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-25
IADB Card (IADB) CONFERENCE card (CONF) 4-U 2w2B1Q Port (4U Transfix) 12-Exchange Port. (Exch12) 6-Exchange Port. (Exchan) 3-V24/V11(V10) Port (V24/V11) 6-Subscriber Port. (Subscr)
SLOTS INTERFACES 3 to 14
1-BBTxRx Port (BBTxRx) 2-U 2w2B1Q Port (2w2B1Q) 3-V24/V11(V10) Port (V24/V11) 4-V24/V28 Port (V24/V28) 6-PAF Channel (6PAFC)
PROTECTED CARD* : - CROSS-CONNECT (TS AND BIT), - SIGNALLING PROCESSING, - INTERNAL MESSAGING PROCESSING, - FRAME RELAY FUNCTION GENERATION - EOC PROCESSING.
3-64 kbit/s Interface (3 64 I) 1 or 4-2 Mbit/s Port (2MU or A2S) ADPCM Card (ADPCM)
CONTROL EQIPMENT UNIT (CU)
PROTECTED POWER SUPPLY* CT and/or RMS (REMOTE or LOCAL)
- 48 V
* : depending of the shelf used
Figure 1.2 - Functional Organization

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-26
1.3 - Equipment Composition

The various FMX equipment cards may be contained in three types of shelf, a shelf being itself installed in a CEPT type B, M3 or ETSI or 19" rack-mounting: - 10U front-end connection shelf (FMX12 shelf), - the 6U rear-end connection shelf (in a 19" rack-mounting only) (P3 Subscriber shelf). - 4U rear-end connection shelf (19" and ETSI rack-mounting only or on table) (FMX4 shelf). Each shelf, apart from the FMX4 shelf, is equipped with: - one or two Power Converter Cards, according to the shelf configuration, - one (or two) connection, timing circuit and synchronization cards (COB cards) which combines the data and associated channel-associated signaling cross-connect, synchronization, internal messaging processing, EOC channel processing, and Frame Relay generating functions. NOTE: The COB card is inserted by default in slot no. 16 of the shelf; the second COB card used for equipment backup operation is plugged into slot no. 17.
- a management and auxiliary interface (GIE or GIE - P) card, which is the control unit providing all the management and supervision functions, is plugged into slot no. 15, NOTE: and either: - one to eleven port cards (card slots 03 to 14) to be selected from the following: . 1 or 4-2 Mbps Multiuse Port Card (2MU or A2S), . 3-V.24/V.11 (V.10) Port Card (V24/V11), . 4-V.24/V.28 Port Card (V24/V28), . 3-64 kbps Interface Card (3 64 I), . 6-Programmable Audio Frequency Channel Card (6PFAC), . 2-2 wire 2B1Q Port Card (2w2B1Q), . 1-Baseband Transmitter-Receiver Port Card (BBTxRx), . 4-2 wire 2B1Q Port Card (4U Transfix) . 6-Subscriber Port Card (Subscr), . 6-Exchange Port Card (Exchan), . 12- Exchange Port Card (Exch12) (FMX12 and FMX shelves only), . IADB Card (IADB), . Conference Card (CONF), . ADPCM Card (ADPCM). NOTE: The cards inserted in the FMX12 shelf do not have a front panel, The FMX4 shelf has: - mains (110/230VAC) power feed or 48 V power converter in slot 1 as in previous versions, - a COB card and a GIE or GIE - P card which are inserted in specific slots, - up to 4 port cards (multipurpose slots 03 to 06) chosen from the cards listed above. NOTE: The cards inserted in the FMX4 shelf have no front panel. The system functional organization is as shown in Figure 1.2. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-27 Along with the power converter card(s), these last two cards for the common equipment units,
1.4 - Specifications 1.4.1 - System Specifications

NOTE: Port specifications are given separately for the respective cards.
1.4.1.1 - Mechanical Specifications

Front-end connection shelf (FMX12) Rack-mounting CEPT Type B 19-inch / 80, ETSI and M3 compatible Dimensions - height - width - depth Weight (shelf + cards) FMX12 420 mm (useful spacing 10U) 440 mm 270 mm about 22 Kg
Rear-end connection shelf (P3 Subscriber) Rack-mounting Dimensions Height Width Depth Weight (shelf + cards) Rear connection shelf (FMX4) Mechanical characteristics Dimensions - height - width - depth Weight (shelf + cards) 177 mm (4 U) 440 mm (19") 260 mm. about 10 Kg 19" and ETSI rack-mounting 270 mm (6U) 440 mm (19") 330 mm (including Adapter Cards) about 22 Kg 19-inch
1.4.1.2 - Auxiliary Ports

External synchronization port (to ITU-T recommendation G.703) Termination Impedance Frequency (input + output) Return loss
Two balanced pairs (transmit, receive) 120 Balanced pairs at 1 MHz 2048 kHz 50.10-6 > 15 dB at 2048 kHz
Synchronization output (To ITU-T recommendation G.703, table X) Synchronized to active synchronization source. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-28
Alarms
Major or minor alarm (except FMX4 shelf equipped with 110/220V mains supply) TNM information dry relay contacts, max. voltage: 150 V max. current: 1.5 A max. power: 30 W service ground or relay contacts (strap-selectable) max. voltage: 150 V max. current: 1.5 A max. power: 30 W three point dry relay contact max. voltage: 72 V max. current: 300 mA typical current: 2 mA input impedance: > 20 k external loop impedance: . to 3 k (contact closed) . to 1 M (contact open)
Remote controls (2 operatorconfigurable alarms) Remote monitoring (3)
SEM interface (To Specifications CSE 52-13) Transmission mode Bit rate asynchronous 9600 bps
Supervisory interface
Local CT connection
(To ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28) - Transmission mode - Location panel asynchronous (DCE mode), 9600 bps 25-way connector on GIE or GIE - P card front (V.24/V.28 type F interface)
- Local selection (DCE)/ switch on GIE or GIE - P card front panel via modem or MEGAPAC equipment (DTE)
Remote CT connection via modem or MEGAPAC equipment

Transmission mode Location asynchronous (DTE mode), 9600 bps connection on connection panel or GIE adapter card front panel or at rear of shelf (depending on shelf type used) (V.24/V.28 type F interface)
Remote management system connection

Transmission mode GIE synchronous HDLC type (DTE or DCE mode) (for local RMS connection) via link option on card or CT if a GIE - P card is used) 9600 to 64 kbps in DTE mode 19200 bps in DCE mode) connection on connection panel GIE adapter card front panel) or at rear of shelf (depending on shelf used) (V.24/V.28 type F interface) TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-29
Location
P1 and P2 Management Interface - Transmission mode - rate synchrone V11 (diffrential) 64 kbps
P1 and P2 management interfaces timing diagram, codirectional mode (64 kbps synchronous mode)
TXCLKP (B-A)
(intput for clock received from P interface)
TXP (B-A)
(intput for data received from P interface)
B8
B1
B2
RXCLKP (B-A)
(output for clock to transmit on P interface)
RXP (B-A)
(output for data to transmit on P interface)
B8
B1
B2
NOTE : P1 and P2 management interfaces can be configured in ingoing contradirectional mode. In this operating mode, RXCLKP (B-A) signals are inputs.
1.4.1.3 - Power Requirements

Station equipment supplied with 48 V (SELV) via one or two backed up power converters. NOTE: The FMX4 shelf can also be supplied from a 110/220V source. The FMX4 (supply cannot be protected.
in compliance with specifications ETS 300 132-1 of December 1996 and ETS 300 132-2 of May 1996 Rated voltage Range Power Converter type V3 -48V Power Converter (FMX4 shelf) 220V supply (FMX4 shelf) TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-30 -48V or 110/220V (110/220V mains supply for FMX4 shelf -40V to -57V or 110/230V without switching across the range (FMX4 shelf) - 48 V 5 V, 53 V -48V / 5V, +12V, 53V, -48V Sig 110/220V / 5V, +12V, 53V, -48V Sig
Nominal sub-assembly (steady state) power consumption: The table below shows typical sub-assembly consumption. For each sub-assembly it specifies: - internal consumption dissipated by the sub-assembly inside the shelf, - external consumption supplied in the port card lines for the subscriber sub-assemblies (2w2B1Q, Subscr,...).
SUB-ASSEMBLIES INTERNAL CONSUMPTION (W) EXTERNAL CONSUMPTION (W)
GIE (GIE - P) (CEU) COB (CEU) 3 64 I (3-64 Interface Card) 2MU (1-2 Mbps Port Card) A2S (4-2 Mbps Port Card) BBTxRx (1-BBTx/Rx Port Card) V24/V28 (4-V24/V28 Port Card) V24/V11 (3-V24/V11(V10) Port Card) 6PAFC (6-Progammable Audio Frequency Channel card) 2w2B1Q (2-2w2B1Q U Port Card) - NUMERIS extension (TNR power feed) - repeaterless TRANSMIC extension (TNR power feed) - TRANSMIC ext with repeater - short-circuit interface Subscr Card (6- Subscriber Port Card) - interface available - interface busy - interface ringing Exchan Card (6- Exchange Port Card) Exch12 Card (12- Exchange Port Card) 4U Transfix (4-2w2B1Q U Port Card) - mains power feed - remote power feed - with repeater and remote power feed CONF IADB ADPCM P3 Power Converter (CEU) -48V Power Converter 220V Power Supply
1.7 3.5 0.5 0.7 2 2 1.6 2.6 1.1 2.7 + 0.1/int 2.7 2.7 + 0.2/int 2.7 + 4.2/int 1.6/int 0.8/int 2.3/int -
0.6/int 0.7/int 3/int 1.7 1.4 3 + 0.4 /int 3 + 0.6/int 3 + 1.5/int 3 5 4 30% Tpc* 30% Tpc* 30% Tpc*
2/int 0.8/int 0.12/int 1/int -
Tpc = Total power consumption of equipment and its peripherals. Tps = Total power supply at power converter or power supply input = Tps x 1,3 (typical yield = 77 %). Tps represents the power used by the equipment and its peripherals and the losses dissipated by the Joule effect in the power converter or power supply ( 36 W for P3 power converter and 22 for -48V power converter and 220V power supply ). The power supplied by the power converter or the power supply includes the internal power consumption and the external power consumption (Joule effect on the line, load of extensions, remote termination units or TNRs fed by line interface of the equipment port card.
NOTE:
In the case of protected power converters, the useful load is divided between two converters at a ratio of 50 20 %. In the event of failure of one converter, the useful power is supplied by the other.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-31
Computation example:
2w2B1Q card: 1 NUMERIS interface and 1 TRANSMIC interface with repeater:

Power dissipated in the card (Pcard) = 2.7 + 0.1 + 0.2 = 3 W Line power supplied (Pext) = 1.6 + 2.3 = 3.9 W Power dissipated in converter (30 % x (Pcard + Pext) = 0.3 x (3 + 3.9) = 2.1 W Power sampled on shelf 48 V power supply = 3 + 3.9 + 2.1 = 9 W
1.4.1.4 - Environmental Conditions

Temperature ETS 300 019 1.3 class 3-1 - Normal operating temperature range - Storage (packed) temperature range 5% relative humidity 100% relative humidity Mechanical environment ETS 300 019 1.4 of February 1992 -8C to +60C -30C to + 27C +5C to +40C with 5% to 85% humidity
Radioelectric and electrostatic environment

in compliance with ETS 300 386-1 of December 1994 Safety The equipment complies with NF specification EN 60950.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-32
1.4.1.5 - Predictable Reliability

The predictable reliability computations are based on the CNET's 1993 issue (RDF 93) of the Reliability Data Manual, on the assumption of specific requirements for the following: ambient temperature (40C), environment (mounted on the ground, fixed and protected), qualification, and component aging. Any changes in the above requirements may entail variations in the results. Sub-set Forecast Failure Rate (in 10-9 /h) ground, fixed, protected Forecast Failure Rate (in 10-9 /h) ground, fixed, unprotected
GIE (GIE - P) COB 3 64 I BBTxRx 2MU A2S V24/V28 V24/V11 6PAFC 2w2B1Q Subscr Exchan Exch12 4U Transfix CONF IADB ADPCM V3 Pwr Converter
Battery power converter - 48 V 110/220V mains power supply FMX12 only P3 Subscriber shelf only FMX4 shelf (without fan)
1186 1620 589 1326 497 1229 607 623 965 1385 3724 1761 1782 2342
785 1497 416
3164 4670 2216 4195 1749 3515 1998 2057 2472 3900 6509 4490 4751 6239
2417 4330 1316
726
-
1876
4507 4954
672
292 654
1679
729 1923
Adapter card: - for GIE - for COB - for V24/V11port - for line port - for V24/V28 port
65 59 74 68 73
163 147 186 170 182
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-33
1.4.2 - 2MU Card Specifications

2048 kbps 4-wire digital interface to ITU-T recommendation G.703. - Bit rate 2048 kbps 50 x 10-6 Code Input impedance Transmission-to-reception permissible attenuation (at 1 MHz) Jitter Reception cable screen Loopbacks HDB3 120 balanced pairs < 6 dB to ITU-T recommendations G.823 and G.736 strap-selectable earthing to ITU-T recommendation X.150
1.4.3 - A2S Card Specifications

Four 2048 kbps 4-wire digital interfaces to ITU-T recommendation G.703. - Bit rate 2048 kbps 50 x 10-6 Code Input impedance link Transmission-to-reception permissible attenuation (at 1 MHz) Jitter Loopbacks HDB3 120 balanced pairs or 75 (coaxial pair) via option < 6 dB to ITU-T recommendations G.823 to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-34
1.4.4 - V.24/V.11 Card Specifications

Interfaces to ITU-T recommendations V.10, V.11, V.24 and X.24. Mode Bit rates DCE 48, 56 or n x 64 kbps with 1 < n < 31 (*) For the 48 kbps and 56 kbps rates, 64 kbps rate adoption in accordance with ITU-T recommendation V.110 or X50 bits 120 + 10 %
- V.11 reception interface impedance X.24/V.11 operation . circuits used . electrical specifications V.24/V.11 operation (V.10) . circuits used
G, T, R, C, I, S, B V.11
102, 102a, 102b 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109 114, 115, 140, 141, 142 V.11: 103, 104, 113, 114, 115 V.10: 106, 107, 108, 140, 141, 142 V.10 or V.11: 105, 109, (selection via CT for the two circuits of one interface) Note: circuits 104, 114, 115 may be changed to V.35 operation (selection using bridge tracks for the three circuits of one interface)
. electrical specifications
Other specifications (*) Front panel connector Loopbacks Not used to ITU-T recommendation X.150
For 2 Mbps operation on card internal datastreams, bit rate for each of the three ports must not exceed 512 kbps. The CT controls switching from 2 to 8 Mbps operation on the internal datastreams (3 x 512 kbps or 3 x 1984 kbps parameter). For operation in the 8 Mbps on internal dastastream mode, the value of the bit rate on the three ports may be programmed above 512 kbps.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-35
1.4.5 - V.24/V.28 Card Specifications

Interfaces to ITU-T recommendations V.24, V.28.
Asynchronous
Mode Bit rates Character format DCE 600 to 38400 bps Length: 7 to 8 bits Parity: even, odd, none Stop bits: 1 or 2-bits 105/106 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108/2, 109, 140, 141, 142
Flow control Interchange circuits
Synchronous Mode Bit rates Clock Interchange circuits DCE 1200 bps to 64 kbps Internal 103, 104, 105, 106, 107, 108/2, 109, 114, 115, 140, 141, 142
Other specifications Multiplexing Front panel connector Loopbacks to ITU-T recommendation V.110 Not used to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-36
1.4.6 - 3 64 I Card Specifications

Codirectional 64 kbps 4-data wire + 64 kbps 4-signalling wire interface (to ITU-T recommendation G.703) - Nominal bit rate - Impedance - Input attenuation - Jitter - Reception cable screen data: 64 kbps signaling: 64 kbps 120 (balanced pairs) 0 to 3 dB to ITU-T recommendation G.823 strap-selectable earthing (0)
Signaling interface
- Tx interface Unbalanced relative to 0V. Protected against short-circuits at 0V. TTL compatible. Permissible load > 1 k at +5V Optocoupler for galvanic isolation Max. current: 20 mA NRZ
- Rx interface - Line code Other specifications - Loopbacks
to ITU-T Recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-37
1.4.7 - 6PAFC Card Specifications

4-wire AF interface (to ITU-T recommendations G.712 and G.714) Frequency band Impedance at 800 Hz (input or output) Levels on 4-wire ports nominal transmit nominal receive 300 to 3400 Hz 600 Balanced pair - 14 dB + 4 dB
Adjustable power range (adjustment in 0.5 dB steps) Tx input - 0.5 dBr to -16 dBr Rx output + 7.0 dBr to -8.5 dBr Load capacitance + 3.14 0.2 dBm0
Protection of interfaces to CSE specification I 31-24
2-wire AF interface (to ITU-T recommendations G.713 and G.715) Frequency band Input/output impedance Levels on 2-wire ports nominal on Tx nominal on Rx 300 to 3400 Hz 600 Balanced pair - 13 dB - 4 dB
Adjustable power range (adjustment in 0.5 dB steps) Tx input - 2.5 dBr to -13 dBr Rx output - 2.0 dBr to -17.5 dBr Load capacitance + 3.14 0.3 dBm0
Protection of interfaces to CSE specification I 31-24
Signaling interface Two E wires and two M wires per interface corresponding to signaling bits a and b earth applied to E wire via a 47 resistor. Galvanic isolation by coupler optoelectronic
- E signal:
- M signal: earth applied to M wire detected by closure of -48V circuit via optoelectronic coupler and 5.1 k resistor Other specifications Front panel connector Loopbacks Not used to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-38
1.4.8 - 2w2B1Q Card Specifications

Complying with ITU-T recommendations Q.960 and G.961 and ETSI specifications DE/TM 3004 and DTR/TM 3002 Line Code (U frames) Modulation speed No. of interfaces 2B1Q 80 kbaud 2 (independents from an operating point of view)
ISDN Operation distribution of channels relative to two card interfaces on 5 or 6 TSs "U subscriber" mode for both card ports * line remote power feed * operating instructions received from far-end "U network" interfaces * line tests possible + 50 V et - 50 V
connection of test bus
a subscriber line to FMX
"U network" mode for both card ports * line remote power feed detection * far-end U Subscriber interface management * transmission of a synchronization signal usable by COB card
TRANSMIC Extension Operation Connection to a REGAT S. unit for low, medium or high bit rate unit extensions NOTE: The 2w2B1Q card allows U subscriber mode operation on one of the interfaces and TRANSMIC extension" mode on the other.
Other characteristics Front panel connector Loopbacks unused to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-39
1.4.9 - BBTxRx Card Specifications

Bit Rate Transmission Mode Code Spectrum of signals transmitted 72, 144 or 288 kbps serial isochronous order 2 interleaved bipolar between 0 and F/2 of bit rate (or 36 kHz, 72 kHz or 144 kHz) via transmitted signal filtering 6V peak-to-peak +0 -10 % 40 dB attenuation at 72 kHz, 144 kHz or 288 kHz frequency 6 mA 150 to ITU-T recommendation V.36 line 4F DC 2.7 mA 10% 5.4 mA 10% 0.7 10-4 at nominal frequency Automatic equalization from 0 to 40 dB at nominal bit rate to ITU-T recommendation X.150
Transmission level Receive level Max. Permissible current at receive interface Line port impedance Frame specific to BBTx/Rx with scrambling and descrambling Transmission medium Maintenance transmitted to exchange transmitted by subscriber Recovery range of receive clock Equalization at reception Loopbacks
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-40
1.4.10 - Subscr Card Specifications

Interfaces to ITU-T recommendation Q.552. - Line powering - Impedance 48 V 600 or complex impedance with Zref such as R1 = Rs = 215 , R2 = Rp = 1000 and C = Cp = 137 nF < 600 . Ring to 50 2 Hz G.711 A law . Bandwidth . Coding period . Load capacitance 300 Hz - 3400 Hz 3.9 s + 3.14 dBmo
- Loop resistance - Ringing frequency - Speech coding
- Signaling code - Transmission levels Type of plan Standard Adjustable (in 0.5 dB steps)
2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
Transmission Input Port 0 dBr 0 dBr to -5 dBr
Reception Output Port -7 dBr -2 dBr to -7.5 dBr
- Possibility of connecting 1 to 3 S3 telephone sets to a same access port - Possibility of ring transmission to two access ports of the Card simultaneously - Transparent to message transmission during the call phase. - Exchange-to-extension operation . connection of telephone extensions to a central office switch or a PABX . charge metering 12 kHz . line polarity normal polarity: negative polarity on wire A, positive polarity on wire B reverse polarity: polarity switching between wires A and B by battery reversal . busy tone frequency 440 Hz . Level - 11 2 dBm0 . Sequencing (transmission/silence) 500 50 ms/500 50 ms Hotline operation busy tone and ringing tone frequency . Frequency . Level . Sequencing (transmission/silence) 440 8 Hz - 11 2 dBm0 Call return: 1500 150 ms/3500 350 ms Busy: 500 50 ms/500 50 ms
Other specifications Front panel connector Loopbacks Possibility of maintenance line tests Not used to ITU-T recommendation X.150 connection of the subscriber line to the FMX test bus TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-41
1.4.11 - Exchan Card Specifications

Interfaces to ITU-T recommendation Q.552. Impedance 600 or complex impedance with Zref such as R1 = Rs = 215 , R2 = Rp = 1000 and C = Cp = 137 nF 1100 max. 50 5 Hz 60 to 80 V (through resistance between 0 and 600 ohms) greater than 200 ms 12 kHz
Loop resistance Ringing frequency . Frequency . RMS voltage at 50 Hz . Duration
Charge metering detected
Detection of the polarity reversal applied to line wires Speech coding . Bandwidth . Coding period . Load capacitance G.711 A law 300 - 3400 Hz 3.9 s +3.14 dBmo 2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
-Signaling code Transmission levels Type of plan (Depending on operation) Standard Short line Adjustable (in 0.5 dB steps)
Transmission Input Port -6 dBr -3 dBr -2 dBr to -7.5 dBr
Reception Output Port -1 dBr -4 dBr 0 dBr to -5 dBr
- Transparent to message transmission during the call phase. - Front panel connector - Loopbacks Not used to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-42
1.4.12 - Exch12 Card Specifications

Interfaces to ITU-T recommendation Q.552. Impedance Loop resistance Ringing frequency . Frequency . RMS voltage at 50 Hz . Duration Speech coding . Bandwidth . Coding period . Load capacitance Signaling code Transmission levels Type of plan (Depending on operation) Short line Adjustable (in 0.5 dB steps) Transmission Input Port -3 dBr -2 dBr to -7.5 dBr Reception Output Port -4 dBr 0 dBr to -5 dBr 600 or complex impedance with Zref 1100 max. 25 to 50 5 Hz 40 to 90 V (through a resistance between 0 and 1 k) greater than 200 ms G.711 A law 300 - 3400 Hz 3.9 s +3.14 dBmo 2-bit subscriber code (NEF subscriber code)
- Transparent to message transmission during the call phase. - Loopbacks to ITU-T recommendation X.150
1.4.13 - 4U Transfix Card Characteristics

Complying with ITU-T recommendations Q.960 and G.961 and ETSI specifications DE/TM 3004 and DTR/TM 3002. Line Code (U frames) Modulation Speed Line remote power feed (MMI controlled) No. of ports 2B1Q 80 kbaud + 50 V and 50 V 4 (independent from operating point of view)
Connection to REGAT S. Unit for low, medium and hit bit rate unit extensions. Other specifications - Loopbacks to ITU-T recommendation X.150
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-43
1.4.14 - CONF Card Characteristics

The CONFERENCE card (CONF) is used in linear networks, in conjunction with the FMX drop/insert features of the FMX, to set up the following functions: - broadcasting, - uploading, - broadcasting and uploading, - conferencing, of data which may be digital (data channels carrying signals from computer terminals) or analogue (data channels carrying audiofrequency signals PCM encoded with A law compression). Functional characteristics: Analog bridges : 24 analog channels of the CE/CS internal frame (IT1 to IT15 and IT17 to IT31) and 12 bridges, : 20 low bit rate digital channels (V.110 frame) or medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) capable of distribution over the 30 time slots of the CE/CS internal frame) and: . If there is no conference bridge; eight broadcast and/or uploading bridges, . If there is a conference bridge; six bridges including a maximum of three conference bridges. : The TS transfer time between CONF card input and output is less than the time occupied by three 125 s frames.
Digital bridges
Information transfert time:
1.4.15 - IADB Card Characteristics

IADB card is a concentrator/multiplexer, X25 bridge/router and "Frame Relay" which uses MEGAPAC standard software. The implemented protocols are of three types: - WAN (Wide Area Network) protocols, - user network protocols, - LAN (Local Area Network) protocols (Ethernet). Lithium battery allows to save the memory informations. Battery specifications: Storage: The IADB card is delivered with a new battery. Battery Life and Reliability: Battery life may reach up to 10 years. Reference: CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 500 mA/h Lithium battery.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-44
1.4.16 - ADPCM Card Characteristics

ADPCM card handles 32 or 16 kbit/s ADPCM code transcoding. - Transcoding PCM/ADPCM) - PCM law type G.711 law A - ADPCM Coding bit rate 32 kbit/s (4 bits per channel) or 16 kbit/s (2 bits per channel) - ADPCM coding law To ITU-T recpmmendation G.726 - Processing capacity 32 kbit/s : 20 PCM 64 kbit/s channels and 20 ADPCM channels, 16 kbit/s : 24 PCM 64 kbit/s channels and 2 ADPCM channels, - signalling processing 32 kbit/s (2 bits per ADPCM channel) : - either signalling bits a and b, - either signalling bit a and maintenance bit c. 16 kbit/s (1 bit per ADPCM channel) : - either signalling bit a, - either maintenance bit c.
1.4.17 - GIE Card Battery Specifications

Storage The GIE card is delivered with its battery charged. After remaining 1 month idle at a temperature of +20C, a charged battery cell will still yield approximately 70% of its capacity. Battery Life and Reliability Battery life may reach up to 10 years. It may however vary depending on the operating conditions and essentially depend on the extent of discharging in cycling-type applications or on additional Ampere/hour overcharge in continuous charge applications. Cycling: . 500 cycles (approximately) for 100% discharge . 2000 cycles (approximately) for 50% discharge Charge and Discharge Charging time: about 20 hours. Disconnection from the power source for 150 hours will result in 50% discharge. Backup time: > 300 hours. Reference 2.5 V - 40 mA/h Cadmium Nickel battery.
1.4.18 - GIE - P Card Battery Specifications

Storage The GIE - P card is delivered with a new battery. Battery Life and Reliability Battery life may reach up to 10 years. Reference CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 270 mA/h Lithium battery. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-45
1.5 - Reminder of the Frame Structure 1.5.1 - 2 Mbps Frame (to ITU-T recommendation G.704)
The 2048 kbps frame has a period of 125 s in time. It further divides into 32 time slots (TS 0 to TS 31), containing the binary information. Each TS contains 8 bits (1-8). TSs 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are allocated to 30 channels numbered 1 to 30.
TS 0 Interpretation
TS 0 is used for transmitting frame alignment information which is present in every other frame: - TS 0 in even-numbered frames: FA Word - TS 0 in odd-numbered frames: nFA Word whereI: set to 1 or used for the CRC4 procedure A: N: remote error indication bit is the national reserve bit used depending on the frame being processed (see Table 1.1). BITS IT0 Odd frame Bit 3 0: Normal 1: FAL, SigFail 0: Normal 1: FAL, Sig Fail, AIS TR2G Other frames (1) I0011011 I1ANNNNN
Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6
1: Normal 1: Normal
0: AIS 0: GSF Not processed (sent to 1) or control access channel at n x 4 kbps (n = 1 to 5)
1: unused or 0 or 1: for PPS or 1: Normal 0: Power Fail Not processed (sent as 1) or control access channel at n x 4 kbps (n = 1 or 2)
Bit 7
Bit 8 (1) Other frames: G.732, G.732i, G.736 or Transfix
Table 1.1 - Spare Bit Allocations in Odd-numbered Frame TS 0s
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-46
TS16 Interpretation
TS16 is allocated to the Channel-Associated Signaling transmission: 16 consecutive frames form a multiframe (numbered 0 to 15). The multiframe alignment signal is 0000; it uses bits 1 to 4 of TS16 in frame 0: - TS16 in frame 0: MFA Word - TS16 in frames 1 to 15: where abcdabcd 0000xyxx
x: reserve bits, set to 1 if unused (see details later on) y: indicates MultiFrame Alignment Loss (TR2G, G.732, G.732i and Transfix) a b c d: 1st quadribit = n channel Signaling a b c d: 2nd quadribit = channel n+15 Signaling BITS IT16 Frame 0 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 IT16 Frames 1 to 15 a b c d (*) TR2G G.732 G.732i
1 0: N - 1: FAL 1 1
same as TR2G
1 0: N - 1: FAL 1 Setting to 1 or 0 available Tx Rx (*) a a b b or1 unused 0 d d or 1
Tx a b c d
Rx (*) a b c d
Tx a b c d
Rx (*) a b or 1 c or 0 d or 1
Received or transmitted at interface level.
NOTE: Whatever the frame used, frame "c" is available.
Table 1.2 - TS16 Bit Allocations

Special case: G.704-G.736 frames TS16 in frame 0 is not processed TS16s in frames 1 to 15 are not processed at the interface and are set to 1 for onward transmission
NOTE:
In the above table, the choice for a bit value is defined by CT (RMS).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-47
1.5.2 - 64 I + Signaling Frame

Structure of the 64 kbps datastream: data and Signaling streams
Bipolarity violation
7 64 I Data
Signalling Sig a Sig b Sig a Sig b
1 - 64 I terminal (DTE)-to-FMX (3 64 I Card) direction Data Sig Violation bit 8 bit 1 EA EB bit 2 X bit 3 X bit 4 X bit 5 X bit 6 X bit 7 X Violation bit 8 EA
2 - FMX (3 64 I Card)-to-64 I terminal (DTE) direction Data Sig Violation bit 8 bit 1 MA MB bit 2 MC bit 3 0 bit 4 0 bit 5 0 bit 6 0 bit 7 0 Violation bit 8 MA
X: any value
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-48
1.5.3 - 72-144-288 kbps BBTxRx Frame

The 72 kbps frame contains 27 bits forming the 64 kbps data bytes with which an 8 kHz overhead bit (Frame E) is associated. It has the following structure: 72 kbps frame
1
Frame E E
Data Byte
1
E
Data Byte
H
E
Data Byte
0
E
Frame H
/ \ / \ S, X4, X3, X2, X1
Bit H carries Signaling, alarm, and maintenance information and is framed over 5 bits as follows: bit S: alternating 1s/0s for synchronization, four bits X4 to X1 for the Signaling information interchange between the subscriber-side baseband transmitter-receiver and FMX (BBTxRx Card):
with the following items in the subscriber baseband transmitter-receiver-to-FMX direction (BBTxRx Card): X4: X3: X2: X1: EA EB Remote loopback (loopback 3 control orders to extension) - active state at 0 Far-end failure (set to 1)
and in the FMX-to-baseband transmitter-receiver direction: X4: MA X3: MB X2: Remote loopback receipt acknowledgment - active state at 0 X1: Reserved (set to 0) The 144 and 288 kbps datastreams are framed in a similar fashion. Bit H has the same role and the data bytes have bit rates of 128 and 256 kbps, respectively, while frame E has a bit rate of 16 and 32 kbps.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-49
1.5.4 - U Frames
Eight frames U make up a multiframe U in order to transmit: - two B channels for 64 kbps data, - one D channel for 16 kbps data, - one 4 kbps LC channel for monitoring and maintenance. Each frame U contains: - a sync-frame word over 18 bits, - 216 data bits: 12 areas of 2B + D channels, each area including 18 bits, - 6 LC channel bits. The eighteen bits of a 2B + D area are distributed as follows: - 8 bits (4 quats) per channel B, - 2 bits (1 quat) per channel D. Channel LC includes 48 bits distributed in a multiframe U. Structure of a multiframe U:
Sync-frame word 2B+D 48 bits in channel LC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits SW: 18 bits
(2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits (2B + D) x 12: 216 bits
1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
ISW: multiframe synchronization SW: frame synchronization In the "network U"-to-"subscriber U" access direction, the information contained in channel LC is as follows: EOCa1 EOCd/m EOC3 EOC6 EOCa1 EOCd/m EOC3 EOC6 EOCa2 EOCa3 EOC1 EOC4 EOC7 EOC2 EOC5 EOC8 ACT DEA 1 1 1 1 U0A 1 1 1 CRC1 CRC3 CRC5 CRC7 CRC9 1 FEBE CRC2 CRC4 CRC6 CRC8 CRC10
EOCa2 EOCa3 EOC1 EOC4 EOC7 EOC2 EOC5 EOC8
CRC11 CRC12
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-50
In the "U subscriber" to "network U" direction, the information contained in channel LC is as follows: EOCa1 EOCd/m EOC3 EOC6 EOCa1 EOCd/m EOC3 EOC6 EOCa2 EOCa3 EOC1 EOC4 EOC7 EOC2 EOC5 EOC8 ACT PS1 PS2 NTM CS0 1 SAI 1 1 1 CRC1 CRC3 CRC5 CRC7 CRC9 1 FEBE CRC2 CRC4 CRC6 CRC8 CRC10
EOCa2 EOCa3 EOC1 EOC4 EOC7 EOC2 EOC5 EOC8
CRC11 CRC12
Meaning of symbols and abbreviations: a1 to a3 ACT CRC CS0 DEA d/m EOC EOC1 to EOC8 FEBE NTM PS1, PS2 SAI U0A address bits activation bit (set to "1" during channel transparency) cyclic redundancy control bit "cold start-up only" (not used, set to "0") deactivation bit (set to "0" to control deactivation) data or message indicator maintenance channel information (data/message) Far-end block error bit (set to "0" for a multiframe containing an error) test bit (no used, set to "1") power supply state bits (set to "0" to indicate a power supply failure) activity indication bit interface U only activation request (set to "0" to activate U only)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-51
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-52
SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION
2.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-1
2 - DESCRIPTION
as un 12
CONVERTER
lot ds ne g i s
Figure 2.1 - Rear Connection Shelf Front Panel (P3 Subscriber Shelf)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-2
CONVERTER
GIE
COB (SECURISATION)
COB
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.1 - Rear Connection Shelf Description (P3 Subscriber Shelf)

This 6U shelf includes slots used for plugging in equipment interface cards (see Figure 2.1). Connections are performed at the rear of the shelf using adapter cards plugged on the card connectors. From left to right, the slots are organized as follows: slot 01 and/or 02: slots 03 to 14: slot 15: slot 16: slot 17: one or two redundant +5V/11A, -5V/2A, +53V/0,8A, 53V/1,6A power converters, general purpose interfaces for any of the interface cards (refer to table of paragraph 2.5.2), Management or "GIE - P") and Auxiliary Interface Card ("GIE"
Connections, Timing Circuit and synchronization card ("COB"), optional COB card (protection).
To adapt to all types of connections, the rear of the shelf is equipped with: - a COB adapter card with 2 9-way , - a GIE adapter card with 2 25-way and 2 15-way connectors, - a GIE-P adapter card (in production), - a filter: power converter card(s), and depending on the configuration of the BMX 264, - an adapter card (AdV11) with three 37-way connectors: V24/V11 card, - an adapter card (AdV28) with four 25-way connectors: V24/V28 card, - a line adapt card (AdLig) with three 215-connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2w2B1Q, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 4U Transfix, Subscr and Exchan cards. - an adapter card (Ad2ME) with four 9-way connectors: A2S card. - an adapter card (AdIADB) with four 15-way connectors and 1 RJ45 connector: A2S card. NOTE: A rear connection shelf (6U), is available called the PRIVATE Subscriber P3 shelf, which is modified mechanically in the compartmenting of the slots in relation to the Subscriber P3 shelf. However, to preserve the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment, a cover (ref.; 55300131) must be installed on each slot whether or not there is a card inserted.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-3
2 - DESCRIPTION
12
un
as
e ig n
ds
lo t
CONVERTER
CONVERTER
GIE COB COB (SECURISATION)
Cover
Figure 2.2 - Front view of front connection shelf (FMX12 shelf)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-4
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.2 - Front Connection Shelf Description (FMX12 shelf)

This shelf comprises two parts (see Figure 2.2): - a 7U lower part composed of card slots, - a 3U upper part equipped with connectors for external shelf connections. The slots are distributed as follows from left to right: slots 01 or/and 02: slots 03 to 14: slot 15: slot 16: slot 17: one or two +5V/11A, -5V/2A, +53V/0,8A, - 53V/1,6A redundant power converters, general purpose interfaces for any of the interface cards (refer to table of paragraph 2.5.2), Management or "GIE - P"), and Auxiliary Interface Card ("GIE"
Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card ("COB"), optional COB Card (protection).
The panel includes: - 1 power filter for power cable (- 48 V1, - 48 V2, - 48 VS) and station alarm (major and minor alarms) connection, - 12 x 3 26-way connectors: 3 connectors are assigned to each slot (3 to 14), - 4 x 26-way connectors: . 1 connector for alarm information (major or minor) at the GTR interface, two 3-way relay contacts and three remote monitoring signals, . 1 connector for V.24 interface (modem or MEGAPAC access for remote CT function) and P2 management interface, . 1 connector for SEM interface, synchronization signals and line test bus, . 1 connector for TMN interface and P1 management interface, - 2 x 26-way connectors reserved for later use. All external connections are made on the equipment front panel on the 3U connection strip. The interface cards inserted in this shelf do not have a front panel. A removable front cover is used to close the shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-5
2 - DESCRIPTION
Motherboard
Shelf
Converter
4 unassigned slots
COB Card GIE Card
Reversible mounting brackets
Cover
Figure 2.3 - Front view of the rear connection shelf (FMX4 shelf)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-6
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.3 - Rear Connection Shelf Description (FMX4 shelf)

This shelf comprises two parts (see Figure 2.3) : - a front part composed of card slots, - and a rear part equipped with connectors for external shelf connections. The slots are distributed as follows: slot reserved for power supply: slots 03 to 06: CEU slot reserved for: CEU slot reserved for: 110/230 V mains or - 48 V power converter, general purpose interface for any of the interface cards (refer to table of paragraph 2.5.2), Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card ("COB"), Management or "GIE - P"), and Auxiliary Interface Card ("GIE"
The rear part includes: - 16 x 25-way connectors: 3 connectors are assigned to each slot (3 to 6), - 8 x 25-way connectors: . 1 connector for SEM interface, line test bus and external synchronization, . 1 connector for V.24 interface (modem or MEGAPAC access for remote CT function), . 1 connector for local CT connection, . 1 connector for SEM interface, synchronization signals and line test bus, . 2 connectors for P1 and P2 management interfaces, . 1 connector for TMN interface and 1 connector reserved for later use. - a power on/off switch. All external connections are made on the equipment rear panel. However, CT connection for local operation may be made on the front panel of the CT of the GIE or GIE - P card when the cover is removed, The interface cards in the FMX4 shelf do not have a front panel. A removable panel is used to close the shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-7
2 - DESCRIPTION
Cnvr-P3
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Switch
Fail
On
Off
+53V/0V +5V/0V -5V/0V -53V/0V
Figure 2.4 - Power Converter Card Front Panel

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-8
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.4 - Sub-set Description

The different sub-set front panels are equipped with the following controls and LEDs. Note: The following descriptions only concern common sub-sets (Common Equipment Units and power converter); refer to volume 2 for port card descriptions. The interface cards in the FMX4 shelf or in the FMX12 front connection shelf do not have a front panel. However, the following power supply units: the +5V, -5V +53V, -53V power converter (FMX12 shelf), 110/230 V mains and - 48 V battery converter (FMX4 shelf) do include a front panel, which is described in the following paragraphs.
2.4.1 - + 5 V/11 A, - 5 V/2 A, +53 V/0,8 A, -53 V/1,6 A Power Converter (P3)
The card front panel supports the following from top to bottom (see Figure 2.4): - 1 red "Fail" LED - 1 "On/Off" switch - four test points: "+53V/0V", "+5V/0V", "-5V/0V", "-53V/0V". no voltage at card output Equipment power up/power off measure of corresponding voltages.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-9
2 - DESCRIPTION
Front Panel View Rear Panel View
Fault Led
Fixing hole
Switch (O/I)
Fuses
110/120 V 220/230 V Mains bloc Cable guide
Earth terminal (M3 screwed bolt)
To 5 V and +12V Power supply motherboard (9-way) J1 connector
To 53 V Power suooly motherboard, major and minor alarm (25-way) J2 connector
Figure 2.5 - 110/220V mains supply unit

Rear Panel View
Front Panel View
Fault Led
ON Switch OFF Fuse
Fixing hole
Earth terminal (M3 screwed bolt)
-48V Power Supply 25-pin HE 502 connector
Cable guide Fixing hole
To 5 V and +12V Power supply motherboard (9-way) J1 connector
To 53 V Power suooly motherboard, major and minor alarm (25-way) J2 connector
Figure 2.6 - 48 V battery converter unit
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-10
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.4.2 - 110/220 V mains supply

The 110/220 V mains supply unit includes a protective cover (protection on the cable weld side is provided by the right side panel of the shelf). The front panel of this card contains from top to bottom (see Figure 2.5) : - 1 red "Fault" LED absence of power output - 2 cables and cable passage orifices (welded at the secondary output power side and terminated by two SUB D 15 and 25-way male connectors) The rear panel of the power supply unit contains (see Figure 2.5): - a switch unit, which comprises a on/off interruptor (O/I), two protection fuses and an internal male mains plug for connecting/disconnecting the primary 110/230V supply, - an earth terminal.
2.4.3 - 48 V battery connector

The - 48 V battery converter includes a protective cover (protection on the cable weld side is provided by the right side panel of the shelf). The front panel of the converter contains from top to bottom (see Figure 2.6): - 1 red "Fault" LED - 1 "M-A" (On/Off) switch absence of power output turning equipment on/off
- 2 cables and cable passage orifices (welded at the secondary output power side and terminated by two SUB D 15 and 25-way male connectors) The rear panel of this card contains (see Figure 2.6): - a 25-way male SUB D type connector for the primary - 48 V power supply, - a protection fuse, - an earth terminal.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-11
2 - DESCRIPTION
GIE (ou GIE - P)
COB
En service
Ala M/ Mj Alm Norm/ Norm Def/ Fail
On
Actif
Actv
Ala m/ Mn Alm Sync Norm/ Norm Def/ Fail
Sync
Nom
Nom
Repli
Stdby
Int
Int
Modem/ Modem Loc/ Loc
Figure 2.7 - GIE or GIE - P and COB Card Front Panels
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-12
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.4.4 - Management and Auxiliary Interface Card (GIE or GIE - P)

This card front panel supports from top to bottom (see Figure 2.7): 1 red "Mj Alm" LED: 1 "Norm-Fail" switch: major alarm, acknowledgment switch associated with a major alarm minor alarm, acknowledgment switch associated with a minor alarm, CT interface validation, DCE type CT interface used to manage the FMX locally ("Loc") (interface on card front panel) or DTE type interface used to manage the FMX via modem ("Modem") or MEGAPAC equipment (connection panel, GIE adapter card front panel or shelf rear panel depending on shelf used), local connection of local terminal.
1 red "Mn Alm" LED: 1 "Norm-Fail" LED:
- 1 "Modem/Loc" switch:
1x 25-way connector:
2.4.5 - Connection, Timing Circuit and Synchronization Card (COB)

This card front panel supports from top to bottom (see Figure 2.4): 1 green "On" LED: indication of COB card operational status: - LED lit COB operational, - LED unlit COB not operational, indication of COB card (standby or active) status: - LED lit COB active, - LED unlit COB on standby, active synchronization item, - LED lit nominal source, - LED lit standby source, - LED lit internal clock.
1 green "Actv" LED:
3 yellow "Sync" LEDs: . "Nom": . "Stdby": . "Int":
NOTE:
The COB card does not have a front panel when it is used in an FMX4 rear connection shelf or an FMX12 front connection shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-13
2 - DESCRIPTION
2.5 - Configurations 2.5.1 - Shelf Mode of Operation

There are three types of shelf FMX12 shelf, the P3 Subscriber (or PRIVATE P3 Subscriber) shelf and the FMX4 shelf.
2.5.2 - Card Combination in Shelves

The FMX12 shelves are front connection shelves while the P3 Subscriber and FMX4 shelves are rear connection shelves. The table below lists the interfaces cards usable in each of the different shelves:
CARD 2MU V24/V28 3 64 I 6PAFC V24/V11(V10) 2w2B1Q (Subscriber) 2w2B1Q (Network) 2w2B1Q (TRANSMIC Extension) BBTxRx A2S 4U Transfix (1) Subscr Exchan Exch12 CONF IADB ADPCM Power converter (P3) 110/220V mains supply unit - 48V battery converter FMX12SHELF YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES (2) YES (4) YES (5) YES NO NO P3 SUBSCRIBER SHELF* YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES (2) YES (4) YES (5) YES NO NO FMX4 SHELF YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES (3) YES (5) NO YES YES
* : P3 Subscriber or PRIVATE P3 Subscriber. (1) : When a 4U TRANSFIX card is used, a COB card with 5 ppm option must be used (2) : Card number is limited to 6. (3) : Card number is limited to 2. (4) : Card number is limited to 4. (5) : Card number is limited to 6. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 2-14
SECTION 3 INSTALLATION - START-UP AND OPERATION
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-2
3 - INSTALLATION - START-UP AND OPERATION
Safety warnings are listed on the introductory page "SAFETY WARNINGS". The purpose of this section is to describe equipment implementation and operation under normal operating conditions. The FMX may be installed in for types of shelves: - a front-connection shelf (10U), called the FMX12 Central Office shelf, to be installed in a ETSI rack-mounting shelf or a 19" rack-mounting shelf as described in sub-section 4.1, - a rear connection shelf (6U) called the P3 Subscriber shelf, to be installed in a 19" rackmounting shelf as described in sub-section 4.2. NOTE: A rear connection shelf (6U), called the PRIVATE P3 subscriber shelf, and with mechanical modifications in the slot compartments with respect to the P3 subscriber shelf, is available. However, to preserve the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment, a cover (ref.: 55300131) must be installed on each slot, whether a card is inserted or not.
- a rear connection shelf(4U), called the FMX4 shelf, to be installed in a 19" rack-mounting shelf or on a table as described in sub-section 4.3. The implementation proposed includes: the installation and description of connections for each type of shelf, equipment start-up and configuration.
The operating functions described are the functions accessible to the operator during operation and whose use has an impact on the general operation of the equipment; these functions essentially concern system data changes such as mode of operation, synchronization etc., monitoring functions and loopbacks. The upgrade paragraph defines the precautionary measures to be taken and constraints to be respected when the physical configuration is modified during operation (addition and removal of a port card etc.). NOTE: The detailed description of the user software and its different functions are found in Users Guide No. N5681515XXXX where XX and YY represent, respectively, the version number and the edition number.
This equipment may only be installed in cabinets, shelves or racks whose lower part is closed or equipped with a minimum HF1 fire-classification air filter, or resting on an flame-proof floor. IMPORTANT: All circuits are Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits except for the type Z, U, BBTxRx and 2W/4W with E/M signaling circuits which are TRT (Telecommunications Network Voltage) type circuits. SELV type circuits must be connected to SELV type circuits.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-3
3 - INSTALLATION -START-UP AND OPERATION
Reversible Mounting bracket
1
Cylinder head stainless steel screw (M3x4) Flat stainless steel washer (M3)
2 Cover 1 Reversible Mounting bracket * :Representation of the reversible mounting brackets for the 19" Rack
Figure 3-1 - FMX 12 Shelf - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19 or ETSI Rack

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-4
3.1 - Front Connection Shelf Installation (FMX12 Shelf)

The shelf may be installed in CEPT Type 80, M3 or 19or ETSI rack-mounting shelves. NOTE: The specific rack environment adapter kits, power supply filter and cables are supplied on request.
3.1.1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation

19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
Item
Description 19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf assembly kit . Reversible Adapter bracket, . CLS M3x4 screws . Stainless steel flat M3 washer
Quantity
1 2 3
2 6 6
Table 3-1 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit

The reversible adapter brackets are designed for either 19" or ETSI rack-mounting; simply loosen the shelf fixings (unscrew the three attachment screws of the reversible adapter brackets) and rotate them from left to right for the left bracket and from right to left for the right bracket to the vertical. Mounting Part Assembly (Figure 3-1) On the left side of the shelf: Position the reversible adapter brackets (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure using 3 stainless steel CLS M3x4 screws (item 2) and 3 stainless steel M3 flat washers (item 3).
Repeat the operation on the right side of the shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-5
Connection panel
3U
L-H side vertical member
SHELF
200 (ETSI Rack)
190.5 (19" Rack)
2 cage nuts (M6)
6U
4
Hexagonal head st. steel screw (M6x12)
* :Representation of the reversible mounting brackets for the 19" Rack
Figure 3-2 - FMX 12 shelf - Shelf Mounting in 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-6
Shelf Mounting in 19" or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf (Figure 3-2) The mounting of the shelf in the 19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf is provided for indicative purposes; the parts used to mount the shelf in the rack-mounting shelves (brackets, cage nuts etc.) specific to them are not supplied. Assembly principle: provide for an available space of 10U, position the support brackets inside the rear of the rack-mounting shelf (lower level of shelf) and secure, secure the 2 M6 cage nuts (item 5) on either side of the shelf, position the empty shelf at the rear of the rack-mounting shelf and place on the support brackets, slide it in until the shelf reversible adapter brackets come in contact with the shelf risers, secure using the cage nuts and M6 x 12 hex-head screws (item 4).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-7
Secondary voltages -48V1 Protection OB1
Power converter
-48V2 Protection OB2 -48S Protection OBS Fail
Tertiary voltages
-48V
Service GND EQUIPMENT
Primary voltages
POWER
0V Chassis ground
ALARMS Visual VIS MAJ ALM
Power supply filter J1 connector Major alarm
Audible
AUD MAJ ALM Service GND The relays are closed when the alarm is present.
Visual
VIS MIN ALM Minor alarm
Audible
AUD MIN ALM Service GND
-48VS
EQUIPMENT
Figure 3-3 - Station Power Distribution Principle

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-8
3.1.2 - Power Distribution and Supply

Station power distribution is shown in Figure 3-3. Setting up the Power Supply Filter The shelf is supplied without a power supply filter; it is compulsory however to guarantee that EMC standards are met.
Setting up the Filter: - remove the filter support cover, - plug in the power supply filter card on the connection panel, - connect the power cable to connector J1 (HE501, 25-way male) on the power supply filter, connector pin options are shown in Table 3-2 below.
Power Supply Filter J1 Connector Pin Options 1-------------------------------------------14---------------------2--------------------------------------------15---------------------3--------------------------------------------16---------------------4--------------------------------------------17---------------------5--------------------------------------------18---------------------6--------------------------------------------19---------------------7--------------------------------------------20---------------------8--------------------------------------------21---------------------9--------------------------------------------22---------------------10------------------------------------------23---------------------11------------------------------------------24---------------------12------------------------------------------25---------------------13------------------------------------------Signal Name -48V2 -48V2 -48V2 -48V2 -48V1 -48V1 -48V1 -48V1 ALA MN* Service GND Service GND MN* ALM MJ* ALM -48S -48S MJ* ALM GND2 (GND1)* OB1 (OB2)* GND2 (GND1)* OB1 (OB2)* 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
power supply filters (5 = MN ALM, 7 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND2, 19 = 21 = Not connected and 22 = 23 = GND1). Sound and visual alarm power supply filters (5 = 19 = MN ALM, 7 = 21 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND1, 22 = 23 = OB2). Seen from PABB, 5 = ALA MN sound, 19 = MN ALM visual, 7 = MJ ALM sound et 21 = MJ Alm visual.
Table 3-2 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter

NOTE: Two switches located on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card are used to disable major and minor alarms even when the GIE or GIE - P card is not powered. The table below provides the status of the LEDs and alarms according to switch position. SWITCH POSITION Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) ALARM (MaJor or MiNor) Absent Present ALARM LEDs Lit Unlit Lit Lit ALARM STATUS (Major or Minor) Sce GND Open Open Sce GND TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-9
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
P101A
Power filter
Connector with 6.35 faston contacts
2 3 4 A 5 6 7 1 2 3 B 4 5 6 7
Front-end connection access shelf
P102B
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
Power and Alarm bus Bar (PABB)
Figure 3-4 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-10
Power Distribution in Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves A Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) is used to supply power to the different shelves installed in a type 80 or 19 rack-mounting shelves. It is secured on the left side, outside the type 80 rack-mounting shelves or inside the 19 rack-mounting shelves. The PABB is powered by a Frame Protection Unit (FPU) or a Alarm and Frame Protection Unit (AFPU) located in the upper part of the rack-mounting shelf. The shelf is powered via the PABB by a 70 cm power cable connected on its power supply filter and equipped shelf-side with an HE 501 female (25-way) connector. There are two versions of the cable differentiated by their end-PABB side: - "Y" cable (ref. 6013235) equipped with 2 7-way connectors (FASTON type) with insertion key, two wires are reserved for central office alarm transmission: one for the major central office alarm and the other for the minor central office alarm (alarm detection is indicated by the presence of a service GND).
BDA side L = 70 cm 4 Shelf side
A
P101A 01 -48V1 power supply voltage 02 Signal ground for -48V1 (Sig Gnd 1) 03 Chassis ground
04 05 06 07 Major Alarm Extn
6013235
P102B 01 -48V2 power supply voltage 02 Signal ground for -48V2 (Sig Gnd 2)
J1
2 3
Cable Cable no.
1 2 3 4 5 5
B
03 Chassis ground
04 05 -48VS service voltage 06 Service ground 07 Minor Alarm Extn
Power supply filter
Connector (25-way female ) Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
Figure 3-5 - Power Cable equipped with two 7-way Connectors (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelf)
- the cable (ref. 6012721) is equipped with a single 7-way connector (FASTON type) with insertion key: a single wire is reserved for central office alarm transmission (alarm detection is indicated by the presence of a service ground).
Shelf side L = 70 cm BDA side 4
01 -48V1 power supply voltage 02 Signal ground 03 Chassis ground
Ali/PWR
6012721 1 2 Cable Cable no. Connector (25-way female) Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
A
1
04 -48V2 power supply voltage 05 -48VS service voltage 06 Service ground 07 Major and Minor Alarm Extn
J1
2 3
Power supply filter
3 4
Figure 3-6 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-11
PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 Distribution Card

TB1
Z Y Mm/Gnd OBS
3 2 1
TB2
J1 J2 -48VS OBS Ala DsJ Ala MJ1 Ala MJ2 Ala Mn1 Ala Mn2 Mm/Gnd
J101
J102
J103
1
J104
2 3
J105
4
J106
1 2 3 4
J107
J108
J109
J120
J110
J111 J112 J121

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J113 J114 J122
J115
J116 J117 J123
J118
J119
LED/DEL Ala/Alm
Power Supply Cable

J102 J102 J103 J103 J104 J104
CONNECTION PANEL
J105 J105 J106 J106 J107 J107 J108 J108
J1
J109 J109
J110 J110
J111 J111
J112 J112
J113 J113
J114 J114
J115 J115
J116 J116
J117 J117
J118 J118
J119 J119
J120 J120
J121 J121
J122 J122
J123 J123
J124 J124
J125 J125
J126 J126
J127 J127
J128 J128
J129 J129
PO WER SU PPLY FILTER
J130 J130
J131 J131
J132 J132
J133 J133
J134 J134
J135 J135
J136 J136
J137 J137
J138 J138
J139 J139
J140 J140
J141 J141
J142 J142
J143 J143
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 12
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 4
Figure 3-7 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution PAPA G2 or PAPE G2
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-12
Slot 16
Slot 2
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 17
Slot 7
Slot 15
M3 or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf Power Distribution The power distribution principle for the M3 or ETSI is provided in User Manual PAPA G2 (PAPE G2) GU - N5671477XXYY (XX = Version and YY = Edition) and Figure 3-7 The Remote Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PPAP G2) or (RPAP G2) is located in the upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes a distribution card which allows: - the protection of secondary voltages (PPAP only) from the power unit of the station and the distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 6 A circuit-breakers to the equipment, - the grouping of major and minor alarms from the rack-mounting shelf equipment and circuit breaker alarms and the transmission of station alarm loops (major and minor), - the display of station alarms (major, minor, circuit breaking) and the presence of -48V/Sce GND signaling voltage. The shelf is connected to the PPAP G2 or RPAP G2 by a power cable equipped with a female HE 501 (25-way) connector at each end and fitted to the power supply filter. The cable may either measure 1.30 meters (ref.: 6012262) and 2.5 meters (ref.: 6012261).
Shelf side
Power supply filter
PAPA G2 side L = 1.3 or 2.5m 1 2
6012261 1
J1
Ali/PWR
Cable Cable no. HE5 connector (25-way female) 3
2 3 3
Figure 3-8 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable

"Universal" Power Cable The cable is used to power the FMX in previously undefined environments is 3 meters long; it is equipped with an HE 501 connector (25-way) at one end, the other end being determined according to use. Shelf side Power supply side
Power supply filter
L = 3m 1 2
Ali/PWR
6012711 1
Free ends
J1
2 3 3
Cable Cable no. HE5 connector (25-way female)
Figure 3-9 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) The 15 wires are identified with rings mentioning the name of the signal. -48VS : Purple-White -48V1 : Black, Green, Blue-Blanc -48V2 : Red, Blue, Red-white OB1 : Brown, yellow OB2 : Brown-White, YellowWhite OBS : Black-White AUD MAJ ALM : Orange AUD MIN ALM : Purple VIS MAJ ALM : Orange-White VIS MIN ALM : Green-White Service GND : Grey, Grey-White, White TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-13
Slot 3
J102 J107 J103 J104 J105 J106 J108
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 11
Slot 13
Slot 15
J109 J113 J114 J110 J111 J112 J115
Slot 7
Slot 10
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
J1 J6 J9 J12 J15 J18 J21 J24 J27 J30
J3
J33
J36
J39
J42
J45
J48
Figure 3-10 - Connection Location - Front Connection FMX 12 Shelf
12 Port Cards slots
J2
J4
J7
J10
J13
J16
J19
J22
J25
J28
J31
J34
J37
J40
J43
J46
J49
Slot 17
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-14

J116 J117 J118 J119 J120 J121 J122 J123 J124 J125 J126 J127 J128 J129
J101
Slot 17
POWER SUPPLY FILTER J137 J138 J139 J140 J141 J142
J130 J131
J132
J133
J134
J135
J136
J143
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 10
Slot 12
Slot 14
Slot 16
J5
J8
J11
J14
J17
J20
J23
J26
J29
J32
J35
J38
J41
J44
J47
3.1.3 - Connection Description

External equipment connections are performed on the front panel of the shelf on the upper panel. The different equipment cards are plugged into the lower part of the shelf in slots 1 to 17. Only the common equipment cards and power converters have pre-determined locations; the type of card which is or is not present in slots 03 to 14 depends on the configuration selected by the operator. The cards (with the exception of the GIE or GIE - P card) inserted in the FMX12 shelf do not have a front panel. This paragraph specifies the connectors associated with each slot (in particular the general purpose slots) and, for each type of port, the nature of the signals, connector pin assignments and cables proposed.
3.1.3.1 - Slot/Connector Association

The table below defines the allocation of each connector on the connection panel and specifies the distribution of line access connectors according to the slots (refer to Figure 3-10). Slot numbers 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Card Name +5V, -5V, +53V, -53V power converters Port cards (optional): - 3 64 I - BBTxRx - 2MU, - A2S (A2S - IV, A2S-IV-S), - 6PAFC, - V24/V11, - V24/V28, - 2w2B1Q, - Subscr - Exchan - Exch12, CONF - 4U TRANSFIX or IADB. Operations Interface Card (GIE or GIE - P) Connection Panel Connectors (external ports) J101: Power Supply Filter Connector Grouping J102 J109 J123 J130 J103 J110 J124 J131 J104 J111 J125 J132 J105 J112 J126 J133 J106 J113 J127 J134 J107 J114 J128 J135
J116 J137 J117 J138 J118 J139 J119 J140 J120 J141 J121 J142
J108: Loops - Alarms J115: SYNCH. - LTB - SEM J122: "F/DEBUG - CT" Interface J129: TMN Interface J136: Extension bus (for later user) J143: Extension bus (for later user)
16* 17
COnnections, Timing Circuit and Synchronization (COB) COB (standby)
: General purpose slots * When there is no protection, the COB card is plugged into slot 16.
Table 3-3 - Slot/Connector Association
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-15
Connection Panel Top Connector: J102 to J107/J123 to J128

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
6PAFC
M A(3) M B(3) E B(6) 0V/MGND E A(3) E A(6) 0V/MGND E B(3) M B(6) 0V/MGND M A(6)
3 64 I
Rx L Sig (3.1) Rx L Sig(3.2) 0V/MGND Tx L Sig (3.1) 0V/MGND Tx L Sig (3.2) 0V/MGND
IADB
0V/MGND
RX+ () 0V/MGND RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
Tx L (3.2) Tx L (6.2) Tx L (3.1) Tx L (6.1) Rx L (3.2) Rx L (6.2) Rx L (6.1) Rx L (3.1)
Tx L (3.2)
Tx L (3.1)
Rx L (3.2)
Rx L (3.1)
Connection Panel Middle Connector: J109 to J114/J130 to J135

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
6PAFC
M A(2) M B(2) E B(5) 0V/GND E A(2) E A(5) 0V/MGND E B(2) M B(5) 0V/MGND M A(5)
3 64 I
IADB
0V/MGND
RX+ () 0V/MGND RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
Tx L (2.2)
Tx L (2.1)
Rx L (2.2)
Rx L (2.1)
Connection Panel Bottom Connector: J116 to J121/J137 to J142

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
6PAFC
M A(1) M B(1) E B(4) 0V/MGND E A(1) E A(4) 0V/MGND E B(1) M B(4) 0V/MGND M A(4)
3 64 I
IADB
0V/MGND
RX+ () 0V/MGND RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
Tx L (1.2)
Tx L (1.1)
Rx L (1.2)
Rx L (1.1)
Table 3-4 - 6PAFC, 3 64 I and IADB Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-16
3.1.3.2 - Line Port Signals

The distribution of signals on line port connectors is provided in the tables below; the nature of the information transmitted is specified according to the type of card located in the associated slot, a detailed view of the connection panel is shown in Figure 3-10. Interpretation of Symbols Used Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2) designate the 2 transmission wires for interface no. i on the balanced pair; this designation is used when the card plugged into the slot includes several interfaces. Ex: Tx L (3-1) Tx L (3-2) | | 2 transmission wires on interface no. 3
For single interface cards (2MU, etc.) only interface no. 1 is used (i = 1). Ex: Tx L (1-1) Tx L (1-2) Connectors Associated with General Purpose Slots Type of connectors: SUB D high density 26-way. The tables below specify the use of the connector contacts according to card type. - Table 3-4 : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I or IADB cards, : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with V24/V11 or V24/V28 cards, : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with Subscr, Exchan or Exch12 cards, : Signals available on the connectors when the slot is equipped with BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX cards.
- Table 3-5:
- Table 3-6
- Table 3-7
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-17

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
V24/V11
Ba (J3) Bb (J3) 106 (J3) 0V/MGND (101 J3) 109a (J3) 140 (J3) 0V/MGND 109b (J3) 105b (J3) 0V/MGND 107 (J3) 105a (J3) 102 (J3) 142 (J3) 141 (J3) 108 (J3) 104b (J3) 115b (J3) 102a (J3) 104a (J3) 115a (J3) 102b (J3) 103b (J3) 114b (J3) 114a (J3) 103a (J3)
V24/V28
106 (J4) 108 (J3) 101 (J3) 107 (J3) 140 (J4) 0V/MGND 106 (J3) 140 (J3) 0V/MGND
102 (J3) 142 (J3) 141 (J3) 102 (J4) 109 (J3) 115 (J4) 104 (J3) 115 (J3) 105 (J3) 114 (J4) 114 (J3) 103 (J3)

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
V24/V11
Ba (J2) Bb (J2) 106 (J2) 0V/MGND (101 J2) 109a (J2) 140 (J2) 0V/MGND 109b (J2) 105b (J2) 0V/MGND 107 (J2) 105a (J2) 102 (J2) 142 (J2) 141 (J2) 108 (J2) 104b (J2) 115b (J2) 102a (J2) 104a (J2) 115a (J2) 102b (J2) 103b (J2) 114b (J2) 114a (J2) 103a (J2)
V24/V28
109 (J4) 108 (J2) 142 (J4) 101 (J2) 107 (J2) 0V/MGND 106 (J2) 140 (J2) 0V/MGND
102 (J2) 142 (J2) 141 (J2) 109 (J2) 107 (J4) 104 (J2) 115 (J2) 105 (J2) 108 (J4) 114 (J2) 103 (J2)

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
V24/V11
Ba (J1) Bb (J1) 106 (J1) 0V/MGND (101J1) 109a (J1) 140 (J1) 0V/MGND 109b (J1) 105b (J1) 0V/MGND 107a (J1) 105a (J1) 102 (J1) 142 (J1) 141 (J1) 108 (J1) 104b (J1) 115b (J1) 102a (J1) 104a (J1) 115a (J1 102b (J1) 103b (J1 114b (J1) 114a (J1) 103a (J1)
V24/V28
105 (J4) 108 (J1) 101 (J1) 107 (J1) 0V/MGND 106 (J1) 140 (J1) 0V/MGND
102 (J1) 142 (J1) 141 (J4) 141 (J1) 109 (J1) 104 (J4) 104 (J1) 115 (J1) 105 (J1) 103 (J4) 114 (J1) 103 (J1)
Table 3-5 - V24/V11 and V24/V28 Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-18

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9---------------------------------------------------LA3 LB3
Subscr & Exchan
Exch12
LA3 LB3 LB10 0V/MGND LA4 LA10 0V/MGND LB4 LB9 0V/MGND LA9
0V/MGND LA4 0V/MGND LB4 0V/MGND

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9---------------------------------------------------LA2 LB2
Subscr & Exchan
Exch12
LA2 LB2 LB11 0V/MGND LA5 LA11 0V/MGND LB5 LB8 0V/MGND LA8

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9---------------------------------------------------LA1 LB1
Subscr & Exchan
Exch12
LA1 LB1 LB12 0V/Mm LA6 LA12 0V/Mm LB6 LB7 0V/Mm LA7
Table 3-6 - Subscr, Exchan and Exch12 Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-19

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
BB TxRx
2MU
A2S
2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX
Unused
Unused
Unused
Tx L (3.2)
Tx L (3.1)
Rx L (3.2)
Rx L (3.1)

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
BB TxRx
2MU
A2S
Unused
Unused
Unused
Tx L (2.2)
U (4.2)*
Tx L (2.1)
U (4.1)*
Rx L (2.2)
U (3.2)*
Rx L (2.1)
U (3.1)*
Connection Panel Bottom Connector: J116 J121/J137 J142

10---------------------------------1---------------------------------------------------19--------------------11---------------------------------2---------------------------------------------------20--------------------12---------------------------------3---------------------------------------------------21--------------------13---------------------------------4---------------------------------------------------22--------------------14---------------------------------5---------------------------------------------------23--------------------15---------------------------------6---------------------------------------------------24--------------------16---------------------------------7---------------------------------------------------25--------------------17---------------------------------8---------------------------------------------------26--------------------18---------------------------------9----------------------------------------------------
BB TxRx
2MU
A2S
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Tx L (1.2)(Out L.2)
Tx L (1.2)
Tx L (1.2) Tx L (4.2) Tx L (1.1) Tx L (4.1) Screen (Rx) Rx L (1.2) Rx L (4.2) Rx L (4.1) Rx L (1.1)
U (2.2)
Tx L (1.1)(Out L.1) Screen (Rx) Rx L (1.2)(In L.2)
Tx L (1.1) Screen (Rx) Rx L (1.2)
U (2.1) Screen U (1.2)
Rx L (1.1)(In L.1)
Rx L (1.1)
U (1.1)
: Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only. Table 3-7 - BBTxRx, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-20
Cables Used Cable selection is specific to the type of signals connected and number of same type of connections to be made. One same cable, called the "universal cable" can be separated on several cards in the same shelf, or on several ports of the same card. Cable references are in accordance with their length. These cables are described below. Key to signal names: Px; Pair no., Qx; Quad no., Color abbreviations: Bl: Black, B: Blue, Br: Brown, C: Colorless, G: Green, Gr: Grey, O: Orange, P: Purple, R: Red, W: White, Y: Yellow. Cables for BBTxRx The cables used for the BBTxRx card are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050109 BBTxRx Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
Connection panel side L 2 1
Code No. 55670104 55670105 55670106 55670107
Card Quantity 1
A 55050109 B Free ends 3 4 1 2 3 4 Cable Cable Part No. Cable reference (length depending) HE5 connector (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
B P Gr W Gr W
Card B A Legend : A Tx L 2Mbit/s B Rx L 2Mbit/s BBTxRx
Connector port Channel 1
Connection panel connector
P B
Bottom
Figure 3-11 - Connection cable for BBTxRx, A2ME, 2w2B1Q cards and for two A2S card ports (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-21

Cables for the A2S card The cables used for the four ports of the A2S card are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050105 Designation A2S (4 ports) Card Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel) 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels) 1.5 m 0.5 m Code No. 55670088 55670089 55670090 55670091 55670xxx 55670xxx 1 Card Quantity 1
Connection panel side
A1
TOP
A2
MIDDLE
55050105
A B
Free ends 1 Cable 2 3 1 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male)
A3
M BOTTO
Wiring diagram 4
B
Gr Y Gr Y P Bl P Bl Br P Gr W Gr W
B A A2
B A A
P Br
B A
A1
A3
Legend : A Tx L 2Mbit/s B Rx L 2Mbit/s
Figure 3-12 - A2S Card 4-port Connecting Cable (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-22
Connection panel side (middle/top) 3 See table 2 1
500 mm
B A C Cable clamp
Item A B C Marking middle top 55670xxx 55670xxx 2 Mbit/s port 2 Mbit/s port In Rec L2 Out Em L2 In Rec L3 Out Em L3
B1
B2
1 Cable 2 Cable identification 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 Coaxial female 1.6/5.6 connectors
Wiring diagram
Rec L2/Rec L3 Em L2/Em L3
B1 B2
10 1 2 3 Green wire connecting the coaxial cable 4 grounding braid 5 6 13 14 24 16 17 8 26 18 25 11 19 20
Em L2/ Em L3
Rec L2/ 9 Rec L3
Figure 3-13 - 75 ohms adapter cable (1 channel)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-23
500 mm
Connection panel side (bottom) 3 See table 2 1
B1
C A D Cable clamp
Item A B C D E Marking 55670xxx 2 Mbit/s port In Rec L1 Out Em L1 Out Em L4 In Rec L4
B2
B3
B4
Wiring diagram
Rec L1 Em L1 Em L4 Rec L4
10 1 2 Green wire connecting 3 the coaxial cable grounding braid 4 5 24 16 11 19 20 13 14
B1 B2 B3 B4
Em L1
8
25
17 26 18 9
Em L4 Rec L4
Rec L1
Figure 3-14 - 75 ohms adapter cable (2 channels)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-24
Cables for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q card The cables used for the 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q cards are identified in the following table :
Std Plan No. 55050106
Designation 4U TRANSFIX, 2w2B1Q Cards
Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
Code No. 55670092 55670093 55670094 55670095
Card Quantity 1 (2 for 4U TRANSFIX)
L
2 1
55050106
Free ends 3 Connection panel side Middle connector: channel 3 et channel 4 Bottom connector: channel 1 et channel 2 1 2 3 4 Cable Cable Part No. Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connector (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
10 1
19
Q1 -P2 Q1 -P1
Bl P W Gr
9
18
26
Figure 3-15 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-25

Cables for the Exch12 card The cables used for the Exch12 card are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050111 Exch12 Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. Card Quantity 1
55670112 55670113 55670114 55670115
A1
TOP
A2
MIDDLE
55050111
55050111
Free ends 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 3 1
A3
M BOTTO
4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
A1 P3 P4
W G W Br O B Bl B
A2 P2 P10 P9 P5
W O R Bl G B Br R
A3 P1 P11 P8 P6
W Bl R O Br B G R
P12 P7
Figure 3-16 - Cable for Exch12 Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-26
Cables for the 3 64 I card The cables used for the 3 64 I card are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050123 3 64 I Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670135 55670136 55670137 55670138 Card Quantity 1
BO
TT
OM
1 A
M IDD LE
55050123
B C Free ends
TO
1 Cable 3 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
Q1 - P2
P Bl Gr P
1 10 2 3
19
Q2 - P2
P Br Gr Y
1 10 2 3
19
Q3 - P2
P R Gr W
1 10 2 3
19
C
Q1 - P1
C
Q2 - P1
C
Q3 - P1
6 7 8 9 18 26
Bl
6 7 8 9 18 26
6 7 8 9 18 26
A B
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P1
Gr W Gr
A B
Q1 - P2 Q1 - P2
P Bl P
A B
Q2 - P1 Q2 - P1
Gr J Gr
Figure 3-17 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-27

Cables for the V.24/V28 card The cables used for the V24/V28 card are identified in the following table: Std. Plan No. V24/V28 Card Connection of one DTE Cable for 1 channel Connection of for DTE Cable for 4 channels 2.5 m 2.5 m 6 012 545 6 012 547 6 012 546 55670144 55670143 1 to 3 1 1/channel 1 to 3 1 Designation Length (L) Code No. Card Quantity
DCE/ DTE Adapter (used on cable no.6012547) 0.30 m Connection of one DCE Cable for 1 channel Connection of for DCE Cable for 4 channels
30 cm To cable no. 6 012 547 1 2
2.5 m 2.5 m
DCE mode
6012546
DTE mode
Connection of one DCE
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connectors (25-way male) Wiring diagram

1 2 14 3 15 4
G B W W Bl Bl-Y Y W Br Bl-W Bl-W W Y Bl W
1 215 3 4
14
5 6 7 20 8
7 20
W W
Br
Bl-Y
25 13
13 25
Figure 3-18 - DTE/DCE Adapter for V24/V28 Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-28
2.50 m Connection panel side 1 2
6012545
Connection of one DTE
1 Cable 2 Cable identification 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way female)
Wiring diagram
101 114
10
W Bl-Y
1 14 2 15 4 3
W W
103 105
108 107
B W
1 2 21
19 20
G W
Bl
106 140
115 141 107 108 140
W Br
5 6 7 8 20
Y
22
Br
104 109
102 142 109 104 105 103
Bl-W W Y W Bl W
14 5 6 7 8 18 9 15
23 24 25 26
W B W G
21
W Bl-Y
141 115
106
142 102
W Bl-W
13 25
Figure 3-19 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-29

Cable four DTEs
2.50 m
J4
TOP
J3
MIDDLE
6012547
J2
BOTTOM
1 2
3
Cable Cable number 3 HE5 Connectors (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connectors (25-way female)
J4
Bl-Y
J1
4
J3
101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109 108 140 114 115 141
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
Top
10
B W G W Bl-W W Y W Bl W
108 (J3) 107 (J3) 106 (J3) 140 (J3) 102 (J3) 142 (J3) 109 (J3) 104 (J3) 105 (J3) 103 (J3)
1 2
19 20 21 22 14
106 (J4) 101 (J3) 140 (J4) 102 (J4) 141 (J3) 115 (J3) 115 (J4)
1 14
101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109
W Bl-Br
Wiring diagram
114 115 141
2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
Y-Br Br Bl-B W Bl-G Y-W
23
15 6 24 25 26 18 9
7 8
Middle
114 (J4) 114 (J3) 108 (J2) 107 (J2) 106 (J2) 140 (J2) 102 (J2) 142 (J2) 109 (J2) 104 (J2)
108 140
10 1 2 19 20 21 22 14 5 15 6 24 7 8 18 9 25 26 23
Bl-Y 109 (J4) Bl-Br 142 (J4) W 101 (J2) (Black and yellow-brown parity)
24
24
142
Br Bl-B W Bl-G Y-W
25 13
142
25 13
141 (J2) 115 (J2) 107 (J4) 108 (J4) 114 (J2) 114 115 141
J2
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
J1
101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109 108 140 114 115 141
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
Bottom
10
Bl-Y W W
101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109
105 (J2) 103 (J2) 105 (J4) 101 (J4) 101 (J1)
108 (J1) 107 (J1) 106 (J1) 140 (J1) 102 (J1) 142 (J1) 109 (J1) 104 (J1) 105 (J1) 103 (J1)
1 2
19 20 21 13 14 23
(Black and yellow-brown parity) Bl-B
141 (J4) 141 (J1) 115 (J1) 104 (J4) 103 (J4) 114 (J1)
Br Bl-Br W Bl-G Y-W
108 140
15 6 24 25 26 18 9
7 8
24
24
142
25 13
142
25 13
Figure 3-20 - Cable for Connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-30
2.50 m Connection panel side
55670144
DTE mode
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way female) Wiring diagram
Q4 - P1 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1 Q2 - P2 101 104 103 109 Gr P Gr
1 14 2
10
108 Q2 - P1 Q1 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1
1 2
19
107 Gr 106 Gr 140 W 142 P 109 Br 104 P 105 B 103 Gr

5 6 7 8 9
Gr 101
21
Q4 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q3 - P2
Br 4 3
5 18 6 7 20 21
Bl
14 23 15 24
102 141
Q1 - P1 140 W Q2 - P1 108 Y Q1 - P2 102 Bl Q3 - P1 105 B
Gr 106 Gr 107 P 142
Q1 - P1 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2
26
P
18
114
Q1 - P2
24 25 13
114 R 141
Q1 - P2 Q3 - P2
Figure 3-21 - Cable for Connecting 1 Channel of the V24/V28 Card
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-31

Cable four DCEs
2.50 m
J4
Top
J3
Middle
55670143
Bottom
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connectors (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connectors (25-way male)
J2
3
Top
10 19 20 2
Wiring diagram
108 Y 107 Gr 106 Gr 140 W 142 P 109 Br 104 P 105 B 103 Gr
5 6 7 8 9 18 26 1
J1
4
Q2 - P1 Q1 - P1 J3 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1
14 23 15
Gr 106 W 140 Q1 - P1 J4 Gr 101 Q4 - P1 J3 Bl 102 Q1 - P2 J3 Q4 - P1 101 Gr R 141 Q3 - P2 J3 Q3 - P2 104 P Bl 102 Q3 - P1 103 Gr Q2 - P2 109 Br J4 Q1 P2 P 114 Q1 - P1 140 W P 114 Q1 - P2 J3 Q2 - P1 108 Y Q1 - P2 102 Bl Q3 - P1 105 B
J4
1 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
J3
Q4 - P1 101 Gr Q3 - P2 104 P Q3 - P1 103 Gr Q2 - P2 109 Br Q1 - P1 140 W Q2 - P1 108 Y Q1 - P2 102 Bl Q3 - P1 105 B
1 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
Gr 106 Q1 - P1 Gr 107 Q2 - P1 P 142 Q2 - P2
Gr 106 Q1 - P1 Gr 107 Q2 - P1 P 142 Q2 - P2
Middle
10
108 Q2 - P1 Q1 - P1 J2 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1
1 19 20 2
107 Gr 106 Gr 140 W 142 P 109 Br 104 P 105 B 103 Gr

5 6 7 8 9
Br 106 P 142 Gr 101 Bl 102
Q2 - P2 J4 Q4 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q3 - P2 Q2 - P1 J4 Q1 - P2 J2 Q4 - P1 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q1 - P1 101 104 103 109 140 J2

24 25 13
14 23 15
P 114 Q1 - P2 R 141 Q3 - P2
24 25 13
P R
114 Q1 - P2 141 Q3 - P2
R 141 Gr 107 J 108 P 114
J2
Gr P Gr
1 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
J1
Q4 - P1 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q1 - P1 101 104 103 109 140 Gr P Gr Br W
1 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 20 21
26
18
Bottom
Q2 - P1 Q1 - P1 J1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P2 Q3 - P1 108 Y 107 Gr 106 Gr 140 W 142 P 109 Br 104 P 105 B 103 Gr
1 2
10
19 20
14 5 6 7 8 9 18 26 23 15
Br W B 105 Q3 - P1 Q2 - P1 108 Y Q4 P1 J4 Gr 101 Q1 - P2 102 Bl Gr 101 Q4 - P1 Q3 - P1 105 B Bl 102 Q1 - P2 J1 R 141 Q3 - P2 P 104 R 141 Q3 - P2 J4 Gr 103 Q3 - P1 P 114 Q1 - P2 J1
Gr 106 Q1 - P1 Gr 107 Q2 - P1 P 142 Q2 - P2
Q2 - P1 108 Y Q1 - P2 102 Bl Q3 - P1 105 B
Gr 106 Q1 - P1 Gr 107 Q2 - P1 P 142 Q2 - P2
24 25 13
P 114 Q1 - P2 R 141 Q3 - P2
24 25 13
P R
114 Q1 - P2 141 Q3 - P2
Figure 3-22 - Cable for connecting 4 Channels of the V24/V28 Card
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-32
Cables for the V24/V11 Card All cables are for DTE connection. The cables used for the V24/V11 card are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. Designation V24/V11 card 1mm/1.6 mm Adapter for V35 Interface V35 Interface adapter cable (34-way ISO 2593 connector) V36 Interface adapter cable (37-way ISO 4902 connector) X24/V11 Interface adapter cable (34-way ISO 4093 connector)
Length (L)
Code No.
Card Quantity
2.5 m 2.5 m 2.5 m
6 486 885 6 012 548 6 012 598 6 012 599
1 1 1
6012548
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (37-way female) Wiring diagram
101 102b 103b 103a
W W
1 20 2 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
W Bl-W W Br W B Bl-Br W Bl
W Y
Bb Ba 114b 114a 104b 104a 105b 105a 106 107 108 109a 140
Ba Bb 109a 109b 107 142 104b 104a 103b 103a
Bl W G W Bl-B W W Br W Y
10 1 2 3 21 4 5 6 15 7 8 18 9 14 23 24 25
Y-W W Y-Br W Bl-Y W Bl-W
24
19 20
Bl-Br W W B
106 140 105b 105a 141 108 115b 115a 114b 114a
25
115b 115a
W
W Bl-Y
26
22
10 11 30 12
Bl-B Y-Br G W
26
109b
31 13 14
102a 102b 102

Y-W Bl-G
18 37 19
142
Figure 3-23 - Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-33
Connection panel side 1
2.50 m 2
55670459
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 Connector (34-way female) 4
Wiring diagram
101
W
102 141
A D
10 1 19 20 2 4 14 5 15 6 24 7 8 18 9 25 26 23 22
B F E J L N R T X V
Bl-B Br W G W Bl-Br
106 140 105 102 141
Y-W Bl-B
107 108 103a 103b
Bl-Y Y-Br
C H K M P SU W Y
109
109 107 142 108 104b 104a 103b 103a
Bl-Br Bl-Y Bl-G Y-Br W Br W Y
Bl-W Bl W W G
J W
140 104a 104b 105a 105b
BB
Z DD JJ
B-V
115b 115a
114b 114a
W B
AA EE KK
CC FF HH LL MM NN
142
1.6mm female way connection is possible via adapter no. 6 486 885
Figure 3-24 - Cable for the Connection of the V24/V11 (V35) Card
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-34
6012599
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (15-way female)
Wiring diagram
102 101 Ba Bb 109a 109b

Bl-Y W G W
10 1 2 3
W
19 20 21 22 14
Bc B
1 2 3
W Br
105b 105a 109b 109a 115b 115a 103b 103a 104a 104b Bb Ba
W Bl-Y W 12 G
5
W Br
23 24 25 26
W Bl-W
4 5 6 7
15
6 7 8 9
18
W Y
15 8
Figure 3-25 - Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-35

Cables for the IADB Card The cables used for the IADB card are identified in the table below:
Std. Plan No. IADB Card
Designation
Length (L)
Code No.
Card Quantity
V24/V11 cable (1 X24/V11 port) RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) Cables for two V24/V28 ports Asynchronous V24/V28 cable for DCE connection Asynchronous V24/V28 cable for DTE connection Synchronous V24/V28 cable for DCE connection Synchronous V24/V28 cable for DTE connection
2.5 m
55670452-2M5
1 1
0.5 m 3m 2m 2m 2m 2m
55670467-0M5 55670467-3M0 6 486 400 6 486 401 6 485 864 6 485 865
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-36
2.50 m 0.80 m IADB card side
See table
2 1
To V24/V11 card of FMX12
Item
3 A B C
Marking
55670452 IADB (Top) 55670452 V24/V11 Card (Bottom) 55670452 X24/V11 Ports
Cable Cable identification 3 HE5 Connectors (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (15-way male)
1 2 Gr W P B Gr Bl Gr W P B
X24/V11 Interface available for DCE or DTE
Wiring diagram
10 1 19 20 12 21 22 5 15
Ba Bb 109a Q1-P1
10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 9 24 16 25 26 18 12 21 22 19 20
109b Q1-P2 107 142 Q3-P1 104b 104a 103b 103a Q1-P2 Q1-P1
Gr Y P Br Gr Y P Br Bl Gr
Ib Q2-P1 Q2-P2 106 140 105a 105b 115b 115a 102a 114b 114a Ia Q2-P2
Br 2 P 3
Gr Y Gr Bl
Q2-P1
Cb Ca Sb Sa
Q2-P1
Rb Ra Q1-P2 Tb Q1-P1 Ta
P B Gr W
6 7 8 9 18
24 25 26
Q3-P1
Q2-P2 102b Q3-P1
Gr Cb Q2-P1 Y Ca P Ib Q1-P2 B Ia
W Gr Q1-P1
Ta Tb
11
5 12 6 13 15 8
P Rb Br Q2-P2 Ra Bl Sb Gr Q3-P1 Sa
Figure 3-26 - Cable for IADB Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-37
HE 5 connector (25-way male)
55670199
Connection panel side "Bottom" connectors J116 to J121/J137 to J142
RJ45 connector (8-way female)
Wiring diagram
10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 18 26 15 19
Transparent (Cover) White 21 Black Brown Yellow 23 Blue Orange Green Red
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TX+ ( TX- ( RX+ (
) ) )
RX- (
Figure 3-27 - RJ45 26-way adapter (1 Ethernet port)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-38
300 mm Port 1
B Connection of the following cables: no. 6 486 400 no. 6 486 401 no. 6 485 864 no. 6 485 865
55670467
C 1 Cable Item A B C Marking IADB Port 1 (V24/V28)

Port 2 (V24/V28) Wiring diagram
Port 2
2 Cable identication 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 RJ45 Connectors (8-way female)
P3 P1
10 1 20 2 3 12 13 19
1 2 3 4 5
Port 1
P4 P2 P1
6 7 8
1 2
6 7
16 17
P2
26 18
3 4 5 6
8 9
P4
Port 2
P3
7 8
Figure 3-28 - Cable for IADB Card Connection (Two V24/V28 ports)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-39
2m Connection to DCE 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670467 1
6 486 400
3 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 RJ45 Connector (8-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
103 (TD) 104 (RD) 105 (RTS) 106 (CTS)
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 20
109 (CD) 108 (DTR)
25 13
Figure 3-29 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-40
2m Connection to DTE (Terminal) 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670467 1
6 486 401
3 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 RJ45 Connector (8-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way female) 4
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 8 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 107 (DSR) 108 (DTR) 105 (RST) 109 (CD) 106 (CTS)
25 13
Figure 3-30 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-41
2m Connection to DCE (Modem) 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670467 1
6 485 864
3 1 2 Cable Cable number 4
3 RJ45 Connector (8-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
102 103 (TD) 104 (RD) 105 (RST) 106 (CTS) 109 (CD) 114 (TC) 115 (RC) 108 (DTR)
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 20 8
25 13
Figure 3-31 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-42
2m Connection to DTE 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670467 1
6 485 865
3 1 2 3 Cable Cable number RJ45 Connector (8-way male) 4
4 HE5 Connector (25-way female)
Wiring diagram
1 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 106 (CTS) 107 (DSR) 105 (RST) 115 (RC) 114 (TC) 108 (DTR) 109 (CD)
215 3 4 5 6 7 20 8
25 13
Figure 3-32 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-43

Cables for the 6PAFC Card The cables used for the 6PAFC card are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. 55050107 6PAFC Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670096 55670097 55670098 55670099
Card Quantity 1
BO
TT
OM
1 A
MID DLE
55050107
B C Free ends
TO
1 Cable 3 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male) Wiring diagram
4
P4 P10
C
P1 P7
W Br B O W Bl W G Br W Bl W Bl W W Br
P5 P11
10 1 2 19 20
C
P2 P8
21 3 13 22 6 7 8 9 18
R Bl B G W O R Br Bl R O W O W R Bl
10 1 2 19 20
21 3 13 22 6 7 8 9 18
P4
P5
24 25 26
B
P1 P1
B
P2 P2
24 25 26
P4
A
R O B Br W G B Bl O R G W G W R O
P5
P6 P12
C
P3 P9
10 1 2 19 20
21 3 13 22 6 7 8 9 18
P6
B
P3 P3
24 25 26
P6
Figure 3-33 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-44
Cables for the Subscr and Exchan Cards The cables used for the cards above are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. 55050110 Designation Subscr and Exchan Cards Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670108 55670109 55670110 55670111
Card Quantity 1
A1
TO
A2
M IDDL E
55050110
55050110
Free ends 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male) 3
A3
BO
O TT
Wiring diagram
4
P3 P4 Br W G W
1 2 3 13
A1
10 19
A2
P2 P5 W O R Bl
1 2 3 10 19
26 9 9
26
A3
P1 P6 W Bl R O
1 2 3 10 19
26 9
Figure 3-34 - Cables for Subscr and Exchan Card Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-45
Connection Panel Connector: J108 10--------------------------1-----------------------------------------19---------------11--------------------------2-----------------------------------------20---------------12--------------------------3-----------------------------------------21---------------13--------------------------4-----------------------------------------22---------------14--------------------------5-----------------------------------------23---------------15--------------------------6-----------------------------------------24---------------16--------------------------7-----------------------------------------25---------------17--------------------------8-----------------------------------------26---------------18--------------------------9------------------------------------------
Signal Name TSIG1A TSIG1B TSIG2A
TSIG2B
TSIG3A
TSIG3B 0V/MGND GTR
Common Point (CP) REMCON2_C 0V/MGND REMCON1_C REMCON2_B REMCON1_B REMCON2_A REMCON1_A
Table 3-8 - J108 Connector, Alarm Loops
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-46
3.1.3.3 - J108 Alarm Loop Connector

The J108 connector (HE501, 26-way) provides the operator with two types of alarm information: alarm information (major or minor) at the GTR interface using a relay contact or service grounding (type of circuit used is determined by the EJ206 link option on the GIE or GIE - P card), 3-way relay contact interface (2 in number).
Furthermore, connector J108 has three relay contact status input interfaces used in acquiring the status of external FMX parameters (remote control signals). Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-8.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-47

Cable for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling: The cables used for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050108 Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
Connection panel side 2 1
Code No
y Card Quantity 1
Cable for the GTR interface, remote commands and remote signaling
55670100 55670101 55670102 55670103
55050108
55050108
Free ends
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
A B
TSIG 1
P5
R Bl
10 1
19
R O R G
P6 P7 G W P3
B A B
TSIG 2 TSIG 3
GTR CP
C A
P4
W Br Bl W
9 26
C A B B
REMCON2 REMCON2 REMCON1
REMCON1
P1
O W P2
18
Figure 3-35 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan)

GTR Interface Alarm Information This information is available on pins 5 and 6 of the connector; its nature depends on the position of the EJ206 link on the GIE or GIE - P card according to the table below. TNM Alarm Normal Fault Fault EJ206 Link Position 1Y - 2Y or 2Y - 3Y 2Y -3Y 1Y - 2Y Status No alarm Relay contact Sce GND
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-48
Relay Contact Interface Connector J108 supplies two alarm indication relay contacts which may be used in the following two ways: via automatic activation according to criterion defined by an OR type logic function of all or part of the following information: . combination of alarm indication (major alarm or minor alarm), . one or more remote monitoring signals, or via a operation control order. Mode of operation is set by the operator using the CT for each interface.
NOTE:
The different modes of operation of the remote control interfaces no. 1 (REMCON1_A_B_C) and no. 2 (REMCON2_A_B_C) are provided in the table below. Alarm Absent Present REMCON1_B - REMCON1_C loop or REMCON1_B - REMCON1_A loop or REMCON2_B - REMCONC1_C loop REMCON2_B - REMCON1_A loop Open Closed Closed Open
Relay Contact Input Interfaces (Remote Monitoring signals) Connector J108 provides connection of 3 incoming loops (TSIG1, TSIG2 and TSIG3) significant of the outside environment.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-49
Connector J1 on GIE or GIE - P front panel 1------------------------------------14----------------------
Signal Name (ITU-T abbreviation)
Designation
Circuit V24
2------------------------------------- TD 15---------------------3------------------------------------- RD 16---------------------4------------------------------------17---------------------5------------------------------------18---------------------6------------------------------------19---------------------7------------------------------------20---------------------8------------------------------------21---------------------9------------------------------------22---------------------10----------------------------------23---------------------11----------------------------------24---------------------12----------------------------------25---------------------13----------------------------------RTS CTS DSR Sig GND DTR
Ground () TX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) Transmit Data () Receive Data () RX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) Request To Send () Clear To Send () Data Set Ready () Signaling Ground () Data Terminal Ready ()
101 - DCE
103 - DCE 104 - DCE
105 - DCE 106 - DCE 107 - DCE 102 - DCE 108/2 - DCE
Table 3-9 - GIE or GIE - P Card - J1 Connector
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-50
3.1.3.4 - Auxiliary Interface

Two V.24 ports are available depending on the equipment connected: GIE or GIE - P card front panel connector J1 for a local CT, connection panel connector J122 for a modem for remote CT.
The GIE or GIE - P front panel key is used to select the active function for the data inputs; data outputs are available simultaneously on both interfaces. GIE or GIE - P Card Front Panel Connector Connector J1 (HE501, 25-way) located on the front panel is designed for CT connection; the interface complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave like a DCE with respect to the terminal. Interface pin assignment is provided in Table 3-9. Transmission characteristics ASCII code: 1 start bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, Bit rate 9600 bps, Transmission mode: asynchronous, Local CT Connection Cable: see Figure 3-36
GIE card side (J1) PC side
L = 1.80 m
6993400 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 HE5 connector (25-way male) 4 HE5 connector (9-way female)
Wiring diagram
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20
103 104 105 106 107 102 108 109
1 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5
22
25 13
Figure 3-36 - Local CT Connection Cable

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-51
Connection panel Connector: J122 10------------------1------------------------------19-------11------------------2------------------------------20-------12------------------3------------------------------21-------13------------------4------------------------------22-------14------------------5------------------------------23-------15------------------6------------------------------24-------16------------------7------------------------------25-------17------------------8------------------------------26-------18------------------9-------------------------------
Signal Name (ITU-T abbreviation) DSC
Designation
Circuit V24
TD
Data Set Connect () 0V/MGND RES19 (reserved) 0V/MGND Transmit Data () RES20 (reserved) Receive Data () RES21 (reserved) Request To Send () RES22 (reserved) Clear To Send () RES23 (reserved) Data Set Ready () RES24 (reserved) 0V/MGND DEBUGAN ("Debug" Interface) 0V/MGND Data Carrier detect on data channel () DEBUGAP ("Debug" Interface) RES18 (reserved) RES9 (reserved)
108/1 - DTE
103 - DTE
RD
104 - DTE
RTS
105 - DTE
CTS
106 - DTE
DSR
107 - DTE
CD
109 - DTE
Table 3-10 - Connector J122, "F/DEBUG - CT" Interface
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-52
Modem Port
Connector J122 (HE5 high bit rate, 26-way) is designed for modem or MEGAPAC equipment connection; the function complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave like a DTE (terminal) with respect to a DCE (modem). The P2 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 synchronous type) includes four clock/data pairs in transmit and receive. The "TPI/P2" interface is used. Characteristics are provided in Table 3-10. TPI Interface Transmission Characteristics: ASCII code: 1 start bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, Bit rate 9600 bps, Transmission mode: asynchronous, CT Connection Cable via MODEM: see Figure 3-37.
Connection panel side (J122)
L=6m
MODEM side
55670009
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Connection diagram
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
19
14
23
18
26
10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
103 104 105 106 107 102 108 109
White Blue Yellow Brown Black Red Grey Green
2 3 4 5 6 7 20 8
14
25 13
Figure 3-37 - CT Connection Cable via Modem
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-53
3.1.3.5 - P2 Management Interface

Cables for P2 Management Interface connection The cables used for P2 Management Interface above are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. Designation Cables for P2 Management Interface connection Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m P2 Management Interface cable with standard end (9-way female) 1.5 m Code No. 55670465-2M5 55670465-5M0 55670465-12M 55670465-25M 55670492-1M5 Card Quantity 1
L
1 2
J122
55670465Free ends Cable length
To P1 of another equipment
Interface P2 3
1 Cable 2 Cable reference
(length depending)
3 HE5 Connector (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
10 1
19 20
W P Gr Y P Br Gr
Q2-P1 Q1-P2 Q2-P2 Q1-P1
TxP2 - RxP1 (N) TxP2 - RxP1 (P) TxCLKP2 - RxCLKP1 (P) TxCLKP2 - RxCLKP1 (N) RxCLKP2 - TxCLKP1 (P) RxCLKP2 - TxCLKP1 (N) RxP2 - TxP1 (P) RxP2 - TxP1 (N)
18 9 26
Figure 3-38 - Cable for P2 Management Interface connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-54
L Connection panel side
J122
55670492Cable length
P1
1 3 2 3 4
Cable Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connector (26-way male) HE5 Connector (9-way female)
Wiring diagram
10 1 11 20 2 3 4 5 15 16 7 8 9 24 25 26 18 21 22 23 19
GND
Q1P2 TXP2P1-P TXP2P1-N TXCLKP2P1-P TXCLKP2P1-N RXCLKP2P1-P RXCLKP2P1-N RXP2P1-P RXP2P1-N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gr Q1P2 B Q1P1 P P Br W
Q1P1 Q2P2 Q2P2 Q2P1
Gr Q2P1
Figure 3-39 - P2 Management Interface Cable with standard end

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-55
3.1.3.6 - P1 Management Interface

Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to P1 Management Interface with slot 15. The P1 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 type) includes 4 clock/data pairs in transmit and receive. Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3-11. Cables for P1 Management Interface connection The cables used for P1 Management Interface above are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. Designation Cables for P1 Management Interface connection Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m P1 Management Interface cable with standard end (9-way male) 1.5 m Code No. 55670466-2M5 55670466-5M0 55670466-12M 55670466-25M 55670491-1M5 Card Quantity 1
L
1 2
J129
P1 Interface
1 Cable 2 Cable reference
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
10
TxP1 - RxP2 (N) TxP1 - RxP2 (P)
W Q1-P1 Gr
1 2 13 14
19 20
P B Y Gr Q1-P2 Q2-P2
TxCLKP1 - RxCLKP2 (P) TxCLKP1 - RxCLKP2 (N) RxCLKP1 - TxCLKP2 (N) RxCLKP1 - TxCLKP2 (P)
17 18 9
26
P B
Q2-P1
RxP1 - TxP2 (N) RxP1 - TxP2 (P)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-56
J129
P2
1 3 2
Cable Cable reference (length depending)
3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (9-way male) Wiring diagram
Q2P1 RXP2P1-N
10 1 2 3 4 5 24 16 7 17 8 9 18 25 26 13 14 19 11 20
Q2P1 RXP2P1-P GND Q2P2 RXCLKP2P1-P Q2P2 RXCLKP2P1-N

1 6 7 8 9
Q1P1 RXCLKP2P1-N Q1P1 RXCLKP2P1-P
2 3 4 5
Q1P2 TXP2P1-N Q1P2 TXP2P1-P
Figure 3-41 - P1 Management Interface cable with standard end
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-57
3.1.3.7 - TNM Port Interface

Connector J129 (HE 501, 26-way) provides access to TNM in the X.25 mode with slot 15. Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3-11.
Connection Panel Connector: J129 10-----------------------1--------------------------------------19----------11-----------------------2--------------------------------------20----------12-----------------------3--------------------------------------21----------13-----------------------4--------------------------------------22----------14-----------------------5--------------------------------------23----------15-----------------------6--------------------------------------24----------16-----------------------7--------------------------------------25----------17-----------------------8--------------------------------------26----------18-----------------------9--------------------------------------Signal Name 104_ TNM
0V/MGND (Ground)
107_ TNM 102_TNM
105_ TNM
114_ TNM 103_ TNM
106_ TNM 108_ TNM
115_ TNM
Table 3-11 - Connector J129, TNM Port Interface and P1 Management Interface
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-58
Examples of TNM port connection : - Connecting FMX to MEGAPAC equipment - Connecting FMX to DM (V28) equipment - Connecting FMX to DM (V11) equipment
Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment

Connecting FMX to MEGAPAC equipment via the TNM port requires the use of two cables in accordance with Figure 3-42. The cables are shown in Figure 3-43 and Figure 3-44.
MEGAPAC Equipment DCE mode) MIO CARD
RJ45
FMX (GIE or GIE - P in DTE mode)

GIE or GIE - P CARD
Cable for RGT port/MEGAPAC connection

26 pts 25 pts
Cable for V.24/v.28 synchronous connection

25 pts RJ45
26 pts
Figure 3-42 - Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-59

The cables used for TNM port connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. Designation Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPAC (DTE mode) Length (L) 2m 2.5 m 12 m Code No. 6 485 865 55670410-2M5 55670410-12M Card Quantity 1 1
2m To cable no. 55670410 2 MEGAPAC side (MIO Card) 1
6 485 865
Wiring diagram
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 106 (CTS) 107 (DSR) 105 (RTS) 115 (RC) 114 (TC) 108 (DTR) 109 (CD)
215 3 4 5 6 7 20 8
25 13
Figure 3-43 - Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-60
J109
DTE mode
1 Cable 3 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4
Wiring diagram
101 104
10 1 19 2 21 5 23 15 24
W Q1-P1 Gr Gr Q2-P1 Q1-P2 Y P B
1 215 3 4 5 6 7 8
14
104 Q1-P1 101 107 102 103 106 108 115 Q1-P2
Gr W P B Gr Y P Br
Bl Gr Br Q2-P2
20
114 Q3-P1 (105) 115 108
103 Gr Bl Q3-P1 106 107 102
(105) 114
Q2-P1 Q2-P2
7 8 9 18 26
25 13
NOTE: Signal 105 is not connected to the end connector.
Figure 3-44 - Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPACequipment (DTE mode) (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-61

Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment
Connecting FMX to DM equipment via the TNM(J129) port of the GIE or GIE - P card requires the use of two cables in accordance with Figure 3-45. The cables are shown in Figure 3-47 and Figure 3-46.
GIE or GIE - P CARD
DM (V28)
Cable for RGT port/DM (V28) connection Wiring harness no.4 913 031
IM CARD
15 pts 15 pts 15 pts 15 pts
26 pts 26 pts
Figure 3-45 - Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment

The cables used for TNM port connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. Designation Wiring harness to DM equipment Cable for connecting TNM port to DM equipment 2.5 m 12 m Length (L) Code No. 4 913 031 55670442-2M5 55670442-5M0 Card Quantity 1 1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-62
B1 B2
1 DM side
Free ends
4913031
B3
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 4 Connector (32-way) HE5 Connectors (15-way)

B4
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A
Gr W P B Gr Y P Br Gr Bl P R Gr G P W Gr Gr W P B Gr Y P Br Q2 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q1 - P1
4
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1 Q3 - P2 Q4 - P1 Q4 - P2 Q5 - P1
B1
Wiring diagram
B2
92
Gr Bl Q3 - P1
11
13
P R W Gr B P Y Gr Br P Gr W Gr R P Y Gr Br P Gr Q3 - P2 Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1
B3
6
14 78
92
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1
11 13
B4
6 14 7 8
Figure 3-46 - Wiring harness for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-63
55670442-
Cable length 3 1 Cable 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (15-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (26-way male) 4
Wiring diagram
10 1 2 3 11 21 19
1 2 3
Q1-P1 Q1-P1 Q1-P2 Q2-P1 Q1-P2
4 5 6 7 8 9 18 23 15 24
4 12 5 6 7 15 8
Figure 3-47 - Cable for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-64
Connecting FMX to DM (V11) equipment

Reserved
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-65
Connection Panel Connector: J115 10-----------------------1--------------------------------------19----------11-----------------------2--------------------------------------20----------12-----------------------3--------------------------------------21----------13-----------------------4--------------------------------------22----------14-----------------------5--------------------------------------23----------15-----------------------6--------------------------------------24----------16-----------------------7--------------------------------------25----------17-----------------------8--------------------------------------26----------18-----------------------9---------------------------------------
Signal Name Synchro Out 0V/MGND Synchro Out + 0V/MGND Synchro In 0V/MGND Synchro In + LTB +
Designation Synchronization Output Ground Synchronization Output Ground Synchronization Input Ground Synchronization Input Line Test Bus
0V/MGND OQLTB LTB Sem Out 0V/MGND Sem Out + 0V/MGND Sem In Sem In +
Ground Line Test Bus Occupation Line Test Bus Output SEM Ground SEM Output Ground SEM Output SEM Input
Table 3-12 - Connector J115, Synchronization, SEM, Line Test Bus Ports
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-66
3.1.3.8 - J115 Multiport Connector

The J115 (HE5 high bit rate 26-way) connector groups the external synchronization, SEM and Line Test Bus ports; its pin assignment is provided in Table 3-12. External Synchronization Port External synchronization connection complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703. Its characteristics are the following: - Fe = 2048 kHz 50.10-6, adaptation attenuation at 2048 kHz 15 dB, Connection cable: see : Figure 3-48, Figure 3-49 and Figure 3-50.
The cables used for synchronization connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050121 Designation Synchronization connection cable Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m 55050125 Two-shelf synchronization connection cable 1.5 m 3m 1.5 m 55050126 NOTE: Three-shelf synchronization connection cable 3m Code No. 55670127 55670128 55670129 55670130 55670145 55670146 55670147 55670148 Card Quantity 1
The FMX continuously generates on pins 10 and 19 of the connector, a frequency controlled by the active synchronization source.
J115 connection panel side 2 Dispatcher side
55050121
55050121
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (26-way male) Free ends
4 Wiring diagram
10
Bl 19 P Br P Q2-P2 Q1-P2
9 18
26
Figure 3-48 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan) TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-67
L
Connection panel side 2 1 Connection panel side
55050125
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (26-way male)
Wiring diagram
10 1 1 10 11 W 19 20 21 Gr W 19 20 12 21
Q1 - P1
Q1 - P1
Gr
26 26 9 18 9 18
Figure 3-49 - Two-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-68
Connection panel side J115 A
C 2 1
B1
J115
B
550501 26
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 connectors (26-way male) 4 D
B2
J115
Wiring diagram
1 1 10 W 19 20 21 Gr W Gr W
10
19 20 12 21
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P1
W
Q1 - P1
Gr
B1
10 19
Q1 - P1 Gr
26 18 26
B2
18
18
26
Figure 3-50 - Three-shelf Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-69

SEM Port SEM interface connection complies with CSE 52.13. Transmission Characteristics Transmission mode: asynchronous Bit rate: 9600 bps Each character is composed of 11 bits: - 1 character synchronization bit (START) always set to "0", - 8 useful bits carrying the information (the first bit transmitted is the low order bit), - 1 parity bit (P) providing protection against transmission errors (the value of this bit is "0" for an even number of bits set to 1 among the 8 bits used), - 1 character separation bit (STOP) always with a value of "1". Line Test Bus Port Port of the metallic subscriber line test bus (2w2B1Q card ports).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-70
Synchronization, SEM and Line Test Bus Connection Cable (see Figure 3-51)
The cables used to connect the synchronization, SEM and LTB are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050122 Designation two-shelf synchronization connection cable Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670131 55670132 55670133 55670134 Quantity Card
Connection panel side 2
L
1 A
55050122
B
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (26-way male) Wiring diagram
1 10 19 Bl P Br P Gr Q1 - P1 W W Q1 - P2 P 9 26 Gr Bl
18
C Free ends 2
Q1 - P2
A (Sync.)
Q2 - P2
C (LTB)
Q1 - P1
B (SEM)
Q1 - P2
Figure 3-51 - Synchronization, SEM and LTB Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-71
Figure 3-1Figure 3-2Figure 3-3Figure 3-4Figure 3-5Figure 3-6Figure 3-7Figure 3-8Figure 3-9Figure 3-10Figure 3-11Figure 3-12Figure 3-13Figure 3-14Figure 3-15Figure 3-16Figure 3-17Figure 3-18Figure 3-19Figure 3-20Figure 3-21Figure 3-22Figure 3-23Figure 3-24Figure 3-25Figure 3-26Figure 3-27Figure 3-28Figure 3-29Figure 3-30Figure 3-31Figure 3-32Figure 3-33Figure 3-34Figure 3-35Figure 3-36Figure 3-37Figure 3-38Figure 3-39Figure 3-40Figure 3-41Figure 3-42Figure 3-43Figure 3-44Figure 345Figure 3-46Figure 3-47Figure 3-48 49
Figure 50Figure Figure 51

Table 3-1Table 3-2Table 3-3Table 3-4Table 3-5Table 3-6Table 3-7Table 3-8Table 3-9Table 3-10Table 3-11Table 3-12Table
Mounting piece
1
Mounting piece
Figure 3-52 - P3 Subscriber Shelf Mounting Part Assembly
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-72
3.2 - Rear Connection Shelf Installation (P3 Subscriber Shelf)

This shelf is only mounted in a 19" rack-mounting shelf.
3.2.1 - 19 Rack-mounting Shelf Installation

19 Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit
Item
Designation 19 Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly kit . Adapter bracket, . CLS M3x4 screw, . M3 stainless flat washer
Quantity
1 2 3
2 10 10
Table 3-13 - 19 Rack- Mounting Shelf Assembly Kit

Mounting Part Assembly (Figure 3-52) On the left side of the shelf: - Position the adapter brackets (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure using 3 stainless steel CLS M3x4 screws (item 2) and 3 stainless steel M3 flat washers (item 3). - Repeat the same operation on the right side of the shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-73
19" Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly (Figure 3-53) The assembly operation is as follows: provide for an available space of 9U, secure the 2 M6 cage nuts (7) in their housings on the right side of the rack-mounting shelf at the 190,5 mm location, repeat the same operation on the left riser, position the empty shelf, secure using the adapter brackets and the M6x 12 hex head screws (6); these screws are the part of the accessories delivered with the shelf. 3-
R-H vertical member
SHELF
5 2 cage nuts (M6)
6U
6
Hexagonal head
st. steel screw (M6x12)
Figure 3-53 - P3 Subscriber Shelf - 19" Rack-Mounting Shelf Assembly
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-74
190.5
3.2.2 - Power Distribution/Supply

Setting up the Power Supply Filter The filter must be present to guarantee compliance with EMC standards; if necessary, place it at the rear of the shelf.
Setting up the Filter: - remove the filter support cover, - plug in the power supply filter card on the connection panel, - connect the power cable to connector J1 (HE501, 25 -way male) on the power supply filter, connector pin options are shown in Table 3-14 below.
Power Supply Filter J1 Connector Pin Options 1-------------------------------------------14---------------------2--------------------------------------------15---------------------3--------------------------------------------16---------------------4--------------------------------------------17---------------------5--------------------------------------------18---------------------6--------------------------------------------19---------------------7--------------------------------------------20---------------------8--------------------------------------------21---------------------9--------------------------------------------22---------------------10------------------------------------------23---------------------11------------------------------------------24---------------------12------------------------------------------25---------------------13------------------------------------------Signal Name -48V2 -48V2 -48V2 -48V2 -48V1 -48V1 -48V1 -48V1 MN ALM* Service GND Service GND MN ALM* MJ ALM* -48S -48S MJ ALM* GND (GND2)* GND (GND2)* GND (GND2)* GND (GND2)* 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
power supply filters (5 = MN ALM, 7 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND2, 19 = 21 = Not connected and 22 = 23 = GND1). Sound and visual alarm power supply filters (5 = 19 = MN ALM, 7 = 21 = MJ ALM, 9 = 10 = GND1, 22 = 23 = OB2). Seen from PABB, 5 = ALA MN sound, 19 = MN ALM visual, 7 = MJ ALM sound et 21 = MJ Alm visual.
Table 3-14 - Connector J1, Power Supply Filter

NOTE: Two switches located on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card are used to disable major and minor alarms even when the GIE or GIE - P card is not powered. The table below provides the status of the LEDs and alarms according to switch position. SWITCH POSITION Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) ALARM (MaJor or MiNor) Absent Present ALARM LEDs Lit Unlit Lit Lit ALARM STATUS (Major or Minor) Sce GND Open Open Sce GND TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-75
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
P101A
Power filter
2 3 4 A 5 6 7 1 2 3 B 4 5 6 7
Front-end connection access shelf
P102B
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
Figure 3-54 - Power and Alarm Bus Bar (PABB) for 19 Rack-mounting Shelf
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-76
19-inch Rack Mounting Shelf Power Distribution A Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) is used to supply power to the different shelves installed in a 19 rack-mounting shelves. It is secured on the left side inside the 19 rack-mounting shelves. The PABB is powered by a Frame Protection Unit (FPU) or a Alarm and Frame Protection Unit (AFPU) located in the upper part of the rack-mounting shelf. The shelf is powered via the PABB by a 70 cm power cable connected on its power supply filter and equipped shelf-side with an HE 501 female (25-way) connector. There are two versions of the cable differentiated by their end PABB-side: - "Y" cable (ref. 6013235) equipped with 2 7-way connectors (FASTON type) with insertion key, two wires are reserved for central office alarm transmission: one for the major central office alarm and the other for the minor central office alarm (alarm detection is indicated by the presence of a service GND).
BDA side
A
4 Shelf side
6013235
P102B 01 -48V2 power supply voltage 02 Signal ground for -48V2 (Sig Gnd 2) 03 Chassis ground
B
J1
2 1 3 Cable Cable no.
04 05 -48VS service voltage 06 Service ground
Power supply filter 4
2 3 5
Connector (25-way female) 5 Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
07 Minor Alarm Extn
Figure 3-55 - Power Cable equipped with Two 7-way Connectors (19"Unit)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-77

TB1
Z Y Mm/Gnd OBS
3 2 1
TB2
J1 J2 -48VS OBS Ala DsJ Ala MJ1 Ala MJ2 Ala Mn1 Ala Mn2 Mm/Gnd
J101
J102
J103
1
J104
2 3
J105
4
J106
1 2 3 4
J107
J108
J109
J120
J110
J111 J112 J121

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J113 J114 J122
J115
J116 J117 J123
J118
J119
LED/DEL Ala/Alm
FRONT PANEL
Power Supply Cable
SHELF REAR VIEW
J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 Power Supply Filter
J2 J2
J2
J2
J2
J1
J3 J1
J3
J4 J2
J3
J3 J4
J3 J1 J1
J3
Figure 3-56 - M3 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-78
M3 or ETSI Rack-Mounting Shelf Power Distribution The power distribution principle for the M3 or ETSI rack is provided dans le guide d'utilisation du PAPA G2 (PAPE G2) GU - N5671477XXYY (XX = Version et YY = Edition) and in Figure 356. The Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PPAP G2) or d'Energie Protection Alarm Panel (RPAP G2) is located in the upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes une carte de distribution et permettant: - the protection of secondary voltages (PPAP only) from the power unit of the station and the distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 6 A circuit-breakers to the equipment, - the grouping of major and minor alarms from the rack-mounting shelf equipment and circuit breaker alarms and the transmission of station alarm loops (major and minor), - the display of station alarms (major, minor, circuit breaking) and the presence of -48V/Sce GND signaling voltage. The shelf is connected to the PPAP G2 or RPAP G2 by a power cable equipped with a female HE 501 (25-way) connector at each end and fitted to the power supply filter. The cable may either measure 1.30 meters (ref: 6012262) and 2.5 meters (ref: 6012261).
Shelf side
Power supply filter
6012261 1
J1
Ali/PWR
Cable Cable no. HE5 connector (25-way female) 3
2 3 3
Figure 3-57 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable

"Universal" Power Cable The cable is used to power the FMX in previously undefined environments is 3 meters long; it is equipped with an HE 501 connector (25-way) at one end, the other end being determined according to use. Shelf side Power supply side
Power supp ly filter
L = 3m 1 2
Ali/PWR
6012711 1
Free ends
J1
2 3 3
Figure 3-58 - "Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) The 15 wires are identified with rings mentioning the name of the signal. -48VS : Purple-White -48V1 : Black, Green, Blue-Blanc -48V2 : Red, Blue, Red-white OB1 : Brown, yellow OB2 : Brown-White, YellowWhite OBS : Black-White AUD MAJ ALM : Orange AUD MIN ALM : Purple VIS MAJ ALM : Orange-White VIS MIN ALM : Green-White Service GND : Grey, Grey-White, White TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-79
J2
2x9
J1
Slot 17
J4 J1
2 x 26 - 2 x 15
Slot 16
J3
J3
J2
J2
3 x 25
J1
Slot 15
Slot 14 Slot 13
J3 J2
3 x 25
J1
Slot 12 Slot 11
J4 J3 J2
4 x 25
J1
Slot 10 Slot 9
12 unassigned slots
J3
J2
3 x 37 1 x 15 1 x 15
J1
J1
Slot 8
Slot 7
J1
Slot 6 Slot 5
J3 J2
3 x 25
J1
Slot 4 Slot 3
POWER SUPPLY FILTER
J1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Figure 3-59 - Cable Layout on Rear Connection Shelf

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-80

External equipment connections are performed at the rear of the shelf via the adapter cards. The different equipment cards are plugged into the front panel of the shelf in slots 1 to 17. Only the common equipment cards and power converters have pre-determined locations, the type of card which is or is not present in slots 03 to 13 depends on the configuration selected by the operator. This paragraph specifies the connectors associated with each slot (in particular the general purpose slots) and, for each type of port, the nature of the signals, connector pin assignments and cables proposed.
3.2.3.1 - Slot/Card/Adapter Card Association

The table below defines the distribution of cards in the slots and specifies the type of adapter card to be used. Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Card Designation +5V, -5V, +53V, -53V Power converters Port cards (optional): - 3 64 I, - BBTxRx, - 2MU, - A2S (A2S - IV or A2S - IV S), - 6PAFC, - V24/V11, - V24/V28, - 2w2B1Q, - Subscr, - Exchan, CONF - 4U TRANSFIX or IADB. Operations Interface Card (GIE or GIE - P) Adapter Card and Power Supply Filter Connector Ports (rear panel) J101: Power Supply Filter
J1, J2, J3 Line Ad adapter card or J1, J2, J3, J4 AdV28 adapter card or J1, J2, J3 AdV11 adapter card or J1, J2, J3 Ad2M Ad adapter card or J1, J2, J3, J4, J5 IADB adapter card J1 TNM port J2 SEM Interface J3 Alarm loops J4 Remote CT J1 Synchro J2 Line Test GIE or GIE - P Adapter Card COB adapter card
16
Connections, Timing circuit and Synchronization card (COB) COB (standby card) : general purpose slots
17
None, use of a cover plate
Table 3-15 - Slot/Adapter Card Association
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-81
The external connection of the different cards is performed at the rear of the shelf via the adapter cards. These 5 adapter cards are specific to card type according to the table below. The adapter cards used by the GIE and COB cards are delivered with the shelf. Card Type AdGIE 3 64 I BBTxRx 2MU A2S Subscr Exchan 6PAFC V24/V11 V24/V28 2w2B1Q 4U TRANSFIX CONF IADB GIE GIE - P COB Adapter Card Type AdGIEP Adlig AdV28 AdV11 AdCOB X X X X X X X X X X X
Ad2M
AdIADB
X X X X
Table 3-16 - Card/Adapter Card Association
The Adlig adapter card (No. 56117192) is equipped with a set S1 of 8 switches in a DIL unit. Only switches 1 to 6 are used: - set them to "ON" for 3 64 I card access, - set them to "OFF" in all other cases.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-82
Line Ad Adapter Card Connector J1 (Line signal out)
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan
1--------------------- Tx L (6.1) 14-------- 0V/MGND 2--------------------- Tx L (6.2) 15-------3--------------------- Tx L (5.1) 16-------- 0V/MGND 4--------------------- Tx L (5.2) 17-------5--------------------- Tx L (4.1) 18-------- 0V/MGND 6--------------------- Tx L (4.2) 19-------7--------------------- Tx L (3.1) 20-------- 0V/MGND 8--------------------- Tx L (3.2) 21-------9--------------------- Tx L (2.1) 22-------- 0V/MGND 10------------------- Tx L (2.2) 23-------11------------------- Tx L (1.1) 24-------- 0V/MGND 12------------------- Tx L (1.2) 25-------13------------------- 0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Tx L (4.1) 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Tx L (4.2) Tx L (3.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (3.2) Tx L (2.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (2.2) Tx L (1.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (1.2) 0V/MGND Tx L (1.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (1.2) 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Tx L (3.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (3.2) Em L (2.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (2.2) Tx L (1.1) 0V/MGND Tx L (1.2) 0V/MGND Tx L out 1 0V/MGND Tx L out 2 0V/MGND 0V/MGND U (4.1)** 0V/MGND U (4.2)** U (2.1) 0V/MGND U (2.2) 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Unused
* **
: 2f2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Cards. : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
Table 3-17 - Adlig adapter Card Connector J1 (1/3)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-83
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan
1--------------------- Rx L (6.1) 14-------- 0V/MGND 2--------------------- Rx L (6.2) 15-------3--------------------- Rx L (5.1) 16-------- 0V/MGND 4--------------------- Rx L (5.2) 17-------5--------------------- Rx L (4.1) 18-------- 0V/MGND 6--------------------- Rx L (4.2) 19-------7--------------------- Rx L (3.1) 20-------- 0V/MGND 8--------------------- Rx L (3.2) 21-------9--------------------- Rx L (2.1) 22-------- 0V/MGND 10------------------- Rx L (2.2) 23-------11------------------- Rx L (1.1) 24-------- 0V/MGND 12------------------- Rx L (1.2) 25-------13------------------- 0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
0V/MGND
Rx L (4.1) 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Rx L (4.2) Rx L (3.1) 0V/MGND Rx L (3.2) Rx L (2.1) 0V/MGND Rx L (2.2) Rx L (1.1) 0V/MGND Rx L (1.2) 0V/MGND Rx L (1.1) 0V/MGND Rx L (1.2) 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Rx L (3.1) 0V/Mm Rx L (3.2) Rx L (2.1) 0V/MGND Rx L (2.2) Rx L (1.1) 0V/MGND RX L (1.2) 0V/MGND Rx L In 1 0V/MGND Rx L In 2 0V/MGND 0V/MGND U (3.1)** 0V/MGND U (3.2)** U (2.1) 0V/MGND U (2.2) 0V/MGND 0V/Mm 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND Unused
* **
: 2f2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Cards. : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-84
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2*
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q *
Subscr and Exchan

LA1 LB1 LA2 LB2 LA3 LB3
1--------------------- M A (1) 14-------- M A (4) 2--------------------- M B (1) 15-------- M B (4) 3--------------------- M A (2) 16-------- M A (5) 4--------------------- M B (2) 17-------- M B (5) 5--------------------- M A (3) 18-------- M A (6) 6--------------------- M B (3) 19-------- M B (6) 7--------------------- E A (3) 20-------- E A (6) 8--------------------- E B (3) 21-------- E B (6) 9--------------------- E A (2) 22-------- E A (5) 10------------------- E B (2) 23-------- E B (5) 11------------------- E A (1) 24-------- E A (4) 12------------------- E B (1) 25-------- E B (4) 13------------------- 0V/MGND
Rx L Sig (1.1) Scr (Tx L Sig1) Rx L Sig (1.2) Rx L Sig (2.1) Scr (Tx L Sig2) Rx L Sig (2.2) Rx L Sig (3.1) Scr (Tx L Sig3) Rx L Sig (3.2) Unused Tx L Sig (3.1) Scr (Rx L Sig3) Tx L Sig (3.2) Tx L Sig (2.1) Scr (Rx L Sig2) Tx L Sig (2.2) Tx L Sig (1.1) Scr (Rx L Sig1) Tx L Sig (1.2) 0V/MGND
LA4 LB4 LA5 LB5 LA6 LB6 0V/MGND
: 2f2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Cards .
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-85

The information transmitted is specified according to the type of card located in the associated slot, a detailed view of the connection panel is shown in Figure 3-59. Interpretation of Symbols Used Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2) designate the 2 transmission wires for interface no. i on the balanced pair; this designation is used, then the card plugged into the slot includes several interfaces. Ex: Tx L (3-1) Tx L (3-2) | | 2 transmission wires on interface no. 3.
For single interface cards (2MU, etc.) only interface no. 1 is used (i = 1). Ex: Tx L (1-1) Tx L (1-2) The tables below specify the use of the connector pins according to card type. Table 3-17, Table 3-18, and Table 3-19 : Ports of connectors J1, J2 and J3 on the Adlig adapter card (6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, Subscr, Exchan, 2w 2B1Q, 4U Transfix, BBTxRx) : Ports of connectors J1, J2 and J3 on the AdV11 adapter card (V24/V11). : Ports of connectors J1, J2, J3 and J4 on the AdV28 adapter card (V24/V28). : Ports of Connecteurs J1, J2, J3, and J4 on the A2Md adapter card (A2S). : Ports of Connecteurs J1, J2, J3, J4 and J5 on the AdIADB adapter card (IADB).
Table 3-20
Table 3-21
Table 3-22 Table 3-23
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-86
AdV11 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2 and J3
V24/V11
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 20------------------- 102b 2--------------------------------------21------------------- BB 3--------------------------------------- BA 22------------------- 103b 4--------------------------------------- 103a 23------------------- 114b 5--------------------------------------- 114a 24------------------- 104b 6--------------------------------------- 104a 25------------------- 105b 7--------------------------------------- 105a 26------------------- 115b 8--------------------------------------- 115a 27------------------9--------------------------------------- 106a 28------------------10-------------------------------------- 141a 29------------------11-------------------------------------- 107a 30------------------12-------------------------------------- 108a 31------------------- 109b 13-------------------------------------- 109a 32------------------14-------------------------------------- 140a 33------------------15-------------------------------------34------------------16-------------------------------------35------------------17-------------------------------------36------------------18-------------------------------------- 142a 37------------------- 102a 19-------------------------------------- 102
Table 3-20 - AdV11 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2 and J3
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-87
AdV28 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3 and J4
V24/V28
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND (101) 14------------------2--------------------------------------- 103 15------------------- 114 3--------------------------------------- 104 16------------------4--------------------------------------- 105 17------------------- 115 5--------------------------------------- 106 18------------------- 141 6--------------------------------------- 107 19------------------7--------------------------------------- 102 20------------------- 108 8--------------------------------------- 109 21------------------- 140 9--------------------------------------22------------------10-------------------------------------23------------------11-------------------------------------24------------------12-------------------------------------25------------------- 142 13--------------------------------------
Table 3-21 - AdV28 Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3 and J4
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-88
Ad2M Adapter Card Connector J1 1----------------------------6-------2----------------------------7-------3----------------------------8-------4----------------------------9-------5-----------------------------
Signal Name Ground RX1_2 RX1_1 Ground TX1_1 TX1_2 Ground
Table 3-22 - Ad2M Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-89
AdIADB Adapter Card Connector s J1 to J4 1----------------------------9-------2----------------------------10-------3----------------------------11-------4----------------------------12-------5----------------------------13-------6----------------------------14-------7----------------------------15-------8-----------------------------
Signal Name Tb1 Ta1 Rb1 Ra1 Cb1 Ca1 Sb1 Ground Sa1 Ia1 Ib1 NC NC NC NC
J1 to J4 connectors J1 J4 fit, respectively, with 1 to 4 junctions.
AdIADB Adapter Card Connector J5 1-------------------2-------------------3-------------------4-------------------5-------------------6-------------------7-------------------8--------------------
Signal Name RX+ RXTX+ NC NC TXNC NC
Table 3-23- AdIADB Adapter Card Connectors J1, J2, J3, J4 and J5
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-90
Cables Used Cable selection is specific to the type of signals connected and number of same type of connections to be made. One same cable can be separated on several cards in the same shelf or on several ports of the same card. The cable proposed are provided in the table below. Standard Plan Type 2MU Card 6 011 901 BBTxRx Card 2w2B1Q Designation Length 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m 6 011 980 3 64 I Card (Transmission and Reception) 4U TRANSFIX 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670188 6 013 411 6 013 179 6 013 412 55670190 6 013 421 6 013 185 6 013 422 Quantity 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6 011 981 3 64 I Card (Signalling)
2.5 m 5m 12 m 25 m
55670189 6 013 423 6 013 186 6 013 424 55670157 55670158 55670159 55670160
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
55050129 6PAFC Card (Transmission and Reception)
2.5 5m 12 m 24.8m
55050130 6PAFC Card (Signalling)
2.5 m 5m 12 m 25 m
55670161 55670162 55670163 55670164
1 1 1 1
V24/V28 Card DTE/DCE Adapter Extension cable for adapter (straight cable) 0.30 m 1.5 m 3m 6012546 4 980 210 4 980 209 1/channel
Table 3-24 - List of Cables
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-91
Standard Plan Type
Designation V24/V11 (37-way) card
Length
Code No.
Quantity
6 011 982
37-way V36 cable straight CLEE
1.5 m 3m
6 013 425 6 013 187 6 486 685 55 670 149 55 670 150 55 670 151 55 670 152 55 670 375 55 670 376 55 670 377 55 670 378 6 013 419 6 013 183 6 013 420 6 013 184 55 670 379 55 670 380 55 670 381 55 670 382 55 670 383 55 670 384 55 670 385 55 670 386 55 670 153 55 670 154 55 670 155 55 670 156 55 670 008
X24/V11 cable straight CLER 55 050 127 Subscr and Exchan Card
3m 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 for 2 Shelf 1 for 3 Shelf 1
55 050 197
A2S Card
2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
6 011 963
COB Card (Synchr Port) for 3 FMXs
1.5 m 3m
6 011 964
COB Card (Synchr Port) for 2 FMXs
1.5 m 3m
55 050 198
Synchronization connection cable
2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
6 011 962
LTB and OQLTB connection cable
2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
55 050 128
Carte GIE (Alarmes + Tlsignalisations)
2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
1/ Shelf 1/ Shelf 1/ Shelf 1/ Shelf 1
GIE Adapter Card (CT Modem Port)
6m
Table 3-25 - List of Cables
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-92
AdLig connection panel side J1 and J2 connectors 2 1
6011901
3
6011901
Free ends 3
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 W Gr
Q1-P1
Figure 3-60 - 2MU, BBTxRx and 2w2B1Q Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-93
6011980
3
6011980
Free ends 3
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 W Gr Bl P Y Gr
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Figure 3-61 - 3 64 I (Transmission and Reception) and 4U TRANSFIX Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-94
AdLig connection panel side J3 connector 2 1
6011981
3
6011981
Free ends 3
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 W Gr Y Gr B Gr R P Br P Bl P
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q3-P2
Q3-P1
Q2-P1
Q1-P1
Figure 3-62 - 3 64 I (Signalling ) Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-95
55050129
55050129 Free ends
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13
R O R Bl W Br W G W O W Bl P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Figure 3-63 - 6PAFC (Transmission and Reception ) Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-96
55050130
3 1 2 4 Cable
55050130
Free ends 3
Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13
W W R B W R R B W R B B G O Bl Br O Bl Br G Bl Br G O
P1 P4 P7 P 10 P2 P5 P8 P 11 P3 P6 P9 P 12 P3 P6 P9 P 12 P2 P5 P8 P 11 P1 P4 P7 P 10
Figure 3-64 - 6PAFC (Signalling) Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-97
30 cm
DCE
6012546
DTE
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connectors (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 15 4
G B W
14 W
Bl Bl-Y Y W Br Bl-W
W Y Bl W W
1 2 3 4 5 6 18 15
14
5 6 18 7 21
Bl-W W
7 8 20 21
Bl-Y Br
24 25 13
25 13
Figure 3-65 - DCE/DTE Adapter for V24/V28 Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-98
L 2 1
4 980 XXX
Cable (length depending)

4
2 Cable reference 3 3 HE5 Connector (25-way female) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 14 2 3 4 5 6 7
25 13
13 25
Figure 3-66 - Extension cable for adapter (straight cable)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-99
6 011 982
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (37-way male) 5 HE5 Connector (37-way female) Wiring diagram
1 2 3 21 20 Br W Gr B P R P Y Gr Br P G Gr P Y Gr P Bl Gr W Q6-P1 Q1-P1 Q1-P2 Q3-P2 Q2-P1 Q2-P2 Q4-P1 Q4-P2 Q5-P2 Q5-P1 Q6-P2 Q3-P1 Q4-P2 20 1 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 26 9 10 30 12 31 13 14 7 8
4 22 5 23 6 24
7 25 8 26 9 10 12 30 13 31 14
18 19 37
B Gr P
Q5-P1 Q6-P1 Q5-P2
18 37 19
Figure 3-67 - Straight cable for connecting one channel of the V24/V11 card - V36 (37-way) (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-100
55050127
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 4
55050127
Free ends 3
3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13
W Bl W O W G W Br R Bl R O P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
Figure 3-68 - Subscr and Exchan Card Connection Cable

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-101
55050197
3
55050197
Free ends 3
14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 W Gr Q1-P1 Bl P Q1-P2 Y Gr Q2-P1 Br P Q2-P2
Figure 3-69 - A2S Card Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-102
Connector J1 ("TNM" or "TNM/P1"*)
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------- 0V/Mm (101) 14------------------- RXP1A** 2--------------------------------------- 103_RGT 15------------------- 114_RGT 3--------------------------------------- 104_RGT 16------------------- RXP1B** 4--------------------------------------- 105_RGT 17------------------- 115_RGT 5--------------------------------------- 106_RGT 18------------------- RXCLKP1B** 6--------------------------------------- 107_RGT 19------------------- RXCLKP1A** 7--------------------------------------- 0V/Mm (102_RGT) 20------------------- 108_RGT 8--------------------------------------21------------------- TXCLKP1A** 9--------------------------------------22------------------- TXCLKP1B** 10-------------------------------------23------------------11-------------------------------------24------------------- TXP1A** 12-------------------------------------25------------------- TXP1B** 13--------------------------------------
Connector J2 ("SEM" or "SEM/P2"*)
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------- 0V/Mm 9------------------- SEMPEM_N 2--------------------------------------- SEMPEM_P 10------------------- 0V/Mm 3--------------------------------------- TXP2B** 11------------------- SEMPREC_N 4--------------------------------------- SEMPREC_P 12------------------- 0V/Mm 5--------------------------------------- TXP2A** 13------------------- RXP2B** 6--------------------------------------- RXP2A** 14------------------- TXCLKP2B** 7--------------------------------------- TXCLKP2A** 15------------------- RXCLKP2B** 8--------------------------------------- RXCLKP2A**
* : ADGIEP adapter card connectors name. ** : Signals available ADGIEP adapter card only.
Table 3-26 - Connectors J1 and J2, GIE and GIE-P Adapter Card (ADGIE and ADGIEP) TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-103
3.2.3.3 - Signals Connected on Slot 15 (GIE or GIE-P)

Connection to Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) and to Management Interface P1 Connector J1 (HE501, 25-way) provides connection of the FMX to the Telecommunications Management Network (TMN) and, for the ADGIEP adapter card, to a management interface of an other equipment. The P1 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 synchronous type) includes four clock/data pairs in transmit and receive. This interface is available on the GIE-P (ADGIEP) adapter card only. Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-26.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-104
Cables for P1 Management Interface connection The cables used for P1 Management Interface above are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. Designation Cables for P1 Management Interface connection Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m P1 Management Interface cable with standard end (9-way male) L 1.5 m Code No. 55670486-2M5 55670486-5M0 55670486-12M 55670486-25M 55670490-1M5 Card Quantity 1
P1 J1
1 3 2
Cable Cable reference (length depending)
3 HE5 Connector ((25-way male) Wiring diagram

GND
1 2 16 14
W Gr Br Rx
18 19
P P1 B P Y Gr
RxCLK
21 22
TxCLK
24 25 13
Tx

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-105
J1
1 Cable 3 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (9-way male) Wiring diagram
GND
1 14
Q2P1 RXP2P1-P Q2P1 RXP2P1-N Q2P2 RXCLKP2P1-N Q2P2 RXCLKP2P1-P Q1P1 TXCLKP2P1-N Q1P1 TXCLKP2P1-P Q1P2 TXP2P1-P Q1P2 TXP2P1-N
1 2 3 6 7 8 9
16
18 7 19
21 22
4 5
24 25 13

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-106
Access to Supervision and Maintenance (SEM) and to Management Interface P2 Connector J2 (HE501, 15-way) provides connection to the SEM function and, for the ADGIEP adapter card, to a management interface of an other equipment. The SEM interface complies with specification FT J52 13. The P2 interface (64 kbit/s, V11 synchronous type) includes four clock/data pairs in transmit and receive. This interface is avaible on the GIE-P (ADGIEP) adapter card only. Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-26
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-107
J2
P2 Interface
1 3
Cable
2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (15-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2
RxP2-TxP1 (N) RxP2-TxP1 (P) RxCLKP2-TxCLKP1 (N) RxCLKP2-TxCLKP1 (P)
W Gr Br P
8
5 13 6 14 7 15
P W Y Gr
TxP2-RxP1 (N) TxP2-RxP1 (P) TxCLKP2-RxCLKP1 (P) TxCLKP2-RxCLKP1 (N)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-108
J2
1 3
Cable
2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (15-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (9-way female) Wiring diagram
1 9 3
GND
1
Q2P1 RXP2P1-N RXP2P1-P TXP2P1-N TXP2P1-P RXCLKP2P1-N RXCLKP2P1-P TXCLKP2P1-N TXCLKP2P1-P
6 7 8 9
2 3 4 5
5 6 13 7 14 8 15
Q2P1 Q1P2 Q1P2 Q2P2 Q2P2 Q1P1 Q1P1
SEM Interface Transmission Characteristics: Transmission mode: asynchronous Bit rate: 9600 bps Each character is composed of 11 bits: - 1 character synchronization bit (START) always set to "0", 8 useful bits carrying the information (the first bit transmitted is the low order bit), 1 parity bit (P) providing protection against transmission errors (the value of this bit is "0" for an even number of bits set to 1 among the 8 bits used), 1 character separation bit (STOP) always with a value of "1". TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-109
Connector J3 ("ALARM LOOPS")
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 9------------------- TSIG1A 2--------------------------------------- TNM 10------------------- PC 3--------------------------------------- TSIG2A 11------------------- TSIG1B 4--------------------------------------- TSIG2B 12------------------- TSIG3A 5--------------------------------------- REMCON2_C 13------------------- REMCON 2_B 6--------------------------------------- REMCON 2_A 14------------------- TSIG3B 7--------------------------------------- REMCON 1_C 15------------------- REMCON 1_B 8--------------------------------------- REMCON 1_A
Connector J4 ("REMOTE CT")
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 14------------------2--------------------------------------- 103_DTE 15------------------3--------------------------------------- 104_DTE 16------------------4--------------------------------------- 105_DTE 17------------------5--------------------------------------- 106_ETTD 18------------------6--------------------------------------- 107_DTE 19------------------7--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND (102_DTE) 20------------------- 108_DTE 8--------------------------------------- 109_DTE 21------------------9--------------------------------------22------------------10-------------------------------------23------------------11-------------------------------------24------------------12-------------------------------------25------------------13--------------------------------------
Table 3-27 - Connectors J3 and J4, GIE and GIE-P Adapter Card (ADGIE and ADGIEP)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-110
Alarm Loop Connector Connector J3 (HE501, 15-way) provides the operator with two types of alarm information: alarm information (major or minor) at the TNM interface using a relay contact or service grounding (type of circuit used is determined by the EJ206 link option on the GIE card), 3-point relay contact interface (2 in number).
Furthermore, connector J3 has three relay contact status input interfaces used in acquiring the status of external FMX parameters (remote monitoring signals). Connector pin assignment is provided in table Table 3-27. Cable is provided in Figure 3-74.
L AdLig connection panel side J3 connector 2 1 2
55050128
55050128
Free ends
1 9
P4 P6
W Br R O
2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8
R Bl
P5
P3 P2
G W O W
R G
P7
Bl W
P1
Figure 3-74 - Alarm Loops Cable Connection (Standard Plan)

- GTR Interface Alarm Information This information is available on pins 2 and 10 of the connector; its nature depends on the position of the EJ206 link on the GIE card according to the table below. GTR Alarm Normal Fault Fault EJ206 Link Position 1Y - 2Y or 2Y - 3Y 2Y -3Y 1Y - 2Y Status No alarm Relay contact Sce GND TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-111
- Relay Contact Interface Connector J3 supplies two alarm indication relay contacts which may be used in the following two ways: via automatic activation according to criterion defined by an OR type logic function of all or part of the following information: . combination of alarm indication (major alarm or minor alarm), . one or more remote monitoring signals, or via an operation control order. Mode of operation is set by the operator using the CT for each interface.
NOTE:
The different modes of operation of the remote control interfaces no. 1 (REMCON1_A_B_C) and no. 2 (REMCON2_A_B_C) are provided in the table below.
Alarm
REMCON1_B - REMCON1_C loop or REMCON2_B - REMCON1_C loop Open Closed
REMCON1_B - REMCON1_A loop or REMCON2_B - REMCON1_A loop Closed Open
Absent Present
- Relay Contact Input Interfaces (Remote Monitoring signals) Connector J3 provides connection of 3 incoming loops (TSIG1, TSIG2 and TSIG3) significant of the outside environment. Local Terminal (CT) Connection Interface Connector J4 (HE501, 25-way) provides connection to the CT via: a 2 Mbps link via a V.24/V28 card (for later use), a modem or equipment MEGAPAC.
The interface complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave like a DTE (terminal) with respect to a DCE (modem or equipment MEGAPAC). The "CT Interface" and "Remote CT" functions are exclusive. They are selected via a switch ("Loc/Rem") located on the front panel of the GIE card. Switch Position Low ("Loc") High ("Rem") Mode of Operation DCE DTE Interface used "CT" connector on GIE card front panel Connector J4 on GIE card front panel
Pin assignment is provided by Table 3-27.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-112
Transmission Characteristics - ASCII code: 1 "start" bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, - Bit rate 9600 bps, - Transmission mode: asynchronous - Connection cable: see Figure 3-76.
Connection panel side Subscriber shelf (J4) L=6m MODEM side (LT)
55670008 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 HE5 Connectors (25-way male)

Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 14 1 14
103 104 105 106 107 102 108 109
White Blue Yellow Brown Black Red Grey Green
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20
25 13
25 13
Figure 3-75 - CT Connection Cable (Modem) Connecting FMX to MEGAPAC equipment

Connection of the FMX to a MEGAPAC equipment requires two cables in accordance with Figure 3-76. The cables are shown in Figure 3-75 and Figure 3-77.
FMX (GIE in DTE mode)
25 pts
GIE CARD
Cable identical to that of the LT via aModem
MEGAPAC EQUIPMENT (DCE mode) MEGAPAC Cable

15 pts 15 pts
25 pts
Adapter Card
25 pts
25 pts
Figure 3-76 - Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equiment

- CT/MEGAPAC equipment connection (see UM - N5681515XXYY where XX = Version and YY = Edition) - FMX/Adaptater cable: see Figure 3-75. - MEGAPAC cable: see Figure 3-77. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-113
Reserved
Figure 3-77 - Cable and adapter for connecting a MEGAPAC equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-114
GIE Card Front Panel Connector Connector J1 (HE 501, 25-way) located on the front panel is designed to connect CT type equipment. The interface complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX to behave like a DCE with respect to the terminal (DTE). Pin assignment is provided in Table 3-28.
Transmission Characteristics - ASCII code: 1 "start" bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, - Bit rate 9600 bps, - Transmission mode: asynchronous Connection cable: see Figure 4.32 in sub-section 4.1.
Connector J1 on GIE Front Panel 1------------------------------------14---------------------2------------------------------------- TD 15---------------------3------------------------------------- RD 16---------------------4------------------------------------17---------------------5------------------------------------18---------------------6------------------------------------19---------------------7------------------------------------20---------------------8------------------------------------21---------------------9------------------------------------22---------------------10----------------------------------23---------------------11----------------------------------24---------------------12----------------------------------25---------------------13----------------------------------RTS CTS DSR Sig GND DTP Signal Name (ITU-U abbreviation) Designation Circuit V24
101 - DCE Ground () TX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) 103 - DCE Transmit Data () Receive Data () RX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) Request To Send () Clear To Send () Data Est Ready () Signalling Ground () Data Terminal Ready () 104 - DCE
105 - DCE 106 - DCE 107 - DCED 102 - DCE 108/2 - DCE
Table 3-28 - GIE Card Connector J1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-115
Connector J1 ("SYNCHRO")
Signal Name
1--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 6------------------- SYNCSTN 2--------------------------------------- SYNCSTP 7------------------- 0V/MGND 3--------------------------------------- SYNCETP 8------------------- SYNCETN 4--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 9------------------5---------------------------------------
Connector J2 ("LINE TEST")

1--------------------------------------6------------------2--------------------------------------7-------------------
Signal Name
3--------------------------------------- OQLTB 8------------------4--------------------------------------- 0V/MGND 9------------------- PLTB 5--------------------------------------- NLTB
Table 3-29 - Connectors J1 and J2, COB Adapter Card
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-116
3.2.3.4 - Signals Connected on Slot 16 (COB)

External Synchronization Port Connector J1 (HE501, 9-way) on the COB Ad card provides connection external synchronization connection in compliance with paragraph 10 of ITU-T recommendation G.703. Its main characteristics are the following: - Fe = 2048 kHz 50 ppm, - matching to 120. Furthermore, connector J1 allows the FMX to continuously generate a 2048 kHz frequency controlled by the active synchronization source and complying with paragraph 10 of ITU-T recommendation G.703. NOTE: Internal source precision is 50 ppm with an optional possibility of 5 ppm.
Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-29.
Synchronization connection cable (Figure 3-78).

The cables used for synchronization connection are identified in the following table : Standard Plan Type 55050198 Designation Synchronization external connection cable Length 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670379 55670380 55670381 55670382 Card Quantity 1
The connection cables for two or three equipment units are provided in the following figures: (Figure 3-78, Figure 3-79 and Figure 3-80)
COB connection panel side J1 connector
L
2 1
55050198
Free ends 3 4 1 2 3 4 Cable Cable Part No. Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connector (9-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P Br Q2-P2 Bl P
Q1-P2
Figure 3-78 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Stantard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-117
L
2 1 2
6011963
3 4
6011963
3
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 G W 3 4 8 9 W G Q1-P1 2 6 7
Figure 3-79 - Synchronization Connection Cable for 2 FMXs
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-118
6011964
3 1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference (length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (9-way male)
1
4
6 7 8 9
Wiring diagram
2 W Gr 6 7 8 9 Gr W Gr W Q1-P1 1 2 3 4 5 Gr W 3 4 Q1-P1 5
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
Figure 3-80 - Synchronization Connection Cable for 3 FMXs
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-119
Line Test Bus Port

Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-29.
LTB and OQLTB connection cable (Figure 3-81).

The cables used for LTB and OQLTB connection are given in Figure 4-120.
Standard Plan Type 6011962
Designation LTB and OQLTB connection cable
Length 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
Code No. 55670383 55670384 55670385 55670386
Card Quantity 1
L
2 1
6011962
Free ends 3 4 1 2 3 4 Cable Cable Part No. Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connector (9-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P 8 9 W Gr Q1-P2 .
Q1-P1
Figure 3-81 - LTB and OQLTB Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-120
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-121
3.
Figure 3.1Figure 3.2Figure 3.3Figure 3.4Figure 3.5Figure 3.6Figure 3.7Figure 3.8Figure 3.9Figure 3.10Figure 3.11Figure 3.12Figure 3.13Figure 3.14Figure 3.15Figure 3.16Figure 3.17Figure 3.18Figure 3.19Figure 3.20Figure 3.21Figure 3.22Figure 3.23Figure 3.24Figure 3.25Figure 3.26Figure 3.27Figure 3.28Figure 3.29Figure 3.30Figure 3.31Figure 3.32Figure 3.33Figure 3.34Figure 3.35Figure 3.36Figure 3.37Figure 3.38Figure 3.39Figure 3.40Figure 3.41Figure 3.42Figure
3.43Figure 3.44Figure 3.45Figure 3.46Figure 3.47Figure 3.48Figure 3.49Figure 3.50Figure 3.51Figure 3.52Figure 3.53Figure 3.54Figure 3.55Figure 3.56Figure 3.57Figure 3.58Figure 3.59Figure 3.60Figure 3.61Figure 3.62Figure 3.63Figure 3.64Figure 3.65Figure 3.66Figure 3.67 Figure 3.68Figure 3.69Figure 3.70Figure 3.71Figure 3.72 73Figure 74 Figure 3.75Figure 3.76Figure 3.77Figure 3.78Figure 3.79 80 81
Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-11Table 3-12 Table 3-13 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Table 3-16 Table 3-17Table 3-18 Table 3-19 Table 3-20 Table 3-21 Table 3-22 Table 3-23 Table 3-24 Table 3-25 Table 3-26 Table 3-27 Table 3-28 Table 3-29
6 M3x6 CBLZ cruciform screw
6 M3 fixing holes
Converter Motherboard
J1
J2
Figure 3.82 - 110/220V Mains Power Supply or -48V Battery Converter Mounting and Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-122
3.3 - Rear-connection Shelf (FMX4 Shelf) Installation

The shelf may be installed in 19"and ETSI racks or on a table. NOTE: The specific rack environment adapter kits and cables are supplied on request.
3.3.1 - Power supply Installation

Power converter installation
Installation procedure:
Warning: All connections should be made with the power supply off. Make sure that the shelf is not connected to a power source. The installation principle is identical for both power supply types (see Figure 3.82): - position the -48 V battery converter or 110/220 V mains unit (slot no. 1 on the right side of the shelf), flush with the 6 screw holes, - attach the -48 V battery converter or 110/220 V mains unit using the 6 M3x6 CBLZ stainless steel screws, - connect the two secondary internal power cables to the motherboard, - connect the power supply cable to the J101 connector (HE501, 25-way male) of the -48 V battery converter or 110/220 V mains unit . The pinout of the -48V converter J101 connector is given in Table 3-30 below.
-48V Battery Converter Connector: J101 1-------------------------------------------14---------------------2--------------------------------------------15---------------------3--------------------------------------------16---------------------4--------------------------------------------17---------------------5--------------------------------------------18---------------------6--------------------------------------------19---------------------7--------------------------------------------20---------------------8--------------------------------------------21---------------------9--------------------------------------------22---------------------10------------------------------------------23---------------------11------------------------------------------24---------------------12------------------------------------------25---------------------13------------------------------------------Signal Name
-48V1 -48V1 -48V1 -48V1 ALM MN OBS OBS ALM MJ -48S -48S OB1 OB1 OB1 OB1 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND 0V/MGND
Table 3-30 - Connector J101, -48V Battery Converter
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-123
Reversible mounting bracket * Reversible mounting bracket *
4
4 plastic feet
* : Reprsentation of the reversible mounting brackets for the 19"Rack.
Figure 3.83 - FMX 4 - Mounting Parts Assembly in 19"Rack
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-124

NOTE: Two switches located on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card are used to disable major and minor alarms even when the GIE or GIE - P card is not powered. The table below provides the status of the LEDs and alarms according to switch position. SWITCH POSITION Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) Low (fault mode) High (normal mode) ALARM (MaJor or MiNor) Absent Present ALARM LEDs Lit Unlit Lit Lit ALARM STATUS (Major or Minor) Sce GND Open Open Sce GND
3.3.2 - 19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Installation

19 or ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit Item Description 19 or ETSI rack-mounting shelf assembly kit: . Reversible Adapter bracket, . CLS M3x4 screws . Stainless steel flat M3 washer . Plastic feet Quantity
1 2 3 4
2 4 4 4
Table 3-31 - 19"or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly Kit

The reversible adapter brackets are designed for either 19" or ETSI rack-mounting; simply loosen the shelf fixings (unscrew the three attachment screws of the reversible adapter brackets) and rotate them from left to right for the left bracket and from right to left for the right bracket to the vertical (see Figure 3.83).
Mounting Part Assembly (Figure 3.83)

On the left side of the shelf: Position the reversible adapter bracket (item 1) opposite the cylindrical rivet nuts; secure using 3 stainless steel CLS M3x4 screws (item 2) and 3 stainless steel M3 flat washers (item 3).
Repeat the operation on the right side of the shelf. NOTE: In 19" and ETSI racks, plastic feet are not mounted.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-125
L-H side vertical member
FMX 4 SHELF
125 mm (ETSI Rack)
101 mm (19" Rack)
5 2 cage nuts (M6) 4U
6
Hexagonal head st. steel screw (M6x12)
Figure 3.84 - FMX 4 - 19" or ETSI Rack-mounting shelf
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-126

19" or ETSI rack-mounting Shelf Assembly (Figure 3.84)
Assembly principle: - provide for an available space of 4U, - secure the 2 M6 cage nuts (item 5) on either side of the shelf, - position the empty shelf, slide it in until the shelf reversible adapter brackets come in contact with the rack risers, secure using the cage nuts and M6x12 hex-head screws (item 6).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-127
Converter
Power Supply
110/220V Network
110/220V Mains
Tertiary voltages
EQUIPMENT
0V Chassis ground Secondary voltages -48V1 Protection OB1
OR
Power converter Tertiary voltages
-48S Protection OBS Fail
-48V
Svce Gbd
Primary voltages
POWER
0V Chassis ground
Visual
VIS MAJ ALM
Major alarm Service GND The relays are closed when the alarm is present. Minor alarm Service GND
Aud ib le
AUD MAJ ALM
Visual
VIS MIN ALM
Aud ib le
AUD MIN ALM
STATION ALARMS -48VS EQUIPMENT
Figure 3.85 - Station Power Distribution Principle

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-128
3.3.3 - Power Distribution and Supply

The shelf is supplied without a power supply. Two power supply are available according to power source: - 110/220V mains power supply, - or -48V battery converter. Station power distribution is shown in Figure 3.85.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-129
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
P101A
2 3 4 A 5 6 7 1 2 3 B 4 5 6 7
-48V Battery Converter
P102B
1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 1A 2 3 4 5 6 7 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7
Figure 3.86 - Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) for Rack-mounting shelf equipped with a -48V Battery Converter
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-130

Power Distribution in Type 80 and 19 Rack-mounting Shelves A Power and Alarms Bus Bar (PABB) is used to supply power to the different shelves installed in a type 80 or 19 rack-mounting shelves. It is secured on the left side, outside the type 80 rack-mounting shelves or inside the 19 rack-mounting shelves. The PABB is powered by a Frame Protection Unit (FPU) or a Alarm and Frame Protection Unit (AFPU) located in the upper part of the rack-mounting shelf. The shelf is powered via the PABB by a 70 cm power cable connected on its power supply filter and equipped shelf-side with an HE 501 female (25-way) connector. There are two versions of the cable differentiated by their end-PABB side: - "Y" cable (ref. 6013235) equipped with 2 7-way connectors (FASTON type) with insertion key, two wires are reserved for central office alarm transmission: one for the major central office alarm and the other for the minor central office alarm (alarm detection is indicated by the presence of a service GND).
L = 70 cm 4 BDA side
A
6013235
P102B 01 -48V2 power supply voltage
2 3
02 Signal ground for -48V2 (Sig Gnd 2)
Cable Cable no.
1 2 3 4 5 5
B
03 Chassis ground
04 05 -48VS service voltage
Connector (25-way female) Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
06 Service ground 07 Minor Alarm Extn
Figure 3.87 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves)
- the cable (ref. 6012721) is equipped with a single 7-way connector (FASTON type) with insertion key: a single wire is reserved for central office alarm transmission (alarm detection is indicated by the presence of a service ground).
Shelf side L = 70 cm BDA side 4
01 -48V1 power supply voltage 02 Signal ground 03 Chassis ground
Ali/PWR
6012721 1 2 Cable Cable no. Connector (25-way female) Connectors with - 6.35 faston contacts
A
1
04 -48V2 power supply voltage 05 -48VS service voltage 06 Service ground 07 Major and Minor Alarm Extn
J1
2 3
Power supply filter
3 4
Figure 3-88 - Power Cable equipped with 7-way Connector (Type 80 and 19" Rack-mounting Shelves)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-131

TB1
Z Y Mm/Gnd OBS 3 2 1 J1 J2 -48V S OBS Ala Ds J Ala MJ1 Ala MJ2 Ala Mn1 Ala Mn2 Mm/Gnd
TB2
J101
J102
J103
1
J104
2 3 4
J105
J106
1 2 3 4
J107
J108
J109
J120
J110
J111 J112 J121

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J113 J114 J122

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J115
J116 J117 J123
J118
J119
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED/D EL Ala/ Alm
Power Supply Cable
FMX 4 Shelf (or MD COMPACT) equipped with a Power Supply of the -48V Battery Converter Type
Figure 3.89 - ETSI Rack-mounting Shelf Power Distribution (PAPA G2 or PAPE G2)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-132

ETSI Rack Power Distribution
The ETSI rack power distribution principle is given in the PAPA G2 (PAPE G2) user guide and shown in Figure 3.89. The Power, Protection and Alarm Panel (PAPA G2) or Remote Protection Alarm Panel (PAPE G2) is located in the upper mounting space of the rack-mounting shelf. It includes a distribution card which allows: - the protection of secondary voltages (PAPA G2 only) from the power unit of the station and the distribution of these protected voltages by 2 to 6 A circuit-breakers to the equipment, - the grouping of major and minor alarms from the rack-mounting shelf equipment and circuit breaker alarms and the transmission of station alarm loops (major and minor), - the display of station alarms (major, minor, circuit breaking) and the presence of -48V/Sce GND signaling voltage. The shelf is connected to the PAPA G2 or PAPE G2 by a power cable equipped with a female HE 501 (25-way) connector at each end and fitted to the power supply filter. The cable may either measure 1.30 meters (ref.: 6012262) and 2.5 meters (ref.: 6012261).
6012261 1 2 3 3 Cable Cable no.
Ali/PWR
HE5 connector (25-way female)
Figure 3.90 - M3 Rack-mounting Shelf Power Cable

"Universal" Power Cable The cable is used to power the FMX in previously undefined environments is 3 meters long; it is equipped with an HE 501 connector (25-way) at one end, the other end being determined according to use.
Power supply side
L = 3m 1 2
Ali/PWR
6012711
Free ends
1 2
3
Figure 3.91 -"Universal" (M3 Rack-mounting Shelf) The 15 wires are identified with rings mentioning the name of the signal. -48VS : Purple-White -48V1 : Black, Green, Blue-Blanc -48V2 : Red, Blue, Red-white OB1 : Brown, yellow OB2 : Brown-White, YellowWhite OBS : Black-White AUD MAJ ALM : Orange AUD MIN ALM : Purple VIS MAJ ALM : Orange-White VIS MIN ALM : Green-White Service GND : Grey, Grey-White, White TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-133
Shelf Front Panel
Slot 3
J5
J6
J7
Slot 1
4 Port Cards Slots
Slot 4
J8
J9
J10 J1
5V
Slot 5
J11
J12
J13
Slot 6
J14
J15
J16 J2
Common Equipment Units
J3
Slot 16
J44
J45
J46
COB Card
53V
J4
Slot 15
J41
J42
J43
GIE Card
Shelf Rear Panel

Slot 3
J104
J103
J102
J101
4 Port Cards Slots
Slot 4
J204
J203
J202
J201
Slot 5
J304
J303
J302
J301
Slot 6
J404
J403
J402
J401
Common Equipment Units
Slot 16
J504
J503
J502
J501
COB Card
Synch./SEM/LBT
Slot 15
ETHERNET
J603
LT-GIE
J602
LT/MODEM
J601
J604
GIE Card
P1 Interface
P2 Interface
TMN
Alarm Loops
Figure 3.92 -Connection Location - Rear Connection FMX4 Shelf
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-134

The external connections are made at the back of the shelf. The different equipment cards are inserted inside the shelf, in the 6 marked slots and one slot reserved for the power converter. Only slots 03 and 06 are general purpose and can receive port cards; the 2 other slots are not general purpose and receive the common equipment units (COB and GIE or GIE - P). The type of card present or not present in slots 03 to 06 depends on the configuration selected by the operator. The cards inserted in the FMX4 shelf do not have a front panel. This paragraph is intended to detail the connectors associated with each slot (in particular with the general purpose slots) and, for each port type, the nature of the signals and the pin connections.
3.3.4.1 - Slot/connector Association

The table below defines the allocation of each connector on the connection and specifies the distribution of line access connectors according to the slots (refer to Figure 3.92). Slot Numbers 01 Card Name -48V Battery Converter or 110/230V mains unit Ports cards (optional): - 3 64 I - BBTxRx, - 2MU, - A2S, - 6PAFC, - V24/V11, - V24/V28, - 2w2B1Q, - Subscr - Exchan - CONF - 4U TRANSFIX or IADB. Operations Interface Card (GIE or GIE - P) Connectors (external ports) J101: Power Supply Filter
Connector Grouping J101 J201 J301 J401 J102 J202 J302 J402 J103 J203 J303 J403 J104 J204 J304 J404
03 04 05 06
15
J601: Loops-Alarms J602: TNM Ports J603: P2 Interface* J604: P1 Interface* J501: CT/MODEM J502: CT/GIE* J603: ETHERNET J504: SYNCH. - SEM - LTB
16
COnnections, Timing Circuit and Synchronization (COB)
: General purpose slots * : P1 and P2 interfaces and CT/GIE functions are only available when a GIE - P card is present in the shelf.
Table 3-32 - Slot/Connector Association
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-135
Right Rear Connectors of the Rear Panel: J101, J201, J301 and J401
1--------------------14-------2--------------------15-------3--------------------16-------4--------------------17-------5--------------------18--------
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan
6--------------------- Unused 19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------9--------------------22-------10------------------23-------11------------------24-------12------------------25-------13-------------------
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
: 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Card.
Table 3-33 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, SubScr and Exchan Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-136

The distribution of signals on line port connectors is provided in the tables below; the nature of the information transmitted is specified according to the type of card located in the associated slot, a detailed view of the connection panel is shown in Figure 3.92. Interpretation of Symbols Used Tx L (i-1), Tx L (i-2) designate the 2 transmission wires for interface no. i on the balanced pair; this designation is used when the card plugged into the slot includes several interfaces. Ex: Tx L (3-1) Tx L (3-2) | | 2 transmission wires on interface no. 3
For single interface cards (2MU, etc.) only interface no. 1 is used (i = 1). Ex: Tx L (1-1) Tx L (1-2) Connectors Associated with General Purpose Slots Type of connectors: 25-way HE5. The tables below specify the use of the connector contacts according to card type. - Table 3-33: Signals available on the J101, J201, J301 and J401 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan cards, Signals available on the J101, J201, J301 and J401 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with V24/V11, V24/V28 or IADB cards, Signals available on the J102, J202, J302 and J402 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan cards, Signals available on the J102, J202, J302 and J402 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with V24/V11, V24/V28 or IADB cards, Signals available on the J103, J203, J303 and J403 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan cards, Signals available on the J103, J203, J303 and J4031 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with V24/V11, V24/V28 or IADB cards, Signals available on the J104, J204, J304 and J404 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan cards, Signals available on the J104, J204, J304 and J404 right rear connectors wen the slot is equipped with V24/V11, V24/V28 or IADB cards,
- Table 3-34:
- Table 3-35:
- Table 3-36:
- Table 3-37:
- Table 3-38:
- Table 3-39:
- Table 3-40:
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-137
Right Rear Connectors of the Rear Panel: J101, J201, J301 and J401
1--------------------14-------2--------------------15-------3--------------------16-------4--------------------17-------5--------------------18-------6--------------------19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------9--------------------22-------10------------------23-------11------------------24-------12------------------25-------13-------------------
V24/V11
V24/V28
IADB
108-J4 0V/MGND (101-J4) 107-J4 106-J4 0V/MGND 140-J4 Unused 102-J4 142-J4 141-J4 109-J4 Unused
104-J4 115-J4 105-J4 114-J4 103-J4
Table 3-34 - J101, J201, J301 and J401 Right Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-138
Right Center Connectors of the Rear Panel: J102, J202, J302 and J402
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan

LP 3.1 LP 3.2
1--------------------- M A (3) 14-------- M B (3) 2--------------------- E B (6) 15-------- 0V/MGND 3--------------------- E A (3) 16-------- E A (6) 4--------------------- E B (3) 17-------- 0V/MGND 5--------------------- M B (6) 18-------6--------------------- M A (6) 19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------- Tx L (3.2) 9--------------------- Tx L (6.2) 22-------10------------------- Tx L (3.1) 23-------- Tx L (6.1) 11------------------24-------- Rx L (3.2) 12------------------- Rx L (6.2) 25-------- Rx L (6.1) 13------------------- Rx L (3.1)
Rx L Sig (3.1) Rx L Sig (3.2) 0V/MGND Tx L Sig (3.1) Tx L Sig (3.2) 0V/MGND
LP 4.1 LP 4.2
Unused
Unused
Unused
STx L (3.2)
Tx L (3.2)
STx L (3.1)
Tx L (3.1)
SRx L (3.2)
Rx L (3.2)
SRx L (3.1)
Rx L (3.1)
**
Table 3-35 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-139
Right Center Connectors of the Rear Panel: J102, J202, J302 and J402
1--------------------14-------2--------------------15-------3--------------------16-------4--------------------17-------5--------------------18-------6--------------------19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------9--------------------22-------10------------------23-------11------------------24-------12------------------25-------13-------------------
V24/V11
V24/V28
IADB
Ba Bb 106 101 109a 140 109b 0V/MGND 105b 107 105a 102 142 141 108 104b 115b 102a 104a 115a 102b 103b 114b 114a 103a
106-J4 108-J3 0V/MGND (101-J3) 107-J3 140-J4 106-J3 0V/MGND 140-J3 0V/MGND
0V/MGND RX+ () RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
102-J3 142-J3 141-J3 102-J4 109-J3 115-J4 104-J3 115-J3 105-J3 114-J4 114-J3 103-J3
Table 3-36 - J102, J202, J302 and J402 Right Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-140
Left Center Connectors of the Rear Panel: J103, J203, J303 and J403
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan

LP 2.1 LP 2.2
1--------------------- M A (2) 14-------- M B (2) 2--------------------- E B (5) 15-------- 0V/MGND 3--------------------- E A (2) 16-------- E A (5) 4--------------------- E B (2) 17-------- 0V/MGND 5--------------------- M B (5) 18-------6--------------------- M A (5) 19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------- Tx L (2.2) 9--------------------- Tx L (5.2) 22-------10------------------- Tx L (2.1) 23-------- Tx L (5.1) 11------------------24-------- Rx L (2.2) 12------------------- Rx L (5.2) 25-------- Rx L (5.1) 13------------------- Rxc L (2.1)
LP 5.1 LP 5.2
Unused
Unused
S Tx L (2.2)
Tx L (2.2)
U (4.2)**
S Tx L (2.1)
Tx L (2.1)
U (4.1)**
SRx L (2.2)
Rx L (2.2)
U (3.2)**
SRx L (2.1)
Rx L (2.1)
U (3.1)**
* **
: 2w2B1Q or 4U TRANSFIX Card. : Ports used for 4U TRANSFIX Card only.
Table 3-37 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: 6PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-141
Left Center Connectors of the Rear Panel: J103, J203, J303 and J403
1--------------------- Ba 14-------- Bb 2--------------------- 106 15-------- 101 3--------------------- 109a 16-------- 140
V24/V11
V24/V28
IADB
109-J4 108-J2 142-J4 0V/MGND (101-J2) 107-J2 106-J2 0V/MGND 140-J2 0V/MGND
4--------------------- 109b 17-------- 0V/MGND 5--------------------- 105b 18-------- 107 6--------------------- 105a 19-------- 102 7--------------------- 142 20-------- 141 8--------------------- 108 21-------- 104b 9--------------------- 115b 22-------- 102a 10------------------- 104a 23-------- 115a 11------------------- 102b 24-------- 103b 12------------------- 114b 25-------- 114a 13------------------- 103a
0V/MGND RX+ () RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
102-J2 142-J2 141-J2 109-J2 107-J4 104-J2 115-J2 105-J2 108-J4 114-J2 103-J2
Table 3-38 - J103, J203, J303 and J403 Left Center Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-142
Left Rear Connectors of the Rear Panel: J104, J204, J304 and J404
6PAFC
3 64 I
2MU
A2S
BBTxRx
2w2B1Q*
Subscr and Exchan

LP 1.1 LP 1.2
1--------------------- M A (1) 14-------- M B (1) 2--------------------- E B (4) 15-------- 0V/MGND 3--------------------- E A (1) 16-------- E A (4) 4--------------------- E B (1) 17-------- 0V/MGND 5--------------------- M B (4) 18-------6--------------------- M A (4) 19-------7--------------------20-------8--------------------21-------- Tx L (1.2) 9--------------------- Tx L (4.2) 22-------10------------------- Tx L (1.1) 23-------- Tx L (4.1) 11------------------24-------- Rx L (1.2) 12------------------- Rx L (4.2) 25-------- Rx L (4.1) 13------------------- Rx L (1.1)
LP 6.1 LP 6.2
S Tx L (1.2)
Tx L (1.2)
Em L (1.2) Em L (4.2)
Tx L (1.2)
U (2.2)
S Tx L (1.1)
Tx L (1.1)
Tx L (1.1) Tx L (4.1)
Tx L (1.1)
U (2.1)
SRx L (1.2)
Rx L (1.2)
Rx L (1.2) Rx L (4.2) Rx L (4.1)
Rx L (1.2)
U (1.2)
SRx L (1.1)
Rx L (1.1)
Rxc L (1.1)
Rx L (1.1)
U (1.1)
Table 3-39 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: PAFC, 3 64 I, 2MU, A2S, BBTxRx, 2w2B1Q, Subscr and Exchan Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-143
Left Rear Connectors of the Rear Panel: J104, J204, J304 and J404
1--------------------- Ba 14-------- Bb 2--------------------- 106 15-------- 101 3--------------------- 109a 16-------- 140 4--------------------- 109b 17-------- 0V/Mm 5--------------------- 105b 18-------- 107 6--------------------- 105a 19-------- 102 7--------------------- 142 20-------- 141 8--------------------- 108 21-------- 104b 9--------------------- 115b 22-------- 102a 10------------------- 104a 23-------- 115a 11------------------- 102b 24-------- 103b 12------------------- 114b 25-------- 114a 13------------------- 103a
V24/V11
V24/V28
IADB
105-J4 108-J1 0V/MGND (101-J1) 107-J1 106-J1 0V/MGND (101-J4) 140-J1 0V/MGND
0V/MGND RX+ () RX- () TX+ () TX- ()
102-J1 142-J1 141-J1 141-J4 109-J1 104-J4 104-J1 115-J1 105-J1 103-J4 114-J1 103-J1
Table 3-40 - J104, J204, J304 and J404 Left Rear Connectors: V24/V11, V24/V28 and IADB Cards
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-144

Cables Used Cable selection is specific to the type of signals connected and number of same type of connections to be made. One same cable, called the "universal cable" can be separated on several cards in the same shelf, or on several ports of the same card. Cable references are in accordance with their length. These cables are described below. Keys for signal names: Px; Pair n, Qx; Quad n, Color abbreviation: Bl: Black, B: Blue, Br: Brown, C: Colorless, G: Green, Gr: Gray , , O: Orange, P: Purple, R: Red, , Y: Yellow, W: White. Cables for the BBTxRx card The cables used for the BBTxRx card are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050173 BBTxRx Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670314 55670315 55670316 55670317
Card Quantity 1
55050173
Free ends
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference 3
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 P W Gr Br P W W Gr
Q1-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Figure 3.93 - Cable for connecting BBTxRx Card (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-145

Cables for the A2S card The cables used for the A2S card 4 port connection are identified in the table below:
Std Plan No. 55050169 A2S Card
Designation
Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
Code No. 55670298 55670299 55670300 55670301 55670xxx
Card Quantity 1
75 ohms adapter cable 120 ohms adapter

L
0.5 m
1 1
JX
04
1 A
J X03
55050169
Free ends
B
JX
02
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 4
Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connectors (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Br P W Gr Q1-P 1 P Q2-P 2 Gr W Br Q1-P 1
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 Q2-P 2 13 25 Bl P Q1-P 2 Bl P Q1-P2
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Y Gr Q2-P 1 Y Gr Q2-P 1
Legende :
A Tx B Rx
A B
Figure 3.94 - Cable for connecting A2S Card (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-146
Connector Jx03/Jx04 3 See table 2 1
500 mm
B A C Cable clamp
Item A B C Marking Jx04 Jx03 55670xxx 55670xxx 2 Mbit/s port 2 Mbit/s port In Rec L2 Out Em L2 In Rec L3 Out Em L3
B1
B2
1 Cable 2 Cable identification 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4 Coaxial female 1.6/5.6 connectors Wiring diagram
Rec L2/Rec L3 Em L2/Em L3
B1 B2
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 8 21
Green wire connecting the coaxial cable grounding braid
Em L2/ Em L3
9 10 24
Rec L2/ Rec L3
25 13
Figure 3.95 - 75 ohms adapter cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-147
500 mm
Connector Jx02 3 B See table 2 1 C A D Cable clamp

Item A B C D E Marking 55670xxx 2 Mbit/s port In Rec L1 Out Em L1 Out Em L4 In Rec L4
B1
B2
B3
B4
Wiring diagram
Rec L1 Em L1 Em L4 Rec L4
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 8 21
B1 B2 B3 B4
Green wire connecting the coaxial cable grounding braid
Em L1
9 10 24
Em L4
Rec L1
25 13
Rec L4
Figure 3.96 - 75 ohms adapter cable

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-148
Unit fixing screw
Jx02
J4
FMX4 side Jx03

3 HE5 connectors (25-way male) 120 ohms Adapter
J3
120 ohms port side
J2
4 HE5 connectors (9-way femelle)
Jx04
J1
Unit fixing screw
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Item Cover ground

A B C D
Connectors Jx02 - J3 Jx03 - J2

Out Em 3.2 Out Em 2.2 Out Em 3.1 Out Em 2.1 In Rec 3.2 In Rec 2.2 In Rec 3.1
1 6 2 7 3 8 9
Jx02 or Jx03 (see table)
6 7 8 9
In Rec 2.1
A B Screen C D
10 22 11 23 12 24 13 25
J3 or J2
4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Cover ground
In Rec 4.2 Out Em 4.1 In Rec 4.1 Out Em 4.2
1 6 2 3 4 5 9 7 8
J4
Jx04
7 8 9
Out Em 1.2 Out Em 1.1 In Rec 1.2 In Rec 1.1
1 6 2 3 4 5 9 7 8
10 22
Screen
11 23 12 24 13 25
J1
Figure 3.97 -120 ohms adapter

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-149

Cables for the 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX card The cables used for the 2w2B1Q and 4U TRANSFIX cards are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050170 Designation 2w2B1Q, 4U TRANSFIX Cards Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670302 55670303 55670304 55670305 Card Quantity 1 (2 for 4U TRANSFIX)
55050170
Free ends
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Gr W P Bl
Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Figure 3.98 - Cable for 4U TRANSFIX and 2w2B1Q Cards Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-150

Cables for the 3 64 I card The cables used for the 3 64 I cards are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050177 3 64 I Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670332 55670333 55670334 55670335
Card Quantity 1
JX 04
1 A
J X03
55050177
B C
Free ends
0 JX 2
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
4
P 1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 P Bl 12 11 24 Bl 25 13 P 12 P Bl 9 8 21 Bl 22 10 23 11 24 Y 25 13 Gr P 9 7 20 8 21 Y 22 10 23 Gr 6 19 7 20 5 18 6 19 W Gr 3 Bl P P 1 14 2 15 Gr 16 4 17 5 18 Y 3 Br 1 14 2 15 Gr 16 4 17 B R
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q3-P2
Q1-P1
Q2-P1
Q3-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
Q1-P2
Q1-P2
Q2-P1
A Tx Legend : B Rx C Tx Sig/Rx Sig
C A B
Figure 3.99 - Cable for 3 64 I Card Connection (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-151

Cables for the V24/V28 card The cables used for the V24/V28 card is identified in the table below: Std Plan No. V24/V28 Card V24/V28 adapter for DTE connection V24/V28 adapter for DCE connection Extension cable for adapter (straight cable) 1.5 m 3m 55620213 55620214 4 980 210 4 980 209 1/channel 1/channel 1/channel 1/channel Designation Length (L) Code No. Card Quantity
L = 65 cm appro.
55 620 213
Port Cards side
One DCE Connection (Terminal)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 16 14
108 101
107 106 140
HE 502 plug connector (25-pin)
7 8 20
102 142 141 109 115 105 114 104
101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
114 115 141 108 140
20 22
HE 502 plug connector (25-way female)
22
13
25
103
142
25 13
Figure 3.100 - V24/V28 adapter for DTE Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-152
L = 65 cm appro.
55 620 214
Port Cards side
One DCE Connection (Modem)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 16 14
108 101
107 106 140
141 114
25 13
22
6 7 8 20
102 142 141 109 104 105 114
22
13
25
103
142 105 107 102 108 106 140 109 103 104 101
8 20 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 1
Figure 3.101 - V24/V28 adapter for DCE Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-153
L 2 1
4 980 XXX
Cable (length depending)

4
2 Cable reference 3 3 HE5 Connector (25-way female) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 14 2 3 4 5 6 7
25 13
13 25
Figure 3.102 - Extension cable for adaptater (straight cable)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-154

Cables for the V24/V11 card The cables used for the V24/V11 card are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. V24/V11 Card V25/V11 adapter (ISO 2110 connector) V24/V11-V36 adapter cable (37-way) V24/V11 (V35) adapter cable 3-V35 port adapter 1mm/1.6 mm adapter for V35 Interface V24/V11 (X24/V11) adapter cable (15-way) Extension cable for adapter (See V24/V28 card cable) 55620215 55670330-1M5 55670459-1M5 6 486 885 55670331-1M5 4 980 210 4 980 209 1/channel Designation Length (L) Code No. Card Quantity
1.5 m 1.5 m
1.5 m 1.5 m 3m
L = 65 cm appro.
55 620 215
Port Cards side
Cable side
Connection diagram
1 2 3 4 5 16 14
101 140 107 102 141 104B 102A 115A 103B 114A
HE 502 plug connector (25-way male)
6 7 8 20
22
13
25
106 109A 109B 105B 105A 142 108 115B 104A 102B 114B 103A
101 103B 103A 114A 104A 104B 105A 115A 106 141 107 105B 102/102B 108 109A 140 115B 109B 102A 114B 142
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
20 22
25 13
Figure 3.103 - V25/V11 adapter (ISO 2110 connector)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-155
1.5 m
2 2
55670330-1M5
55670330-1M5
Cable length
1 Cable 3 2 Cable reference 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (37-way female) 4
Wiring diagram
Q4 P2 F1 P Q4 P2 F2 Q5 P1 F1 Q5 P1 F2 Q5 P2 F1 W Gr B P
20
1 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 7 26 8 9 10 11
Gr Q1 P1 F1
14 15 16
Q2 P2 F1 Q3 P2 F1 Q6 P1 F1 Q5 P2 F1 Q2 P1 F1 Q4 P1 F1 Q3 P1 F2 Q5 P2 F2 Q1 P2 F2 Q4 P2 F1 Q5 P1 F1 Q1 P1 F2
P P Gr P Gr Gr Bl Y B P Gr W
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G Gr R Gr G Br B Br Y W P
Q4 P1 F2 Q1 P1 F1 Q3 P2 F2 Q3 P1 F1 Q4 P1 F2 Q2 P2 F2 Q5 P1 F2 Q6 P1 F2 Q2 P1 F2 Q4 P2 F2 Q1 P2 F1
Q5 P2 F2 Y
18 19 20 21 22
Q6 P1 F1 Gr
30 12 31 13 14
10 23 11 24 12 25 13
W P B Gr Y P Br Gr Bl P R
Q1 P1 F2 Q1 P2 F1 Q1 P2 F2 Q2 P1 F1 Q2 P1 F2 Q2 P2 F1 Q2 P2 F2 Q3 P1 F1 Q3 P1 F2 Q3 P2 F1 Q3 P2 F2
Q6 P1 F2 Br
18 37 19
Gr Q4 P1 F1 G Q4 P1 F2
Figure 3.104 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (37-way) Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-156
FMX12 Side 1
1.50 m 2
55670459
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 3 4 Connector (34-way female) Wiring diagram
1 14
4
W
A D C HK P SU Y BB CC FF HH MM LL JJ DD EJ N T X V Z F L R B
106 108
Gr Q1-P1 W
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 21 9 22 10 23 24 25 13
15
B 104(b) Gr Q3-P1 104(a) 114b Q4-P1 114a Gr G
101 P Q1-P2 109 Y 140 Gr Q2-P1 105 Br 107 P Q2-P2 142 B 141 Gr Q5-P1* 102 P 115b R Q3-P2 115a W 103(b) P Q4-P2 103(a)
Gr 106 Q1-P1 W 108 Gr 105 Q2-P1 Y 140 P M 103(a) Q4-P2 W 103(b) 114a 114b G W Q4-P1 Gr AA
EE KK
101 B Q1-P2 109
Gr 102 B Q5-P1* 141 Gr 104(a) Bl Q3-P1 104(b) R 115a P Q3-P2 115b
P
NN
142 107
Br Q2-P2
* Pair 2 of quarte 5 is not connected.
1.6mm female way connection is possible via adapter no. 6 486 885
Figure 3.105 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (V35) Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-157
1.5 m
2 1 2
55670331-1M5
55670331-1M5
Cable length
1 Cable 2 Cable reference 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (15-way female) 4
Wiring diagram
Q2 P2 F1 Q2 Q3 Q3 Q1 P1 F1 P2 F2 P1 F2 P2 F1 P Gr R Bl P
1 14 2 3 4 5 6 19 21 15
G Gr
Q4 P1 F2 Q1 P1 F1 Q3 P1 F1 Gr Q3 P1 F2 Bl Q3 P2 F1 P Q3 P2 F2 R Q4 P1 F1 Gr Q4 P1 F2 G
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Br P Y Gr
Q2 P2 F2 Q3 P2 F1 Q2 P1 F2 Q3 P1 F1
Q4 P1 F1 Q1 P2 F2
Gr B
10 22 23 12 24
Gr W P B Gr Y P Br
Q1 Q1 Q1 Q1 Q2 Q2 Q2 Q2
P1 F1 P1 F2 P2 F1 P2 F2 P1 F1 P1 F2 P2 F1 P2 F2
Q1 P1 F2
13 25
Figure 3.106 - Adapter Cable for V24/V11 (X24/V11) Card Connection
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-158
Unit fixing screw
J101* J1
J102 FMX4 side J2

V35 Interface Adapter 3 HE5 connectors (37-way femelle)
V35 Interface side
4 HE5 connectors (25-way male)
J103
J3 J104
Unit fixing screw * Connector J101 is not used.
Wiring diagram J102 J103 J104

101 0V/Mm Ba 103a 114a 104a 105a 115a 106 141 107 108 109a 140
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 31 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
J1 J2 J3
102b Bb 103b 114b 104b 105b 115b
Ba 106 109a 109b 105b 105a 142 108 115b 104a 102b 114b 103a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
10 22 11 23 12 24 13 25
Bb 101 140a 0V/Mm 107 102 141 104b 102a 115a 103b 114a
119b
142 102
18 37 19
102a
Figure 3.107 - 3-V35 port adapter

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-159

Cables for the IADB Card The cables used for the IADB card are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. Designation IADB card V24/V11 cable (1 X24/V11 port) Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 25 m RJ45 25-way adapter (1 Ethernet port) Cables for two V24/V28 ports Asynchronous V24/V28 cable for DCE connection Asynchronous V24/V28 cable for DTE connection Synchronous V24/V28 cable for DCE connection Synchronous V24/V28 cable for DTE connection
2.50 m 0.80 m IADB card side
See table
2 1
Code No.
Card Quantity 1
55670458-2M5 55670458-5M0 55670458-12M 55670458-25M 55670198 55670468-0M5 55670468-3M0 6 486 400 6 486 401 6 485 864 6 485 865
0.5m 3m 2m 2m 2m 2m
To V24/V11 card of FMX4
Item
3 A B C 1 2
Marking
55670458 IADB (Jx02) 55670458 To V24/V11 Card 55670458 X24/V11 Ports
X24/V11 Interface available for DCE or DTE
Cable Cable identification 3 HE5 Connectors (25-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (15-way male)
103a 103b 104b 104a 109b 109a 115a 115b Cb Ca Sb Sa Q1-P1 W Gr P B P Br Gr Bl Gr W P B
1 214 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 23 11 24 25 13 21
Wiring diagram
Gr Y P Q2-P1 Q3-P2
14
Q1-P2 Q2-P2 Q3-P1 Q1-P1 Q1-P2
105b 105a GND
109a 109b 105b 105a Q2-P2 Q2-P1
Br P Gr Y
3 4 5 6
Y Gr Q2-P1 Br Q2-P2 P Br Gr Q3-P1
Tb Ta Rb Ra Ib Ia
115b 115a
Bl Q3-P1 Gr
21 9 10 23 24 13
P B Gr W Q1-P2
104b 104a
103b Q1-P1 103a
Gr Cb Q1-P1 Ca Ib Ia Q1-P1 Q3-P2 Gr W Bl Gr

1 9 2 10 3 4 11 5 12 6 13 15 8
Y Br P P B
Q2-P1
Ta Tb
Rb Q2-P2 Ra Q1-P2 Sb Sa
GND
Figure 3.108 - Cable for IADB Card Connection

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-160
HE5 connector (25-pin)
55670198
FMX4 Rear left connector side (JX04)
RJ45 connector (8-way female)
Wiring diagram
1 15 3 4 5 6 18
Transparent (Cover) White Brown Black Yellow Blue Orange Red Green
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TX+ ( RX+ ( TX- ( RX- (
) ) ) )
20 21
13 25
Figure 3.109 - RJ45 25-way adapter (1 Ethernet port)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-161
300 mm
Port 1
B Connection of the following cables: no. 6 486 400 no. 6 486 401 no. 6 485 864 no. 6 485 865
55670468
C 1 Item A B C Marking IADB Port 1 (V24/V28) Port 2 (V24/V28) Wiring diagram

P1 P4
1 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 7 9 21
Cable
2 4
Cable identification 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) RJ45 Connectors (8-way female)
Port 2
1 2 3 4 5
Port 1
P2 P3
6 7 8
P3 P4 P1
1 2 3 4 5 6
10 22 11 23 12 24 25 13
Port 2
P2
7 8
Figure 3.110 - Cable for IADB Card Connection (Two V24/V28 ports)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-162
2m Connection to DCE 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670468 1
6 486 400
3 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 RJ45 Connector (8-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
103 (TD) 104 (RD) 105 (RTS) 106 (CTS)
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 20
109 (CD) 108 (DTR)
25 13
Figure 3-111 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-163
2m Connection to DTE (Terminal) 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670468 1
6 486 401
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 8 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 107 (DSR) 108 (DTR) 105 (RST) 109 (CD) 106 (CTS)
25 13
Figure 3-112 - Asynchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-164
2m Connection to DCE (Modem) 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670468 1
6 485 864
3 1 2 Cable Cable number 4
3 RJ45 Connector (8way-male) 4 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
102 103 (TD) 104 (RD) 105 (RST) 106 (CTS) 109 (CD) 114 (TC) 115 (RC) 108 (DTR)
1 14 2 15 3 4 5 18 6 7 20 8
25 13
Figure 3-113 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DTE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-165
2m Connection to DTE 2 Connection to Cable no. 55670468 1
6 485 865
3 1 2 3 4 Cable Cable number RJ45 Connector (8-way male) HE5 Connector (25-way female) 4
Wiring diagram
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 106 (CTS) 107 (DSR) 105 (RST) 115 (RC) 114 (TC) 108 (DTR) 109 (CD)
215 3 4 5 6 7 20 8
25 13
Figure 3-114 - Synchronous V24/V28 (DCE) Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-166

Cables for the 6PAFC card The cables used for the 6PAFC card is identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050171 6PAFC Card Designation Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670306 55670307 55670308 55670309
Card Quantity 1
JX 04
1 A
J X03
55050171
B C
0 JX
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 3 Cable reference
Free ends
(length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (25-way male)

4
R G 1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 W Bl W Br Bl Br W W 8 21 W Br 6 O B 4 3 16 17 5 18 R 19 7 20 8 O Bl W R O W R Bl 21 Bl 6 G B 4 W Bl
Wiring diagram
R B
P7
1 14 2 15
Br W O
P8
1
BL W 14 2 15 3 16 Br B 18 R 19 7 20 G O W R G W R O O G
P9
P1
P2
P3
P10
P11
17 5
P12
P4
P5
P6
P1 P4
9 22 10 23 11 24
P2 P5
9 22 10 23 11 24
P3 P6
P1 P4
12 25 13
P2 P5
12 25 13
P3 P6
A Tx 4 w Legend : B Rx Ex/Rx 2 w C E&M
C A B
Figure 3.115 - Cable for 6PAFC Card Connection (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-167

Cables for the Subscr and Exchan The cables used for the Subscr and Exchan cards are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050174 Designation Subscr and Exchan Cards Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670318 55670319 55670320 55670321
Card Quantity 1
JX 0
J X03
55050174
Free ends
0 JX
(length depending) 4 HE5 Connectors (25-way male)

4
W
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 13 12 25 13 11 24 12 25 10 23 11 24 9 22 10 23 8 21 9 22 7 20 8 21 6 19 7 20 5 18 6 19
Wiring diagram
W P1
1 14 2 15
W P2
1 14 2 15
Bl R O
O R
G W
P3
P6
16 4 17
Bl
P5
16 4 17 5 18
Br
P4
Figure 3.116 - Cable for Subscr and Exchan Cards Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-168
3.3.4.3 - J601 Alarm Loop Connector

The J601 connector (HE501, 25-way) provides the operator with two types of alarm information: alarm information (major or minor) at the GTR interface using a relay contact or service grounding (type of circuit used is determined by the EJ206 link option on the GIE or GIE - P card), 3-way relay contact interface (2 in number).
Furthermore, connector J601 has three relay contact status input interfaces used in acquiring the status of external FMX parameters (remote control signals). Connector pin assignment is provided in Table 3-41.
Rear Panel Connection Connector: J601 1-------------------------------------------14---------------------2--------------------------------------------15---------------------3--------------------------------------------16---------------------4--------------------------------------------17---------------------5--------------------------------------------18---------------------6--------------------------------------------19---------------------7--------------------------------------------20---------------------8--------------------------------------------21---------------------9--------------------------------------------22---------------------10------------------------------------------23---------------------11------------------------------------------24---------------------12------------------------------------------25---------------------13-------------------------------------------
Signal Name TSIG1A TSIG1B TSIG2A TSIG2B TSIG3A OV/MGND TSIG3B GTR
Common Point (CP)
REMCON2_C REMCON 1_C REMCON 2_B REMCON 1_B
REMCON 2_A REMCON 1_A
Table 3-41 - J601 Connector, Alarm Loops
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-169

Cable for GTR interface, remote control and remote monitoring item connection The cables used for GTR interface, remote control and remote monitoring item connection are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050172 Designation Cable for GTR interface, remote control and remote monitoring item connection Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m
L
Code No. 55670310 55670311 55670312 55670313
Card Quantity 1/Shelf
55050172
Free ends
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Bl W W G W O Br W G R O Bl R R
P5
P6
P7
P4
P2
P3
P1
Figure 3.117 - Cable for Alarm Loop Connection (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-170

GTR Interface Alarm Information This information is available on pins 6 and 8 of the connector; its nature depends on the position of the EJ206 link on the GIE or GIE - P card according to the table below. TNM Alarm Normal Fault Fault Relay Contact Interface Connector J601 supplies two alarm indication relay contacts which may be used in the following two ways: via automatic activation according to criterion defined by an OR type logic function of all or part of the following information: . combination of alarm indication (major alarm or minor alarm), . one or more remote monitoring signals, or via a operation control order. Mode of operation is set by the operator using the CT for each interface. EJ206 Link Position 1Y - 2Y or 2Y - 3Y 2Y -3Y 1Y - 2Y Status No alarm Relay contact Sce GND
NOTE:
The different modes of operation of the remote control interfaces no. 1 (REMCON1_A_B_C) and no. 2 (REMCON2_A_B_C) are provided in the table below. Alarm Absent Present REMCON1_B - REMCON1_C loop or REMCON1_B - REMCON1_A loop or REMCON2_B - REMCONC1_C loop REMCON2_B - REMCON1_A loop Open Closed Closed Open
Relay Contact Input Interfaces (Remote Monitoring signals) Connector J601 provides connection of 3 incoming loops (TSIG1, TSIG2 and TSIG3) significant of the outside environment.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-171
3.3.4.4 - Operating interface

Three V.24 ports are available depending on the equipment connected: - connectors J1 on GIE or GIE - P front panel or J502 on shelf rear panel for a local CT, - connector J501 of the shelf rear panel if the CT is remoted via a modem or MEGAPAC equipment. The GIE or GIE - P front panel key is used to select the active function for the data inputs; data outputs are available simultaneously on both interfaces.
GIE or GIE - P card front panel and shelf rear panel connectors
Connectors J1 (HE501, 25-way), located on the GIE or GIE - P card front panel, and J502, located on the shelf rear panel, are designed for CT connection ; this interface is compliant with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. They allow a FMX to act as a DCE with regard to the terminal. The pinout is shown in Table 3-42.
Connectors J1 on GIE or GIE - P Front Panel and J502 on Shelf Rear Panel 1----------------------------14-------2----------------------------15-------3----------------------------16-------4----------------------------17-------5----------------------------18-------6----------------------------19-------7----------------------------20-------8----------------------------21-------9----------------------------22-------10--------------------------23-------11--------------------------24-------12--------------------------25-------13---------------------------
Signal Name (ITU-T abbreviation)
Designation Ground () TX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) Transmit Data () Receive Data () RX - DEBUG ("DEBUG" Interface ()) Request To Send () Clear To Send () Data Set Ready () Signaling Ground () Data Terminal Ready ()
Circuit V24 101 -DCE 103 - DCE 104 - DCE 105 - DCE 106 - DCE 107 - DCE 102 - DCE 108/2 - DCE
TD RD RTS CTS DSR Sig GND DTR
Connector J502 on shelf rear panel can be only used when a GIE - P card is present in the shelf.
Table 3-42 - Connectors J1 on GIE or GIE -P Front Panel and J502 ("CT Interface") on Shelf Rear Panel
Transmission characteristics ASCII code: 1 start bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, Bit rate 9600 bps, Transmission mode: asynchronous, Local CT Connection Cable: see Figure 3.118
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-172
GIE card side (J1)
PC side
L = 1.80 m
6993400 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male) 4 HE5 Connector (9-way female)
Wiring diagram
103 104 105 106 107 102 108 109
Figure 3.118 - Local CT Connection Cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-173

Modem port
Connector J501 (HE5, 25-way) is designed for modem connection; the function complies with ITU-T recommendations V.24 and V.28. It allows the FMX4 to behave like a DTE (terminal) with respect to a DCE (modem). The interface is provided by the remote "CT/Modem" interface. Characteristics are provided in Table 3-43. Transmission Characteristics - ASCII code: 1 start bit, 8 information bits, 1 "stop" bit, no parity, - Bite rate 9600 bps, - Transmission mode: asynchronous, TPI cable to be connected via a Modem: 25M/25M straight cable No.6 486 877
Shelf Rear Panel Connector: J501 Signal Name (ITU-T abbreviation) Designation Circuit V24
1----------------------------14-------2----------------------------- TD 15-------3----------------------------- RD 16-------4----------------------------- RTS 17-------5----------------------------- CTS 18-------6----------------------------- DSR 19-------7----------------------------20-------8----------------------------- CD 21-------9----------------------------22-------10--------------------------23-------11--------------------------24-------12--------------------------25-------13---------------------------
Transmit Data () Receive Data () Request To Send () Clear To Send () Data Set Ready () 0V/MGND Data Carrier detect on data channel ()
103 - DTE 106 - DTE 105 - DTE 104 - DTE 107 - DTE
108 - DTE 109 - DTE
Table 3-43 - Connector J501, "CT/ Modem" interface
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-174
Rear Panel Connection Connector: J504
Signal name (ITU-T abbreviation) 1----------------------------- 0V/MGND 14-------- Synchro Out 2----------------------------- Synchro Out + 15-------3----------------------------16-------- Synchro In 4----------------------------17-------- Synchro In + 5----------------------------18-------6----------------------------- LTB + 19-------7----------------------------20-------- OQLTB 8----------------------------- LTB 21-------9----------------------------22-------- Sem Out 10--------------------------23-------- Sem Out + 11--------------------------24-------- Sem In 12--------------------------25-------- Sem In + 13--------------------------- 0V/MGND
Designation
Ground Synchronization Output Synchronization Output
Synchronization Input Synchronization Input
Line Test Bus
Line Test Bus Occupation Line Test Bus
SEM Output SEM Output SEM Input SEM Input Ground
Table 3-44 - Connector J504, Synchronization, SEM port, Line Test Bus Ports
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-175
3.3.4.5 - J504 Multiport Connector

The J504 (HE5 high bit rate 25-way) connector groups the external synchronization, SEM and Line Test Bus ports; its pin assignment is provided in Table 3-44. External Synchronization Port External synchronization connection complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703. Its characteristics are the following: - Fe = 2048 kHz 50.10-6, - adaptation attenuation at 2048 kHz 15 dB, The cables used for synchronization connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. 55050175 Designation Synchronization connection cable Length (L) 2. m 5m 12 m 24.8 m 55050196 Two-shelf synchronization connection cable 1.5 m 3m
L
Code No. 55670322 55670323 55670324 55670325 55670373 55670374
Card Quantity 1/Shelf
1/Shelf
55050175
Free ends
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 4 3 Cable reference 3
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 P Br P Bl
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Figure 3.119 - Synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-176
55050196
1 Cable 2 Cable Part No. 4 3 Cable reference
3 4
(length depending)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 Gr W Gr
1 14 2 15
Q1-P1
W
3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13
Figure 3.120 - Two-shelf synchronization Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-177

SEM Port SEM interface connection complies with CSE 52.13. Transmission Characteristics Transmission mode: asynchronous Bit rate: 9600 bps Each character is composed of 11 bits: - 1 character synchronization bit (START) always set to "0", - 8 useful bits carrying the information (the first bit transmitted is the low order bit), - 1 parity bit (P) providing protection against transmission errors (the value of this bit is "0" for an even number of bits set to 1 among the 8 bits used), - 1 character separation bit (STOP) always with a value of "1". Line Test Bus Port Port of the metallic subscriber line test bus (2w2B1Q card ports).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-178

Synchronization, SEM and Line Test Bus Connection Cable (see Figure 3.121) The cables used to connect the synchronization, SEM and LTB are identified in the table below: Std Plan No. 55050176 Designation Synchro - SEM - LTB Connection Cable Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m Code No. 55670326 55670327 55670328 55670329 Card Quantity 1/Shelf
55050176
Free ends
(length depending)
4
HE5 Connector (25-way male) Wiring diagram

1 14 2 15 3 16 4 17 5 18 6 19 7 20 8 21 9 22 10 23 11 24 12 25 13 P Bl Gr W P W Gr P Br P Bl
Q1-P2
Q2-P2
Q1-P1 Q1-P2
Q1-P1
Q1-P2
Figure 3.121- Synchronization, SEM and LTB Connection Cable (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-179
3.3.4.6 - J602 TNM Ports

Connector J602 (HE5, 25-way) provides access to TNM in the X.25 mode with slot 15. Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3-45.
Rear Panel Connection Connector: J602 1----------------------------14-------2----------------------------15-------3----------------------------16-------4----------------------------17-------5----------------------------18-------6----------------------------19-------7----------------------------20-------8----------------------------21-------9----------------------------22-------10--------------------------23-------11--------------------------24-------12--------------------------25-------13---------------------------
Signal Name (ITU-U abbreviation) 104-TNM
107-TNM 102-TNM
105-TNM
114-TNM 103-TNM
106-TNM 108-TNM
115-TNM
Table 3-45 - Connector J602, TNM Interface

Examples of TNM port connection : - Connecting FMX to MEGAPAC equipment - Connecting FMX to DM (V28) equipment - Connecting FMX to DM (V11) equipment
Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment Connecting FMX to MEGAPAC equipment via the TNM (J602)port requires the use of two cables in accordance with Figure 3-122. The cables are shown in Figure 3-123 and Figure 3124.
MEGAPAC Equipment DCE mode) MIO CARD
RJ45

GIE or GIE - P CARD
Cable for RGT port/MEGAPAC connection

26 pts 25 pts
Cable for V.24/v.28 synchronous connection

25 pts RJ45
26 pts
Figure 3-122 - Connecting a FMX to MEGAPAC equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-180

Connecting TNM port J602 to MEGAPAC equipment The cables used for TNM port connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. Designation Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPAC Length (L) 2m 2.5 m 12 m Code No. 6 485 865 55670453-2M5 55670453-12M Card Quantity 1 1
2m To cable no. 55670453 2 MEGAPAC side (MIO Card) 1
6 485 865
Wiring diagram
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 15
102 104 (RD) 103 (TD) 106 (CTS) 107 (DSR) 105 (RTS) 115 (RC) 114 (TC) 108 (DTR) 109 (CD)
2 3 4 5 18 6 7 8
20
25 13
Figure 3-123 - Synchrone V24/V28 (DCE) cable
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-181
L MEGAPAC connection to cable no. 6 485 865 2 1 FMX4 Connection
MEGAPAC
J602
1 Cable 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connectors (25-way male) Wiring diagram
1
W Gr Q1-P1
16
103-RGT 104-RGT 106-RGT 107-RGT
Gr Q1-P1 W
4
1 14 2 15 3 17 5 6 7 20 8 21 22
104-RGT 103-RGT 107-RGT 106-RGT
Y Gr
2 14
114-RGT Q2-P1 102-RGT 102-RGT
105 P Q1-P2 B
Strap
P Br 115-RGT Q2-P2 108-RGT
114-RGT
Q2-P1
Gr Y
4 17 5 6 7 20 8
B P
Q1-P2
108-RGT 115-RGT Q2-P2
Br P
22 24 25 13
24 25 13
Figure 3-124 - Connection cable for TNM port to MEGAPAC equipment (Standard Plan)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-182

Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment
Connecting FMX to DM equipment via the TNM(J602) port of the GIE or GIE - P card requires the use of two cables in accordance with Figure 3-125. The cables are shown in Figure 3-127 and Figure 3-126.
GIE or GIE - P CARD
DM (V28)
Cable for RGT port/DM (V28) connection Wiring harness no.4 913 031
IM CARD
15 pts 15 pts 15 pts 15 pts
26 pts 26 pts
Figure 3-125 - Connecting a FMX to DM (V28) equipment
Connecting TNM port J602 to DM (V28) The cables used for TNM port connection are identified in the following table: Std Plan No. Designation Wiring harness to DM (V28) equipment Cable for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment 2.5 m 12 m Length (L) Code No. 4 913 031 55670454-2M5 55670454-5M0 Card Quantity 1 1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-183
B1 B2
1 DM side
Free ends
4913031
B3
1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 4 Connector (32-way) HE5 Connectors (15-way)

B4
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A
Gr W P B Gr Y P Br Gr Bl P R Gr G P W Gr Gr W P B Gr Y P Br Q2 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q1 - P1
4
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1 Q3 - P2 Q4 - P1 Q4 - P2 Q5 - P1
B1
Wiring diagram
B2
9 2
Gr Bl
11
Q3 - P1
13
P R W Gr B P Y Gr Br P Gr W Gr R P Y Gr Br P Gr Q3 - P2 Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1
B3
6
14 7 8
9 2
Q1 - P1 Q1 - P2 Q2 - P1 Q2 - P2 Q3 - P1
11
B4
13 6 14 7 8
Figure 3-126 - Wiring harness for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-184
L Connection to cable no. 4 913 031
DM90
J602
1 Cable 3 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 4 HE5 Connector (15-way male) HE5 Connector (25-way male) Wiring diagram
104-RGT 103-RGT Gr Q1-P1
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 6
1 2 10 3 11 4 12 5
NOTE : The blue wire of pair 2 is not connected
Gr W P Q1-P1
104-RGT 103-RGT Q1-P2 114-RGT
7 20 8 21 22
Q1-P2
114-RGT V28 Interface (FMX4) 115-RGT
15 8
24 25 13
Strap
Figure 3-127 - Cable for connecting TNM port to DM (V28) equipment
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-185
3.3.4.7 - J603 and J604 P1 and P2 Management Interface Ports

Two connectors J603 and J604 are provided for P2 and P1 management interface connection. Each interface (V11, 64 kbit/s synchronous type) includes 4 clock/data pairs in transmit and receive. This function is only available when a GIE - P card is present in the shelf. Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3-46.
Shelf Rear Panel Connectors: J603 and J604 1----------------------------14-------2----------------------------15-------3----------------------------16-------4----------------------------17-------5----------------------------18-------6----------------------------19-------7----------------------------20-------8----------------------------21-------9----------------------------22-------10--------------------------23-------11--------------------------24-------12--------------------------25-------13---------------------------
Signal Name (ITU-T abbreviation) 0V/MGND RXP2A (RXP1B) RXP2B (RXP1A) 0V/MGND RXCLKP2A (RXCLKP1B) RXCLKP2B (RXCLKP1A) 0V/MGND
TXCLKP2A (TXCLKP1A) TXCLKP2B (TXCLKP1B) 0V/MGND TXP2A (TXP1A) TXP2B (TXP1B) 0V/MGND
Table 3-46 - Connectors J603 and J604, TNM Interface
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-186

Cables for P1 Management Interface connection The cables used for P1 Management Interface above are identified in the table below: Std. Plan No. Designation Cables for P1 Management Interface connection Length (L) 2.5 m 5m 12 m 24.8 m P1 Management Interface cable with standard end (9-way male) L 1.5 m Code No. 55670487-2M5 55670487-5M0 55670487-12M 55670487-25M 55670493-1M5 Card Quantity 1
J604
P1 Interface
1 3 2 3
Cable Cable reference (length depending) HE5 Connector (25-way-male)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 8 21 22
W Gr Br P
TxP1-RxP2(N) TxP1-RxP2(P) TxCLKP1-RxCLKP2(N) TxCLKP1-RxCLKP2(P)
Gr Y Bl P
RxCLKP1-TxCLKP2(P) RxCLKP1-TxCLKP2(N) RxP1-TxP2(P) RxP1-TxP2(N)
24 25 13

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-187
J604
P2
To P2 of another 4 equipment
GND
1 14 15
Q2P1 Q2P1 Q2P2 Q2P2
RXP2P1-N RXP2P1-P RXCLKP2P1-N RXCLKP2P1-P
17 18 7 8 21 22
16 27 38 49 5
Q1P1 Q1P1 Q1P2 Q1P2
TXCLKP2P1-P TXCLKP2P1-N TXP2P1-P TXP2P1-N
24 25 13
Figure 3-129 - P1 Management Interface Cable with standard end
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-188

J603
55670488-
To P1 of another equipment Free ends
Cable length P2 Interface 1 Cable 3 2 Cable reference (length depending) 3 HE5 Connector (25-way male)
Wiring diagram
1 14 2 15 3 4 17 5 18 6 7 8 21 22
W P Gr Y
TxP2-RxP1(P) TxP2-RxP1(N) TxCLKP2-RxCLKP1(P) TxCLKP2-RxCLKP1(N)
P Br Gr W
RxCLKP2-TxCLKP1(P) RxCLKP2-TxCLKP1(N) RxP2-TxP1(P) RxP2-TxP1(N)
24 25 13

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-189
J603
P1
To P1 of another 4 equipment
GND
1 14 15
Q1P2 Q1P2 Q1P1 Q1P1
TXP2P1-P TXP2P1-N TXCLKP2P1-P TXCLKP2P1-N
17 18 7 8 21 22
16 27 38 49 5
Q2P2 Q2P2 Q2P1 Q2P1
RXCLKP2P1-P RXCLKP2P1-N RXP2P1-P RXP2P1-N
24 25 13

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-190
3.3.4.8 - J1 and J2 Secondary Power Supply Ports

Two connectors, J1 (25-way) and J2 (15-way), are provided for powering the shelf cards from the -48V battery converter or the 110/220V mains unit inserted in slot 01. Connector pin assignment is indicated in Table 3-47.
Shelf Motherboard Connector: J1 1----------------------------14-------2----------------------------15-------3----------------------------16-------4----------------------------17-------5----------------------------18-------6----------------------------19-------7----------------------------20-------8----------------------------21-------9----------------------------22-------10--------------------------23-------11--------------------------24-------12--------------------------25-------13--------------------------Signal Name Ground Ground VDALA DEFCNVR ALAALI Ground N5V N5V N5V N5V Ground Ground Ground Ground P12V P12V P5V P5V P5V P5V P5V P5V P5V P5V Ground
Shelf Motherboard Connector: J2 1----------------------------6-------2----------------------------7-------3----------------------------8-------4----------------------------9-------5-----------------------------
Signal Name Masse P53V 0V53 ALAMJ N53V N53V ALAMN N48S OBS
Table 3-47 - Connector J1 and J2, Secondary Power Supply Ports Interface
3.3.4.9 - J3 and J4 Fan Power Supply Ports

Two bar power supply J3 and J4 are provided for fan connection. The bars are power supplied from connector J1.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-191
3.4 - Start-up and Configuration

To facilitate equipment start-up, the operator must define its characteristics (mode of operation, nominal synchronization unit, etc.) and environment beforehand. The procedure proposed is the following: - power-up the shelf and check the power converter cards, - if the desired mode of operation is different from the standard configuration (factory-set configuration), configure the cards equipped with link and switch options on their printed circuits, - plug the cards into the shelf, - power-up and check that the entire unit operates correctly via the selftests, - program the equipment, configure the port cards one by one and create the connections using the CT, refer to software Users Handbook No. N5681515XXYY. On initial configuration and subsequent upgrades, the operator must check consistency between the local equipment card mode of operation and that of the far-end equipment cards to ensure correct Signaling management.
REMINDER!
As the cards are protected by antistatic packaging, before handling, the operator must procure, and wear an antistatic bracelet
IMPORTANT
The placing of the GIE card such that its battery comes in contact with a metal surface is prohibited. A red label glued on the card serves as a warning.
Figure 3-1Figure 3-2Figure 3-3Figure 3-4Figure 3-5Figure 3-6Figure 3-7Figure 3-8Figure 3-9Figure 3-10Figure 3-11Figure 3-12Figure 3-13Figure 3-14Figure 3-15Figure 3-16Figure 3-17Figure 3-18Figure 3-19Figure 3-20Figure 3-21Figure 3-22Figure 3-23Figure 3-24Figure 3-25Figure 3-26Figure 3-27Figure 3-28Figure 3-29Figure 3-30Figure 3-31Figure 3-32Figure 3-33Figure 3-34Figure 3-35Figure 3-36Figure 3-37Figure 3-38Figure 3-39Figure 3-40Figure 3-41Figure 3-42Figure 3-43Figure 344Figure 3-45Figure 3-46Figure 3-47Figure 3-48Figure 3-49Figure 3-50Figure 3-51Figure 3-52Figure 3-53Figure 3-54Figure 3-55Figure 3-56Figure 3-57Figure 3-58Figure 3-59Figure 3-60Figure 3-61Figure 3-62Figure 3-63Figure 3-64Figure 3-65Figure 3-66Figure 3-67Figure 3-68Figure 3-69Figure 3-70Figure 3-71Figure 3-72Figure 3-73Figure 3-74Figure 3-75Figure 3-76Figure 3-77Figure 3-78Figure 3-79Figure 3-80Figure 3-81Figure 3-Figure 3-823-83Figure 3-84Figure 3-85Figure 3-86Figure 387Figure 3-88Figure 3-89Figure 3-90Figure 3-91Figure 3-92Figure 3-93Figure 3-94Figure 3-95Figure Figure 3-963-973. 44Figure 3-98Figure 3-993-100Figure 3-101Figure 3-102Figure 3-103Figure 3-104Figure Figure 3-1053-106 Figure 107Figure 108
Figure 109Figure 110Figure 111Figure 112Figure 113Figure 114Figure 115Figure 116Figure 117Figure 118Figure 119Figure 120Figure 121Figure 122Figure 123Figure 124Figure 125Figure 126Figure 127Figure 128Figure 129Figure 130Figure 131
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-192
3.4.1 - Shelf Power-up

Equipment power-up is carried out in two stages: - power-up of shelf then of power converter(s) or 110/220V mains supply, - power-up of other equipment cards from power source and interpretation of results.
Power converters power up

NOTA : Before powering-up converters or 110/220V mains supply, be sure that the shelf is fitted with at least one COB card and one GIE (or GIE - P) card. The FMX is supplied, depending on the type of shelf used,: - with -48 VDC from three DC sources (the rated voltage must remain between -40 and -57V) when a P3 converter is used (FMX12 or P3 Subscriber shelf), - with -48 VDC from two DC sources (the rated voltage must remain between -36 and -72V) when a -48V battery converter is used (FMX4 shelf), - with 110/220VAC from an AC source (the rated voltage must remain between 100 and 260 VMS) when a 110/220V mains supply is used (FMX4 shelf). It is necessary to,: - check primary voltages, - connect, if required, the primary source to the rack power distribution frame, - check the power supply protection fuses (-48V battery converter and 110/220V mains unit used for the FMX4 shelf, - insert the power converter(s) or mains unit in the self after checking that their front panel "M-Ar" switch (ON/OFF) (P3 converter and -48V battery converter) or rear panel "O/I" switch (110/220V mains unit) are positioned at, respectively, "Ar" or "O" (both indicating "Off"), NOTE: 110/220V mains supply units do not require operational adjustment (cf. 3.4.2). - connect the primary supply, where necessary via the distribution frame, to the power filter or directly to the 48V battery converter or 110/220V mains supply unit , - check that the "Def" LED on the front panel of each converter or on the 110/220V mains supply unit is lit, - power up the converter(s) or 110/220V mains supply unit; the "Def" of each converter or of the 110/220V mains supply unit should be extinguished.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-193
3.4.2 - Card Configuration 3.4.2.1 - Power Converter P3 Card
E11
3 2 1
EJ11
F1
EJ11 jumper on E11 strip of converter card: - Position 1 - 2* - Position 2 - 3 : converter outage for voltage of between 36 V and 40 V, : converter outage for voltage of less than 36 V.
*: factory set position Fuse Power converter: F1 = 5A
3.4.2.2 - -48V battery converter and110/220V mains supply unit

The -48V battery converter and 110/220V mains power unit do not require any configuration before commissioning. Fuse 48V battery converter : 3,15 A delayed-action. : 3,15 A delayed-action.
110/220V mains power unit
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-194
3.4.2.3 - GIE Card

AL OP
BATTERIE
E601 3Z 1Z E402 1V 3V P1
BATTERY
Ala m/ Mn Alm Norm/ Norm Def/ Fail
3Y
E206 1Y
P2
F1
P3
The factory-set configuration is as follows: - battery not connected, - GTR alarm: Sce GND, - DTE mode. NOTE: If the GIE card was stored, reconnect the battery as it is necessary for data saving. On factory outlet, the card battery is charged. DESIGNATION GTR connection mode DCE mode DTE mode Polarization of TNM alarm relay contact Common GTR sce grounded relay contact Battery connected Battery not connected Battery connected F1 = 1,25 A POSITION 1V - 2V 2V - 3V* 1Y - 2Y* 2Y - 3Y 1Z - 2Z* 2Z - 3Z
LINKS AND FUSE EJ601
EJ206
EJ402
Fuse * factory-set position
Table 3-48 - GIE Card Link and Switch Options
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-195
3.4.2.4 - GIE - P Card

1Z Pile E402 3Z
Ala m/ Mn Alm Norm/ Norm Def/ Fail
Battery
P1
1Y E206 3Y
P2
F1
P3
The factory-set configuration is as follows: - Battery connected, - GTR alarm: Sce GND. NOTE: If the GIE - P card was stored, reconnect the battery as it is necessary for data saving. On factory outlet, the card battery is new. DESIGNATION Polarization of TNM alarm relay contact Common GTR sce grounded relay contact Not used F1 = 1,25 A POSITION 1Y - 2Y* 2Y - 3Y
LINKS AND FUSE EJ206
EJ402 Fuse * factory-set position
Table 3-49 - GIE - P Card Link and Switch Options
3.4.2.5 - COB Card

XC SYNC
En service
On
Y701
P1
Actif
QUARTZ/ CRYSTAL : 16670 kHz
Actv
Sync
Sync
Nom
E502
Y501 QUARTZ/ CRYSTAL : 15360 kHz
Nom
Repli
Stdby
Int
Y502 E501 QUARTZ/CRYSTAL : 3686,4 kHz F1
P2
Int
QUARTZ/CRYSTAL : 16670 kHz P3
Y801
The COB Card supports no link and switch options. Fuse: F1 = 2 A. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-196
FMX12 and P3 subscriber shelves
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
UNASSIGNED SLOTS (CHOICE) : - 2MU, - A2S, - V24/V11, - V24/V28, - BBTxRx, - 6PAFC, - Subscr, - Exchan, - Exch12 (FMX12 shelves only), - 3 64 I, - 2w2B1Q, GIE - 4U TRANSFIX or GIE - P CARD - CONF, - IADB.. COB CARD CONVERTER CARD (COB1)
PROTECTION COB CARD (COB2)
FMX4 SHELF
03
UNASSIGNED SLOTS (preferably A2S) COB CARD GIE or GIE - P CARD
04 05 06
-48V Battery Converter or 110V/220V Power Supply
Figure 3-132 - Card Layout in the Shelf

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-197
3.4.3 - Setting Up the Cards

Power converters and 110/220V mains supply unit
The P3 converters are inserted in slots 01 and 02 of the FMX12 or P3 subscriber shelves. The shelf (FMX12 or P3 subscriber) can be equipped with a converter located in any one of the two slots in an unprotected version or with two identical converters in a protected version. The -48 battery converter or 110/220V mains supply unit are inserted in the slot reserved for the power supply in the FMX4 shelves. The converter cards should be checked according to the procedure in 3.4.1.
Other cards
Before inserting the cards, it should be checked that their hardware configuration corresponds to the chosen operating mode. The port cards V24/V28, V24/V11, Exchan, Subscr, Exch12, 4U TRANSFIX, 2w2B1Q, 6PAFC, A2ME, A2S, 364 I, CONF and BBTxRx should be configured using the CT (or remote management system) following insertion. NOTE 1: If the GIE (or GIE - P) card has been stored, the battery must be reconnected, since this is necessary for the saving of data. Cards leave the factory battery charged up or with a new battery (card GIE - P). After inserting a first COB card, the shelf must be reset by turning the converters off/on.
NOTE 3:
Slot numbering is provided in Figure 3-132 . The cards are distributed from left to right as follows: - slot 01 (or reserved) - slot 02 - slots 03 to 14 P3 converter (FMX12 or P3 Subscriber shelf), -48V battery converter or 110/220V mains supply unit (FMX4) shelf), redundant P3 converter (FMX12 or P3 Subscriber shelf), general purpose slots reserved for channel cards declared present or not depending on configuration (see Figure 3-132 ) ; the FMX4 shelf has only four general purpose slots (03 to 06), Management and Auxiliary Interface card (GIE or GIE P), Connections, timing circuit and Synchronization card (COB1), COB protection card (COB2) (FMX12 or P3 Subscriber shelf only).
- slot 15
- slot 16 (or reserved)
- slot 17(or reserved) NOTE:
The port cards inserted in the FMX4 and FMX12 shelves do not have a front panel.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-198
3.4.4 - External Connections

After inserting the cards in the shelf, the operator performs the connection of the different signals and depending on the type of port cards present in the shelf and according to the type of shelf used (refer to sub-section 3.1 "Front Connection Shelf (FMX12 shelf) Installation)" or 3.2 "Rear Connection Shelf (P3 Subscriber shelf) Installation or in 3.3 "Rear connection shelf installation (FMX4 shelf))".
3.4.5 - Card Power-up

Before power-up, check the presence and status of card fuses, particularly on the common equipment unit cards and those equipped with fuse-holders. On power-up, certain ports go through a selftest phase. Their microprocessor initiates the different card units, reads the configuration (factory-set configuration by default), lights the various LEDs on the front panel and initiates the selftest. If no fault is detected during the selftest, the card configuration (type of card) is applied by the GIE or GIE - P card. The chaining of the various initialization phases is specific to each type of card and is specified in the related sub-section in Volume 2.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-199
3.4.6 - Operation 3.4.6.1 - Introduction

The FMX is centrally managed by an operating system which may be: a Craft Terminal (CT), or a remote management system (RMS).
These two operating system may be connected to the equipment simultaneously, locally or remotely. The operation of the FMX includes remote equipment connected to it (low, medium and high bit rate or dual-interface units). Interfacing with the operating system may be: a V24/V28 interface, an EOC channel transmitted in a 8 bps path, a 64 kbps EOC channel carried by one of any of TSs in a 2 Mbps aggregate or tributary port,
- or GIE - P card P1 and P2 management interfaces via others equipments (FOT 155 or RMX). On power-up, the slots are considered free. Any card plugged into a free slot is immediately detected by the common equipment units, subject to its time in the slot being greater than 2 seconds. The slot is then considered not empty. The common equipment units recognize each card type. This is the physical composition, it is automatically applied by the FMX. Using the CT or RMS, the operator can create a logical configuration, that is determine a set of configuration data necessary to operate the equipment: define general system parameters, physical description and associated parameters (cards, ports), connections and their characteristics, alarm allocation etc. On first initialization, the equipment system data (also called general parameters) are determined by default; they can be changed at any time by operator: synchronization, mode of operation etc. Data saving is provided by a battery which allows all the information to be preserved for over 48 hours in the event of a power failure. To use a FMX, the operator must determine the logical configuration, that is: general parameters (synchronization data, equipment behavior etc.), physical description (shelf, cards and ports) and associated parameters (fault severity, monitoring status, loopbacks, performance etc., connection description.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-200
3.4.6.2 - Operating System

A) Craft Terminal (CT)
General
Local operation (possibly remoted via modem) of the equipment is performed via a PC type computer connected on the V.24/V.28 F interface of the GIE or GIE - P card front panel (either the front panel of the GIE adapter card or the connection panel depending on the type of shelf used and of the type of GIE card used). The local connection allows the operation of: - the FMX to which it is connected, either via modem or MEGAPAC equipment, - other FMX or DCE DCM belonging to the management network (a list of accessible equipment is displayed) via a frame relay connection set up between the different units.
Operating Session
Access to the CT operating session may be password-protected. It is single user type session. A FMX, operated in a remote session via the EOC network on a CT cannot be operated in a local session and vice versa. A priority is nevertheless granted to the local user. If a remote user has obtained rights on the CT and controls the operating session, the remote user may be disconnected following a request by the local user (the converse is not true).
Password
By default, the access control function is inactive, access to all MMR functions is unrestricted except the "reset" function. The "Password" function allows passwords for three user classes corresponding to a service category and controlling access to the MMI functions to be defined.
CT Functions
Refer to software Users Handbook No. N5681515XXYY where XX and YY are the version number and the issue number respectively.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-201
B) Remote Management System (RMS)
General
The Remote Management System (RMS) is connected on a V.24/V.28 interface of the connection panel or the GIE adapter card (AdGIE), depending on the type of shelf used, of the gateway FMX. The interface, operated in the synchronous mode and of the HDLC type, behaves like a DTE (for local connection to the RMS, the interface is configured as DCE by positioning a link option on the GIE card or by CT for a GIE- P card): The connection allows the operation: - of the FMX to which the RMS is connected, - of other FMX or DCE DCM type equipment belonging to the management network (a list of accessible equipment is displayed) via the frame relay connection set up between the different equipment units.
Operating Session and RMS Functions

All the equipment parameters which can be modified on the CT can also be modified via the RMS. NOTE: the "reset" function is not accessible via the RMS. Refer to the IONOS network management system Users Handbook No. 56814480-XX where XX indicates is the version an issue number. C) Cohabitation of Modes of Operation The FMX may operate according to the following two modes of operation: - the "connected" mode (operation via the RMS), - and the independent mode (operation via the CT). By default, the FMX mode of operation is the independent mode. The independent mode is used: - for installation, - local maintenance, - when the management relation with the RMS is not set up, - or when there is no RMS. In the last two cases, the FMX is not administratively connected. This mode of operation is used as long as the equipment is not connected administratively. The FMX supervises the RGT interface to detect a possible connection request and no interaction is undertaken between the CT interface and the RGT interface.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-202
In the "connected" mode of operation: - management communication between the FMX and the RMS is operational, - the FMX is operation, - and the network element [(entity (FMX and remote equipment) managed by the RMS] is, administratively, connected to the RMS (action performed on the RMS), - the FMX network element (FMX-NE) reports any functional configuration change to the RMS. NOTE: In this mode of operation, operation may also be performed on the CT, the principle being as follows: - when the operator opens a local operation session on the CT, the FMX requests authorization from the RMS; during the local operation phase, the FMX informs the RMS of any functional configuration change via the continuous function and the RMS makes no modification on the equipment, - when the local operator disconnects, the FMX informs the RMS. The FMX memorizes functional configuration changes made on the CT or RMS in the events memory. When communication between the RMS and the equipment is cut off, the content of this memory is available for the RMS for consistency purposes. The events memory includes continuous recordings of all events occurring in the system and which must be reported to the RMS: - local connection/disconnection to/from operation requests (connection to F interface), - configuration changes, - fault indications (occurrence, disappearance), - exceeded performance threshold indications or return to normal status, - loopback indications. The structure of the information blocks is equivalent to that of the notification messages sent continuously. This memory is circular. It may be read or reset by the operator. Its maximum storage capacity is 800 events.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-203
3.4.6.3 - CT Operating Software Implementation

The procedure for implementing the operating software (CT) is described in User Manual No. N5681515XXYY where XX and YY are the version number and the issue number respectively.
3.4.6.4 - RMS Operating Software Implementation

The procedure for implementing the operating software (RMS) is described in the IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480-XX where XX indicates is the version and issue number. .
3.4.6.5 - Configuration by Default

On power-up, the FMX is configured by default as follows: - multiplexed connection function, - unused TS code: . SIG = 1101 and Data = AIS (all 1), - synchronization source: . nominal = free oscillation, . mode = manual, - no password, - unmasked alarms at each slot and each port (for multiple port card), - absent card code (see glossary): . SIG = 1111 and Data = AIS, - idle code for connections declared deactivated (see glossary): . SIG = 1101 and Data = AIS, - performance thresholds (see 4.5.4): 2 Mbps path: . ES (Errored seconds) = 96 (15 min) and 128 (24 h), . SES (Severely Errored Seconds) = 4 (15 min) and 4 (24 h), - Sb Mux mode of operation, - non-gateway FMX, - FMX12 Shelf.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-204
3.4.6.6 - Start-up Test

The start-up test is performed by the software when the shelf is put into service, or after the restart functions are activated. The software analyzes the validity of configuration data respectively contained on the GIE or GIE - P card (backup memory) and on the COB card (standby memory) to select the data to preserve. "OK": configuration exists. "NOK":no configuration defined. GIE or GIE - P CARD OK OK NOK NOK COB CARD ACTIONS
OK NOK OK NOK
Transfer COB configuration COB to GIE or GIE - P Transfer GIE configuration GIE or GIE - P to COB Transfer COB configuration COB to GIE or GIE - P automatic INITIALIZATION the operator must take up programming again
Table 3-50 - Start-up Test
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-205
3.5 - Particular Operating Functions

This paragraph describes certain particular operating functions accessible in use. It specifies their impact on general equipment operation. These functions are the following: - connection function, - synchronization, - codes to be inserted in the TSs, - performance parameters, - error and fault management, - environment loop processing, - events memory, - CT operating interface, - SEM interface.
3.5.1 - Connection Function

The connection function is defined for each card or port (depending on type of card). It may be multiplexed or cross-connected. Two tributaries or two multiplexes may be linked if they have a multiplexed connection function. If the source termination is a multiplex with a multiplexed connection function, the destination termination must be a tributary with the multiplexed connection function or must have a crossconnected connection function. The table below summarizes the different possible cases. CONNECTION TRIBUTARY PORT AGGREGATE PORT Multiplexed connection Multiplexed connection function function TRIBUTARY PORT TRIBUTARY PORT Cross-connect connection Multiplexed connection function function or cross-connect connection function AGGREGATE PORT AGGREGATE PORT Cross-connect connection Multiplexed connection function function or cross-connect connection function
FUNCTION POSSIBLE
FUNCTION POSSIBLE
FUNCTION POSSIBLE
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-206
MULTIPLEXING
Tributary ports Multiplexed connection function
B C C A B A
2 Mbit/s G.703 Aggregate Multiplexed connection function
B F F D A C A D C B
2 Mbit/s G.703 Aggregate Multiplexed connection function
Multiplexed connection function
Unassigned ports Multiplexed connection function
B C C
A D B D
Unassigned ports Multiplexed connection function
Unavailable configuration
Figure 3-133 - Connection Function
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-207
The selection and distribution of the cards are exclusively determined by operator need and shelf wiring. Figure 3-133 shows the connection function (multiplex and cross-connect).
3.5.2 - Synchronization 3.5.2.1 - Synchronization Sources

The FMX may be synchronized on one of the following 14 timing clocks: one of the 12 2.048 MHz timing clocks from the tributary or multiplex card slots of the shelf in which the following cards are inserted: a 2-2w2B1Q port card (timing clock recovered from a port in the U network mode), a 2MU card, or a A2S card. NOTE: the A2S card which manages up to 4 PCM streams, at a given time only delivers one of the 4 receive timing clocks. The port selected as the synchronization timing clock must be "activated".
- the external synchronization interface, matched at 120 complying with ITU-T recommendation G.703, - the internal clock possibly replaced by a TCXO (depending on the COB card installed). The active synchronization source is the clock from which, at a given moment, the COB card supplies all the necessary frequencies to the rest of the equipment. The equipment is designed to operation with a nominal synchronization source and at most two standby sources ranked in decreasing order of priority. Free oscillation cannot be backed up. Selections are modifiable by the operator on the CT or RMS.
3.5.2.2 - Synchronization Mode

In the event of synchronization source loss (nominal or standby), switching is performed automatically onto the lower priority source until the free oscillation defined as the least priority source, but always available, is attained. The synchronization mode is the mode of return to the hierarchically higher source; two modes are available (on the CT): - automatic timeout mode, - manual mode. Automatic Timeout Mode If the equipment is synchronized on a source Si, the equipment synchronize itself on a higher priority source when the latter has become correct at the end of a T1 (3 s) time period. If the equipment is synchronized on Si and Si goes into fault mode, the equipment tries to synchronizer itself on the lower priority source. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-208
Manual Mode If the equipment is synchronized on Si, only the operator may request the return to higher priority source (from the CT or RMS). If the equipment is synchronized on Si and Si goes into the fault mode, the equipment tries to synchronize itself on the lower priority source.
3.5.2.3 - Synchronization Setting

Whatever the synchronization mode, at any time the operator can set the synchronization on any one of the possible sources or impose the internal clock (from the CT or RMS). IMPORTANT : Faults which may occur in this status are not detected by the software, no alarm is generated, no switching may take place. Nevertheless, on fault detection on the set source (other than the internal clock) the equipment switches to the internal clock but no alarm is generated. The equipment returns under the control of the set source with not timeout when the fault disappears.
The operator may cancel this control order with the return to nominal synchronization function (on the CT), the synchronization management controller is automatically reinitiated in the mode preceding the setting and on the previously designated nominal source. This return to synchronization function allows the operator to return to the synchronization source with the highest priority, in the manual mode.
3.5.3 - Codes to be Inserted in the TSs

To avoid transmission errors, codes are inserted by the common equipment units in the unused data TSs and Signaling half TSs: TSs not allocated to a link, connection deactivated etc.. These codes may be modified by the operator, per card, per port (depending on card type) or per connection. TSs not allocated to a link (or non-existent connection) - Data: - Signaling: code of unused TSs associated with card or port 8 bits selected among 2 possible configurations code of unused TSs associated with card or port 4 bits selected among 8 possible configuration
TSs allocated to a connection declared deactivated - Data: - Signaling: code of unused TSs associated with card or port 8 bits selected among 2 possible configurations code of unused TSs associated with card or port 4 bits selected among 8 possible configuration
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-209
TSs associated with an absent card - Data: - Signaling: AIS: (11111111) absent card code associated with connection 4 bits selected among 8 possible configurations
3.5.4 - Performance Management

Operation performance management essentially consists in running a statistical analysis of transmission performance offered by a transmission resource such as a path or digital section, using indicators built on the number of transmission errors detected. Performance management also performs the following functions: - transmission error detection, - basic indicator generation, that is: number of Errored Seconds (ES), number of Severely Errored Seconds (SES), number of background block errors (BBE), - transmission performance generation (TXP), - transmission of spontaneous messages to the CT and/or RMS with possible exceeded threshold notification, - storage of information in the memories for statistical purposes. Parameters Performance management is established for paths generating the CRC4 procedure. Basic indicators are generated each second based on the number of transmission errors detected in the second. The parameters applied are the following: - ES: Errored Second An ES is a second including at least one transmission error or one fault affecting transmission. - SES: Severely Errored Second An SES is a second including a number of transmission errors greater than a threshold which typically corresponds to an error rate of 10-3 or one fault affecting transmission. - BBE: Background Block Errors A BBE corresponds the accumulated number of errored blocks outside an SES. - UAP: Unavailability Period (number of seconds of unavailability) An unavailability period begins when 10 consecutive SES have been detected and ends after 10 seconds with no SES (these 10 seconds are not part of the unavailability period). When the path is in unavailability status, ES, SES, and BBE counting is stopped and a fault is generated if the port is not masked. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-210
Transmission Performance Generation Transmission performance is determined via the consolidation of basic indicators. It may take on one of the following three values: - Normal Transmission Performance (NTP), - Degraded Transmission Performance (DTP), - Intolerable Transmission Performance (ITP). Transmission performance is determined by counting the number of ES, SES and BBE over non-sliding fixed periods (T1 = 15 minutes to calculate ITP and T2 = 24 hours to calculate DTP) and comparing the ES and SES counters to fixed thresholds. These counters are the following: - counter C1 of ES to determine ITP over T1, - counter C2 of SES to determine ITP over T1, - counter C3 of ES to determine DTP over T2, - counter C4 of SES to determine DTP over T2. At the end of T1 (respectively T2), counters C1 and C2 (respectively C3 and C4) are reset. Passage from NTP to DTP or from NTP or DTP to ITP occurs as soon as counting thresholds are exceeded. On the other hand, a return from DTP to NTP or from ITP to DTP or NTP only occurs at the end of the counting periods (T1 for ITP and T2 for DTP). ITP is declared if during a period T1, one of the counters (C1 or C2) exceeds threshold Si. The measurement is performed with not hysteresis. Exit from ITP is declared if at the end of a period T1 posterior to a ITP period: C1 < S1 et C2 < S2. DTP is declared if ITP status has not already been reached and if during a period T2, one of the counters (C3 or C4) exceeds a threshold Si. Exit from DTP is declared at the end of a period T2. NTP is declared if DTP or ITP status have not already been reached. Performance status (TXP) may be queried by the operator for any path termination (in the transmission and reception directions). NOTE: Values Si are fixed and global to the system: - S1 = 96, S2 = 4, S3 = 128 et S4 = 4.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-211
Error Determination Parameters Error determination parameters define the thresholds for the number of errors or errored blocks per second defining an SES. The values of the error determination parameters are those recommended by ITU-T recommendation M.2100. These values are defined in the table below. RECEPTION DIRECTION ES 1 FAL* 1 Sig Fail at 2 Mbps 2048 kbps (with CRC4 processing 1 CRC4 reception error N1 (N1 = 805) CRC4 reception errors 1 CRC4 transmission error N2 (N2 = 805) CRC4 transmission errors 1 RAL** e (e = 128) RAL * FAL ** RAL : Frame Alignment Loss : Remote Alarm Indication YES YES YES YES SES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO YES TRANSMISSION DIRECTION ES SES
Interface
Error(s) detected per second
Transmission Performance Parameters Values Si are fixed and global to the system: - S1 = 96, S2 = 4, S3 = 128, S4 = 4 (measurement performed without hysteresis). Notifications Exceeded thresholds are notified for each path termination, independently for each transmission direction, if the port is unmasked. The notification contains the following information: - path termination identification (on 23 characters), - transmission or reception direction, - date and time, - measurement period (15 minutes or 24 hours), - reason exceeded (ES and SES). These notifications are also recorded continuously in an event memory.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-212
Performance Memories
Performance Register Memories

The information resulting from the transmission performance calculations are stored in performance register in cumulated form over fixed time periods (15 minutes or 24 hours) for all paths. This register is associated, on an individual basis, with each path termination. At the end of each period: the content of the register is spontaneously transferred to the CT if the path is monitored, the register is reset (cumulative counts reset), a new measurement period begins.
The performance register contains the following information: path termination identification, transmission or reception direction, period start date, period duration, effective measurement time, number of ES, number of SES, number of BBE, and the number of unavailability periods.
This memory has a capacity of 1000 blocks for all the paths. It is managed in a circular manner and may be queried by the operator.
Unavailability Register Memories

The memory of the unavailability registers has a capacity of 500 blocks for all the paths. The unavailability register contains the following information: path termination identification, transmission or reception direction, unavailability period start date (to the second), end of unavailability date (to the second).
This memory is managed in a circular manner and may be queried by the operator.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-213
3.5.5 - Error and Fault Management

Error and Fault Management performs the following functions: elementary fault detection, fault indication (FI) generation, spontaneous message transmission to CT and/or RMS, information storage in events memory, local alarm generation, local alarm control access means generation.
Fault Detection The faults and errors are either detected by the common equipment units or transmitted by the port cards. These faults may have the following different origins: fault states detected on the equipment (Signal fail, FAL, AIS, converter fault etc), transmission error counting, configuration error detection.
Actions consequential to fault detection, taken by the common equipment units, may be the following: lighting (extinguishing) of LEDs on the GIE or GIE - P card front panel, notification of fault and error messages to auxiliary interfaces, activation of central office alarms, constitution of an events memory.
Fault Indication (FI) Generation Fault Indications (FI) are attributes of objects seen by the CT. The FIs are generated on the basis of faults or errors detected by filtering and (or) combination. The purpose of the filtering operation, internal to the equipment, performed on the basis of time criterion (confirmation time on occurrence), is to confirm the fault.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-214
FI Confirmation The confirmation of the occurrence of a FI is performed on a timeout. The following parameters are attributed to each FI: FI local severity (major, minor or no alarm) which determines the contribution to the alarm type, an occurrence timeout (Ta) which allows the FI to be confirmed if the elementary fault lasts longer than Ta. NOTE: the Ta occurrence timeout only exists for port type FIs. The FI local severity and Ta occurrence timeout parameters may be modified by the operator (CT). Ta is worth 0 or 1 seconds and its default value varies according to the entity. FI status changes (occurrence an (or) disappearance) are notified to the CT if it is connected. Local Alarms The FMX generates local alarms (major and/or minor) based on the different equipment FIs. The major alarm (respectively minor) is activated as soon as a FI with major severity (respectively minor) is confirmed on an object. Control Access Means
Present Alarms Cause Display

An MMI control order allows the operator to display the causes(s) of the alarms present at the common equipment level. NOTE: When the cause of the alarms present is inherent to the position of the "Normal/fault keys located on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card, there is no alarm.
Fault Severity Display

An MMI control order allows the operator to display or modify the severity of each fault for each entity managed. Fault and Error Description The faults and errors are broken down into different classes: card or port level fault and error, equipment level fault and error, faults and errors associated with the synchronization functions, faults and errors associated with the operation functions (auxiliary interfaces etc.). Faults relative to equipment are not maskable. Port level faults and errors depend on card type. These faults and errors may be masked (un-monitored status) at the port or globally at the card level. Virtual interface level faults and errors may be masked at the global level (2 Mbps port) or at the connection level.
NOTE:
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-215
3.5.6 - Environment Loop Processing

The environment entities are managed via the remote monitoring and remote control interfaces available in loop form. A remote monitoring signal is an all or nothing device characterized by a status bit which indicates the presence or absence of an environment status or connected equipment. Three remote monitoring interfaces may be associated with a determined entity (the remote monitoring is processed like a fault for this entity). A remote control can be used to control an environment entity (door opening). The remote controls, two in number, are the maintained type (each one is activated or deactivated by loading a status value). Environment Object Implementation By default, the remote monitoring and remote control interfaces are inactivated. They may only be activated after the associated environment objects have been enabled. The operator may enable an environment object by indicating: its name ( 8 characters), for each remote control, interface no. initial status value associated (open or closed), activation mode and associated criteria, and for each remote monitoring signal, interface no., fault identification and status value associated and fault characteristics (severity, time delay).
Application in Operation Once the object has been enabled, each remote monitoring signal is regularly scanned. The changes in status value are processed depending on the case, such as an FI occurrence or disappearance, in accordance with general fault processing. Each remote control declared in the manual mode may then be activated or deactivated by the operator.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-216
3.5.7 - Events Memory

The events memory includes continuous recordings of all events occurring in the system and which must be notified to the CT, that is: local operation connection and disconnection requests (connection to F interface), fault indications (occurrence or disappearance), exceeded performance threshold indications or return to normal status, loopback indications.
The structure of the information blocks is equivalent to notification messages sent continuously. The events memory (maximum capacity = 800 events), of the circular type, may be read and reset by the operator.
3.5.8 - CT Interface
The FMX detects the connection and disconnection of the CT on the local auxiliary interface and verifies that no other session is in progress. The local session corresponds to the time during which the operator can transmit control orders to the FMX. The local session is automatically closed in the event of the following: CT disconnection, via the "Reset" and "Restart" functions or when the GIE or GIE - P card is removed from the shelf.
3.5.9 - SEM Message Processing

The FMX can be connected to a centralized supervision and maintenance structure (SEM) via an asynchronous serial interface whose general characteristics comply with the CSE J 52-13 standard. The protocol is the master/slave type with the FMX being the slave. SEM Interface Characteristics Transmission speed is 9600 baud. Interchanges with the collection equipment are performed on the initiative of the latter via query/response type messages. Each character is composes of 11 bits: 1 character synchronization bit (START) always with a value of "0", 8 useful bits carrying the information (the first bit transmitted is the low order bit), 1 parity bit (P) providing protection against transmission errors (the value of this bit is 0 for an even number of bits in status 1 among the 8 useful bits), the character separation bit (STOP) always with a value of "1".
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-217
Messages transmitted by the collection equipment to the FMX There are four different types of messages: 101: procedure initialization, 102: routine interrogation, 103: request for monitored equipment configuration, 105: request for local alarm status.
Short messages such as 101 or 102 are composed of three bytes: first byte (high order bit at 1): total length of message, second byte: order code, third byte: longitudinal redundancy character (LRC),
Long messages such as 103 or 105 are composed of several bytes: first byte (high order bit at 1): total length of message, second byte: order code (bits E and F are not managed; they are set to "0"), third byte: order code index, information bytes, last byte: longitudinal redundancy character (LRC).
Message 101: PROCEDURE INITIALIZATION This message is used during a restart procedure, either after the supervision equipment has stopped, or after the interchanges have been cut off. 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 LRC Response: message 201 or 202. Message 102: ROUTINE INTERROGATION This message allows interchange maintenance; it is mainly used when the collection equipment has no information to transmit to the supervised equipment. 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 N 0 0 0 0 1 0 LRC Normal response: message 201 or 202.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-218
Message 103: CONFIGURATION REQUEST This message allows the supervision equipment to obtain knowledge on equipment type and shelf configuration. 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LRC Response: 204 Message 105: ALARM STATUS REQUEST This message is sent by the supervision equipment after a response to a routine interrogation indicating the existence of an error on the equipment: errors, fault indications, maintenance information. 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LRC Response: message 205. Messages received by the collection equipment (FMX to CE) There are three different types of messages: - 200: received message fault (procedure error or response to an interrogation which does not exist in the integrated supervision message library), - 201: response to routine interrogation, - 202: initialization request, - 204: identification and configuration of supervised equipment, - 205: identification and location of faults detected locally. The structure of short or long messages is identical to that defined for the messages transmitted: - short messages: 200, 201, 202, - long messages: 204, 205. Message 200: RECEIVED MESSAGE FAULT This message is used to indicate any message reception fault (order code not understood, N numbering code incorrect with order code different from preceding message).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-219
On receiving this message, the EC must reset the procedure. 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LRC
Message 201: REPONSE TO ROUTINE INTERROGATION 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 1 LRC Bit D: detection of fault on shelf (shelf, card, port level) of FMX (D=1 fault present)
Normal response to interrogations 101 and 102. Message 202: INITIALIZATION REQUEST This message is transmitted: - when an event occurs on FMX power-up, - if a modification in operating conditions has occurred (change in equipment description). The CE must re-request the configuration or undertake an initialization procedure. 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 LRC
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-220
Message 204: SUPERVISED EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION This message, which is the normal response to control order 103, defines the global installation of the equipment. The message is 54 bytes long. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 X X 0 Y Y 0 b6 b13 b20 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 X X 1 Y Y 0 b5 b12 b19 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 X X 0 Y Y 0 b4 b11 b18 51 52 53 54 0 0 0 b6 b13 b20 b5 b12 b19 b4 b3 b11 b10 b18 b17 LRC b2 b9 b16 b1 b8 b15 b0 b7 b14 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X 1 Y Y 0 b3 b10 b17 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X X 1 Y Y 0 b2 b9 b16 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 X X 1 Y Y b1 b1 b8 b15 0 0 0 1 M 1 M 1 S 0 0 P 0 4 0 0 V X Version 2 X Version 1 0 Y Revision 2 Y Revision 1 b0 b0 These three bytes are b7 repeated 12 times b14
- Bit D: fault detection (shelf, card, port level) D=1 fault present - Byte 4 to byte 16: 13 bytes for equipment identification in ASCII code form.
vers2 vers1
rev2 rev1
vers2vers1 : coding on two bits of GIE or "GIE - P" card software version no. rev2rev1 : coding on two bits of GIE or "GIE - P" card software revision no. - Byte 17: byte for shelf type indication. SHELF P3 Subscr FMX12 FMX4 Bit b2 0 0 1 Bit b1 1 1 0 Bit b0 0 1 0
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-221
- Byte 18 to byte 53: three bytes are associated with each of the 12 slots. 0 0 0 b6 b13 b20 b5 b12 b19 b4 b11 b18 b3 b10 b17 b2 b9 b16 b1 b8 b15 b0 b7 b14
b4b3b2b1b0: b6b5 b13b12b11b10b9b8b7 b20b19b18b17b16b15b14:
type of card described in the slot (according to table below)
configuration element implying a different reading of message 205 fault bits CARD NAME 1 channel BBTxRx V24/V11(V10) V24/V28 Subscr 6 3 64 I Exch 6 6PAFC 2 Mbit/s multi-use 2 Mbit/s A2S 2 w 2B1Q Exch12 4U TRANSFIX CONFERENCE
b4b3b2b1b0 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00111 10000 01000 01001 01010 10001 10010 01110 11111
TYPE BBTxRx V24/V11 V24/V28 Subscr 3 64 I Exchan 6PAFC A2ME A2S 2w2B1Q Exch12 4 U TRANSFIX CONF Slot free or card absent*
*: for FMX4 (or MD COMPACT) shelf which has only 4 general purpose slots. NOTE: The same type of card is used for cards A2S.
BBTxRx Type (00001) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205. V24/V11 Type (00010) b9 b12 b16 0 0 0 0 1 1 b8 b11 b15 0 0 1 1 0 1 b7 b10 b14 0 1 0 1 0 1 Rate and over-rate (port 1) Rate and over-rate (port 2) Rate and over-rate (port 3) 48 kbps and V.110 frame 48 kbps and X.50bis "jamming " X50 bis 56 kbps and V.110 frame 56 kbps and V.110 or X.50bis "jamming " Other rates . no over-rate Unused port
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-222
V24/V28 Type (00011) b6 b8 b10 b12 0 0 1 1 b5 b7 b9 b11 0 1 0 1 Rate (port 1) Rate (port 2) Rate (port 3) Rate (port 4) 4800 bps or unused * between 9600 and 38400 bps 48 or 56 kbps 64 kbps
* Port no. 4 is unused in a P3 Subscr. Subscr Type (00100) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205. 3 64 I Type (00101) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205. Exchan Type (00111) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205. Exch12 Type (10001) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205. 6PAFC Type (10000) No configuration element modifies the reading of message 205.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-223
2MU Type (01000) MODE OF OPERATION Port 1 TR2G tributary RESERVED G.732 tributary G.732i tributary TRANSFIX G.736 tributary RESERVED RESERVED TR2G aggregate G704 aggregate RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED
b9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
b8 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
b7 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
b6 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
A2S type (01001) MODE OF OPERATION Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 TR2G tributary RESERVED G.732 tributary G.732i tributary TRABSFIX G.736 tributary G.736 tributary 1984 kbps RESERVED TR2G aggregate G704 aggregate G704 aggregate 1984 kbps RESERVED G732 tributary with Virtual Interfaces G736 tributary with Virtual Interfaces G732i tributary with Virtual Interfaces Port unused or deactivated
b8 b12 b16 b20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
b7 b11 b15 b19 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
b6 b10 b14 b18 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
b5 b9 b13 b17 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-224
Type 2w2B1Q type (01010) MODE OF OPERATION Port 1 Port 2 U network U Subscr U remote TRANSMIC RESERVED
b6 b8 0 0 1 1
b5 b7 0 1 0 1
For U remote Transmic mode: b10 b12 0 0 1 1 b9 b11 0 1 0 1 TYPE OF S. UNIT (on port 1 of 2w 2B1Q card) (on port 2 of 2w 2B1Q card)
Medium/high bit rate S.unit RESERVED Low bit rate S. unit RESERVED
4U Transfix type (10010) MODE OF OPERATION Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 RESERVED RESERVED U remote TRANSMIC RESERVED
b6 b8 b10 b12 0 0 1 1
b5 b7 b9 b11 0 1 0 1
For U remote Transmic mode: b14 b16 b18 b20 0 0 1 1 b13 b15 b17 b19 0 1 0 1 TYPE OF S. UNIT (on port 1 of 4 U Transfix card) (on port 2 of 4 U Transfix card) (on port 3 of 4 U Transfix card) (on port 4 of 4 U Transfix card) Medium/high bit rate S. unit 2HR 2 x 64 kbps S. unit Low bit rate S. units 2HR 1 x 128 kbps S. unit
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-225
Message 205: Identification of faults detected locally (message length 53 bytes) This message is the response to control order 105 (message length 53 bytes). It allows the alarms present on the shelf to be synthesized. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 b6 b6 b13 b20 b27 1 0 0 b5 b5 b12 b19 b26 1 0 0 b4 b4 b11 b18 b25 0 0 0 b3 b3 b10 b17 b24 1 1 0 b2 b2 b9 b16 b23 0 0 0 b1 b1 b8 b15 b22 1 1 0 b0 b0 b7 b14 b21
Shelf fault These four bytes are repeated 12 times
LRC - Bit D: detection of fault on shelf (shelf, card, port level) (D = 1 presence of at least one fault).
- Byte 4: one byte for the identification of an equipment or shelf type fault. 0 b6: b5: b4: b3: b2: b1: b0: b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Converter fault ("Conver") "COB" card in slot 16 ("COB 16") absent ("AbsC") "COB" card in slot 17 ("COB 17") absent ("AbsC") Synchronization switching fault ("SynSw") General Synchronization Fault ("SynGen") 0 0
Each slot has four bytes for which each bit has a significance which depends on the type of card concerned. The abbreviations used below are explained at the end of the document. The suffix -i which ends certain abbreviations indicates that the fault concerned is relative to port -i of a card with several ports. Note 1: For all card types a single table is described independently of the mode of operation. If one of the faults concerned does not exist in a given mode of operation, the corresponding bit is set to 0. Considering that the faults from the extension may be obtained via another network access, only port card local faults and possibly a synthesis bit for the faults on the remote unit are reported.
Note 2:
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-226
Note 3:
When the card (or port) is masked, fault and associated performance states are disabled and the corresponding bits are set to 0. When one of the ports is masked, the fault and performance states for this port are disabled. The corresponding bits are set to 0. On declaration, the cards and ports are unmasked. This masking can be modified on the CT. On configuration modification (in description sense), the FMX returns a 205 response with bit D set to 0, to force the EC to return a 102 message to which the FMX responds with a 202 message. The EC must then re-request the configuration or undertake a reset procedure.
Note 4:
BBTxRx type (00001) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt BER 0 0 C Out LFail 0 0 Wdg RF* 0 0 NF rMU 0 0 SigFail 0 0 0 FALE/H 0 0 0 CSF 0 0 0
* RF = (RAL, ReqmF) The SigFail fault is inactive and set to 0. V24/V11 Type (00010) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt NF_1 0 0 C Out V110_1 0 0 Wdg NF_2 0 0 0 V110_2 0 0 0 NF_3 0 0 0 V110_3 0 0 0 0 0 0
The V 110_i fault may be activated only if frame V110 exists. Otherwise it is set to 0. V24/V28 Type (00011) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt V110_2 RteFlt_4 0 C Out RteFlt_2 0 0 Wdg NF_3 0 0 NF_1 V110_3 0 0 V110_1 RteFlt_3 0 0 RteFlt_1 NF_4 0 0 NF_2 V110_4 0 0
Subscr Type (00100) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt LEF_2 EarthF_4 0 C Out EarthF_2 NF_5 0 Wdg NF_3 LEF_5 0 NF_1 LEF_3 EarthF_5 0 LEF_1 EarthF_3 NF_6 0 EarthF_1 NF_4 LEF_6 0 NF_2 LEF_4 EarthF_6 0
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-227
3 64 I Type (00101) 0 0 0 FusFlt 0 0 C Out 0 0 Wdg 0 0 SigFail_1 0 0 SigFail_2 0 0 SigFail_3 0 0 0 0 0
Exchan Type (00111) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt NF_3 LEF_6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C Out LEF_3 Wdg NF_4 NF_1 LEF_4 LEF_1 NF_5 NF_2 LEF_5 LEF_2 NF_6
6PAFC Type (10000) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt NF_5 0 0 C Out NF_6 0 0 Wdg 0 0 0 NF_1 0 0 0 NF_2 0 0 0 NF_3 0 0 0 NF_4 0 0 0
Exch12 Type (10001) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt NF_3 LEF_6 NF_10 C Out LEF_3 NF_7 LEF_10 Wdg NF_4 LEF_7 NF_11 NF_1 LEF_4 NF_8 LEF_11 LEF_1 NF_5 LEF_8 NF_12 NF_2 LEF_5 NF_9 LEF_12 LEF_2 NF_6 LEF_9 0
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-228
2MU Type (01000) 0 0 0 0 - TR2Ga Mode: - Transfix Mode: - G736a Mode: - TR2Gr Mode: - G704r Mode: - G732Ia Mode: NF NF NF NF MFAL FusFlt FAL or MFAL 0 0 NF MFAL MFAL C Out NF 0 0 Wdg 0 0 0 SigFail 0 0 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 AIS or TLSF 0 0 0 TXP1 0 0 0 TXP0 0 0 0
Performance status (TXP0 and TXP1) is a synthesis of the performance status calculated for reception and the performance status calculated for transmission over 15 minute and 24 hour periods. TXP1 TXP0 PATH PERFORMANCE STATUS (taking into account transmission and reception directions) No fault or CRC4 inactive Degraded performance status Intolerable performance status Path unavailable
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-229
A2S Type (01001) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt FAL_1 or MFAL-1 NF_2 MQS_4 C Out NF_1 SigFail_3 AIS_4 or TLSF_4 Wdg SigFail_2 AIS_3 or TLSF_3 FAL_4 or MFAL-4 SigFail_1 AIS_2 or TLSF_2 FAL_3 or MFAL-3 NF_4 AIS_1 or TLSF_1 FAL_2 or MFAL-2 NF_3 0 TXP1_1 TXP1_2 TXP1_3 TXP1_4 TXP0_1 TXP0_2 TXP0_3 TXP0_4
- TR2Ga mode - G732Ia mode - Transfix mode - G736a mode - G736a 1984 mode - TR2Gr mode - G704r mode - G704r 1984 mode - G732Ia IV mode - G732a IV mode - G736a IV mode
: : : : : : : : : : :
NF_i NF_i MFAL_i NF_i NF_i NF_i NF_i NF_i NF_i MFAL_i MFAL_i
inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0
NF_i = synthesis of NF faults of Virtual Interfaces of port i NF_i MFAL_i inactive and set to 0
Performance status (TXP0 and TXP1) is a synthesis of the performance status calculated for reception and the performance status calculated for transmission over 15 minute and 24 hour periods. TXP1 TXP0 PATH PERFORMANCE STATUS (taking into account transmission and reception direction) No fault or CRC4 inactive Degraded performance status Intolerable performance status Path unavailable
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-230
2w 2B1Q Type (01010) For 2 ports in ISDN mode 0 0 0 0 FusFlt RF_1 LoSU _2 UactF_2 C Out NF_1 LSynU _2 RSLF_2 Wdg FALV4_1 CkSlp_2 SunitF_2 LoSU_1 UactF_1 PwFail _2 PortFA_2 LSynU_1 RSLF_1 RF_2 0 CkSlp_1 SunitF_1 NF_2 0 PwFail_1 PortF_1 FALV4_2 0
- U network mode:
RF_i = (LSL_i, RSY_i, A3_i, Inva.M_i)
- U subscriber mode: RF_i = (A3_i, Inva.M_i) - U rem Fr mode.: - U rem Fr mode.: - U network mode: - U subscriber mode - U rem Fr mode: PwFail_i PwFail_i CkSlp_1 CkSlp_i SunitF_i = (DAlimR_i, DCompR_i, DDialR_i) DefAcc_i = (FAL110, NF) on remote S.unit on port i of 2w2B1Q card UactF_ RLSF_i i UactF_ RLSF_i i RF_i NF_i Sunit F_i PortF_i SunitF_i FALV4t_ i PortF_i inactive and set to 00 inactive and set to 0 inactive and set to 0
4 U TRANSFIX Type (10010) 0 0 0 0 FusFlt SunitF_1 PortF_2 LoSU_4 C Out PortF_1 LoSU_3 LSynU _4 Wdg LoSU_2 LSynU_3 UActF_4 LoSU_1 LSynU_2 UActF_3 RLSF_4 LSynU_1 UactF_2 RLSF_3 SunitF_4 UActF_1 RLSF_2 SunitF_3 PortF_4 RLSF_1 SunitF_2 PortF_3 0
SUnitF_i = (TPwrF_i, TCompE_i, TCommF_i) PortF_i = (NF) on one port of remote S. unit on port i of 4 U transfix card Abbreviations A3: AIS: BER: CkSlp: COBxx: Conver: COut: CSF: A3 message in bits A Alarm Indication Signal Bit Error Rate Clock slip "COB" card in slot xx Converter fault Card out Clock Signal Failure
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-231
EarthF: FAL: FAL110: FALE/H: FALV4: FusFlt: IV: Inva.M: LEF: LFail: LoSU: LSL: LSF: LSynU: MFAL: NF: PwFail: PortF: RAL: ReF: RF: RSLF: RSY: RteFlt: SigFail: SunitF: TCommF: TCompE: TPwrF: TLSF: UActF: Wdg:
earth to line Failure Frame Alignment Loss Frame Alignment Loss for V110 frame Frame Alignment Loss for E or H frame V4 Frame Alignment Loss Synthesis of different faults on power supply units (+5V, -5V...) of concerned card Virtual Interface Invalid message in bits A Local Extension Failure Line Failure for BBTxRx card U Loss of Signal LSL message in bits A Line Signal Failure U Loss of synchronization Multiframe Alignment Loss Network Fault Power Fail Synthesis of local faults on s unit ports supported by 2w2B1Q card (network fault, FAL V110) or 4U Transfix card (network fault) Remote Alarm Indication Remote equipment fault Remote fault: synthesis of faults detected on remote unit received on card Remote Signaling Local Failure RSY Message in bits A Rate Adaptation Fault Signal Failure Synthesis of S unit faults detected on 2w 2B1Q card(TCommF, TPwrF, TCompE) Subscriber Terminal Communications Failure Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error Subscriber Terminal Power Failure Transmission Line Signal Failure U activation fault Watchdog fault
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-232
3.6 - Evolution
This sub-section concerns the evolution of the physical configuration in operation. Equipment characteristics are accessible via the CT (or RMS).
3.6.1 - Adding a Port Card

The FMX allows new cards to be added to the physical configuration without altering operation in progress. The procedure proposed is the following: - plug the card in the free or previously freed slot.
1) If the slot is not allocated: No card has been described for this location by the operator using the CT If the card is correctly recognized: - the card is applied in the physical configuration. The operator may query its characteristics (software version and type) using the CT. The operator may then declare the card, assign is fault and alarm parameters, create connections. By default the card is unmasked as well as its ports.
2) If the slot was already allocated: The FMX analyzes the information of this new card and compares it to that of the card declared in this location in the physical description. Two cases are possible: a) the new card is different from the previous card in terms of type. The different card fault is generated. If the operator really wants this new card, the physical description must be modified. The previous card must be deleted which deletes the connections and the different card fault. The new can may then be described by the operator. b) the new card and the previous one are of the same type. The FMX reprograms the new card with the parameters of the former cad. The card absent fault disappears. Service is restored.
Note: Replacing an identical card may be performed without the CT.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-233
3.6.2 - Modification of a Port Card without Removing it from the Shelf

The operator may modify the port cards via the CT. After modification validation, it is applied in the physical configuration. The connections can be deleted in certain cases. The operator will have been notified locally via the CT.
3.6.3 - Port Card Removal

When a port card is definitively removed, the operator switches a slot from occupied status to free status; the procedure proposed is the following: - delete the card on the CT, this choice must be confirmed, - remove the card from the shelf. NOTE: The function deletes the memorization of the card in the slot and all the connections transiting through this slot, no message informs the operator if connections transiting through this slot exist or not.
3.6.4 - GIE or GIE - P Card Downloading

GIE or GIE - P card downloading allows the downloading of the code or data in the flashEPROM memory from a PC, by utilizing the serial maintenance link of the GIE or GIE - P card. Local GIE or GIE - P card downloading authorizes the an application code version to be changed with not physical intervention on the card. Incorrect operation risks linked to this intervention are thus eliminated. The code file to be downloaded is coded according to S MOTOROLA format. This tool allows a single version of the GIE or GIE - P card code to be downloaded using its DEBUG channel. Local downloading and the card application cannot operate simultaneously. When local downloading is activated, the card application is automatically stopped. When an error is detected during code transfer, downloading is stopped. There is no communication protocol between the PC and the card authorizing a restart. The transfer operation must be restarted from the beginning. Downloading utilizes a serial link with a bit rate of 19200 bps. As a result, transfer time on the serial link is about 15 minutes.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-234
3.6.4.1 - Minimum Downloading Configuration

Minimum downloading configuration is based on a PC-type computer whose minimum required characteristics are the following (the configuration used to operate the CT is suitable): 80386 processor with 25 MHz clock, 1 40 MB hard disk, 4 MB RAM, 1 3"1/2 (1,44 MB) disk drive, RS232 (COM1 or COM2) serial port Communication channel bit rate is set at 19200 bps bu the Boot Start Program (BSP) of the GIE or GIE - P card.
NOTE:
a mouse port (or and additional serial port) for mouse use, 1 keyboard, 1 mouse, 1 VGA B&W or color screen (16 gray levels), a downloading cable composed of the cable used for local FMX operation via the CT (no. 6993400) and a 25-way female/male adapter providing access to the DEBUG channel (no. 55620015), 1 3"1/2 (1,44 MB) diskette containing the downloading software and the file to be downloaded.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-235
3.6.4.2 - FMX Connection for Downloading

FMX
RS232
LP CABLE 9/25 way (N 6993400) + 25 male/female way adapter (N 55620015)
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-236
Floppy disk
Figure 3-134 - Connection to FMX for GIE or GIE - P Card downloading
GIE card side (J1)
PC side
1.80 m
6993400 1 Cable 2 Cable no. 3 3 HE 502 connector (25-way male) 4 HE 502 connector (9-way female)
Connection diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 14
103 104 105 106 107 102 108 109
1 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5
22
25 13
Figure 3-135 - CT Cable (Local Operation)
L = 65 cm appro.
55 620 015
GIE card side (J1)
Local CT cable side
Connection diagram
1 2 3 4 5 16 14
RD ED
1 2 3 4 5
14
HE 502 plug connector (25-way male)
6 7 8 20
TS
6 7 8 20 22
22
25 13
25 13
Figure 3-136 - Downloading Adapter for GIE or GIE - P Card
3.6.4.3 - Software Environment

GIE or GIE - P card downloading requires the use of the "TERMINAL" utility which is executed within the Windows 3.1 environment on the MS-DOS version 6 operating system.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-237
3.6.4.4 - GIE or GIE - P Card Downloading Procedure

Connect the PC to the FMX according to Figure 3-134 . Switch on the PC and screen. Insert the diskette containing the downloading software and file to be downloaded in the 3"1/2 disk drive (a or b). Go to the operating system log-in (MS-DOS) of the PC (C:\>) and enter the following a (or b):\gie.exe c:\ to initiate the gie.exe program of the diskette inserted in drive a or b. Check that the gie.x file was created in the root directory of drive C.
- Initiate Windows. NOTE: The GIE.X file must be erased manually at the end of the downloading procedure. In the Windows program manager, select the "Terminal" icon to run the application, the terminal windows appears. Select the Communications... command of the Terminal Application Settings menu the following window is displayed:
- In the different fields of the Communications window, select the following parameters by clicking on the appropriate option buttons: "Connector": "Baud Rate": "Data Bits": "Stop Bits": "Parity": "Flow Control": COM1, 19200 bps, 8, 1, None, None.
NOTE:
Port selection allows the other parameters to be activated and thus programmed.
- Select the OK command button in the Communications window to enter the options selected and return to the Terminal window.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-238
- Press on Enter: the following window is displayed:
NOTE:
When the GIE or GIE - P card has already been downloaded, only TL> appears. When the GIE or GIE - P card has never been downloaded, the "Card without program" message is displayed.
- Hit Ctrl T in the Terminal window, the following message is displayed:
You are now under the control of the local downloading software of the GIE or GIE - P card. Type "d" then hit "Enter" to erase the flash-EPROMs, the following message is displayed:
Check that the "CR Clear = 0" message appears, otherwise begin the operation again ("d" then "enter").
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-239
Enter: - "r" then "Enter" to reset the data in the RAM, - then "s" and "Enter" to reset the data in the saved RAM, - and "l" then "Enter" to initiate the downloading and flash-EPROM programming, the following message is displayed:
Select the Send Text File... in the Transfers menu; the following window appears:
Under c:\ select the gie.x file and click on "OK" in the "Send Text File" window.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-240
Downloading begins and the following window is displayed:
The indicator, located to the right of the Restart command button is used to follow the downloading process. On the TL> prompt, type "." then "Enter" to end the transfer. When the downloading is finished, a message is displayed with a report on the transfer operation. If an error is detected during the transfer, the downloading is stopped. The error encountered is displayed to the operator. If the transfer occurred correctly (the Flash-EPROM programming report is 0), the Flash-EPROM programming operation is initiated; otherwise the entire operation must be restarted. Close Terminal application.
NOTE:
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-241
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 3-242
SECTION 4 MAINTENANCE
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-2
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.1 - Preventive Maintenance

The only preventive maintenance operation applicable to the FMX Digital Cross-connect System is the replacement of the GIE, or GIE - P or IADB Card battery. It is recommended to replace it every six years.
WARNING If the battery is incorrectly replaced there is a risk of explosion. Only replace with same type battery or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer instructions.
Battery Replacement Procedure Remove the GIE, GIE - P or IADB card; when GIE or GIE-P is removed the FMX operates in the protected mode. Unsolder the battery (GIE card) or remove the battery (GIE - P or IADB Card) and replace with a new identical battery: - 2.5 V - 40 mA/h Cadmium Nickel battery for GIE card, - CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 270 mA/h Lithium battery for GIE - P card, - CR 2430 for Printed Board, 3 V - 500 mA/h Lithium battery for GIE - P card, Replace the GIE, GIE - P or IADB Card back in position. When GIE or GIE-P is replaced FMX runs start-up tests (see Sub-section 3.4.6.6). When IADB card is replaced in the shelf, realize the starting-up of the card (see Volume 2 Chapter 14). Enter date and time.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-3
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2 - Corrective Maintenance 4.2.1 - Principle

The procedures below permit the logic analysis of failures and suggest solutions to restoring service at the shortest possible notice. They apply only to corrective maintenance consisting of card replacement in the field.
Fault and Error Detection

Faults and errors are either detected by the Common Equipment Units, or transmitted by equipment port cards. These faults may have the following different origins: faults states detected on the equipment such as "SigFail", "FAL", "AIS", "Conver",... transmission error counting, configuration error detection.
Possible consequential actions are: - central office alarm activation, - fault and error message notification to auxiliary interfaces, - lighting or extinguishing of one or more LED(s) on the card front panels, - constitution of events memory. NOTE: This section deals with overall equipment maintenance only. For alarms detected on a particular port, refer to the volume 2 section dealing with the equipment card corresponding to that port.
Fault Indication (FI) Generation

Fault Indications (FI) are attributes of objects detected by the CT or RMS (several FIs may be assigned to one object). The FIs are generated on the basis of faults or errors detected through filtering. The purpose of the filtering, based on a time criterion (confirmation time on fault occurrence) is to confirm the fault.
FI Confirmation
The confirmation of an FI occurrence is performed on a timeout. The following parameters which may be modified by the operator (CT or RMS) are assigned to each FI: - local severity (major, minor, no alarm), - occurrence timeout (0 or 1 second) (FI confirmed if and only if the fault lasts longer than the occurrence timeout). FI status changes (occurrence and disappearance) are notified to the CT if it is connected to the equipment and to the RMS. NOTE: The occurrence of slot type FIs disables the disappearance of FIs linked to the card allocated to this slot.
The equipment generates major and minor alarms on the basis of the different equipment FIs (the major alarm, respectively minor, is activated as soon as a major severity, respectively minor, FI is confirmed on an object). TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-4
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.2 - Maintenance Facilities

The operator may use the following sources of information for easier fault locating: - card front panel LEDs and controls (test sockets, etc.) listed below, - auxiliary functions enabling the operator to list equipment configuration information and read alarm status, - alarm monitoring facilities including the display of notifications on the CT or RMS. - maintenance functions, - loopback facilities (both manual and remote-controlled), available on the various port cards, as described in Volume 2 for each particular card.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-5
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.2.1 - Front Panel LEDs and Controls

FMX card front panels support LEDs providing visual presentation of card alarms, control switches and test sockets.
P3 Power Converter, -48V battery Power Converter and 110/220V mains supply
Red "Fail" LED "On/Off" Switch (located on rear panel of 110/220V mains supply) Four test points: "+ 5V/0V", "- 5V/0V" "+ 53V/0V" and "- 53V/0V" (P3 power converter only) GIE (or GIE - P) Card Red "Mj Alm" LED "Norm/Fail" switch Red "Mn Alm" LED "Norm/Fail" switch Modem/Loc Switch Major alarm Major alarm acknowledgment switch Minor alarm Minor alarm acknowledgment switch validation of an CT interface; DCE type CT interface for FMX local management (Loc) (interface on card front panel) or DTE type interface for FMX management via a modem (Modem) (connection panel or front panel of GIE (or GIE - P) adapter card depending on shelf used), connection to Craft Terminal (CT) locally voltage failure at card output System power-up/down
Measurement access
25-way connector
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-6
4 - MAINTENANCE
COB Card Green On LED indication of operational status of COB card: - LED lit COB operational, - LED unlit COB deactivated, indication of COB card status (active or standby) - LED lit COB active, - LED unlit COB on standby active synchronization element, - LED lit nominal source, - LED lit standby source, - LED lit internal clock.
Green Actv LED
Yellow "Sync" LEDs . "Nom" . "Stdby" . "Int"
4.2.2.2 - Auxiliary Functions

Auxiliary functions provide the operator with access to the physical configuration identified by the system, the active configuration parameters and where applicable the parameters relative to a given card: Listing of general equipment parameters, Reading synchronization status including nominal synchronization source, standby source and restoration mode selection. Listing port cards, whether or not fitted in the rack and accepted in the physical configuration, and their parameters (mode of operation, bit rate, etc) Listing alarm assignments made during start-up for the various faults monitored by port cards: major alarm, minor alarm, or null. Listing connections for each card slot. Reading alarm disable/enable status for each card or port to prevent alarms detected at card or port level from being processed by common equipment units. Reading current alarms.
Furthermore, displaying the notifications transmitted by the equipment on the CT may provide an operating history; the interpretation of the different messages available as well as the explanation of the different operating functions are provided in the CT Users Manual CT N5691515XXYY (where XX and YY represent, respectively, the version number and the edition number) network management system manual N56914480 - XX (where XX represents the version number and edition number).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-7
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.3 - Fault or Error Locating

Preliminary remarks
The operator may display the cause or causes of the alarms that have occurred on common equipment units with the exception of those that have occurred due to power supply failure or incorrect setting of the switches. Port card failure and error conditions may be assigned to major or minor alarms, or unassigned, via the man-machine interface. In the following procedures, failure conditions are assumed to initiate alarms assigned by default. Before fault locating, display any currently applied loopbacks. An incorrectly plugged unit or a fuse fault always causes a major alarm to be initiated and an appropriate error message to be transmitted. This however does not apply to the GIE (or GIE P) and COB Card. The cause of a failure (on local or far-end equipment) may always be determined by a loopback test procedure, but it requires interrupting the link in both directions of transmission. Upon completion of loopback tests, set looping plugs or switches back to their initial positions.
Description of Faults and Errors

The faults and errors are broken down as follows: faults associated with the physical configuration (equipment level fault (non maskable faults), card level fault (incompatibility between cards and shelf and/or slots) power supply fault, port level faults and errors depending on card type, NOTE: These faults and errors may be masked (unmonitored condition) on the port or globally for the card. Virtual Interface level faults and errors may be masked globally (2 Mbps port) or at the level of each connection.
faults and errors associated with multiplexing (connections) and synchronization functions, faults and errors associated with auxiliary functions (auxiliary interfaces etc.).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-8
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.3.1 - Major (or Minor) Alarm Troubleshooting

The major alarm, respectively minor alarm, is activated when the fault or error is detected by the GIE (or GIE - P) card. The major alarm, respectively minor alarm, occurs in several forms: the red Maj Alm LED, respectively Min Alm LED located on the GIE (or GIE - P) card front panel lights, the major or minor alarm output(s*) respectively of the power supply filter or the -48V battery power converter (depending on the shelf type used) is/are* service-grounded (central office major and minor alarm respectively), NOTE: The major and minor alarms are not remoted to the power supply connector of the FMX4 (or MD COMPACT) shelves, nor when they are equipped with 110/220V mains supply.
major or minor alarm information is available on the GTR interface, via relay contact or service grounding***, on a connector of the connection panel of the GIE (or GIE - P) adapter card front panel or at the rear of the shelf (depending on type of shelf used). the number (1 or 2) of major or minor alarm outputs depends on the power supply filter used. The nature of the circuit used (COB or open) depends on the position of the "Norm/Fail" switch associated with the major alarm, respectively minor alarm. The nature of the circuit used (COB or relay contact) is determined on installation by the positioning of a link option on the GIE (or GIE - P) card.
* ** ***
In the event of an alarm, the operator may disable the major (minor) alarm using the "Norm/Fail" switch (Fail position) on the front panel of the GIE (or GIE - P) card ; after the disappearance of the fault, the central alarm and the LED remain active until the operator returns the switch to the Norm position. Only the GTR alarm is independent of switch position. Fault locating procedures are identical for major and minor alarms. Only the respective conclusions they lead to are different. The following procedure is suggested for analyzing the various possible causes of a major (or minor) alarm. Alarms are classified according to their probability of occurrence and severity of effects. Maj Alm or Min Alm LEDs lit 1 - Check the settings of the GIE (or GIE - P) Card front panel "Norm/Fail" switches. During normal operation, they should be set in the "Norm" position. ---> In the event of a failure, refer to the beginning of Sub-section 4.2.3.1. 2 - the active synchronization source presented on the COB Card front panel is different from that selected by the operator. ---> In the event of an error, refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.2 on synchronization failures. 3 - A Power Converter Card front panel LED is lit. ---> Refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.3 dealing with power supply alarms. TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-9
4 - MAINTENANCE
4 - Connect the CT to the system: ---> the operator fails to log on to the system: refer to Sub-section 4.2.3.4 dealing with start-up. ---> log on is completed successfully: . . . . analyze the various items of auxiliary information, list alarms, refer to Sub-sections 4.2.3.5 and 4.2.3.6 dealing with alarm analysis for common equipment units and port cards, respectively. refer to the volume 2 section describing port cards to analyze alarms for such cards.
4.2.3.2 - Synchronization Failure

Timing circuit faults and errors are synchronization losses detected by the COB card on the different synchronization sources. Synchronization source fault criteria are the following: the presence for one second of an AIS in the datastream of the 2Mbps active source, line signal fail, card absence, card fuse fault or watchdog fault, U interface deactivation.
The source availability criterion is the disappearance of all the faults. The fault criteria of the external synchronization source is the absence of transitions for a period of four time bits (16 s). The criterion for the detection of a 2048 kHz clock signal fail is the absence of transitions on this clock for a period of 4 time bits (about 2 s). Synchronization is made using a PLL. Lock-off is guaranteed beyond 160 ppm. Lock-off (DSG) is only processed by the software in manual mode. Actions consequential to the detection of a synchronization fault on the nominal or standby source are : switch onto standby source, FI generation, active source change notification.
Two types of FI may be generated: general fault (when there is no operational nominal or standby synchronization source allowing operation in the mode selected by the operator), switching fault (if synchronization sources are still available).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-10
4 - MAINTENANCE
Failure of FMX synchronization may be due to one of the following causes: a physical configuration problem: the operator must check source validity, actual synchronization failure.
Perform the following operations for easier fault locating: list the information linked to the synchronization function to know the sources and synchronization mode selected, list the faults present on the equipment.
The nominal synchronization source is the clock extracted from a card interface
In this case, check that the source is correct: 2 Mbps Card or 2w2B1Q Card fitted in the slot correctly described, that is, no (C Out) failure condition is displayed by the system. Error-free 2 Mbps signal detected at the Card interface and failure to detect any FAL or AIS alarm on the Card (front panel LEDs unlit, or no failure contained in the list printed).
Synchronization failure
Synchronization loss is the physical inability of the COB card to synchronize itself on the specified signals (absence of excessive signal slip); the equipment then synchronizes itself on its internal clock (OL) when no other source is available. The "General failure" alarm causes: the system to switch to freely-oscillating mode, whereas the COB Card front panel LED corresponding to the nominal synchronization source remains lit, a alarm to be generated and a GTR alarm to be transmitted,
- timeslot 0 non-frame alignment bit 5 to be set on 2 Mbps Cards operating in TRANSMIC 2G aggregate mode, after a time delay of 500 ms.
Processing a synchronization alarm

1The external synchronization source is displayed via the COB Card front panel: - check for signal detection and correct frequency, - in the event of a failure, replace the cable and/or the external synchronization source.
2 - The source displayed on the COB card is recovered from one of the card ports, - check for signal detection, - apply loopback, ---> if synchronization is restored, check for correct link frequency, ---> upon failure to restore synchronization, replace the 2 Mbps Card. 3 - If none of the above operations has cleared the alarm, switch power off to FMX, replace the COB Card, then switch power on again.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-11
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.3.3 - Power Supply Failure

P3 Power Converter A 5V output voltage failure on a Power Converter Card means that the various equipment circuits are no longer powered by the Card, either due to a defective card or to a card fitted, but switched off. This condition causes the corresponding Power Converter Card "Fail" LED to light up. The common equipment units allow the condition of the converter(s) to be monitored. Certain conditions correspond to faults. NOTE: The consequential actions are only executed if the - 48 V Signaling is available (the three indicators, "Fail", "Maj Alm" and "Min Alm", are the only ones powered with the -48 V Sig voltage). PRESENT and Enabled No alarm Minor alarm PRESENT and Disabled* Minor alarm Major alarm, Minor alarm and GTR alarm Major alarm, Minor alarm and GTR alarm ABSENT No alarm Major alarm, Minor alarm and GTR alarm Major alarm, Minor alarm and GTR alarm
CONVERTER A CONVERTER B PRESENT and enabled PRESENT and disabled
ABSENT
No alarm
Disabled means that the converter no long supplies + 5 V power whether it is switched off or in a failure condition.
These faults generate alarms with no time delay which light the corresponding LEDs, including the central office alarms. The transmission of a notification on the auxiliary interface is conditioned by the presence of at least one enabled converter. Power Converter failure troubleshooting - check for nominal voltage of the power source, - set the switch to the "Off" position and remove the Card, - check the fuse condition on the Power Converter Card or Cards, - if necessary, replace the Power Converter Card, - set the switch to the 'On" position and check that voltages are equal to +5 V and -5 V. If a second Power Converter Card is not added in the course of this procedure, FMX operates from backup. Reminder : The presence of 2w2B1Q cards with active remote power feed, requires the use of a P3 type power converter. The absence of 53V voltages at converter output also generates the lighting of the Fail LED. This alarm is processed like the + 5V alarm.
NOTE:
Following a shelf power failure, the logs (events, performance, unavailability) are erased. Nevertheless, the last ten registers are saved and the duration of the power failure is indicated in a register of the events memory.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-12
4 - MAINTENANCE
-48V battery Power Converter and 110/220V mains supply (FMX4) shelf) Power supply to FMX4 type shelves cannot be protected. Power converter presence cannot be detected.
4.2.3.4 - CT Log-on Failure

The CT is connected to the system, but it cannot log on to it. 1 - Illegible characters are displayed on screen: - check the GIE (or GIE - P) Card fuse condition. Replace if necessary. 2 - Operate the GIE (or GIE - P) Card front panel switch back and forth repeatedly to check for any effects on the Card. 3 - Check the CT connection ---> upon log-on completion, check the cable connecting the CT to the system. If necessary, connect the terminal to the modem interface on the panel after setting the GIE (or GIE - P) Card front panel switch to the appropriate position, upon failure to log on, refer to the GIE (or GIE - P) Card start-up procedure described below.
--->
GIE (or GIE - P) Card start-up procedure The GIE (or GIE - P) Card has been fitted after the other common equipment units. The CT has been connected to the system, but cannot log on to it. - remove the GIE (or GIE - P) Card, then plug it in again after a few seconds, ---> ---> ---> ---> the Maj Alm LED only is lit: Check the GIE (or GIE - P) Card fuse condition, all GIE Card LEDs are lit. Replace the GIE (or GIE - P) Card, LEDs are also lit on other equipment cards. Check the COB Card fuse condition. the Maj Alm (or Min Alm) LED lights up, then goes off. Check for a watchdog fault on the GIE (or GIE - P) Card.
GIE (or GIE - P) card start-up may be performed in the following different ways: cold start, hot start, start-up following a restart control order.
Each type of start-up has particular consequences which are described below.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-13
4 - MAINTENANCE
GIE (or GIE - P) Card Cold Start-up
GIE (or GIE - P) card cold start-up which occurs on card power-up is independent of the other equipment units. The GIE (or GIE - P) card: initiates a self-test phase to check its physical resources, obtains knowledge of the presence of the COB card(s), acquires the description of the COB card which has a not empty description in is standby memory. At the end of the standby condition, the COB card asks the port cards to notify their faults and loopbacks. If none of the COB cards has a description, the COB cards acquire the description of the GIE (or GIE - P) card saved in the memory.
NOTE:
GIE (or GIE - P) Card Hot Start-up

GIE (or GIE - P) card hot start-up only occurs following a software error or the dropping of the watchdog. In this case: the GIE (or GIE - P) card restarts with its unaltered data, the memories generated by the GIE (or GIE - P) card remain intact, settings and alarms in progress are maintained, operating sessions opened on the different interfaces are closed.
Start-up Following a Reset Control Order

The reset control order is initiated by the operator to reset the GIE (or GIE - P) card without switching off the power. The reset control order causes: the resetting of all data relative to the description (except the date and time), the deactivation of the remote control orders, the erasure of the events, performance and unavailability memories, the cancellation of the loopbacks and alarms in progress, the closure of all operating sessions opened on the different interfaces.
Start-up After a Restart Control Order

The restart control order is initiated by the operator to generate a cold startup of the GIE (or GIE - P) card (Card removal/insertion).
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-14
4 - MAINTENANCE
The restart control order: positions the remote controls to their respective initial states, erases the events, performance and unavailability memories (only the last 10 registers are saved), cancels the loopbacks and alarms in progress, closes all the operating sessions opened on the different interfaces.
GIE (or GIE - P) and COB Card Watchdog Fault

The GIE (or GIE - P) and COB cards are protected by a watchdog which allows a problem linked to the card microprocessors to be detected. The watchdog causes a card restart and reinitiates the microprocessor, and as a result, the activation of the major, minor and TNM alarms. The "Min Alm" or "Maj Alm" LEDs light up, then go off again after a short time, as a result of a particular operator action, or in a periodical or reproducible manner. Check that the failure is not caused by a watchdog fault on the GIE (or GIE - P) Card microprocessor and the COB Card. If the "Maj Alm" and "Min Alm" LEDs light up alternately, the failure is due to the GIE (or GIE P) Card watchdog. If the problem persists, change the GIE (or GIE - P) card then the COB card.
4.2.3.5 - Alarm Analysis on Common Equipment Units

Detection of a fault or error on a common equipment unit causes an appropriate message to be transmitted, or a front panel LED to light up as follows:
COB Card - LED: refer to Sub-section 4.2.2.1, - error messages.
GIE (or GIE - P) Card - "Maj Alm" or "Min Alm" LEDs: refer to Sub-sections 4.2.2.1, - error messages. For both cards, in the presence of an error message notified on the CT or RMS obtained from the alarm list function, the operator may replace the card involved if the alarm persists.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-15
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.3.6 - Alarm Analysis on Port Cards

The faults and errors detected on port cards can be of two types: - "card" level faults and errors including: . card out of rack, . card power failure, . watchdog fault, where applicable, . replacement with a different card, . connection error, . failed self-tests (2 Mbps Multiuse Card, ...), - "port" level faults and errors (they are summarized for each type of card in Volume 2). If the card (or port) alarms have not been disabled, any fault or error is detected by the ASAE Card and causes an alarm to be transmitted: CONTINUOUS PRINT message, major alarm or minor alarm, depending on the configuration. The various port card faults and errors are listed in the following tables. On the basis of the corresponding port card front panel LED conditions or error messages, they enable the operator to: - isolate the fault and identify its cause, - take corrective action. REMINDER: Any loopback procedure causes the link to be interrupted in both directions of transmission.
4.2.4 - Card Replacement Procedure

When a card has to be replaced, follow the procedures below as specified for each type of card.
REMINDER Equipment cards are stored in anti-static packaging. The person handling them must take the required precautionary measures.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-16
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.4.1 - Replacing a Common Equipment Card

GIE (or GIE - P) Card
Do not switch off power This allows service in terms of data cross-connect to be maintained. Nevertheless, certain functions such as: switching from one COB card to another, generating information intended for the operator (CT, SEM or RMS), generating alarms and logs, auxiliary communication (CT, SEM or RMS), equipment power-up,
are no longer performed. 1 Remove the defective card. 2 Check the fuse if necessary, replace and plug-in the card again (step 4) 3 On the new card: set the link options to the same position as those on the card removed. 4 Plug in the card, 5 On GIE (or GIE - P) card start-up (software initialization phase) the data memorized in the COB card standby memory are recopied in the GIE (or GIE - P) card back-up memory. 6 Reset FMX time. NOTE: When an CT is connected to the FMX, the start-up operation generates messages.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-17
4 - MAINTENANCE
COB Card
The COB card may be removed or inserted when the equipment is powered. Due to the possible protection of the COB card, several cases are possible.
Protected operation - removal of active COB card

The removal of the active COB card causes a switching of service to the standby COB card (the card becomes active). The following events occur: card absent fault generated following the removal of the active COB card, all traffic switched onto the standby COB card, traffic fully restored, chain fault fault generated.
NOTE: Operation is no longer protected. The switching events are memorized in the events memory and are systematically notified. Do not switch off power 1 Remove the defective card. 2 Check the fuse If necessary, replace and plug-in the card again (step 4) 3 On the new card: check the position of the link options. 4 Plug in the card. The physical composition is updated. 5 On COB card start-up (software initialization phase) the standby memory of the newly inserted COB card is updated and takes on the role of the standby COB card. 6 Check test results.
Protected operation - standby COB card Removal

The removal of the standby COB card generates a fault. Operation is no longer protected and no switching is possible. COB card insertion causes: the updating of the physical composition, the updating of the newly inserted COB card standby memory which takes on the role of the standby COB card, the fault due to card removal disappears.
Unprotected Operation
COB card removal causes a service interruption and generates a fault. Inserting the COB card in the location of the previous one updates the physical composition. Reboot the shelf. The COB card is reprogrammed on the basis of the logical configuration by the GIE (or GIE - P) card. Service is restored.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-18
4 - MAINTENANCE
4.2.4.2 - Replacing a Port Card

During operation, when a port card is removed from the shelf, the common equipment units detect the absence of the card after a transient phase due to the equipment. As soon as card absence is detected, the card is declared absent and the common equipment units insert the absent card code in the connections in service. Furthermore, the common equipment units generate the absent card fault which possibly generates an alarm. Depending on masking status, the fault is notified to the local CT (RMS). The connections created by the operator still exist. Do not switch off power. 1 Disable card alarms if so desired. Disable the connections. 2 Remove the defective card. 3 Check the fuse: if necessary, replace it and plug the card back in. 4 Replace the defective card. 5 Insert a new card. The FMX 264 analyzes the information of this "new" card and compares it with that of the "previous" card which was declared in this location in the physical description. The following two cases are possible: the "new" card is different from the "previous" one (the comparison is run on card type): The common equipment units generate the "Card different" fault. If the operator wants the new card to be applied, the previous card must be deleted from he physical description. This results in the elimination of the connections transiting through the card and of the "different card" faults. The operator must program the "new" card. the "new" card is identical to the "previous" card (the comparison is run on card type) : The FMX programs the "new" card with the parameters of the "previous" card : the "Card Out" fault disappears and service is restored to the way it was prior to removal. 6 Check that initialization and self-test where applicable (2 Mbps Multiuse...) have been successful (see Volume 2). * In the case of port cards, self-test is only performed on card power-up.
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-19
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 4-20
GLOSSARY
TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page G-1
GLOSSARY
Active operations port

Operations port from which the operator can enter commands intended for FMX. They consist of the "Loc" port and the "Modem". The active operations port is selected via an GIE or GIE - P Card front panel switch.
Active synchronization source

Clock source from which the COB Card derives system synchronization (nominal or standby clock sources).
Backup
Operation consisting, during GIE or GIE - P Card start-up, in resuming operation from active configuration data stored in the backup memory. Data is copied in the back-up memory of the COB card.
Backup memory
Memory area or package located on the GIE or GIE - P Card, the contents of which may be backed by a battery, even if the Card is no longer powered.
Backward/Forward
In the direction of transmission of interest, backward and forward equipment is located before and after local equipment, respectively.
Card out code

Code added into TSs supporting connections configured as "Active" when one of the port cards is not in the rack.
Common Equipment units (CEU)

FMX common equipment units: all GIE or GIE - P, COB and Converter Cards.
Configuration Data
See "Logic Configuration".
Connection
This term defines the path used inside FMX via a link. Adding a connection means adding a relation between port TSs (or bits) and specifying characteristics. For traffic to be handled, the connection must be configured as active by the operator. When the connection has been configured as inactive by the operator, traffic is logically interrupted. A connection is defined by at least two ports, a bit rate and in the case of a framed port by a selected TS group. A connection is either two-way (transmitter port, receiver port), or distributed (transmitter port and more than one receiver ports).
Connections Description
Data entered by the operator relative to the connections to be set up. Physical Description Data entered by the operator describing the physical ressources selected. The data concerns the shelves and cards.
GLOSSARY
Consecutive TS Integrity in a Frame

An N x 64 kbps connection preserves consecutive TS integrity in a frame if for each transmission direction all the data TSs of the same incoming frame are found in the same order in the same outgoing frame.
Disabled / Enabled
Refers to a card or a port for which alarms have been disabled or enabled by the operator. In case of disabling, detected faults and error conditions are not processed by common equipment units and therefore do not initiate any alarm.
Equipment Composition
The physical composition corresponds to the physical reality of equipment units installed.
General Parameters
Information entered by the operator characterizing the equipment.
Idle code for connections configured as inactive

The data code is also the unused TS code; the signalling code is specific to the connection.
Link
Path used between two subscribers regardless of the equipment units used.
Logic configuration
Unites all the information on functional ressources and their associated parameters; general system parameters, physical description and associated parameters, description of connections, equipment synchronization, protected operation.
MMI Session
The operator can only change the system parameters if a Man-Machine Interface session (MMI) has been opened.
Monitoring Status
Filter associated with a card, a port or shelf which controls alarm visibility for a given control access interface. Two filtering levels are defined: - filtering concerning the contribution of local alarms (LEDs, loops) and notification messages to the local interface (LT) and the centralized supervision interface (SEM); this filtering is called masking, - filtering of notification messages to TMN interface (Q interface) (this function is not implemented).
Nominal synchronization source

Synchronization source selected by the operator to synchronize the system in normal mode of operation.
GLOSSARY
Port
Physical interface port differing from a card in that the latter can support various ports. A port is defined by traffic type and range of bit rates.
Port card
Plug-in unit forming part of the FMX Digital Cross-connect System and supporting one or more ports. A card is deemed to be fitted in an allocated slot if common equipment units can detect it in that slot. The card is deemed to be out of the rack if it is removed and/or replaced with another card type or with a "different".
Port card characteristics

Port card information known by common equipment units. They include essentially card type and, where applicable, mode of operation and configuration parameters, port bit rate, card software version. Cards can be single-port (e.g.: 2MU), same type multi-port (e.g.: 3 64 I Card), or different type multi-port (e.g.: 2w2B1Q).
SbMux
Subscriber multiplexer providing management of local subscriber loops.
Scrolling
Dialog mode in which all menu lines are accessible only after pressing the arrow keys.
Securisation
Operation consisting, during GIE or GIE - P Card start-up, in resuming operation from securisation memory. Data is copied onto the back-up memory.
Securisation memory
Memory area or package located on the COB Card and containing a copy of system, "physical" configuration, and active configuration data.
Shelf
Physical unit containing plug-in cards.
Slot
Location in which an equipment card is fitted. On first system power-up, port card slots have an "empty" logic status. A slot is allocated as soon as a card is declared by the operator in this location, even in the absence of a card in the shelf.
StMux
Station multiplexer providing management of inter-office links.
Start-up
GIE or GIE - P Card "start-up" is the software starting phase, during which backup or protection operations are carried out.
GLOSSARY
Unused TS code
Defined on a per slot basis, data idle codes and signalling idle codes are added, in the card transmission direction, into TSs unused for connections.
V24 - Definition of interchange circuits

Circuit 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108/2 109 Abbreviation Gnd Sig Gnd TD RD RTS CTS DSR DTR Protective ground Signal ground or common return Transmit Data Received Data Request To Send Clear To Send Data Set Ready Data Terminal Ready Data carrier detect (on data channel) Signification
SAGEM FMX
64 and n x 64 kbit/s Digital Cross-Connect Multiplexer
FMX
P4.3B RELEASE
TECHNICAL MANUAL
TM - N56815140305 - Volume 2
Issue June 1999
No reproduction without the written consent of SAGEM SA. SAGEM SA reserves the right to change the specifications for improvement. All trademarks are registrated by their owners.
HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST
0.
(Each new edition supersedes the previous edition) No. Issue (No., date) Change Description Changed Pages (volume 2) All pages All pages All pages
0101 0202 0203
July 1998 September 1998 November 1998
Creation of document (Volumes 1 and 2) Equipment P4.3 Release Increasing number of equipment Units managed by LT - Error correction Stage 4.3B Upgrade - Addition of the ADPCM card - Modification of the A2S card Error correction Volume 1
0304
Mars 1999
All pages
0305
June 1999
Title page and page 0-1
TM - N56815140305 Volume 2 Page 0-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 0-2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ?
This Technical Handbook comprises two volumes. Volume 1 contains information relative to the entire equipment: Section 1: Section 2: System overview and specifications Equipment description: (shelf and common equipment units) and available configurations Installation of equipment shelves and common sub-assemblies. Equipment operations: description of operator features. Maintenance: fault locating and restoral of operational condition through sub-assembly replacement
Section 3:
Section 4:
Volume 2 contain information relative to optional sub-assemblies (Port Cards...): hardware description, start-up and operation, on a per card basis (each card is dealt with in an individual section). Use of this information depends on the exact equipment configuration in use. For easier use of this Technical Handbook, Volume 1 contains all preliminary pages describing the organization of the Technical Handbook (content pages and foreword) and a glossary of abbreviations. NOTE : The User's Manual part number is N5681515XXYY where XX et YY represent, respectively, the version number and the edition number.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 0-3
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 0-4
PAGE INDEX
Pages
VOLUME 2 HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX 0-1 0-3 0-5 and 0-6
SECTION 1 - 2MU CARD SECTION 2 - A2S CARD SECTION 3 - V.24/V.11 CARD SECTION 4 - V.24/V.28 CARD SECTION 5 - 3 64 I CARD SECTION 6 - 6PAFC CARD SECTION 7 - 2w2B1Q CARD SECTION 8 - BBTxRx CARD SECTION 9 - 4U TRANSFIX CARD SECTION 10 - 6-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCHAN) SECTION 11 - SUBSCRIBER CARD SECTION 12 - 12-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCH12) SECTION 13 - CONFERENCE CARD (CONF) SECTION 14 - INTELLIGENT ACCESS DEVICE BOARD (IADB) SECTION 15 - ADPCM BOARD (ADPCM)
1-1 to 1-38 2-1 to 2-52 3-1 to 3-52 4-1 to 4-40 5-1 to 5-20 6-1 to 6-18 7-1 to 7-56 8-1 to 8-28 9-1 to 9-44 10-1 to 10-24 11-1 to 11-28 12-1 to 12-22 13-1 to 13-34 14-1 to 14-12 15-1 to 15-18
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 0-5
Pages
VOLUME 1
FOREWORD/SECURITY FOREWORD HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX CONTENTS (VOLUME 1) LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
0-1 and 0-2 0-3 0-5 0-7 and 0-8 0-9 to 0-12 0-13 to 0-16 0-17 and 0-18 0-19 to 0-21
SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 2 - EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION AND OPERATION SECTION 4 - MAINTENANCE GLOSSARY
1-1 to 1-52 2-1 to 2-14 3-1 to 3-242 4-1 to 4-20 G-1 to G-6
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 0-6
SECTION 1 2MU CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-2
1 - 2MU CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF TABLES LIST OF FIGURES 1.1 - Presentation 1.2 - Description 1.3 - Start-up and Operation 1.3.1 - Configuration 1.3.2 - Connection 1.3.3 - Initialization 1.3.4 - Utilization 1.3.4.1 - General 1.3.4.2 - TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Operation 1.3.4.3 - G.704/1920 Kbps Multiplex Operation 1.3.4.4 - TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Operation 1.3.4.5 - G.732 Tributary Operation 1.3.4.6 - International G.732 Tributary Operation 1.3.4.7 - G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary Operation 1.3.4.8 - TRANSFIX Tributary Operation 1.3.4.9 - Loopbacks 1.4 - Maintenance 1.4.1 - Loopbacks 1.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 1.4.2.1 - Alarm Display 1.4.2.2 - Cause of a Fault 1.5 - User Software Description
1-3 1-4 1-4 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8 1-9 1-9 1-11 1-11 1-12 1-15 1-18 1-21 1-24 1-24 1-27 1-30 1-31 1-31 1-35 1-35 1-36 1-36
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-3
1 - 2MU CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 - Front Panel Figure 1-2 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 - Switch Table 1-2 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex mode of operation Table 1-3 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex mode of operation Table 1-4 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.704/1920 Kbps multiplex mode of operation Table 1-5 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.704/1920 Kbps Multiplex mode of operation Table 1-6 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary mode of operation Table 1-7 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary mode of operation Table 1-8 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.732 Tributary mode of operation Table 1-9 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.732 Tributary mode of operation Table 1-10 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary mode of operation Table 1-11 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary mode of operation Table 1-12 - Effects of 2MU Card in the TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation Table 1-13 - Effects of 2MU Card in the TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation Table 1-14 - Alarm analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-4
1 - 2MU CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-5
1 - 2MU CARD
2 Mbit/s Loc Rem Net Fail Fail Fail AIS Loop
Green Led Red Led Yellow Led
Eqt Line
Eqt Norm Loop
In
Figure 1-1 - Front Panel
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-6
Norm Loop Norm
Out
1 - 2MU CARD
1.1 - Presentation
The 2048 Kbps Multiuse Card, "2MU", supports a standard 2048 Kbps interface to the equipment. The 2MU card performs connection and/or transport functions when using the TRANSMIC network. Furthermore, other single-network type uses without frame c handling are also possible using this card. 2MU card configuration and operating mode selection is performed via a supervision and management system which may be: - a craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or on the connection panel or GIE adapter card depending on the type of unit and of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS Network Management System. Reminder: The terms below as used in this Technical Handbook when referring to the 2MU Card have the following meanings: - reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, - transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
1.2 - Description
The Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs from top to bottom (see Figure 1-1): 5 LEDs: Red "Loc Fail" LED Local failure: upon detection of one of the following line failure conditions (depending on applications): - Frame Alignment Loss (FAL), - Line Signal Failure (SigFail), - MultiFrame Alignment Loss (MFAL). Remote failure: one of the following failure information items received from the network equipment: - Remote Alarm Indication (RAL), - Remote MultiFrame Alarm Indication (RMFAL), - Remote Alarm Indication Signal (rAIS), - Remote Jitter Reducer Unlock (rGSF), - Remote 220 V Power Supply Fail (RPfail). Network failure: upon detection of network failure information transmitted via bit c Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) in data far-end equipment Local loopback controlled by the supervision and management system or remote controlled logic loop request; loopback is active when the LED is lit Unlocked Control application of equipment loopback to the Card.
Red "Rem Fail" LED
Red "Net Fail" LED Red "AIS" LED Yellow "Loop" LED
Three-position switch "Eqpt Loop/Norm/Line Loop" 2 manual looping plugs
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-7
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3 - Start-up and Operation 1.3.1 - Configuration

Before installing the 2MU Card into the shelf, check that the Card switch and link options are set correctly.
2 Mbit/s Multiuse
Loc Ram Net Fail Fail Fail AIS Loop
S1 (disabled)
Eqt Line Loop Norm Loop
P1
1Y S5 2Y
F1
Norm Lp Norm
Out
In
Component - Side View F1 : 0.5 A fuse
Front panel
The table below provides the position of switch S5. SWITCH S5 Watchdog . Required setting * factory-set option 1Y-2Y: linked * DESIGNATION
Table 1-1 - Switch
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-8
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.2 - Connection
Not applicable.
1.3.3 - Initialization
On power-up, the 2MU Card is initialized in successive steps. The results of checks are indicated by front panel LED conditions as follows: a - LEDs remain unlit - power supply failure: check the fuse and the Power Converter Card. b - LEDs flash only once and then go off - timing circuit failure: . isolated fault: Card timing circuit fault, replace the Card . fault observed also on other cards: System timing circuit fault; check COB card. c - all LEDs are lit microprocessor fault: replace the Card d - LEDs flash: self-test is underway Self-test includes 11 functional tests performed in succession for about 1 second. If no fault is detected, current test numbers are displayed one by one via LEDs (see table hereafter). Upon fault detection, self-test does not proceed any further and the test number is displayed via the red LEDs while the yellow LED keeps flashing: remove the Card or switch power off. Test No. LEDs Loc Fail Rem Fail Net Fail AIS Loop L: LED lit F: LED flashing L F L F L L F L F L L F L L F L L L F L F L L F L L F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-9
1 - 2MU CARD
Circuits and functions tested: Test 1 Line interface and framer detection of RLSF alarm Line interface and framer detection of TLSF alarm Framer/microprocessor interface, framer, interchange circuits, FAL alarm detection Framer/microprocessor interface, framer, interchange circuits, frame alignment Framer/microprocessor interface, interchange circuits, framer AIS detection Cross-connect matrix and framer Equipment Loop Matrix, interchange circuits and framer data transmission test Dual access RAM, framer, matrix signaling transmission test Dual access RAM, framer, matrix, interchange circuits signaling transmission test Timer counter remote CRC-4 and alarm
Test 2
Test 3
Test 4
Test 5
Test 6
Test 7
Test 8
Test 9
Test 10
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-10
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4 - Utilization 1.3.4.1 - General

The 2MU can manage several types of G.704 frames in the multiplex or tributary mode in equipment used as a multiplexer. The equipment can be configured as a Station Multiplexer (St Mux) or Subscriber multiplexer (Sb Mux). These different parameters allow different 2MU card modes of operation. Whatever the mode of operation, CRC4 processing is automatic, in compliance with ITU-T recommendation G.706.
EOC Channel
The 2MU is capable of removing 2 Mbps frames from the V.O. channels. The latter are found on the spare bits (Sa4 to Sa8) in TS0 of the odd frames and their bit rate varies from 4 to 20 Kbps. By default, the EOC channel is found on bits Sa7 and Sa8 at a bit rate of 8 kbps. NOTE: The EOC channel may also be found on any TS of the 2 Mbps datastream.
Integrity in each Frame

The 2MU card has been designed to modify TS order to ensure the integrity of the N x 64 Kbps links in each frame.
Synchronization
The 2MU card can synchronize the equipment on the 2 Mbps datastream it manages. To do so, the clock signal removed from the signal received at 2 Mbps is placed on the FMX motherboard. The supervision and management system selects the equipment synchronization source.
Circuit Quality
The 2MU card constantly measures the quality of transmitter and receiver circuits. Measurement parameters are indicated on initialization via common equipment messages. The parameters analyzed by the card and transmitted to the common equipment are nSAE, nSGE, IND and nBBE. The messages indicating the number (not nil) of SAE, SGE and BBE are sent at the end of the analysis period if necessary. Messages linked to unavailability (IND) are sent as they occur. The card also notifies exceeded thresholds when they occur and sends end-of-analysis period indications corresponding to condition changes QTI, QTD and QTN. NOTE: The operator can re-initiate a quality measurement on request via the supervision and management system.
Faults and Consequential Action

In case of faults, forward and backward reactions are undertaken respectively within 2 ms and 100 ms of fault detection.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-11
1 - 2MU CARD
Operation
The 2MU Card offers various modes of operation. Micro-switches allow the operator to select the desired mode of operation as well as the value of some configuration parameters specific to each mode. - TRANSMIC 2G multiplex operation, - G.7047/1920 Kbps multiplex operation, - Transmic 2G tributary operation, - G.732 tributary operation, - international G.732 tributary operation, - G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary operation - TRANSFIX tributary operation TRANSMIC 2G operation is compatible with the use of a TDCN (Digital Circuit Double Terminal). Loopbacks are applied via the supervision and management system, front panel switches or remote control reception. Presentation of detected alarms and loopbacks in progress is provided via front panel LEDs. NOTES: The "backward" and "forward" terms are defined in the glossary. Line failure: Remote failure: input signal failure detected by the Card, failure indication detected by the far-end equipment in the incoming frame.
1.3.4.2 - TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Operation

In this mode of operation, the frame handled is the TRANSMIC 2G frame. The Card is capable of transmitting up to thirty 64 Kbps data channels and one signaling channel at a rate of 4 x 500 bit/s per channel. The multiplex-side 2MU Card does not monitor frame "c" and only allows manual loopbacks. It is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d if there is no failure on the line. The only loopbacks applicable are loopbacks controlled by common equipment units (no particular reaction on frame "c"). NOTE: Using the supervision and management system, the operator can select the TDCN mode. In this case, bit 6 in TS0 with no FA can be set by the operator to 0 or 1 depending on the transmission direction, but the PSF alarm is no longer processed.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-12
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected in the TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex mode and their effects are listed in the table below.
Fault detected Line failure: - AIS
Consequential action
Forward reaction: - AIS on both channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward reaction: - Bit 4 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "0". Equipment reaction: - "AIS" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
- FAL, SigFail
Forward reaction: - AIS on both channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
- MFAL
Forward reaction: - AIS in signaling channels (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward reaction: - Bit 6 in Frame 0 TS16 set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 1-2 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-13
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../... Remote failure: - RFAL, rAIS rGSF and RAL
Forward and backward reactions: - None
Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Equipment failure: GSF (jitter reducer unlock) PFail (220V power supply failure) Card failure TLSF (transmission linesignal failure) Forward reaction: - None Backward reaction: - Bits 5 and 6 of TS0 w/o FAW set to "0" (for GSF and PFail, respectively). Equipment reaction: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 1-3 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-14
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.3 - G.704/1920 Kbps Multiplex Operation

This mode of operation corresponds to a multiplex whose TS0 is not a TRANSMIC 2G type but which has channel-associated signaling. In this mode of operation the frame handled is the G.704 frame. The card is capable of transmitting thirty 64 kbps data channels and one signaling channel at a rate of 4 x 500 bps per channel. The multiplex-side 2MU Card does not monitor frame c. It is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d in the absence of line failures. The only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment units (no particular reaction on frame c).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-15
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected in the G.704/1920 Kbps mulitplex mode and their effects are listed in the table below.
- FAL, SigFail
- MFAL
Forward reaction: - AIS in signaling channels (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward reaction: - Bit 6 in Frame 0 TS16 set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 1-4 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.704/1920 Kbps multiplex mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-16
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../... Equipment failure: - RMFAL and RAL
Forward and backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Card and equipment failure: - TLSF (transmission line signal failure) Forward and backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 1-5 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.704/1920 Kbps Multiplex mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-17
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.4 - TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Operation

In this mode of operation, the frame managed is TRANSMIC 2G. The Card supports transmission of 30 data channels at 64 Kbps and one signaling channel at 4 x 500 bps per channel. When used for TRANSMIC 2G tributary operation, the 2MU card monitors frame "c" in the card transmitter circuits and generates frame "c" in the receiver circuits. The messages transmitted by frame "c" and detected by the card are: - high bit rate network loopback control orders if the equipment is operated in the St Mux mode, - and high bit rate subscriber loopback control orders in the Sb Mux mode. The message generated by the card in frame "c" is the "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement. In the absence of any line failure or high bit rate line loopback control order, it is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d. Frame "c" sent to the network contains loopback control order receipt acknowledgements. NOTE: Using the supervision and management system, the operator can select the TDCN mode. In this case, bit 6 in TS0 with no FA can be set by the operator to 0 or 1 depending on the transmission direction, but the PSF alarm is no longer processed.
As the card manages frame "c" in this mode of operation, applicable loopbacks are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment units and loopbacks remote controlled by frame c" (high bit rate loopbacks).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-18
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected in the TRANSMIC 2G Tributary mode and their effects are listed in the table below.
- FAL, SigFail
- MFAL
Forward reaction: - AIS in signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward reaction: - Bit 6 in Multiframe 0 TS16 set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "AIS" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 1-6 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-19
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../... Remote failure: - RMFAL, RAL, rAIS, rGSF and RPFail
Forward reaction: - None except for RPFail for which frame "c" is transmitted with the "power supply loss" (bit 12) message (the "power supply loss message persists as long as the card detects FAL or Sig Fail faults. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Equipment cards failure: - GSF (jitter reducer unlock) TLSF (transmission line signal failure) Forward reaction (to the common equipment units - None Backward reaction (to the 2 Mbps circuit): - Bits 5 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "0". Equipment reaction: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 1-7 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-20
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.5 - G.732 Tributary Operation

This mode of operation has been specially designed for digital PABX connections. It allows transmission of active channels with 2 signaling bits (a and b). The frame handled is the G.704 frame with processing of bit c. NOTE: The handling of frame "c" can be disabled on configuration. Except for the cases of operation described (frame "c", faults) where they are set, bits c and d of the signaling multiframe are handled transparently. The card is capable of transmitting 30 speech channels (or data channels) at 64 Kbps and one signaling channel at 2 x 500 bps per channel (bits a and b). When used for G.732 tributary operation, the 2MU Card monitors frame "c" in the transmitter circuits and generates frame "c" in the receiver circuits: in the absence of line failures, or high bit rate loopback control orders at the receive end of the interface it is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c and d, at the transmit end of the interface, in the absence of line failures or high bit rate loopback control orders, signaling bits b, c and de are processed individually according to operator selection (transparent, set to "1" or "0").
The messages transmitted by frame "c" and detected by the card are: - subscriber high bit rate loopback control orders if the equipment is operated as a Station or Subscriber multiplex (St Mux or Sb Mux) (in this case the card sets up a subscriber connection), - and the "c" = 1 message (network fault). The messages generated by the card in frame "c" are: - loopback control order receipt acknowledgement, - the "c" = 1 message. As the card manages frame "c" in this mode of operation, the loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment units loopbacks remote controlled by frame "c" (high bit rate loopbacks).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-21
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected in the G.732 Tributary mode and their effects are listed in the table below.
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels and specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "AIS" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
- FAL, SigFail
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels and specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FA set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
- MFAL
Forward reaction: - Specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward reaction: - Bit 6 in multiframe 0 TS16 set to "1". .../...
Table 1-8 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.732 Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-22
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../...
Consequential action Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Remote failures: - RMAL and RAL. Forward and backward reactions: - None Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Card and equipment failure: - GSF (jitter reducer unlock) TLSF (transmission line signal failure) Forward and backward reactions: - None
Equipment reactions: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Message c=1 (network failure):
Forward reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in the data TS as well as in the four associated signaling bits in which bit c is detected at "1", . A time-out of 5 seconds is associated with this reaction. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - "Net Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 1-9 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.732 Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-23
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.6 - International G.732 Tributary Operation

The International G.732 Tributary mode of operation is identical to G.732 tributary operation described in sub-section 1.3 with the following differences: frame "c" from the network is not sent forward upstream of the card, bit "c" is forced to "0" towards the international circuit except in case of forcing after a fault. Bit "c" from the international circuit is ignored and replaced by a bit "c" supported the card ("c" = 0 or framed c), network fault detection (message "c" = 1) by the card causes no consequential action.
1.3.4.7 - G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary Operation

This mode of operation is provided for digital switch connections with common channel signaling and data transmission equipment without channel-associated signaling; it supports the transmission of 30 TS on a G.704 frame. The frame is the G.704 frame without signaling multiframe. The card supports the transmission of 30 data (or speech) channels at 64 Kbps using TS1 to TS31. When used in G.736 tributary mode, the 2MU Card monitors frame "c" from the network on the tributary TS16 and generates a signaling multiframe via TS16 towards the network with only bit c being in the active state. This processing of frame c only supports high bit rate loopback control orders with receipt acknowledgement sent back to the network. TS 16 sent to the subscriber is set to "1" while the received TS 16 is inhibited. The interface supports high bit rate loopback remote controls from the network via frame "c" as well as loopbacks controlled by the common equipment units.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-24
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected in the International G.736 - G.704 Tributary mode and their effects are listed in the table below.
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "AIS" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
- FAL, SigFail
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 1-10 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-25
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../... Remote failure: - RAL.
Forward and backward reactions: - None Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Equipment reaction: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 1-11 - Effects of 2MU Card faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 Kbps Tributary mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-26
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.8 - TRANSFIX Tributary Operation

This mode of operation is provided for the connection of client equipment complying with G.703/G.704 TRANSFIX service; it allows the connection of PABXs with channel-associated signaling or semaphore signaling transmitted end to end. The tributary circuit is the G.704 type without signaling. The distribution of TSs on the tributary is fixed and may take on the following values according bit rate: BIT RATE 256 kbit/s 384 kbit/s 512 kbit/s 768 kbit/s 1024 kbit/s 1920 kbit/s DISTRIBUTION with TS16 TS1 to 3 + TS16 TS1 to 5 + TS16 TS1 to 7 + TS16 TS1 to 11 + TS16 TS1 to 16 TS1 to 30 DISTRIBUTION without TS16 TS1 to 4 TS1 to 6 TS1 to 8 TS1 to 12 not used not used
In this mode of operation, the "frame c" option, declared on configuration, allows the transmission of frame "c" from the multiplex and the generation of frame c to the network. NOTE: The tributary TS16 does not correspond to the multiplex TS16, (the connection set up in the equipment must transport the tributary TS16 in a TS other than the multiplex TS16 and frame integrity will be respected).
The 2MU Card in the TRANSFIX Tributary mode of operation, with "frame c" option activated, monitors frame "c" at the transmission end of the interface and generates frame "c" at the receive end of the interface: bits a, b and d in the corresponding TS16 from the network are ignored, bits a, b and d in the corresponding TS16 to the network are set to "1".
The messages transmitted by frame "c" and detected by the card are: - high bit rate loopback control orders, - the "c" = 1 message (network fault). As the card manages frame "c" in this mode of operation, possible loopbacks are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment units and loopbacks remote controlled by frame "c" (high bit rate loopbacks).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-27
1 - 2MU CARD
Faults The faults detected during TRANSFIX Tributary operation and their effects are listed in the following table.
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "AIS" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment units for retransmission (alarm center and control access message).
- FAL, SigFail
Forward reaction: - AIS on channels Backward reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 w/o FAW set to "1". Equipment reaction: - "Loc Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 1-12 - Effects of 2MU Card in the TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-28
1 - 2MU CARD
Fault detected .../... Remote failure: - RAl.
Forward and backward reactions: - None Equipment reaction: - "Rem Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Equipment reaction: - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Message c=1 (network failure):
Forward reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in TS16 of frame transmitted to subscriber . A 5 second time-out is associated with this reaction. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - "Net Fail" LED lit - FI transmission to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and control access message).
Table 1-13 - Effects of 2MU Card in the TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-29
1 - 2MU CARD
1.3.4.9 - Loopbacks
The 2MU Card offers various loopback facilities: loopbacks controlled from the common equipment units: . line loopback (loop 3b), applied via the supervision and management system, . equipment loopback (loop 2b), applied via the supervision and management system. manual loopback (loop 2a) applied via the link and switch opens, Loop 2b high bit rate remote control loopback (equipment loopback via loop 2 remote control order receipt).
The above loopback facilities comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150. They are shown in figure 1.2 and their implementation is as described in sub-section 1.4.1. The card supports only one loop at a time. Loopback control orders from the supervision and management system have priority over loopback control orders received from the network via frame "c".
REMOTE UNIT OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER
EXTENSION
FMX h 64I
REMOTE UNIT OR SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL FMX a Lp2a Lp3b Lp2b
NETWORK FMX b BB Tx Rx BB MODEM c
2 Mbit/s
FMX d
X24/V11 MODEM e X.24 /V.11
FMX f STATION MUX 2 Mbit/s
FMX g SUBSCRIBER MUX
Lp 3b Lp 2a Lp 2b
local control order (supervision and management system) local control order (jumpers) local control order (supervision and management system) or network-originated remote control order (from any higher-order network equipment)
Figure 1-2 - Loop Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-30
1 - 2MU CARD
1.4 - Maintenance 1.4.1 - Loopbacks
High bit rate interface loopback (loop 3b)
CT CO
CEU CO High bit rate interface loop
SUBSCRIBER LOCAL
2MU TRIBUTARY
RECEPTION Data AIS + a=b=d=1+ c = 1 or c FramED (bit 5 and 4 to "0") M U L T I P L E X
LOCAL
Loop
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application Application is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Effects The line signals received at the receive end of the interface are rerouted on the line to the transmit end of the interface. The loop is applied at the HDB3 transcoder level. The datastream is looped back and transmission synchronization is provided by the receive clock. Data and signaling bits a, b, c, d transmitted to the network and set to "1" (AIS). Bit c is transmitted either set to "1" or framed ("frame c" option). If the "frame c" option is applied, bit c carries the subscriber-originated loop 2 control order on all four signaling bits. The "Loop" LED is lit.
Removal Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-31
1 - 2MU CARD
Equipment loopback (loop 2a)
SUBSCRIBER LOCAL
2MU TRIBUTARY
NETWORK
LOCAL
Out
RECEPTION
Line disconnect
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
In
Application Set the front panel looping plugs to "Lp".
Effects Signals at the transmitting end of the interface are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is applied to subscriber-end lines with interrupt. the loopback condition, which is not detected by the Card, is not displayed via a front panel LED and not seen by the common equipment units.
NOTE:
Removal - Set the looping plugs back to the "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-32
Norm Lp Norm
1 - 2MU CARD
Equipment loopback (loop 2b) via local control
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL
2MU TRIBUTARY
NETWORK M U L T I P L E X
LOCAL
RECEPTION c = loopback or c framed (bit8)
Loop
AIS
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application Application is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2b. Effects The signals transmitted on the transmit end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b and d) are routed to the receive end of the interface. The loop is applied at the HDB3 transcoder level. Loopback is applied to bit c or it is framed ("frame c" option); if the "frame c" option is applied, bit c carries the loopback control order receipt acknowledgement message. The "Loop" LED is lit. At the transmitting end: AIS transmission.
Removal Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-33
1 - 2MU CARD
High Bit Rate Equipment loopback (loop 2b) via local control
RC frame "c"
High Bit Rate network loop CO (ST MUX) High Bit Rate subscriber loop CO (SB MUX)
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL
NETWORK
LOCAL
2MU TRIBUTARY
RECEPTION Frame "c" (bit 8) RC Loop High Bit Rate TRANSMISSION
AIS
M U L T I P L E X
Loop
LED LIT
Application A high bit rate loopback remote control order transmitted via frame "c" is received from the network. The 2MU card performs network/subscriber discrimination according to whether the equipment is a St Mux or Sb Mux. The loopback applied is local loop 2b. Effects The signals transmitted at the transmit end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b and d) are routed to the receive end of the interface. The loopback is applied at the HDB3 transcoder level. Loopback is not applied to bit c, which transmits the "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement" message. The loopback control order concerning this card has priority over all the forward loops transmitted via frame "c". The "Loop" LED is lit. At the transmitting end: AIS transmission. If frame c frame alignment loss occurs while the loopback is applied, the 2MU card clears the loop after a time-out of 0.5 seconds and reinitiates frame c scanning.
Removal Information transmitted via frame c.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-34
1 - 2MU CARD
1.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 1.4.2.1 - Alarm Display

The types of faults and errors are detected: - "Card" level faults and errors: . card out (C.Out), . fuse fault (FusFlt), . watchdog (Wdg), . Card different (C.Dif.), . selftest (S/test), - "Port" level faults: . local failure (line failure) according to mode of operation: * * * * * * * Signal Failure (SigFail) Frame Alignment Loss (FAL), Multiframe Alignment Loss (MFAL), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Transmission Line Signal Failure (TLSF) Transmission Unavailability Period (TxUP), Reception Unavailability Period (RxUP),
. remote failure according to mode of operation: * * * * * Multiframe Alignment Loss (MFAL), Remote Multiframe Alarm Indication (RMAL), Remote Alarm Indication Signal (rAIS), Remote Power Failure (RPFail), Remote Jitter Reducer Unlock (rGSF),
. network failure (NF) according to mode of operation. If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is notified to the CT (RMS), major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. Local failure, failure "AIS", remote failure or network failure cause the LEDs to light up on the 2MU Card front panel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-35
1 - 2MU CARD
1.4.2.2 - Cause of a Fault

The following table lists the faults displayed on the front panel, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions.
Detected fault Local failure: FAL, Signal Failure (SigFail) or MFAL
Probable cause Fault detected by local equipment on signal received from far-end eqpt: . local equipment failure . far-end-to-local equipment failure Fault detected by far-end equipment transmitting information to local equipment: . far-end equipment failure . far-end-to-local equipment failure Alarm indication transmitted by far-end equipment: . remote equipment failure Failure detected by the network or on the network: . any network equipment . far-end-to-local equipment failure
Remedial action Check interface cable
Remote failure
See far-end equipment
AIS
No local action
Network failure
No local action
Table 1-14 - Alarm analysis
1.5 - User Software Description

Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Configurables Parameters
Card interfaces can be configured independently using the supervision and management system. Configuration parameters are:
Interface Parameters:
mode of operation.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-36
1 - 2MU CARD
Interface Parameters According to Mode of Operation:
MODE OF OPERATION TR2G Multiplex and Tributary G.732 Tributary CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS - TDCN used or not, - Bit 6 in TS0 with FA set to "1" or "0". - Frame c handled or not, - Forward reaction on fault or not, - Bits a and b to network set to "1" or "0", - Bits b, c and d to line transparent or, respectively set to "1", "0" and "1". - Frame c managed or not, - Bit 8 set to "1" or "0", - Bits a and b to network set to "1" or "0", - Bits b and d to line transparent or set to "1". - Frame c managed or not. - Frame c managed or not, - Forward reaction on fault or not.
International G.732 Tributary
G.736 Tributary TRANSFIX Tributary
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-37
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 1-38
SECTION 2 A2S CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-2
2 - A2S Card
CONTENTS
Pages
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 2.1 - Overview 2.2 - Description 2.3 - Start-up and Operation 2.3.1 - Configuration 2.3.2 - Initialization 2.3.3 - Utilization 2.3.3.1 - General 2.3.3.2 - TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Operation 2.3.3.3 - G.704/1920 kbps Multiplex Operation 2.3.3.4 - G.704/1984 kbps Multiplex Operation 2.3.3.5 - TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Operation 2.3.3.6 - G.732 (G.732 - IV Tributary) Tributary Operation 2.3.3.7 - G.732 International Tributary Mode of Operation (International G.732 - IV Tributary) 2.3.3.8 - G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode of Operation (G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps - IV tributary) 2.3.3.9 - G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode of Operation 2.3.3.10 - TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation 2.3.3.11 - I431 tributary Operation 2.3.3.12 - Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode 2.3.3.13 - Loopbacks 2.4 - Maintenance 2.4.1 - Loopback Application 2.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 2.4.2.1 - Alarm Display 2.4.2.2 - Cause of a Fault 2.5 - User Software Description
2-3 2-4 2-4 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-15 2-17 2-20 2-23 2-26 2-29 2-29 2-32 2-35 2-38 2-40 2-43 2-44 2-44 2-50 2-50 2-51 2-51
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-3
2 - A2S Card
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2.1 - Front Panel Figure 2.2 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1 - Control Access Connectors Table 2-2 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Mode Table 2-3 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Mode Table 2-4 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.704.1920 Kbps Multiplex Mode Table 2-5 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.704.1920 Kbps Multiplex Mode Table 2-6 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.704.1984 Kbps Multiplex Mode Table 2-7 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.704.1984 Kbps Multiplex Mode Table 2-8 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Mode Table 2-9 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Mode Table 2-10 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.732 Tributary Mode (G.732 - IV Tributary) Table 2-11 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.732 Tributary Mode (G.732 - IV Tributary) Table 2-12 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.732 Tributary Mode (G.732 - IV Tributary) Table 2-13 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode (G.736 - G.704.1920 kpbs - IV Tributary) Table 2-14 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode (G.736 - G.704.1920 kpbs - IV Tributary) Table 2-15 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode Table 2-16 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode Table 2-17 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSFIX Tributary Mode Table 2-18 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSFIX Tributary Mode Table 2-19 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in I431 Tributary Mode Table 2-20 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in I431 Tributary Mode Table 2-21 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode Table 2-22 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode Table 2-23 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-4
2 - A2S Card
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-5
2 - A2S Card
A2S
Fail
Red LED Yellow RED
Mntce
Figure 2.1 - Front Panel

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-6
2 - A2S Card
2.1 - Overview
The Structured 4 x 2048 kpbs Card, "A2S" performs the matching of the standardized 2048 kbps interface to the equipment four times. The purpose of the A2S card is to provide connection and/or transport capabilities when using a "TRANSMIC" network. Furthermore, other "mono-network" type uses without frame "c" control can also be performed by this card. In addition, the A2S card offers: - the service on the 2 Mbps circuits, called a Virtual Interface (IV), used to connected several N x 64 kbps links of various originations but with a single destination on a 2 Mbps circuit. - and the service, Protection, which is for protecting a 2 Mbit/s link over a digital section by duplicating the 2 Mbit/s path between the two ends of the section. A2S card operating mode configuration and selection is performed through a Supervision and Management System which may be: - a craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or on the connection panel or GIE adapter card depending on the type of unit and of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System (RMS) which is the IONOS network management system. Reminder : The terms below as used in this Technical Manual when referring to the A2S Card have the following meanings - Reception direction: interface to common equipment direction. - Transmission direction: common equipment to interface direction.
2.2 - Description
The card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs from top to bottom (see Figure 2.1 - Front Panel): - 2 LEDs: 1 red "Fail " LED "Fail": upon detection or reception, depending on the operating mode, by the equipment - of one of the following line failures: - Frame Alignment Loss (FAL), - Signal Failure (SigFail), - Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), - Alarm Indication (RMAL), - of fault information from the network, such as: - Remote Alarm Indication (RAL), - Remote Multiframe Alarm Indication (RMAL), - Remote Alarm Indication Signal (rAIS), - Remote Jitter Reducer Unlock (rGSF), - Remote Power Failure (RPFail), - of a network failure (information transmitted by bit c), - frame "c" failure. 1 yellow "Mntce" LED Local loopback activated via the supervision and management system or remote-controlled logic loopback request or loop remote control transmission; loopback is active when the LED is lit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-7
2 - A2S Card

Before installing the A2S Card into the shelf, check that the card switch and link options are correctly set.
J u m p e r in p o s itio n l ( In te rf a c e Im p e d a n c e = 1 2 0 o h m s )
In te r fa c e Im p e d a n c e = 7 5 o h m s
E 4
E 1
P1
E 2
E 3
P2
F1 F2
P3
Component - Side View F1 (+ 5V), F2 (- 5V) : A 1 fuse
The table below shows the connector position. Interface Circuits EJ 1 (E 1) DESIGNATION Interface 1 impedance selection Position 2 - 3 : 75 l - 2: 120 Interface 2 impedance selection Position 2 - 3 : 75 l - 2: 120 Interface 3 impedance selection Position 2 - 3 : 75 l - 2: 120 Interface 4 impedance selection Position 2 - 3 : 75 l - 2: 120
EJ 2 (E 2)
EJ 3 (E 3)
EJ 4 (E 4)
* factory set position
Table 2-1 - Control Access Connectors
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-8
2 - A2S Card
On power-up, the A2S card is initialized in successive steps. The results of the checks are indicated on the front panel LEDs. The initialization sequence runs the initialization and self-test operations as follows: a - LEDs remain unlit: - power supply failure: check fuses, b - LEDs light and go off one after another: Self-test includes 6 seconds. 5 functional tests performed in succession for about
If no fault is detected, current test numbers are displayed one by one via the lighting and unlighting of one of the two LEDs (according to table below), except test 1 which lights none of the two LEDs. Upon fault detection, self-test does not proceed any further and the test number is displayed via the red LED or the yellow LED which remains lit: remove the card or switch power off.
Test N LEDs Fail Mntce 1 2 3 4 5 6
U U
A -
A -
A : LED lit U : LED unlit Circuits and functions tested: Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Test 5 Test 6 Microcontroller RAM self-test DSP unit (BAL) self-test DSP unit (RAM) self-test 5V power supply fuse self-test Framer self-test IC (Input Channel) and OC (Output Channel) cross-connect connection memory self-test
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-9
2 - A2S Card

The A2S card can handle several types of G.704 frames both in the tributary or multiplex mode in the equipment used as the multiplexer. The equipment can be configured as the Station or Subscriber Multiplexer (StMux) or (SbMux). These different parameters allow the utilization of the A2S card according to several modes of operation. Whatever the mode of operation, CRC4 processing is automatic in compliance with ITU-T recommendation G.706.
VO Channels
The VO channels are, depending on the operating mode on the spare bits (Sa4 to Sa8) in TS0 of the odd frames (without FAL) at bit rates of 4 to 20 kbps. By default, the EOC channel is on bits Sa7 and Sa8 with a bit rate of 8 kbps. On the receive end, the A2S card copies the odd TS0 (without FAL) on the even TS0 (with FAL); the A2S card is transparent to VO channels. On the transmission end the A2S card inserts spare bits (SA4 to SA8) in odd TS0. If one (or more) of these bits is(are) used for VO Channel transmission, the common equipment programs the connection of this(these) bit(s) and the A2S card is transparent to this (these) bit(s).
Integrity in each Frame

The A2S card has been designed to modify TS order so that the integrity of the N*64 kbps circuits in each frame is ensured and delay certain TSs designated via the supervision and management system by precisely one frame.
Synchronization
The A2S card can synchronize the equipment on any one of the 2 Mbit datastreams it processes. To do so, the 2 Mbps clock signal selected via the supervision and management system is placed on the equipment motherboard. In case of synchronizing datastream failure, the A2S card can, under control of the supervision and management system, switch to another 2 Mbps datastream.
Circuit Quality
The A2S card constantly analyzes transmission and receive circuit quality. Analysis parameters are indicated on initialization by common equipment messages. The parameters analyzed by the card and transmitted to the common equipment are nES, nSES, PI and nBBE. The messages indicating the number (not nil) of ES, SES and BBE are sent at the end of the analysis period when applicable. Messages linked to unavailability (PI) are sent as they occur. The card also provides notification of exceeded thresholds when they occur as well as the end of analysis period indications corresponding to QTI, QTD and QTN status changes. NOTE : A quality analysis can be reset individually per circuit, on operator request through the supervision and management system. Quality analysis (based on performance measurements) on the protected link is performed in the same way, but in receive mode only.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-10
2 - A2S Card
Faults and Consequential Actions

In case of failure, the forward and backward actions are undertaken respectively within 2 and 100 ms after fault detection.
Operation
The A2S card can offers several modes of operation. The supervision and management system allows the selection of the mode of operation as well as the value of certain configuration parameters specific to each mode: - TRANSMIC 2G multiplex operation, - G.704/1920 kbps multiplex operation, - G.704/1984 kbps multiplex operation, - TRANSMIC 2G. tributary operation, - G.732 tributary operation, - International G.732 tributary operation, - G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps tributary operation, - G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps tributary operation, - TRANSFIX tributary operation, - I431 tributary operation, - Transparent TS0 tributary operation. Operation in the TRANSMIC 2G mode is compatible with TDCN (Digital Circuit Doubler Terminal) use. Loopbacks can be applied by means of the supervision and management system or upon reception of remote control orders. Detected alarms and loopbacks in progress are displayed on the front panel. Terminology: The "backward" and " forward" terms are defined in the glossary. Line failure : input signal failure detected by the Card, Remote failure : failure indication detected by the far-end equipment incoming frame.
in
the
Virtual Interface (A2S card)

The Virtual Interface (IV) function, which provides more flexibility for connecting subscribers, allows several N*64 Kbps links from one or more originations but with a single destination on a 2 Mbps circuit. The Virtual Interface function only applies to tributary circuits used to connect subscribers in one of the following modes of operation: - G.732 - VI - tributary operation - International G.732 - VI tributary operation - G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps - VI tributary operation The Virtual Interface (IV) function essentially consists in: - individualizing frame "c" according the circuits carried by the 2 Mbps datastream (1 circuit = 1 connection = 1 frame "c" repeated in all the connection TS, - reacting to the network fault connection per connection, - reacting to frame "c", faults connection per connection, - accepting Loop 2 and 3 control orders which concern each of the connections (in addition to the high bit rate loop which concerns the entire 2 Mbps datastream), - accepting the transmission of loop 2 or 3 control orders for each connection.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-11
2 - A2S Card
2 Mbit/s link protection (A2S card)

The 2 Mbit/s link protection function (S) is used to protect a 2 Mbit/s link on a digital section by duplicating the 2 Mbit/s path between the two ends of the section. This function is possible only between two FMXs with A2S cards at the same software release installed. The two paths are terminated at each on the same A2S card. The transmission system or systems between the two FMXs do not affect the protection function provided that they are transparent to the 2 Mbit/s streams carried and that they are not themselves fitted with protection devices. The 2 Mbit/s link protection function is therefore a card operating mode option. This function depends on the operating mode selected for the paths. A protected link (block) uses two G.704 interfaces on the same A2S card. Use of the protection function therefore automatically reduces the capacity of the card in terms of number of ports. An A2S card can support: - two protected blocks, - one protected block and two unprotected ports, - or four unprotected ports. For the protection function, paths 1 and 2, and 3 and 4 are always coupled together. Other combinations are not possible. Since the protection function is always set up between two FMXs, the paths are always set with CRC4 protection. Each path keeps its independence with respect to quality analysis (transmitting and receiving) and fault management. Creation of a protected link automatically results in creation of a quality analysis (in receive mode only) applied to both paths. The two paths that make up the link are given the same priority: there is no main path or backup path. Because of this, there is no concept of "return" to the main path. An operator command can be used to lock the link onto one of the two paths so that maintenance work can be carried out on the other. NOTE: This "forcing" operation must be performed at both ends for the link to be locked onto one of the paths. Protection principles The two paths on which link protection is based are automatically set to the same operating mode with the same options. The unused spare bits are automatically set to the same values on each of the two paths. When transmitting, the data to be sent, the signaling half-bytes and the bits of TS0 to be sent from the common equipment of the FMX, are all duplicated by the A2S card onto each of the two paths, framed independently and then sent over the line, also independently. NOTE: The two frames sent need not be synchronized (FA or MFA or CRC4).
When receiving, the A2S board chooses between the two paths and sends the data, the signaling half-bytes and the bits of TS0 to the common equipment of the FMXs.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-12
2 - A2S Card
When the link is created or reset, paths 1 and 3 are automatically selected. NOTE: The A2S card remains connected to the selected path until it decides to switch to the other path.
As part of the link creation process, a link quality analysis is initialized; this analysis is based on selected receive mode path performance parameters at the start of each second of the analysis. The time-related parameters of the two paths are assumed to be identical (the analysis sections are in phase). If the system switches from one path to the other, an SES is reported. Switchover criteria Two switchover criteria are generated, and available for operator selection. 1) Immediate switchover criterion In this case, the link switches from one path to the other if an FAL alarm is reported on the initial path. The switchover takes place only if the other path does not have an FAL alarm: - if both paths have FAL alarms, the Link Lost Fault (LLF) is sent to the common equipment for recording in the event log, - if the second path is OK, the "Switch to path x" message is sent to the common equipment for recording in the event log. NOTE: The faults and quality analysis (transmit and receive modes) for each path continue to be processed individually and normally. When both paths have an FAL alarm and the alarm is cleared on one of the paths, the link switches (or remains connected) to the path and the Link Lost Fault (LLF) is cleared. 2) Timed switchover criterion In this case, the link switches from one path to the other if unavailability occurs when receiving on the initial path. The switchover is conditional upon the other path not being unavailable in receive mode: - if both paths are unavailable, the Link Lost Fault (LLF) is sent to the common equipment for recording in the event log, - if the second path is OK, the "Switch to path x" message is sent to the common equipment for recording in the event log. NOTE: The faults and quality analysis (transmit and receive modes) for each path continue to be processed individually and normally. When both paths have an unavailability alarm and the alarm is cleared on one of the two paths, the link switches (or remains connected) to this path and the Link Lost Fault (LLF) is cleared.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-13
2 - A2S Card
Path forcing The operator can, at any time, force the link onto one of the two paths that make up the link. This operation, recorded in the event log, is performed as follows: - in receive mode, the A2S card forces switchover to the selected path, - in transmit mode, as an operating option, an AIS is sent over the other path for 12 seconds (to switch the other end to the selected path). The forcing command can be sent at any time, even if the path to which the link is to be switched is not OK in reception. However, when the forcing command is executed, if the path to which the link is to be forced is not OK, a warning message is output to the operator, indicating this state of affairs. Forcing the link to one of the paths locks the link onto that path. The forcing condition can be canceled to revert to protected operation, but with the link remaining on the path to which it was forced if there are no fault conditions. Maintenance All loopbacks, apart from the HD interface loopback, are set up at link level. They are initiated by a command carried by the "c" frame, or by a command from the supervision and management system. The HD interface loopback is managed on each port individually. The loopback is automatically preceded by a command forcing to the port to be looped or to the other ports. In the event of an interface loopback, data from the receive side of each path is sent on line (the data transmitted on line may therefore not be identical on both paths). Fault and consequential action management The fault and consequential action management function is applied individually and normally to each path according to the operating mode. The "c" frame faults are detected only on the first port (1 or 3) of the protected block, but the forward reaction, if there is one, is applied to both ports.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-14
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.2 - TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Operation

In this mode of operation, the frame managed is TRANSMIC 2G. The card supports transmission of 30 data channels at 64 kbps and one signaling channel at 4 x 500 bps per channel. In the multiplex mode, the interface does not monitor frame "c". It is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d in the absence of any line failure. The only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment (no particular reaction on frame "c"). NOTE : The operator can select the TDCN (Digital Circuit Double Terminal) mode using the supervision and management system. In this case, bit 6 in TS0 without FAL can be set to "0" or "1" by the operator depending on the transmission direction, but the PSF alarm is not processed. Faults The faults detected in the TRANSMIC 2G multiplex mode and their effects are listed in the following table. Faults Detected Line failure: - AIS, Forward reaction: - AIS on the channels, and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and in the EOC channels of TS0. Backward reaction: - Bit 4 in TS0 without FAL set to "0". Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). -FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS on the channels, and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and in the EOC channels of TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FAL set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - MFAL, Forward Reaction: - AIS on signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward Reaction: - Bit 6 in TS0 in Frame 0 set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-2 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-15
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... - tUP and rUP.
Consequential Action
Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message).
Remote Faults: - RMAL, rAIS, rGSF and RAL. Forward and Backward reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Equipment Faults: - GSF (Jitter Reducer Unlock) and PFail (Power Supply Failure), and card fault: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward Reaction: - None
Backward Reaction: - Bits 5 and 6 in TS0 without FAL set to "0" (respectively for GSF and PFail) Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission in the case of TLSF default (central alarm office and control access message).
Table 2-3 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Multiplex Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-16
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.3 - G.704/1920 kbps Multiplex Operation

This mode of operation corresponds to a multiplex whose TS0 is not of the TRANSMIC 2G type but which has channel-associated signaling. In this mode of operation the frame managed is the G.704 frame. The card supports transmission of 30 data channels at 64 kbps and one channel at 4 x 500 bps per channel. In the multiplex mode, the interface does not monitor frame "c". It is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d in the absence of any line failure. The only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment (no particular reaction on frame "c").
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-17
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the G.704/1920 multiplex mode and their effects are listed in the following table. Faults Detected Line Faults: - AIS, Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - None Equipment Reaction: - Activation of "Fail" LED, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 of TS0 with FAL set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - MFAL, Forward Reaction: - AIS in signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward Reaction: - Bit 6 in TS0 of frame 0 set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-4 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.704.1920 Kbps Multiplex Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-18
2 - A2S Card
Remote Faults: - RMAL and RAL. Forward and Backward Reactions: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment Faults: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward and Backward reactions: - N/A Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-19
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.4 - G.704/1984 kbps Multiplex Operation

This mode of operation corresponds to a multiplex whose TS0 is not of the TRANSMIC 2G type but which has no channel-associated signaling. In this mode of operation the frame managed is the G.704 frame without signaling. The card supports transmission of 30 data channels at 64 kbps and one semaphore signaling channel or 31 data channels at 64 kbps. As frame "c" is not managed, the only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-20
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the G.704/1984 multiplex mode and their effects are listed in the following table.
Faults Detected Line Failure: - AIS,
Consequential Actions
Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - None Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
- FAL and SigFail,
Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). .../...
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-21
2 - A2S Card
Remote Failure: - RAL. Forward and Backward Reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment Failure: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward and Backward Reaction: - None
Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-22
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.5 - TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Operation

In this mode of operation, the frame managed is TRANSMIC 2G. The card supports transmission of 30 data channels at 64 kbps and one signaling channel at 4 x 500 bps per channel. In the TRANSMIC 2G tributary mode, frame "c" is monitored in the transmission direction and generated in the receive direction. The messages transmitted by frame "c" and detected are: - high bit rate network loop control orders if the equipment is operated in the Station Mux mode, - and subscriber high bit rate loop control orders if the equipment is operated as a Subscriber Mux. The message generated by the card in frame "c" is the loopback control order receipt acknowledgment. In the absence of any line failure or high bit rate line loop control order, it is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c, d. NOTE : The operator can select the TDCN (Digital Circuit Double Terminal) mode using the supervision and management system. In this case, bit 6 in TS0 without FAL can be set to "0" or "1" by the operator depending on the transmission direction, but the PSF alarm is not processed. As frame "c" is monitored in this operation mode, the only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment or remote controlled by frame "c" (high bit rate loopbacks). The frame "c" option defined in the loopback description is always applied.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-23
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the TRANSMIC 2G tributary mode of operation and their effects are listed in the table below. Faults Detected Line Failure: - AIS, Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 4 in TS0 without FA set to "0". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS in the channels and signaling (a=b=c=d="1") and the EOC channels in TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - MFAL, Forward Reaction: - AIS in signaling (a=b=c=d="1"). Backward Reaction: - Bit 6 in TS16 of frame 0 set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - tUP and rUP. Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-8 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-24
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... Remot Faults: - RMAL, RAL, rAIS, rGSF and RPFail.
Forward Reactions: - None except for RPFail for which frame "c" is transmitted with the "power supply failure" (bit 12) message (the "power supply failure" message persists as long as the card detects the FAL or SigFail faults. Backward Reaction: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment Faults: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward Reaction (to common equipment): - None. Backward Reaction (to 2 Mbps circuit): - Bit 5 in TS0 without FA set to "0". Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Table 2-9 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSMIC 2G Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-25
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.6 - G.732 (G.732 - IV Tributary) Tributary Operation

This mode of operation has been designed, among others, for digital PABX connections. It allows transmission of active channels with 2 signaling bits (a and b). The frame handled is the G.704 frame with signaling multiframe and bit "c" processing. NOTE : Frame "c" processing can be inhibited on configuration via the supervision and management system. Except for the modes of operation described (frame "c", faults) where they are forced, bits c and d of the signaling multiframe are handled transparently. The card can support transmission of 30 speech (or data) 64 kbps channels and one signaling channel at 2 x 500 bits/s per channel (bits a and b). In the G.732 tributary mode of operation, frame "c" is monitored in the transmission direction and generated in the receive direction: - in the absence of any line failure or loop control order at the receive end, it is transparent to signaling bits a, b, c d, - at the transmission end, in the absence of line failure or loop control order, signaling bits b, c d are handled individually at the operators discretion (transparent, respectively set to "1", "0" and "1"), Frame "c" messages sent and detected by the interface are: - subscriber high bit rate loop control orders if the equipment is operated in the Station or Subscriber Mux mode (in this case the card performs a subscriber connection), - the "c" = 1 message (network failure), - Loop 2 or 3 loop control orders, - loop control order receipt acknowledgment. The messages generated by the card in frame "c" are: - loop control order receipt acknowledgment, - "c" = 1 message, - loop 2 or 3. As frame "c" is monitored in this operation mode, the only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment or remote controlled by frame "c".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-26
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the G.732 tributary mode of operation and their effects are listed in the table below. Faults Detected Line Failure: - AIS, Forward Reaction: - AIS on EOC channels of TS0 and specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS on EOC channels of TS0 and specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - MFAL, Forward Reaction: - Specific code for signaling: . a = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . b = 0 or 1 (according to configuration), . c = d =1. Backward Reaction: - Bit 6 in TS16 of Frame 0 set to "1". - tUP and rUP. Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-10 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.732 Tributary Mode (G.732 - IV Tributary)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-27
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... Remote Failures: - RMAL and RAL.
Consequential Action Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). Forward and Backward reactions: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment Failures: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP).
Forward and Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Network Failure (Message "c" = 1)
Forward Reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in data TS as well as in the associated four signaling bits in which bit "c" is detected at "1", . AIS in the data and signaling channels of the connection on which the network failure was detected. Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-28
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... Failure on frame "c": - local failure (bit c10 = 0), - remote failure (bit c11 = 0), - subscriber power supply failure (bit c12 = 0), - subscriber unavailable (bit c13 = 0).
Consequential Action Forward Reaction: - None or on configuration option on port: AIS in data TS for link concerned as well as in associated four signaling bits
Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
2.3.3.7 - G.732 International Tributary Mode of Operation (International G.732 - IV Tributary)

The international G.732 mode of operation is identical to G.732 tributary operation described in paragraph 2.3.3.6 with the following exceptions: - frame "c" from the network is not sent forward; bit "c" is forced to "0" to the international circuit except in the case failure-generated forcing. Bit "c" received from the international circuit is ignored and replaced by a bit "c" supported by the card ("c" = 0 or framed "c"), - "network failure" detection ("c" = 1 message) by the interface results in no consequential action. - the detection of a failure on frame "c" causes no consequential action.
2.3.3.8 - G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode of Operation (G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps - IV tributary)
This mode of operation is provided for digital switch connections with common channel signaling and data transmission equipment without channel-associated signaling. It supports transmission of 30 TSs on a G.704 frame. The frame handled is the G.704 without signaling multiframe. The card supports transmission of 30 data (or speech) channels at 64 kbps using TS1 to 31. The A2S card in the G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps tributary mode monitors a possible frame "c" from the network on TS16 from the multiplex and generates a signaling multiframe on TS16 towards the network with only bit c in active condition.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-29
2 - A2S Card
The processing of frame "c" allows the following to be handled: - high bit rate loop control orders, - receipt acknowledgment returned to the network, - loop 2 or 3 control orders, - frame "c" failures, - Loop 2 or 3 control orders sent to the network. TS16 sent to the subscriber is set to "1" and TS16 received from the subscriber is ignored (application of binary "1101" idle code on each set of four bits). The card supports loop remote control orders from the network via frame "c" as well as loopbacks controlled by the common equipment. Faults The faults detected in the International G.736 - G.704 tributary mode of operation and their effects are listed in the table below. Faults Detected Line Failures: - AIS, Forward Reaction: - AIS in EOC channels of TS0 Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FAL set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS in EOC channels of TS0 Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - tUP and rUP. Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-13 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode (G.736 G.704.1920 kpbs - IV Tributary)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-30
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... Remote Failure: - RAL.
Forward and Backward Reactions: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment failures: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward and Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Failure on frame "c": - local failure (bit c10 = 0), - remote failure (bit c11 = 0), - subscriber power supply failure (bit c12 = 0), - subscriber unavailable (bit c13 = 0).
Forward Reaction: - None.
Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Table 2-14 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1920 kbps Tributary Mode (G.736 G.704.1920 kpbs - IV Tributary)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-31
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.9 - G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode of Operation

This mode of operation is provided for digital switch connections with common channel signaling and data transmission equipment without channel-associated signaling. It supports transmission of 31 TSs on a G.704 frame. The frame handled is the G.704 without signaling multiframe. The card supports transmission of 31 data (or speech) channels at 64 kbps or 30 data (or speech) channels and one semaphore channel. As frame c is not handled, the only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-32
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the International G.736 - G.704 tributary mode of operation and their effects are listed in the table below. Faults Detected Line failures: - AIS, FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS in the EOC channels of TS0 Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - tUP and rUP. Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message). Remote Failure: - RAL. Forward and Backward Reactions: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-15 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-33
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected .../... Card and Equipment Failures: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP).
Forward and Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Table 2-16 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in G.736 - G.704/1984 kbps Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-34
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.10 - TRANSFIX Tributary Mode of Operation

This mode of operation is provided for client equipment connection complying with G.703/G.704 TRANSFIX service. It allows PABX connection with channel-associated signaling or semaphore transmitted end-to-end. The tributary circuit is a G.704 without signaling type. The distribution with or without TS16 of TSs on the tributary circuit is fixed and can take on the following values according to bit rate: BIT RATE 256 kbit/s 384 kbit/s 512 kbit/s 768 kbit/s 1024 kbit/s 1920 kbit/s DISTRIBUTION with TS16 TS1 to 3 + TS16 TS1 to 5 + TS16 TS1 to 7 + TS16 TS1 to 11 + TS16 TS1 to 16 TS1 to 30 DISTRIBUTION without TS16 TS1 to 4 TS1 to 6 TS1 to 8 TS1 to 12 Not applicable Not applicable
In this mode of operation, the "frame c" option, selected on configuration, allows the processing of frame "c" from the multiplex circuit and the generation of frame "c" towards the network. NOTE : TS16 of the tributary circuit does not correspond to TS16 of the multiplex circuit (the connection set up in the equipment must carry tributary TS16 in a TS other than multiplex TS16 and frame integrity will be respected). In the TRANSFIX tributary mode of operation, with "frame c" option activated, the card monitors frame "c" in the transmission direction and generates frame "c" in the receive direction: - bits a, b and d in corresponding TS16 from the network are ignored, - bits a, b and d in corresponding TS16 to the network are set to "1". Frame "c" messages sent and detected by the card are: - high bit rate loop control orders, - and "c" = 1 message (network failure). The messages generated in frame "c" are: - high bit rate loop control order receipt acknowledgment, - and "c" = 1 message (network failure). As frame "c" is handled in this mode of operation, the only loopbacks possible are loopbacks controlled by the common equipment and loopbacks remote controlled by frame "c" (high bit rate loopbacks).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-35
2 - A2S Card
Faults The faults detected in the TRANSFIX tributary mode of operation and their effects are listed in the table below. Faults Detected Line failures: - AIS, Forward Reaction: - AIS in EOC channels of TS0 Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - FAL and SigFail, Forward Reaction: - AIS in EOC channels of TS0. Backward Reaction: - Bit 3 in TS0 without FA set to "1". Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). - tUP and rUP. Forward and backward reactions: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central office alarm and operation message). .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-17 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSFIX Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-36
2 - A2S Card
Forward and Backward Reactions: - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Card and Equipment Failures: - TLSF (Transmission Line Signal Failure), Link Lost Fault (LLF) and Link Unavailability Period in reception (rLUP). Forward and Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Network Failure (Message "c" = 1.)
Forward Reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in TS16 of frame transmitted to subscriber (use of D). Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message).
Table 2-18 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in TRANSFIX Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-37
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.11 - I431 tributary Operation

This operating mode is used to connect equipment which has primary access ISDN (nB + D; where 1 n 29). The managed frame is the G.704 frame without signaling. The I431 tributary mode interface can use the "c" frame ("c frame" option) from the aggregate and generate a "c" frame for the network. NOTE: The TS16 of the tributary does not correspond to the TS16 of the aggregate. A connection made by the equipment must transport the tributary TS16 in a TS other than TS16 of the aggregate. When the "c frame" option is validated, the interface supervises the "c" frame in the transmission direction of the interface and generates the "c" frame in the receive direction of the interface. NOTE: Bits a and b of the corresponding TS16 from the network are not processed. They are set at "1" to the network.
The messages transmitted by the "c" frame and detected by the card are the high bit rate loopback command and the "c=1" (network fault) message. The messages generated by the card in the "c" frame and detected by the card are the loopback command acknowledgment and the "c=1" message. Since the interface is managing the "c" frame in this operating mode, the possible loopbacks are those controlled by the Common Equipment Units and those remotely controlled by the "c" frame (high bit rate loopbacks). Faults Faults registered during the I431 tributary operation are listed in the following table along with their consequences. NOTE: For a protected port, line failure, remote failure, card fault and faults transmitted by the "c" frame are registered at the port level. Faults transmitted by the "c" frame are only detected for the first protected block port, whereas the forward reaction takes place over the two ports. Faults Detected Line Failure: - AIS, FAL and Sigfail. Forward Reaction: - AIS in channels and EOC channels. Backward Reaction : - Bit 3 in TS0 without Fal set to "1" Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a FAL line fault on a port can cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port. .../... Consequential Action
Table 2-19 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in I431 Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-38
2 - A2S Card
Forward and Backward Reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a remote failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port.
Equipment Failure: - GSF (Jitter Reducer Unlock), and Card Failure: - TLSF (transmission Line Signal Failure). Forward and Backward Reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission in the case of the TSLF fault (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a card or equipment failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port. Forward Reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in TS16 of frame transmitted to subscriber (use of D). Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a "c" frame transmission failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port.
Network Failure (Message "c" = 1.)
Table 2-20 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in I431 Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-39
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.12 - Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode

In this operating mode, the card is transparent to TS0 in both transmission directions. The port only supports one data connection over the 32 frame TSs. NOTE: The orderwire channel connections are not managed in this operating mode (transparent TS0).
TS0 of the tributary does not correspond to TS0 of the aggregate. A connection made by the equipment must transport the tributary TS0 in a TS other than the aggregate TS0 and TS16 (frame integrity is respected). The aggregate 2 Mbit/s stream contains therefore 2 TS0s (or more). The distinction between TS0s is made via the CRC4 processing (re-synchronization procedure if the error rate is higher than 915 false CRC blocks per second). The transparent TS0 tributary mode interface can use the "c" frame ("c frame" option) from the aggregate and generate a "c" frame for the network. NOTE: The TS16 of the tributary does not correspond to the TS16 of the aggregate. A connection made by the equipment must transport the tributary TS16 in a TS other than the aggregate TS16 (frame integrity is respected). When the "c frame" option is validated, the interface supervises the "c" frame in the transmission direction of the interface and generates the "c" frame in the receive direction of the interface. NOTE: Bits a and b of the corresponding TS16 from the network are not processed. They are set at "1" to the network.
The messages transmitted by the "c" frame and detected by the card are the high bit rate loopback command and the "c=1" (network fault) message. The messages generated by the "c" frame and detected by the card are the loopback command acknowledgment and the "c=1" message. Since the interface is managing the "c" frame in this operating mode, the possible loopbacks are those controlled by the Common Equipment Units and those remotely controlled by the "c" frame (high bit rate loopbacks). Faults Faults registered during the transparent TS0 tributary operation are listed in the following table along with their consequences. NOTE: For a protected port, line faults, remote fault, card fault and faults transmitted by the "c" frame are registered at the port level. Faults transmitted by the "c" frame are only detected for the first protected block port, whereas the forward reaction takes place over the two ports.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-40
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected Line failure : - AIS, FAL and Sigfail.
Forward Reaction: - AIS in channels. Backward Reaction : - None Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a FAL line fault on a port can cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port.
Remote Failure : - RAL. Forward and Backward Reactions : - None. Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit, - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a remote failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port. Equipment Failure: - GSF (Jitter Reducer Unlock), and Card Failure: - TLSF (transmission Line Signal Failure). Forward and Backward Reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission in the case of the TSLF fault (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a card or equipment failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port.
Table 2-21 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-41
2 - A2S Card
Faults Detected Network Failure (Message "c" = 1.)
Consequential Action Forward Reaction: - None or on configuration option: . AIS in all data TSs and in TS16 of frame transmitted to subscriber (use of D). Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - "Fail" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (central alarm office and operation message). NOTE: In the case of a protected port, detection of a "c" frame transmission failure on a port does not cause switchover of the link to the other protected block port.
Table 2-22 - Effects of A2S Card Faults in Transparent TS0 Tributary Mode
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-42
2 - A2S Card
2.3.3.13 - Loopbacks
The A2S card offers various loopback facilities: - loopbacks controlled by common equipment: . interface loopback (loop 3b), controlled via the supervision and management system, . equipment loopback (loop 2b), controlled via the supervision and management system. - High Bit rate remote-controlled equipment loopback (loop 2b) (equipment loopback via reception of a high bit rate loop remote control order). In addition, the A2S card offers the following loopback facilities: - channel-associated interface (loop 3b) loopback via the supervision and management system, - channel-associated equipment loopback (loop 2b), via the supervision and management system, - channel-associated remote-controlled equipment loopback (loop 2b) (equipment loopback via loop 2 or 3 remote control order reception). The A2S card allows transmission, via the supervision and management system, of loop 2 or 3 remote control orders to the extensions in the TRANSMIC 2G multiplex mode or if it carries the signaling multiframe. These loopbacks concern the N x 64 kbps channels as well as the associated signaling. The loopbacks comply with ITU-T recommendation X.150. They are shown in figure 2.3 and their application is described in 2.4.1. The card only supports one type of loop at a time on each interface. Loop control orders from the supervision and management system have priority over loop control orders from the network via frame "c". When protection is enabled, two loops cannot be set up at the same time on the two protected ports, unless the two loops are interface loops.
EXTENSION
FMX h 64 kbit/s i interface NETWORK MODEM c BBTx/R BBTx/Rx FMX d Sub Mux 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s FMX e STa Mux
REMOTE or SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL FMX a
FMX b Lp3b Lp2b
Bcl 3b Bcl 2b
local control order (supervision and management system) local control order (supervision and management system) or network-originated remote control order (from any higher-order network equipment)
Figure 2.2 - Loop Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-43
2 - A2S Card
2.4 - Maintenance 2.4.1 - Loopback Application

Refer to Figure 2.2 - Loop Analysis.
High Bit rate Interface Loopback (loop 3b)

Supervision and Management control
Common Equipment control order Hight bit rate int. loop LOCAL
A2S TRIBUTARY
NETWORK
SUBSCRIBER RECEPTION AIS Data + a=b=d=1+ c = 1 or framed c (bit 5 and 4 to "0") AIS M U L T I P L E X
Fail Mntce
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application - They are applied via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT Technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or the IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. NOTE: Effects - Signals at the receiving end of the interface are transmitted forward on the line to transmitting end of the interface. The loop is applied at the HDB3 transcoder. Loopback is applied to the entire datastream and transmission synchronization is provided by the receive timing circuit. - The data and signaling bits a, b, d are transmitted to the network and are set to "1" (AIS). - Bit c is transmitted either set to "1" or framed ("frame c" option). In the "frame c" option case, bit c carries the "subscriber-originated loop 2 loop control order" message on all the four signaling bits. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. Removal - Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. This loopback configuration is set up on individual ports, even if the protection option is enabled.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-44
2 - A2S Card
High Bit Rate Equipment Loopback (loop 2b) via Local Control
Supervision and Management control order
Common Equipment High Bit rate eqpt loop control order LOCAL
A2S TRIBUTARY
LOCAL
SUBSCRIBER RECEPTION c = relooped or framed c (bit8) AIS TRANSMISSION
Fail Mntce
LED LIT
Application - Application is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT Technical Manual No. N5681468XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. NOTE: Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b, d) are routed to the receiving end of the interface. (loopback at the HDB3 transcoder level). - Bit c of each set of four bits is either looped back or framed ("frame c" option). In the "frame c" case, bit c transmits the "loop control order receipt acknowledgment " message. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. - The line is loaded at the receiving end and an AIS is transmitted at the transmitting end. Removal - Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681468XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. This loopback is available only on port 1. When the protection option is enabled, activating the loopback configuration on port 1 causes the protected link to be looped.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-45
2 - A2S Card
High Bit Rate Equipment Loopback Remote Control Reception
Frame "c" control order
Network High Bit Rate control order (St Mux) Subscriber High Bit Rate control order (Sub Mux) LOCAL
A2S TRIBUTARY
LOCAL
SUBSCRIBER RECEPTION Frame "c" (bit 8) High Bit rate loop control order (frame c) TRANSMISSION
Fail Mntce
AIS
LED LIT
Application - Reception of a high bit rate remote loopback control order from the network via frame "c". The A2S card performs network/subscriber discrimination depending on whether the equipment is a Station Mux or Subscriber Mux. NOTE: Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b, d) are routed to the receiving end of the interface. (Loopback at the HDB3 transcoder level). - Loopback is not applied to bit c, which transmits the "loop control order receipt acknowledgment" message. The loop control order relative to the card overrides any other forward loops transmitted via frame "c". - The "Mntce" LED is lit, - The line is loaded at the receiving end with AIS transmission at the transmitting end. - If frame "c" frame alignment loss occurs on loopback, the A2S card releases the loop after a 0.5 second timeout and restarts frame "c" scanning. Removal - Information transmitted via frame c. When the protection option is enabled, activating the loopback configuration causes the protected link to be looped.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-46
2 - A2S Card
Channel-associated Interface Loopback (loop 3b)

Supervision and Management control order
Common Aquipment control order Channel-associated intfc loopback LOCAL SUBSCRIBER

A2S TRIBUTARY
NETWORK
RECEPTION Nx64kbit/s or 2Mbit/s link AIS Data + a=b=d=1+ c = 1 or framed c (bit 5 and 4 to "0") M U L T I P L E X
Fail Mntce
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application - Application is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681468XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. NOTE: Effects - The Nx64 Kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link signals received from the line at the receiving end are transmitted forward on the line to the transmitting end of the interface. Loopback is performed at the logical level. Loopback of all 64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link data TSs and, if applicable, the associated four signaling bits is applied. - The data TSs of the Nx64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link concerned, and if applicable, associated signaling bits a, b and d transmitted towards the network are forced to "1" (AIS). - Framed bit c transmits the "subscriber-originated loop 2 control order" message on all sets of four signaling bits concerned by the loopback. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. Removal - Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. When the protection option is enabled, activating the loopback configuration causes the protected link to be looped.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-47
2 - A2S Card
Channel-associated Equipment Loopback (Loop 2b) Via Local Control Order

Supervision and Management system control order Common Eqpt channelAssociated eqpt loopback control order LOCAL SUBSCRIBER
A2S TRIBUTARY
LOCAL
Fail Mntce
Nx64kbit/s or 2Mbit/s link
RECEPTION Framed c (bit 8)
AIS
TRANSMISSION
(TS + associated signalling Concerned by loopback)
LED LIT
Application - Application is performed via the Supervision and Management System. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. NOTE: When the protection option is enabled, activating the loopback configuration causes the protected link to be looped.
The loopback applied is local loop 2b type. The high bit rate equipment loop on the circuit overrides the equipment loop on the circuit. Effects - Signals of the Nx64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link concerned at the transmitting end of the interface (data and associated signaling bits a, b and d) are routed to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is performed at the logical level. Loopback of all 64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link data TSs and, if applicable, the associated four signaling bits is applied. - Loopback is not applied to bit c of each set of four bits which transmits the "loop control order receipt acknowledgment" message. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. - The other links of the interface's N x 64 kbit/s link operate normally and an AIS is transmitted at the transmitting end on the data TSs as well as on the associated signaling of the link concerned. Removal - Removal is performed via the supervision and management system. Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-48
2 - A2S Card
Remote Channel-Associated Equipment Loopback Control order Reception

SUBSCRIBER
A2S TRIBUTARY
LOCAL
NETWORK
LOCAL
Nx64kbit/s or 2Mbit/s link
RECEPTION Framed "c" (bit 8) Loop 2 or 3 Control order (frame c)
AIS
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X Network or subscriber origination Loop2 or 3 control order LED LIT (frame "c")
Fail Mntce
(TS + associated signalling Concerned by loopback)
Application - Reception of channel-associated loop remote control order transmitted via frame "c" from the network. NOTE: When the protection option is enabled, activating the loopback configuration causes the protected link to be looped.
Local loop 2b type loopback. Effects - Signals of the Nx64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link concerned at the transmitting end of the interface (data and associated signaling bits a, b and d) are routed to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is performed at the logical level. Loopback of all 64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s link data TSs and, if applicable, the associated four signaling bits is applied. - Loopback is not applied to bit c of each set of four bits which transmits the "loop control order receipt acknowledgment" message. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. - The other links of the interface's N x 64 kbit/s link operate normally and an AIS is transmitted at the transmitting end on the data TSs as well as on the associated signaling of the link concerned. - If frame "c" frame alignment loss occurs on loopback, the A2S card releases the loop after a 0.5 second timeout and restarts frame "c" scanning. Removal - Information transmitted via frame c.
Loop Remote Control Order Transmission on Virtual Interface

Loop 2 or 3 remote control orders to the extension can be transmitted via the supervision and management system in the TRANSMIC 2G multiplex mode or if it transmits the signaling multiframe. These loops concern the N x 64 kbps or to 2 Mbit/s links and associated signaling. Network or subscriber-originated loop 2 control orders or network-originated loop 3 control orders are transmitted according to whether the FMX is respectively a subscriber Mux or Station Mux.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-49
2 - A2S Card

Several types of faults and errors are detected: - "Card" level faults and errors: . card out of rack (C.Out), . card not powered (FusFlt), . watchdog fault (Wdg), . replacement by a different card (C.Dif.), . connection fault (adapter card out of rack or invalid) if the card is in a subscriber shelf (S/assFlt), . self-test fault (S/test), . Link Unavailability Period in receive mode (rLUP), . Link Lost Fault (LLF), - "Port" level faults: . local failure (line failure) according to mode of operation: * * * * * * * * Signal Failure (SigFail), Frame Alignment Loss (FAL), MultiFrame Alignment Loss (MFAL), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Transmission Line Signal Failure (TLSF), Different Port (Acc.Dif.), Transmission Unavailability period (TxUP), Reception Unavailability period (RxUP),
. remote failure according to mode of operation: * * * * * Remote Signaling Alarm Indication (RMAL), Remote Alarm Indication (RAL), Remote Alarm Indication Signal (rAIS), Remote Power Failure (RPFail), Remote Jitter Reducer Unlock (rGSF),
. Network Failure (NF) according to mode of operation. . error on frame "c" (local failure, remote failure, subscriber power supply failure and subscriber unavailable). If the card (or port) is not masked, faults and errors are detected by the common equipment and an alarm is initiated: notification to CT (and Remote Management System) of a major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. Local failures (line failures) the "AIS" failure, remote failure, network failure and frame "c" failure cause the "Fail" LED to light up on the A2S Card front panel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-50
2 - A2S Card

The following table lists the faults displayed by the front panel LED, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions. Detected Fault Local failure: FAL, SigFail or MFAL Probable Cause Fault detected by local equipment on signal received from far-end equipment: . local equipment failure . far-end to local equipment failure Fault detected by far-end equipment transmitting information to local equipment . far-end equipment failure . far-end-to-local equipment failure AIS Alarm indication transmitted by far-end equipment .Far-end equipment failure Failure detected by the network or on the network: . any network equipment . far-end-to-local equipment failure Failure detected by the network or on the network: . any network equipment . far-end-to-local equipment failure No local action Remedial Action Check interface cable
Remote failure
See far-end equipment
Network failure (depending on mode of operation)
No local action
Failure on frame "c"
No local action
Table 2-23 - Alarm Analysis

Refer to CT technical Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Configurable Parameters
Card interfaces can be configured independently, unless the protection option is enabled, via the supervision and management system. Configuration parameters are:
Common interface parameters:

- mode of operation, - interface activation or deactivation, - interface impedance (75 or 120 ohms).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-51
2 - A2S Card
Card parameters: - protection option (Enabled or Disabled; Disabled by default), - switching criterion (Immediate or Delayed; Immediate by default), - option to transmit an AIS in case of forcing (Enabled or Disabled; Disabled by default), - name of Protected Digital Block (PDB) on 23 characters (empty string by default). Interface Parameters Depending on Mode of Operation:
MODE OF OPERATION TR2G Multiplex or Tributary CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS - TDCN used or unused, - Bit 6 in TS0 without FA set to "1" or "0". G.732 Tributary - Frame c processed or not, - Forward Reaction on failure or not, - Bits a and b to network in case of line failure to "1" or "0", - Bits b, c and d to line transparent or, respectively set to "1", "0" and "1". International G.732 Tributary - Frame c processed or not, - Bit 8 to "1" or "0", - Bits a and b to failure to "1" or "0", network on line
- Bits b and d to line transparent or, set to "1". G.736 Tributary TRANSFIX Tributary - Frame c processed or not - Frame c processed or not, - forward Reaction on failure or not. G.732 - IV Tributary - Forward Reaction on failure or not, - Bits a and b to failure to "1" or "0", network on line
- Bits b, c and d to line transparent or, respectively set to "1", "0" and "1". International G.732 - IV Tributary - Bit 8 to "1" or "0", - Bits a and b to failure to "1" or "0", network on line
- Bits b and d to line transparent or set to "1". I431 Tributary - Frame c processed or not, - Forward Reaction on network failure or not. Transparent TS0 Tributary - Frame c processed or not, - Forward Reaction on network failure or not.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 2-52
SECTION 3 V.24/.V11 CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-2
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 3.1 - Overview 3.2 - Description 3.3 - Start-up and Operation 3.3.1 - Configuration 3.3.2 - Initialization 3.3.3 - Utilization 3.3.3.1 - General 3.3.3.2 - V24/V11 Operation 3.3.3.3 - X24/V11 Operation - Data 3.3.3.4 - X24/V11 Operation - Data + Signalling 3.3.3.5 - Signal Adaptation 3.3.3.6 - Phase Alignment Compensation 3.3.3.7 - Loopbacks 3.4 - Maintenance 3.4.1 - Loopback Application 3.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 3.4.2.1 - Alarm Description 3.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED 3.4.2.3 - Cause of a Fault 3.5 - User Software Description 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-7 3-7 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-19 3-22 3-25 3-28 3-28 3-31 3-31 3-48 3-48 3-48 3-49 3-50
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-3
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
LISTE OF FIGURES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in V24/V11 mode of operation Table 3-2 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in V24/V11 mode of operation Table 3-3 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11, Data mode of operation Table 3-4- Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11, Data mode of operation Table 3-5 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11 data + signalling mode of operation Table 3-6 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11 data + signalling mode of operation Table 3-7 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-4
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-5
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
V24V11
Fail
Green Led Red Led
Mntce
Yellow Led
Test
Loop
J1 J2 J3
Eqpt Line Extn
Loop Loop Loop 2
Norm Loop
25
13
L T
14
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-6
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.1 - Overview
The V24/V11 Card accepts three N x 64 kbps (N*64 kbps) or 48 kbps, 56 kbps channels for FMX. The Card supports three separate standard DCE interfaces providing V24/V11 or X24/V11 links. V11 output ports may be changed to V35 output ports via hardwired connections. Each interface used independently, can support the following configurable bit rates : Nx64 kbps with N [1,31] as well as 48 and 56 kbps. The table below indicates the bit rates usable depending on the mode of operation. MODE OF OPERATION V24/V11(V10) X24/V11, Data X24/V11, Data + signalling BIT RATE 48, 56, 64 to 1920 kbps 48, 56, 64 to 1984 kbps 48, 56, 64 to 1920 kbps
NOTE : The 1984 kbps bit rate does not include the four signalling bits. Neither the signalling nor frame "c" can be processed. V.24/V11 card configuration and operation is performed via a Supervision and Management System which may be: - a craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or on the connection panel or GIE adapter card depending on the type of unit and of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS Network Management System. Maintenance operations (loopbacks) may be controlled via switches located on the card front panel when they are validated by the supervision and management system. . Reminder: The terms below as used in this Technical Manual when referring to the V24/V11 Card have the following meanings : - reception direction : interface-to-common equipment direction, - transmission direction : common equipment-to-interface direction.
3.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the V24/V11 Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 3-1): 4 LEDs for all three card ports : Red "Fail" LED Fail: detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c), or V.110 Frame Alignment Loss FAL, or extension failure, or remote extension failure, or remote extension power failure, or remote extension unavailable, or -5V failure or connection error (in the case of a subscriber shelf).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-7
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Yellow "Mntce" LED Green"Test" LED
Maintenance : line, equipment, or extension loopback. When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation. Test: line-or extension loopback for the interface indicated by the "J1/J2/J3" switch position When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation. Loopback: line or equipment loopback for the interface indicated by the "J1/J2/J3" switch position. When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation.
Yellow "Loop" LED
3 switches controlling maintenance access (loopback testing) when the user terminal is not connected to the Card: three-position switch "J1/J2/J3" Controls selection of the relevant interface for loopback (interface 1, 2 or 3). Even when loopback switch control is not provided, the switch validates the use of the "Test" and "Loop" LEDs for the designated connection. Controls selection of the loopback to be applied (equipment, line or extension loopback). Inoperative when the "Norm/Loop" switch is in "Norm" position. Controls selection of normal operation or validates loopback selected with the above switches. NOTE : The "Norm/Loop" switch is activated (or inoperative) by the supervision and management system. Inoperative when the Norm/Loop switch is in Norm position.
three-position switch "Eqt Loop/Line Loop/ Extn Loop2" two-position switch "Norm/Loop"
25-way connector
Not used
Fuses: F501, F502,: T1, 25A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-8
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD

The V24/V11 Card requires no particular configuration before installation in the shelf. On initialization or subsequent upgrades, operating instructions (configuraton parameters) can be programmed via the supervision and management system. .
The V24/V11 Card is initialized as follows: on power up, initialization followed by self-test, configuration with the user terminal if the standard (default) configuration parameters are not those desired.
Power up initialization
On power up, the Card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are presented via front panel LEDs as follows : a. LEDs remain unlit . Check fuses and the power converter. b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed successfully. c. Self-tests Five functional self-tests are performed in sequence. If no fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a failure is detected, the failure code is indicated by the flashing condition of the "Mntce", "Test" and "Loop" LEDs : replace the Card. Failure conditions are coded as follows : Failure code LEDs Fail Mntce Test Loop F: flashing LED F F F F F F F 1 2 3 4 5
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-9
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Failure code
1 2
Tested circuits and functions number

RAM microprocessor block data memory Dual access RAM Transmission and reception of TS0s and TS16s Input ports Data reception EEPROM For storing configuration parameters selected via CT ASIC Digital processing operations
V.24/V.11 (V10) and X.24/V.11 type card operation is described in paragraph 3.3.3.

The V24/V11 Card offers various modes of operation. The following options may be selected via the user terminal for each individual interface : mode of operation including bit rate and manual control of control circuits: . V24/V11 operation, . X24/V11 operation, Data, . X24/V11 operation, Data + Signalling, rate adaptation (X50 bis or frame V.110) on the equipment internal interface (64 kbps datastream) if the selected bit rate is equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps, phase alignment function in the X24/V11 mode of operation with clock B used.
Loopback applicable is performed via the supervision and management system, subscriber control orders or remote control order reception or switches located on the front panel if they have been validated by the supervision and management system (Norm/Loop switch). Presentation of detected alarms and loopbacks in progress is provided via front panel LEDs.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-10
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.3.3.2 - V24/V11 Operation

Bit c in the four signalling TS16 bits is fully under control of the Card. Signalling bit d is not used : it is set continuously to logic "1". At N*64 kbps bit rates, control signals use bits a and b in TS16. At bit rates equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps, control signals can use bits S1, S3 and S4 in frame V.110 (SB is copied on bit a), if any, or otherwise signalling bits a and b as at other bit rates. Use of frame V.110 for adaptation to the 64 kbps internal bit rate is described in sub-section 3.3.3.5. Where bits a and b are not used (transmission bit rate equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps with V.110 frame), bits a and b are set continuously to logic "1". In the network-to-subscriber direction, (b and d) unused bits are not decoded. Where bits a and b are used but circuits using them are not supported, bits a and b are set to the logic condition representing "ON": a = "0" (105 image) and b = "1" (inverted 108 image). Special case: On loop 2 remote control order or equipment loop (supervision and management system or swithc) cntrol order reception, loopback is applied to bits a, b and d (SA and SB frame V.110) received in the network-tosubscriber direction and transmitted forward in the subscriber-to-network direction.
The V24/V11 interface is the DCE type. Data received through the network from system common equipment units on the network are transmitted over circuit 104 to the subscriber (remote) DTE. Data received from the subscriber (remote) DTE over circuit 103 are transmitted to common equipment units as data. The Card controls interchange circuits 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 114, 115, 140, 141 and 142 of each connection. Use of the various interchange circuits is described from a functional standpoint in ITU-T recommendation V24. The special provisions applicable for interchange circuit operation are provided further.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-11
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Via interface configuration, control circuits can be : - "forced" - "controlled" - "isolated" - "ignored" : condition "0" (output only), : "carried" or "used" circuit (input/output) : set to high impedance (output only), : uncontrolled circuit (input only).
The table below summarizes possible circuit conditions. CIRCUIT POSSIBLE STATES Forced Controlled Isolated Ignored 105 106 107 108 109 140 141
X X
X X -
X X -
X X
X X -
X X
X X
Circuit 106 may be used (activated) as a delayed replication of circuit 105 (if circuit 105 is indeed controlled) or be set to high impedance (isolated). Circuit 114 (clock) used for SDH transmission may be the replication of circuit 115 or its inverted form. V11 or V10 operation is obtained by configuring circuits 105 and 109 appropriately, in manual circuit control mode: as a result, the 120 termination for circuit 105 is automatically connected in V11 mode or disconnected in V10 mode. Circuits 105 and 109 may also be set to high impedance (isolated). Transmission of control signals and operation of all interchange circuits are described below. Note : - the loopbacks mentioned are described in sub-section 3.4.1, - all network fault conditions are analyzed in.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-12
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Control signal transmission

Signalling bit a (or bit S4 in the V.110 frame) is transmitted over circuit 109 to the subscriber DTE. The signal received from the subscriber DTE over circuit 105 is placed in signalling bit a (or bit S4 of frame V.110 ) to be delivered to circuit 109 of the extension. The signal received from the subscriber DTE on circuit 108 is placed on signalling bit b inverted signal - (or in bit S3 and possibly S1 in the V.110 frame) for transmission over circuit 107 of the extension. The control signal options (transmission), make it possible to configure separately circuits 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 140 and 141.
A "filtering" option selected when configuring the interface in manual circuit control mode prevents signalling transmission errors in - bits a and b (or S1, S3 and S4) - in the four signalling bits - (signal filtering criterion: 3 signalling bits received consecutively through the network in the same condition). Circuit 103 (Transmitted Data) Direction: From DTE. All data present on this circuit are transmitted to the network when circuits 105, 106, and 107 are in the ON condition. In any other case, circuit 103 is deemed to carry a logic 1. Circuit 104 (Received Data) Direction: To DTE. This circuit transmits subscriber data from the network when circuit 109 carries a logic "0" (ON condition). When circuit 109 carries a logic "1" (OFF condition), circuit 104 is set continuously to logic "1". Closed condition to open condition delay of circuit 109 allows all the data present in the multiplexer to be transmitted on circuit 104.. Circuit 105 (Request To Send) Direction: From DTE. Circuit 105 indicates whether DTE is prepared to transmit data on the network. The condition of this circuit is analyzed by the interface which responds to DTE via circuit 106. The condition of circuit 105 (ON = "0" and OFF = "1") is placed in bit a or else in bit S4 in the V.110 frame. This circuit may be configured into two alternative modes: a. 105 controlled : the condition of circuit 105 is analyzed and transmitted in bit a or bit S4 in the V.110 frame. b. 105 set to the ON condition : the status of circuit 105 is not controlled, i.e. neither analyzed nor transmitted. As a result, circuit 105 is deemed to be in the ON condition and therefore bit a or S4 is set to the "0" condition.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-13
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Circuit 106 (Ready For Sending) Direction: To DTE. This circuit indicates whether the FMX Cross-connect is prepared to transmit data. The condition of this circuit is identical to that of circuit 105 (if the latter is controlled) with an R1 delay. Circuit 106 can be isolated (locked in high impedance condition) or controlled (under the control of circuit 105 in normal operating conditions). However, in the event of a link failure, it is no longer under control of circuit 105: the OFF condition of circuit 107 immediately and in all cases causes circuit 106 to change to the OFF condition (other 107 OFF/106 combinations are provided for by ITU-T but are not implemented in the FMX Cross-connect Multiplex), when circuit 107 changes back to the ON condition, circuit 106 cannot change back to the ON condition until delay R1 has expired.
The delay or response time R1 can be programmed when configuring the interface in manual circuit control mode. It may have the following values : 8 to 12 bits, 48 to 64 bits.
Circuit 106 may be set to high impedance (and therefore deactivated) in the following cases: by configuring the interface for operation in the manual circuit control mode, automatically when circuits 105 and 109 are not controlled.
Circuit 106 is set to logic "1" during equipment loopback. Circuit 107 (Data Set Ready) Direction: To DTE. When in the ON condition, this circuit indicates whether MD2G equipment is ready to operate (it enables DTE to change circuit 105 to the ON condition): therefore, it does not have exactly the same meaning as described in ITU-T recommendation V24. This circuit may be configured into two alternative modes (in conjunction with circuit 108): a. 107 controlled : the value of extension circuit 108, transmitted in bit b or bit S3 and possibly S1 the V.110 frame, is applied to circuit 107. b. 107 set to the ON condition : circuit 107 is not controlled, i.e. the condition of bit b or bit S3 and possibly S1 of the V.110 frame is not analyzed. Extension circuit 108 is then deemed to be in ON condition. Circuit 107 changes back to the ON condition : when circuit 107 is controlled during normal operation of the link and extension circuit 108 is in the ON condition (bit b set to "1" or bits S1 and S3 to "0").
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-14
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Circuit 107 changes to the OFF condition : when equipment loopback is applied to the interface, with loopback being removed, in the event of a link failure (network fault) or, with circuit 107 being controlled, extension circuit 108 is in the OFF conditions (bit b set to "0" or bits S1 and S3 to "1").
Circuit 108 (Connect Data Set) Direction: From DTE. Circuit 108 indicates that DTE is connected to DCE and operates normally. Therefore, it does not have exactly the same meaning as described in ITU-T recommendation V24. The condition of this circuit (ON = "0" and OFF = "1") is analyzed by the interface and transmitted in bit b or else on bit S3 and possibly S1 of the V.110 frame. This circuit may be configured into two alternative modes: a. 108 controlled in conjunction with 107 : the condition of circuit 108 is analyzed and inserted in bit b or else in bit S3 and possibly S1 transmitted on the network. b. 108 and 107 in the ON condition : circuit 108 is not controlled, i.e. neither analyzed nor transmitted. Circuit 108 is deemed to be set continuously in the ON condition and bit b transmitted on the network is set to "1" or bit S3 and possibly S1 are set to "0". Circuit 109 (Data channel received line signal detector) Direction: To DTE. When set in the ON condition, circuit 109 indictates whether the FMX Crossconnect Multiplex is prepared to transmit data. Therefore, it does not have exactly the same meaning as in ITU-T recommendation V24. The circuit condition is given by the condition of bit a or else bit S4 in the V.110 frame, which represent the condition of extension circuit 105. This circuit may be configured into three alternative modes: a. 109 controlled : the value of extension circuit 105, transmitted in bit a or bit S4 in the V.110 frame, is applied to circuit 109. b. 109 forced in closed condition. c. 109 set to the ON condition: circuit 109 is not controlled, i.e. the conditions of bit a or bit S4 of the V.110 frame are not analyzed. Extension circuit 105 is then deemed to be in ON condition. Circuit 109 may be set to the OFF condition in the event of a network failure. It is set to the OFF condition when equipment-loopback is applied.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-15
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Circuit 114 (Transmitter signal element timing (DCE source)) Direction : to DTE. The signals transmitted on this circuit supply the DTE with the timing circuit for the elements of the signal transmitted on circuit 103. On circuit 103, the DTE must provide a data signal in which the transition between signal elements theoretically occur at the same time as the transitions of the 0 (closed) to 1 (open) condition transitions of circuit 114 (closed and open conditions must be maintained for theoretically equal time periods). The signal transmitted by circuit 114 is directly derived from the equipment reference clock. Circuit 115 (Receiver signal element timing (DCE source)) Direction : to DTE : Circuit 115 synchronizes the signals transmitted on circuit 104. The open and closed conditions must be maintained for equal ime periods and the closed to open condition transitions indicate the median position of the bits transmitted on circuit 104 to the DCE.. Circuit 115 is derived from the FMX reference clock Circuit 140 Circuit 140 can be ignored on port configuration. When it is ignored, this circuit is considered as being permanently in the open condition. When circuit 140 is controlled, the signal transmitted by the DTE on this circuit is used to apply or remove a type 2 loop on the extension DCE. The closed condition of this circuit corresponds to a type 2 loopback request on the remote DCE while the open condition corresponds to the stopping of the a type 2 loopback request on the extension DCE. Circuit 141 Circuit 141 can be ignored on port configuration. When it is ignored, this circuit is considered as being permanently in the open condition. When circuit 141 is controlled, the signal transmitted by the DTE on this circuit is used to activate or remove a type 3 loop on the local DCE. The closed condition of this circuit corresponds to a type 3 loopback request on the local DCE while the open condition corresponds to the stopping of the a type 3 loopback request on the local DCE. Circuit 142 The signals transmitted on circuit 142 indicate the presence of a maintenance condition or not. The closed condition of this circuit indicates that the DCE is in maintenance condition which prevents the reception or transmission of data to or from a remote DTE. The open condition indicates that the DCE is not in maintenance condition.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-16
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Faults No fault indication is detected from connected equipment (subscriber-to-network direction). The faults detected are relative to multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). Note : The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary. Fault detected Fault indication transmitted in frame "c" (extension failure, remote extension failure, remote extension power failure, remote extension unavailable). Consequential action Forward reaction depending on selected maintenance configuration - none, - or effective upon : . Forcing to "1" of data present on circuit 104 (This action occurs less than 100 ms after detection), . Open status is applied on circuit 106 after a delay of 1s 100 ms if the circuit si controlled. . Open status is applied on circuit 107 after a delay of: * 10 s 1 s if the circuit is forced * 1 s 100 ms if the circuit is controlled . Open status is applied on circuit 109 after a delay of: * 10 s 1 s if the circuit is forced, * 1 s 100 ms if the circuit is controlled. . NOTE : In case of interface or equipment loop, there is no action on the data and command circuits. Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of fault indication of common equipemtn for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
NOTE : This is reception on the framed multiplex side with one of bits 10, 11, 12 or 13 of the frame in the inactive condition the multiplex circuit must be G.704 type with channel associated signalling
Table 3-1 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in V24/V11 mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-17
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Fault detected .../... Network Failure NOTE : This error indicates a network failure upstream from the equipment (AIS, , FAL, MFAL) It is detected by the presence of unframed bit c different from O.
Consequential action Forward Reaction . Remote maintenance actions maintained for 0,5 s 100 ms*, . Data present on circuit 104 forced to 1 This action occurs less than 100 ms after detection), . Open status is applied on circuit 106 after a delay of 1 s 100 ms if the circuit is controlled. . Open status is applied on circuit 107 after a delay of: * 10 s 1 s if the circuit is forced, * 1 s 100 ms if the circuit is controlled . . Open status is applied on circuit 109 after a delay of: * 10 s 1 s if the circuit is forced, * 1 s 100 ms if the circuit is controlled. . NOTE : In case of interchange or equipment loop, there is no action on the data and control circuits. Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Fault indication transmissiont to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
V.110 Frame alignment loss indication
Table 3-2 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in V24/V11 mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-18
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.3.3.3 - X24/V11 Operation - Data

No signalling is supported. Bits b and d from the four TS16 signalling bits are set to "1". Where bit a is not used (transmission bit rate equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps with the V.110 frame), bit a is set to "1". Where bit a is used, as C and I are not supported, bit a is set to the condition representing the ON condition : a = "0" (image of C). In the network-to-subscriber direction, bits a, b and d are neither analyzed nor transmitted. Bits S1, S3 and S4 in the V.110 frame are set to "0" and are neither analyzed nor transmitted in the network-to-subscriber direction. Special Case : On reception of a remote control loop 2 or an equipment loop, (supervision and management system or switch) loopback is applied to bits a, b and d (SA and SB of frame V.110) received in the network-to-subscriber direction and transmitted forward in the subscriber-to-network direction.
Signalling bit c is fully supported by the Card. NOTE : the 1984 kbps bit rate does not include four signalling bits, frame c and signalling are not processed. The interface configured for X24/V11 data operation is the DCE type. Data received from the system common equipment units on the network are transmitted over circuit R to the subscriber (remote) DTE. Data received from the subscriber (remote) DTE on circuit T are transmitted forward to common equipment units as data. Only circuit B is configurable on interchange circuit forcing: circuits C and I are always, respectively, programmed in the ignored and isolated mode. circuit B (clock) is either effectively used (activated) or isolated set to high impedance.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-19
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Faults No fault indication is detected from connected equipment (subscriber-to-network direction). The faults detected are relative to multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). Note : The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary. Actions consequential to a fault do not concern the 1984 kbps bit rate.
Fault detected Fault indication transmitted in frame "c" (extension failure, remote extension failure, remote extension power failure, remote extension unavailable). NOTE : This is reception on the framed multiplex side with one of bits 10, 11, 12 or 13 of the frame in the inactive condition the multiplex circuit must be G.704 type with channel associated signalling
Consequential action Forward reaction depending on selected maintenance configuration - none,
- or effective with actions described below on the data and on the command circuits for the network failure.
Backward reaction:
- None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 3-3 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11, Data mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-20
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Fault detected .../... Network fault
NOTE : This error indicates a network failure upstream from the equipment (AIS, FAL, MFAL.).It is detected by the presence of bit c set to "1" or bit c unframed different from "0".
- or effective with: . remote maintenance actions maintained for 0,5 s 100 ms*, . Forcing to "1" or "0" (choice made by supervison and management system on port configuration) of data present on circuit R (This action occurs less than 100 ms after detection), Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 3-4- Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11, Data mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-21
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.3.3.4 - X24/V11 Operation - Data + Signalling

At any bit rate, loopback control orders and fault indications are transmitted in frame "c At N*64 kbps bit rates, signalling is transmitted in bit a from the four TS16 signalling bits. At bit rates equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps, signalling is transmitted in bit S4 of the appropriate V.110 frame for adaptation to 64 kbps internal bit rate (refer to sub-sections 3.3.3.4 and 3.3.3.5). Signalling bit c is fully supported by the card. Signalling bits b and d are not used : they are set to "1". Bits S1 and S3 are set to "0" and bit X set to "1". Special Case: On reception of a remote control loop 2 or an equipment loop, (supervision and management system or switch) loopback is applied to bits a, b and d (SA and SB of frame V.110) received in the network-to-subscriber direction and transmitted forward in the subscriber-to-network direction.
The interface configured for X24/V11 data + signalling operation is the DCE type. Data received from the system common equipment units on the network are transmitted over circuit R to the subscriber (remote) DTE. Data received from the subscriber (remote) DTE on circuit T are transmitted forward to common equipment units as data. Bit a (or bit S4 in the V.110 frame) is transmitted over circuit I to the subscriber DTE. The signal received from the subscriber DTE over circuit C is inserted in bit a (or bit S4 in the V.110 frame). A "filtering" option selected during interface configuration in manual circuit control mode prevents signalling transmission errors (signal I filtering criterion : 3 bits a (or S4 in the V.110 frame) received consecutively from the network in the same condition). Only circuit B can be configured during interface forcing: circtuis C and I are always programmed in the controlled mode. circuit B (clock) is either effectively used (activated or isolated) set to high impedance.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-22
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Faults No fault indication is detected from connected equipment (subscriber-to-network direction). The faults detected are relative to multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). Note : The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary.
Fault detected Fault indication transmitted in frame "c" (extension failure, remote extension failure, remote extension power failure, remote extension unavailable). NOTE : This error indicates a network failure upstream from the equipment (AIS, FAL, MFAL.).It is detected by the presence of bit c set to "1" or bit c unframed different from "0".
- or effective with: . Remote maintenance actions maintained for 0,5 s 100 ms*, . Forcing to "1" or "0" (choice made by supervision and management system on port configuration) of data present on circuit R (This action occurs less than 100 ms after detection), Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message). .../...
Table 3-5 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11 data + signalling mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-23
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Fault detected .../... Network fault
NOTE : This error indicates a network failure upstream from the equipment (AIS, FAL, MFAL.).It is detected by the presence of bit c set to "1" or bit c unframed different from "0".
- or effective with: . Remote maintenance actions maintained for 0,5 s 100 ms*, . Forcing to "1" or "0" (choice made by supervision and management system on port configuration) of data present on circuit R (This action occurs less than 100 ms after detection), . Open status is applied on circuit I after a delay of 1 s 100 ms. Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Table 3-6 - Effects of V24/V11 Card faults in X24/V11 data + signalling mode of operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-24
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.3.3.5 - Signal Adaptation

X.24/V.11 DATA INTERFACE
Only circuits G, T, R, S are used (circuit I can be forced). The transmission or reception facilities of the other circuits are inoperative (outputs set to high impedance, protection remaining in place). This condition of uncontrolled circuits is not applied on reception. Only the simple twoway transmission of data in the synchronous mode controlled by the signals present on circuit S is performed. When the multiplex circuit has channel-associated signalling, bits a and b are transmitted respectively at 0 and 1 furthermore at 48 kbps in V110.7a and 56 kbps in V110.7c, bits SA and SB are transmitted at 0.
X.24/V.11 DATA + SIGNALLING INTERFACE

The multiplexer adapts the signals transmitted and received at the interface (circuits T and R) into a two-way binary logical signal structured in bytes which is inserted in the TS of a multiplex circuit. This mode can only be selected if the multiplex circuit has channel-associated signalling (it cannot be used for a 1984 kbps bit rate). The circuits used ared G, T, R, S, C, I and B. The functions performed are: * * To-way data transfer in synchronous mode controlled by signals present on circuit S, Transmission on circuit I of the opposite end of the link of the condition present on circuit C. There is no phase alignment between the signals present on circuits T, C and R, I. The signals presented on C are carried by bit a in TS16 of the multiplex circuit at a bit rate of 500 bps.
The conversion rule is the following: - C OPEN
a = 1 I OPEN and C CLOSED a = 0 I CLOSED - C OPEN SB = 1 I OPEN et C CLOSED SB = 0 I CLOSED (frame V.110, 48
and 56 kbps) Signalling is carried in the same way: - circuit C condition is transmitted on bit a in TS16 of the multiplex circuit and on bit SB in frame V.110 at kbps in V.110.7a or at 56 kbps in V.110.7c, - circuit I reproduces the condition of bit a in TS16 or of bit SB in frame V.110 at 48 kbps in V.110.7a and at 56 kbps in V.110.7c, - bit b is transmitted at 1 and bit SA is transmitted at 0 at 48 kbps in V.110.7a and at 56 kbps in V.110.7c. There are two modes of operation possible (except for the use of frame V.100) to apply conditions on circuit I. Selection between the two is performed via port configuration. - without signalling filtering : the condition of bit a in TS16 is reproduced immediately on circcuit I. - with signalling filtering : the condition of bit a in TS16 is filtered before reproduction on circuit I (three consecutive bits a received in same condition), Bit SB received is not filtered in V.110.
V.24/V.11(.V10) INTERFACE
The multiplexer adapts the data signals transmitted and received at the interface (circuits 103 and 104) into a two-way binary logical signal at 64 kbps structured in bytes which is transmitted by a TS of a multiplex circuit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-25
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Signalling Transport In addition to the adaptation of signals transmitted by circuits 103 and 104, the multiplexer must allow transmission of the following circuits when the multiplex circuit has channel-associated signalling. - Circuit 105 : The condition of circuit 105 is transmitted on bit a of TS16 (and SB of frame V.110) of the multiplex circuit when this circuit is controlled (selection on port configuration) and also on bit SB at 48kpbs in V.110.7a and at 56 kbps in V.110.7c. - Circuit 109 : When circuit 109 is controlled, it reproduces the condition of bit a in TS16 or of bit SB at 48 kbps in V.110.7a and 56 kbps in V.110.7.c. Two modes of operation are available (except frame V.110 use) : - without signalling filtering : bit a condition immediately reproduced on circuit 109. - with signalling filtering: bit a condition filtered before being applied on circuit 109. (Filtering criterion : three consecutive a bits received in same condition). Bit SB is not filtered in the V.110 mode.
When bit a is used, the conversion rule is the following:
a = 1 109 OPEN and 105 CLOSED a = 0 109 CLOSED, - 105 OPEN SB = 1 109 OPEN and 105 CLOSED SB = 0 109 CLOSED (frame
- 105 OPEN V.110). - Circuit 108 : Circuit 108 signal is transmitted on reversed bit b in TS16 of the multiplex circuit when this circuit is controlled (selection on port configuration) or on bit SA at 48 kbps in V.110.7a and at 56 kbps in V.110.7c. - Circuit 107 : When circuit 107 is conctrolled, it reproduces the condition of reversed bit b in TS16 or the condition of bit SA at 48 kbps in V.110.7a and 56 kbps in V.110.7c. Two modes of operation are available (except for frame V.110 use) : - without signalling filtering : reversed bit b condition immediately reproduced on circuit 107. - with sigalling filtering: reversed bit b condition filtered before being applied on circuit 107. (Filtering criterion : three consecutive reversed b bits received in same condition). Bit SA is not filtered in the V.110 mode.
When bit bi is used, the conversion rule is the following:
b = 0 107 OPEN and 108 CLOSED b = 1 107 CLOSED, - 108 OPEN SA = 0 107 OPEN and 108 CLOSED SA = 1 107 CLOSED (frame
- 108 OPEN V.110)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-26
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
RATE ADAPTATION TO ITU-T RECOMMENDATION X.50 bis - Bit F (bit 1 in TS of multiplex circuit) is forced to 0, - The next 6 bits (bit 2 to 7in the TS) transport data, - Bit S (bit 8 in the TS) is framed with the following pattern: 1/0 (alternating 1 and 0) 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, X. Bit X can be set to 0 or 1 via programming on start-up. Bit S is not decoded on reception. For the 56 kbps bit rate, rate adaptation is performed as follows: - The first 7 bits (bits 1 to 7 in the TS) transport data, - Bit S (bit 8 in the TS) is framed with the following pattern: 1/0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, X. Bit X can be set to 0 or 1 via programming on start-up. Bit S is not decoded on reception. RATE ADAPTATION TO ITU-T RECOMMENDATION V.110 For the 48 kbps bit rate, the user rate adapatation is performed in one step according to table 7.a of 2.2 of ITU-T recommendation V.110. The frame appropriate to this bit rate uses four successive bytes of the TS of the multiplex circuit or 24 bits of data (bits 2 to 7 in the TS), For the 56 kbps bit rate, the method is similar to the one above with a 64 bit frame (8 successive bytes of the TS) including 56 bits of data (bits 1 to 7 in the TS) according to table 7.C of 2.2 of ITU-T recommendation V.110. The use of the eight bits of the first four bytes follows the following sequence: 0, X, SA, SB can allow channel signalling transmission. The user can also program the 56 kbit rate adaptation according to table 7.b of 2.2 of ITU-T recommendation V.110. In this cas, the eight bit of the TS is set to 1. For frame structures corresponding to tables 7a and 7c: - Circuit 108 signal is inserted in bit SA for transmission on extension circuit 107. When it is not used, it is set to 0., - Circuit 105 signal is inserted in bit SB for transmission on extension circuit 109. When it is not used, it is set to 0. - Bit X is set to 1., - Bit d of the four signalling bits is set to 1. For the frame structures corresponding to table 7b: - Circuit 105 signal is inserted bit a of the four signalling bits for transmission on extension circuit 109. When it is not used, it is set to 0. - Circuit 108 reversed signal is inserted into bit b of the four signalling bits for transmission on extension circuit 107 after reversal. When it is not used, it is set to 1. - bit d of the four signalling bits is set to 1.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-27
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.3.3.6 - Phase Alignment Compensation

Phase alignment enables the V24/V11 Card to operate as a byte-mode DCE (X24/V11 operation with clock B enable) when subscriber line length is such that delay (DCE-to-DTE + DTE-to-DCE) is greater than 1 bit time time period, provided attenuation remains within permissible values. DCE samples received data T on the falling edge of clock S with delay depending on line length. If this length is excessive, data may be sampled with several bits delay, and the formation of bytes under control of clock B is no longer correct. In the V24/V11 Card, phase alignment compensation consists in transmitting a byte "10000000" to the subscriber DTE which returns this byte (DTE should have line loopback applied). The V24/V11 Card analyzes the return byte to detect the position of the logic "1". The number of delay bits is thus determined and used to achieve correct sampling of data bytes. The correction is performed by programming the number compensation bits supplied by the common equipment.
3.3.3.7 - Loopbacks
The V24/V11 Card offers various loopback options: - the loopbacks controlled by the supervision and management system or by the front panel switches: . line or interface loopback (loop 3b), . equipment loopback (loop 2b), . loop 2 (switch or supervision and management system) or loop 3 (supervision and management system only) (extension loopback). - loopbacks controlled by ITU-T type control in V24/V11 operation: . line or interface loopback (loop 3b), . loop 2 (extension loopback). - remote controlled loopback (loop 2 : equipment loopback). Loopbacks comply with ITU-T recommendation X.150 with their application described in paragraph 3.4.1. For maintenance actions, a priority system has been set up. Priority 1 overrides all others. Only the control order with the highest priority is established. In case of equal priority, only the first control order detected is set up. Priority 1 : Loopbacks controlled by the supervision and management system. Priority 2 : Network-originated loopbacks controlled by frame c. Priority 3 : Loopbacks controlled by card front panel keys or subscriber originated loopbacks controlled by frame c. The first control order detected is performed. Priority 4 : Loopbacks controlled by circuits 140 and 141 (in the V.24/V.110(V.10) mode only) A control order change is indicated by a message to the common equipment which is fed back to the supervisions and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-28
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Circuit R condition in case of an equipment loopback (X24/V11 operation)

Configuration options can be used to change the manually controlled condition value of circuit R, on a interface-per-interface basis, in case of an equipment loopback (value "0" or "1").
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-29
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
EXTENSION
FMX h
64 I
64 kbit/s interface
Extn RC Loop 2
DTE c V24 /V11 (V10)
REMOTE UNIT OR SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK
DCE
FMX b
DTE V24 /V11 (V10)

i
Lp3b Lp2b LOCAL FMX a
FMX d
BBT xRx
BB MODEM e
FMX f SbMux 2 Mbit/s
FMX g StMux
Loop 3c
local control order (supervision and management system or switches) subscriber control order (DTE) in V.24/V.11(V.10) mode of operation local control order (supervision and management system or switches) or network-originated remote control order or subscriber remote control order (transmitter: FMXb or FMXd or DTE c) remote control order by the supervision and management system or subscriber-originated switches to the extension (transmitter FMXa, to FMXb or FMXd) or subscriber control order (DTEi) in the V.24/V.11 (V.10) mode of operation.
Loop 2b
EXT RC (Loop 2)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-30
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD

The following loopbacks are available on the V24/V11 Card: line loopback: loop 3c via the supervision and management system or switches or, in the, V.24/V.11(V.10) mode of operation, via DTE subscriber remote control order, equipment loopback: Loop 2b via the supervision and management system or switches, equipment loopback: Loop 2b upon reception of a remote controlled loopback (loop 2) control order, loop 2 or 3: transmission of a loop 2 or 3 remote control order to the extension via the supervision and management system or switches (loop 2 only) or, in the V.24/V.11(V.10) mode of operation, via DTE subscriber remote control order (loop 2 only).
For front panel switch controlled loopbacks, the Norm/Loop switch must be validated by the supervision and management system (Refer to CT user manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480). The loopback descriptions below are first given for V24/V11 operation and then for X24/V11 (Data or Data + Signalling) operation.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-31
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Line or Interchange Circuit loopback V24/V11 operation

LOCAL SUBSCRIBER DTE
141 105 108 103 104 107 106 109 142 to "0" TRANSMISSION Loopback control via Supervision and Management system or by subscriber
Fail
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
Data = a = b = d = 1 RC loop 2 (frame "c")
Loopback control via front panel switches

Fail
Mntce
Mntce
Test
Test
Loop
J3 J2 J1
Loop
J3 J2 J1
Lp
Loop Loop Loop2 Norm Loop
LED LIT
Application
a. Via the supervision and management system - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches - Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. - Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Line loop" position. - Set switch "Norm / Loop" to "Loop" position. c. By subscriber control order - ITU-T control order: . circuit 141 changes to "0" (ON), The loopback applied is local loop 3c.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-32
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The signals received from the line at the receive end of the interface (103) are transmitted to line at the transmitting end of the interface (104). The signals present on circuits 114 and 115 remain directly derived from the internal clock of the equipment. Circuit 107 is the image of circuit 108 if the latter is controlled (it is set to "0" otherwise). Circuit 142 changes to "0" (ON) to denote the maintenance status. Circuit 106 operates normally in response to circuit 105. Circuit 109 in the "1" (OFF) condition locks circuit 104 in the "1" condition. When line bit rates are equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps with use of frame V.110, bits SA and SB are forced to 0. The data, possible channel-associated signalling bits and signalling bits a, b d in TS 16 transmitted to the network are forced to "1". If a G.704 type channel-associated signalling multiplex circuit is used, bit c is framed with the loop 2 control order message, subscriber-or network-originated, depending on whether the multiplexer is configured as a St Mux or Sb Mux. The data and signalling received multiplex-side (except for possible indications transmitted by bit c) are not anlayzed. The "Mntce" LED is lit. Whatever the application procedure used, the "Loop" and "Test" LEDs are lit if the "J1/J2/J3" switch position indicates the interface to which loopback is applied.
Removal
a. Case of supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT Users Handbook No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System handbook No. 56814480. b. Case of Switch-controlled application - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position. c. Case of subscriber-controlled application - . ITU-T control order: . circuit 141 changed to "1" (OFF).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-33
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Local equipment loopback control V24/V11 operation

LOCAL Loopback control via Supervision and Management system Loopback control via front panel switches
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
Data, a, b, d (frame "c")
Fail Mntce Fail Mntce
104 to "1" 107 to "1"

Data, a, b, d
Test Loop
J3 J2 J1
Test
Loop Loop
J3 J2 J1
142 to "0"
TRANSMISSION
Loop Loop Loop2 Norm Lp
LED LIT
Application
a. Via supervision and management system - Refer to CT Users Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 5684480. b. Via switches (user terminal disconnected) Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Eqt loop" position. Set switch "Norm / Loop" to "Loop" position.
The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-34
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The signals transmitted by common equipment units at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface ; loopback is performed at the digital data stream generation level. Bis a and b received in case of channel-associated signalling are not filtered even if the signalling filtering option was selected. Loopback is not applied to bit c ; it is framed in the network direction and carries the message "loop control acknowledgement". If the line bit rate is 48 kbps or 56 kbps, loopback is applied to bits SA, SB and X. The "Mntce" LED is lit. The loop and test LEDs are, respectively, lit and unlit when the position of switch "J1/J2/J3" corresponds to the interface on which the loopback is applied Circuit 114/115 timing signals are still transmitted. At the transmitting end, circuits 104, and 107 change to " 1" (OFF) and circuit 142 changes to "0" (ON) to denote the maintenance status.
Removal
a. Case of supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Switch control (user terminal disconnected) - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-35
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Equipment loopback upon reception of remote loopback control order V24/V11 operation
SUBSCRIBER DTE LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
NETWORK
EXTENSION
TRANSMISSION
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL
Fail
104 to "1" 107 to "1" 142 to "0"

Data, a, b, d RC Loop 2
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
M U L T I P L E X
Mntce
Test
Lp
RECEPTION
J3 J2 J1
RC Loop 2
LED LIT
Application
Reception of a loop 2 control order (network or subscriber origin) transmitted by the extension or network equipment via fame "c" from the network. The multiplex circuit must be G.704 type with channel-associated signalling.
The loopback applied is a local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals transmitted by common equipment units at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d in TS 16) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface ; loopback is performed at the digital datastream generation level. Bits a and b received in the case of channel-associated signalling are not filtered even if the signalling filtering option was selected. Loopback is not applied to bit c; which is framed in the network direction and carries the message "loop control acknowledgement". When line bit rate is equal to 48 kpbs or 56 kpbs, loopback is applied at the subscriber bit rate, that is not applied to X.50 bis frames or reconstituted V.110 frames, indepdendently, loopback is applied to bits SA, SB and X. The "Mntce" LED is lit. The loop and test LEDs are, respectively, lit and unlit when the position of switch "J1/J2/J3" corresponds to the interface on which the loopback is applied Circuit 114/115 timing signals are still transmitted . At the transmitting end, circuits 104, and 107 change to " 1" (OFF) and circuit 142 changes to "0" (ON) to denote the maintenance status.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-36
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Removal
Information transmitted via frame "c". Detection of a frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be removed after a 0.5 sec. timeout.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-37
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Loop 2 or 3 remote loopback control order to the extension V24/V11 operation

LOCAL Loopback control via Supervision and Management system or by subscriber
Fail
SUBSCRIBER DTE
140 141
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
EXTENSION M U L T I P L E X
TRANSMISSION

Fail
Lp 2 TC
Mntce
Mntce
Test
Test Loop J3 J2 J1 Loop Loop Loop2 Norm Loop
107 to "0" 142 to "0"

(frame "c")
Loop RECEPTION
J3 J2 J1 Lp
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application The multiplex circuit must be G.701 type with Channel-associated signalling
a. Via the supervision and management system (transmission of a loop 2 or 3 loop control order if St Mux) - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches (transmission of loop 2 control order) - Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. - Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Extn loop2" position. - Set switch "Norm / Loop" to "Loop" position. c. By subscriber control order (transmission of loop 2 control order). - CCITT (ITU-T) control order: . circuit 140 changes to "0" (ON),
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-38
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The Loop2 remote-control order is transmitted via frame "c". If the multiplexer is configured as a Sb Mux, a subscriber-originated loop 2 control order is transmitted by bit c. If the multiplexer is configured as a St Mux : - and if the action is controlled at common equipment request, this request indicates transmission via bit c of a network-originated loop 2 control order or a netowork-originated loop 3 control order, - and if the action is controlled manually on the card front panel switches (if their action is validated by the supervision and management system) or via circuit 140, a networkoriginated loop 2 control order is transmitted via bit c. Upon loopback control order reception, the "Mntce" LED lights up. Upon loopback acknowledgement reception, whatever the application procedure used, the "Test" LED lights up if the "J1/J2/J3" switch position indicates the interface to which loopback is applied. Circuits 105, 106 and 109 operate normally. Circuit 142 changes to "0" (ON).
Removal
a. Case of supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Case of switch-controlled application - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position. c. By subscriber control order - CCITT (ITU-T) control order: . circuit 140 changes to "1" (OFF),
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-39
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Line or Interface loopback X24/V11 (V10) operation

LOCAL Loopback control via Supervision and Management system
Fail
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION C T R I TRANSMISSION
Data = a = b = d = 1 RC Loop 2 (frame "c")

Fail
Mntce
Mntce
Test
Test
Loop
J3 J2 J1
Loop
J3 J2 J1
Loop
LED LIT
Application
a. via the supervision and management system - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches - Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. - Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Line loop" position. - Set switch "Norm / Loop" to "Loop" position. The loopback applied is local loop 3c.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-40
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The signals received from the line at the receiving end of the interface (T) are transmitted forward to line at the transmitting end of the interface (R). Circuit C signal (in X.24/V.11 Data + signalling operation) is transmitted on circuit I. Circuit B continues to deliver signals. The data, possible channel-associated signalling bits and signalling bits a, b, d in TS16 transmitted to the network are forced to "1". If the multiplex circuit is G.704 type with channel-associated signalling, bit c is framed with the subscriber-originated or network-originated, depending on whether the multiplexer is configured as a Sb Mux or St Mux, loop 2 control order message. The data and signalling received multiplex-side (except possible indicates transmitted by bit c) are not analyzed. For line bit rates equal to 48 or 56 kbps with the use of frame V.100, bits SA and SB are forced to 0. The "Mntce" LED is lit. Whatever the application procedure used, the "Loop" and "Test" LEDs are lit if the "J1/J2/J3" switch position indicates the interface to which loopback is applied.
Removal
a. Case of Supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. With switches (user terminal disconnected) - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-41
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Local equipment loopback control X24/V11 operation

LOCAL Loopback control via Supervision and NETWORK Management system
Fail
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION

Fail
R set
Data, a, b, d
I at "1" TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
Mntce
Mntce
Test
Test
Loop J3 J2 J1 Loop
Loop J3 J2 J1
Loop Loop Loop2

Norm Lp
LED LIT
Application
a. Case of Supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches (user terminal disconnected) - Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. - Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Eqt loop" position. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-42
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The signals transmitted by common equipment units at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d in TS16) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface ; loopback is performed at the digital datastream generation level. Bits a and be received in the case of channel-associated signalling are not filtered even if the signalling filtering option was selected. Loopback is not applied to bit c ; it is framed in the network direction and carries the message "loop control acknowledgement". If line bit rate is 48 or 56 kbps, loopback is applied on bits SA, SB and X. The "Mntce" LED is lit. The loop and test LEDs are, respectively, lit and unlit when the position of switch "J1/J2/J3" corresponds to the interface on which the loopback is applied Interchange circuit S/B timing signals are still transmitted. At the transmitting end, circuit I changes to "1" (OFF) and circuit R is in the condition configured for the card ("0" or "1").
Removal
a. a. Case of Supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches (user terminal disconnected) - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-43
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Equipment loopback upon reception of a remote loopback control order X24/V11 operation
SUBSCRIBER DTE LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
NETWORK
EXTENSION
TRANSMISSION
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL
Fail
R set
Data, a, b, d RC Loop 2
I at "1" TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
Mntce
Test
RECEPTION
Loop
J3 J2 J1
RC Loop 2
LED LIT
Application
Reception of a loop 2 control order (network- or subscriber-originated) transmitted by the extension or subscriber extension or network equipment via frame "c" from the network. The multiplex circuit must be G.704 type with channel-associated signalling.
Effects
Signals transmitted by common equipment units at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface ; loopback is performed at the digital datastream generation level. Loopback is not applied to bit c ; which is framed in the network direction and carries the message "loop control order acknowledgement". Where transmission bit rate is equal to 48 kbps or 56 kbps, loopback is performed at the subscriber bit rate, i.e. it is not applied to X50bis frames or reconstituted V.110 frames, independently ; bits S1, S3 and S4 transmitted to the network are the images of bits S1, S3 and S4 transmitted from the network. The "Mntce" LED is lit. The loop and test LEDS are respectively lit and unlit when the position of switch "J1/J2/J3" corresponds to the interface on which the loopback is applied. Interchange circuit S/B timing signals are still transmitted. At the transmitting end, circuit I changes to "1" (OFF) and circuit R is in the condition configured for the card ("0" or "1").
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-44
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Removal
Information transmitted via frame "c". Detection of a frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be removed after a 0.5 sec. timeout.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-45
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Loop2 or 3 remote loopback control order to the extension X24/V11 operation

LOCAL Loopback control via Supervision and Management system
Fail
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
TRANSMISSION

Fail
RC Loop 2
Mntce
Mntce
TRANSMISSION
Test
Test
Loop
Loop
J3 J2 J1
(frame "c")
RECEPTION
J3 J2 J1
Lp
LED LIT
Application (the multiplex circuit must be the G.704 type with channel-associated signalling)
a. via the Supervision and management system (transmission of loop 2 or 3 control order) - Reger to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches (user terminal disconnected) - Set switch "J1/J2/J3" to the position corresponding to the interface selected for loopback. - Set switch "Eqt loop / Line loop/ Extn loop2" to "Extn Loop2" position. - Set switch "Norm / Loop" to "Loop" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-46
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
Effects
The Loop2 remote-loopback control order is transmitted via frame "c". If the multiplexer is configured as an Sb Mux, a subscriber-originated loop 2 control order is transmitted via bit c If the multiplexer is configured as a St Mux : - and if the action is controlled on common equipment request, this request indicates transmission via bit c of a network-originated loop 2 control order or a network-originated loop 3 control order. - and if the action is controlled manually on the card front panel switches (if their action has been validated by the supervision and management system), a network-originated loop 2 control order is transmitted via bit c. Loopback activation causes the "Mntce" LED to light up. Upon reception of the loopback order acknowledgement, whatever the application procedure used, the "Test" LED lights up if the "J1/J2/J3" switch position indicates the interface to which loopback is applied. Circuits I, R, T and C operate normally.
Removal
a. Case of supervision and management system-controlled application - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. b. Via switches (user terminal disconnected) - Set the "Norm / Loop" switch to "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-47
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
3.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 3.4.2.1 - Alarm Description

Three types of faults and errors are detected: "Card" level faults and errors: . card out of rack (C.Out), . Fuse fault (FusFlt), . watchdog fault (Wdg), . replacement by a different card (C.Dif.), . connection error (out of rack or invalid interface card) if the card is in a subscriber shelf), (S/assFlt . - 5 V failure (-5V Fail), . self-test failure (S/test), "Port" level faults: . network fault (NF), . V.110 frame alignment loss (V110), . local extension failure (LEF), . remote extension failure (REF), . remote extension modem power failure (REMPF), . remote extension modem unavailable (LSF).
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is nitified to the Supervision and Management system, major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. Connection error, - 5 V failure and "port" level faults cause the "Fail" LED to light up on the V24/V11 Card front panel. The detected fault is then accessible via the Supervision and Management system.
3.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED

Location is performed using the supervision and management system:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-48
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed via the user terminal, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions .
Detected fault - 5 V failure Connection error Network fault (received via frame "c")
Probable cause Card - 5 V fuse fault Card sub-assembly out or not available for the card Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment . fault on network-to-local equipment link Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment . fault on local equipment -tonetwork link Failure detected by the extension: . extension failure . (remote) subscriber link from extension to extension
Remedial action Replace - 5 V/1.25A fuse (F 502) Fit appropriate adapter card No local action
V.110 frame alignment loss (at bit rates < 64 kbps)
No local action
Extension failure
No local action
Remote extension failure
Failure detected by the extension (remote) subscriber: . extension (remote) subscriber failure . extension-to-extension (remote) subscriber failure
No local action
Remote extension power failure Remote extension unavailable
Failure detected by extension (remote) subscriber Failure detected by extension (remote) subscriber
No local action
No local action
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-49
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD

Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Card ports can be configured independently using the supervision and management system.. Configuration parameters are
Card parameters :
- front panel switch management, - 3 x 512 kbps or 3 x 1984 kbps mode of operation.
Port parameters
- activated or deactivated - interface type : X.24/V.11 or V.24/V.11(V.10), - filtering (Y/N) of signalling (bit a in TS16 received for Data and Signalling mode), - validation of actions consequential to extension fault indications transmitted by bit c (if applicable), - values of port failure occurrence time delays (0 or 1 second),
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-50
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
N X.24/V.11 interface
- number of delay time bits for compensation, - selection of condition applied on circuit R following error or equipment loopback, - programming circuit B in controlled or isolated mode, - operation in Data or Data + Signalling mode, - selection of X.50bis or V.110 rate adaptation for 48 and 56 kbps bit rates, - value of bit X in case of X.50 bis adaptation,
- if port is in Data mode :

- programming of circuit I in forced (closed) or isolated mode - bit rate : . if card is in 3 x 512 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 8), mode . if card is in 3 x 1984 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 31), mode
- if port is in Data + Signalling mode

- bit rate : . if card is in 3 x 512 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 8) . if card is in 3 x 1984 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 30), - signalling filtering used or unused
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-51
3 - V.24/V.11 CARD
N V.24/V.11(V.10) interface
- programming of circuits 105, 108, 140 and 141 individually in the controlled or "ignored mode - programming of circuit 106 in the "controlled" or "isolated" mode, - programming of circuit 107 in the "controlled" or "forced", mode - programming of circuit 109 in the "controlled" or "forced", mode - selection of use of levels V.10 or V.11 for circuits 105 and 109, - selection of 106/105 delay in one of two ranges of 8 to 12 time bits or 48 to 64 time bits, - bit rate : . if the card is in 3 x 512 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 8) mode . if the card is in3 x 1984 kbps (48 kbps, 56 kbps, N*64 kbps with N varying from 1 to 30), mode - selection of X.50 bis or V.110 rate adaptation for 48and 56 kbps bit rates, - value of bit X in case of X.50 bis rate adaptation, - signalling filtering used or unused
Circuit Display
Using the supervision and management system (CT or IONOS), it is possible to display the instantaneous condition of the interfaces managed.
N V.24/V.11(V.10) mode : Circuits 103, 105, 106, 107, 108, 140, 141 and 142 can be displayed. N X24/V11 mode : Circuits T, C and I can be displayed.
The displayed conditions, deducted from the reading performed for 16 ms, can be: - 0 or closed - 1 or open, - X if condition not stable.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 3-52
SECTION 4 V.24/V.28 CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-2
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
CONTENTS
Pages CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 4.1 - Overview 4.2 - Description 4.3 - Start-up and Operation 4.3.1 - Configuration 4.3.2 - Initialization 4.3.2.1 - Power-up Initialization 4.3.3 - Utilization 4.3.3.1 - General 4.3.3.2 - Low Bit Rate DCE Operation (Bit rates 38400 bit/s) 4.3.3.3 - High Bit Rate DCE Operation (48, 56 or 64 kbps) 4.3.3.4 - Allocation of Interfaces to Channels 4.3.3.5 - Loopbacks 4.4 - Maintenance 4.4.1 - Loopback Application 4.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 4.4.2.1 - Alarm Display 4.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED 4.4.2.3 - Cause of a Fault 4.5 - User Software Description 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-7 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-17 4-22 4-24 4-27 4-27 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-3
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 4.1 - DCE and DTE Equipment Connection to the V24/V28 Card Figure 4.2 - V.24/V.28 Front panel Figure 4.3 - Local Interface Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1 - Effects of V.24/V.28 Card in Low Bit Rate DCE Mode of Operation Table 4-2 - Effects of V.24/V.28 Card-in Medium Bit Rate DCE Operation Table 4-3 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-4
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-5
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
2 Mbit/s
Network
Low Bit Rate V.24/V.28 Card DCE interface V24/V28 FMX
Terminal (DTE)
Figure 4.1 - DCE and DTE Equipment Connection to the V24/V28 Card
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-6
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.1 - Overview
The V24/V28 Card performs the adaptation of low bit rate V.24/V.28 interfaces to the equipment. The Card supports four separate independently and functionally operable standard V24/V28 interfaces which may be the DCE (Data Circuit terminating Equipment) or DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) types Each interface thus offers the following operator configurable bit rates : 600 bit/s to 38.400 bit/s asynchronous, 1200 bit/s to 64 kbps synchronous.
Equipment is connected to the V24/V28 interfaces as shown in Figure 4.1, depending on whether the interfaces are the DCE or DTE types. Configuration and control access to the V24/V28 Card is realized by a Supervision and Management System which may be: - a craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or on the connection panel or GIE adapter card depending on the type of unit and of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS Network Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-7
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
V24V28
Fail
Green Led Red Led
Test
Yellow Led
Loop
25
13
14
Figure 4.2 - V.24/V.28 Front panel
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-8
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the V24/V28 Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 4.2) : - three LEDs for all four card ports : Red "Fail" LED Fail: detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c), or rate adaption fault, or V.110 Frame Alignment Loss FAL, or connection error (in the case of a subscriber shelf) or shelf type different. Test: maintenance operation (loopback) in progress with an interface involved in the operation. Loopback : line or equipment loopback. When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation. Unused
green "Test" LED
yellow "Loop" LED
- 25-way connector Reminder :
The terms below as used in this Technical Manual when referring to the V24/V28 Card have the following meanings : interface-to-common equipment direction common equipment-to- interface direction
- reception direction : - transmission direction : Fuse: F401: T1,25A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-9
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

The V24/V28 Card does not provide any link or switch option. During initialization or configuration upgrades, the operating instructions (configuration parameters) may be programmed using the supervision and management system.
The V24/V28 Card is initialized as follows : on power up, initialization followed by self, configuration with the user terminal if the standard (default) configuration parameters are not those desired.
4.3.2.1 - Power-up Initialization

On power up, the Card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are presented via front panel LEDs as follows : a. LEDs remain unlit. check the fuse and power converter. Alternating flashing LEDs indicates that all the front panel LEDs are operational. Self-test Eight functional self-tests are performed in sequence. If no fault is detected, alternately flashing LEDs indicate that self-test has been completed successfully. If a fault is detected, the software stops at the unsuccessful self-test, and the failure code is indicated by the flashing condition of the "Fail", "Test" and "Loop" LEDs : replace the card.
b. c.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-10
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Failure conditions are coded as follows :
Failure code
LEDs Fail Test Loop
F F
F -
F F
F F -
F F F
F: flashing LED
Failure code No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Circuits and functions tested External RAM test (write/read) Dual access RAM test (write/read) Input port test Interface no. 1 Interface no. 2 Interface no. 3 Interface no. 4 Bit cross-connect
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-11
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

The V24/V28 Card offers various mode of operation. The supervision and management systemmay be selected: mode of operation of each individual interface including Baud rate specifications (rate, signalling transmission mode at 48 kbps and 56 kbps bit rates) and circuit manual control: . . normal DCE operation at transmission bit rates less than or equal to 38400 kbps, high bit rate DCE operation at transmission bit rates of 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps,
allocation of interfaces to channels,
Loopbacks may be applied under control of the Supervision and Management System, subscriber control orders, or upon reception of remote control orders. Presentation of detected alarms and loopbacks in progress is provided via front panel LEDs. At 48 kbps, 56 kbps and 64 kbps bit rates, the mode of operation is compatible with various options on the V24/V11 Card. Therefore; both cards can be interconnected at these bit rates via a TRANSMIC 2G 2 Mbit/s PCM circuit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-12
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.3.3.2 - Low Bit Rate DCE Operation (Bit rates 38400 bit/s)
In normal operation, all data is transmitted in the V.110 frame, i.e. data, test information, and loopback control orders. Bits a, b and d from the four signalling bits (TS16 associated with the support TS) are set to 1 and bit c is set to 0. Monitoring of frame "c" transmitted by the network is not provided. Note : When the link uses the first bit of the 64 kbps support TS (jamming) the condition of bit SB transmitted via frame V.110 is inserted on bit a in the four channel-associated signalling bits (TS16) associaed with the 64 kbps support TS. Normal operation is a proprietary mode of operation which uses V.110 frame E bits to transmit several information elements: bits E1, E2, E3 for checking bit rate identity, bits E4 and E5 for loopback control orders, bit E6 for loopback control order acknowledgment, Note : Bit E6 set to "0" used with bits E4 and E5 set to "1" indicate remote loopback with loopback control order transmitted by the card. bit E7 carrying the mode of operation of the interface (this information is not used in the reception direction): E7 = "1" --> mode DCE.
The condition of the control circuits is always carried in frame V.110 via bits X, SA and SB. According to the mode of operation which depends on the type of terminal connected, these signals are "used", "ignored" or "forcec" at the interchange circuit level. Data from the V.110 frame received through the network is transmitted via the interface on circuit 104 to the (remote) subscriber DTE. Data received from the (remote) subscriber DTE on circuit 103 is transmitted forward to the network via the V.110 frame. In normal DCE mode of operation with bit rates less than or equal to 4800 bit/s, the Card checks bit rate consistency using bits E1 to E3 (the intermediate 8 kbps bit rate can transmit several bit rates). In the event of an inconsistency, the Card identifies it as a loss of V.110 frame alignment, but transmits a specific message to common equipment units, and to the associated user terminal to indicate the nature of the problem ("bit rate adaptation" fault). The card controls circuits 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 114, 115, 140, 141 and 142 of each interface. The use of the different interchange circuits is described functionally in ITU-T recommendation V.24 . Interface operation complies with the provisions of paragraph 4 of ITU-T recommendation V.24 Transmission of control signals and operation of all interchange circuits are described below. Note : the loopbacks mentioned are described in sub-section 4.4.1, all network failures are analyzed in Table 4-3.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-13
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

Bit SB (S4, S9) received from the V.110 frame is transmitted on circuit 109 to the subscriber DTE. the signal received from the subscriber DTE on circuit 105 is placed in V.110 frame bit SB (S4, S9) for transmission on extension circuit 109 if the extension is a DCE or on extension circuit 105 if the extension is a DTE (it is also placed in bit a of TS16 when the port occpies the first bit of the corresponding data TS), the signal received from the subscriber DTE on circuit 108 is placed in V.110 frame bit SA (S1, S3, S6 and S8) for transmission on extension circuit 107 if the extension is a DCE, or extension circuit 108 if the extension is a DTE. the signal supplied to the subscriber DTE on circuit 109 is placed, in return, in V.110 frame bit X for transmission on extension circuit 106 if the extension is a DCE which controls circuit 106 (the extension is not used if it is a DTE) (programmable via the Supervision and Management System) (106/105 delay configuration).
Circuit 103 (Transmitted data)

Direction: from DTE. All data present on the circuit are transmitted to the network during the 105 = 106 = 107 = "closed" condition (otherwise, circuit 103 is "ignored", that is considered as being in condition "1").
Circuit 104 (Received data)

Direction: To DTE. This circuit transmits data from the network to the subscriber when circuit 109 carries a logic "0" (ON condition). When circuit 109 carries a logic "1" (OFF condition), circuit 104 is set continuously to logic "1".
Circuit 105 (Request to send)

Direction: From DTE. Circuit 105 indicates whether DTE is prepared to transmit data on the network. The condition of this circuit is analyzed by the interface which responds to DTE via circuit 106. The condition of this circuit (ON = "0" and OFF = "1") is placed in bit SB (S4, S9) in the V.110 frame. This circuit may be configured into two alternative modes : a. 105 control : the condition of this circuit is analyzed and transmitted in the V.110 frame. b. 105 not controlled : the status of this circuit is neither analyzed nor transmitted. Circuit 105 is deemed to be continuously in the ON condition, and bit SB (S4 and S9) in the V.110 frame transmitted to the network is set to "0". This mode is used when the connected DTE does not control this circuit. In the event of a network failure or a line loopback, bit SB is set to "1". Nota : When the link uses the first bit of the 64 kbps support TS (jamming) the signal of bit SB transmitted to thenetwork vira frame V.110 is inserted on bit a of the four channelassociated signalling bits (TS16) associated with the 64 kbps support TS.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-14
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Circuit 106 (Ready for sending)

Direction: to DTE. This circuit indicates whether the FMX Cross-connect Multiplexer is prepared to transmit data. The circuit condition is given by bit X in the V.110 frame received from the network (106 control), or it may be configured to be identical to the condition of circuit 105 with an R1 timeout. Timeout or response time R1 can be programmed when configuring the interface in manual circuit control mode. It may have the following values : 0 msec, 25 msec, or 50 msec value to 2 msec.
Circuit 107 (Data set ready)

Direction : towards the DTE. When the interface is ready to transmit data and circuit 142 is set to the open condition, circuit 107 is set to the closed condition. By configuring the interface, circuit 107 can be controlled or forced (in closed condition).
Circuit 108/1 (Connect data set)

Direction : from DTE. When it is "controlled", this circuit controls the connection of the signal converter to the transmission line. During the "open" condition on circuits 107 and 108/1, the DCE ignores all other signals from the DTE. By configuring the interface, circuit 108/1 can be "controlled" or "ignored".
Circuit 109 (Detector of Transmission signal received on the data channel)

Direction : towards the DTE Circuit 109 in the closed condition indicates that the link is available to the DTE. By configuring the interface, circuit 109 can be controlled or "forced" (in "closed" condition).
Circuit 114 (transmitter signal element timing (DCE source))

Direction: To DTE. This circuit is used with synchronous transmission only. With asynchronous transmission, it is set to "1". Serial data received on circuit 103 are sampled upon change from 0 (ON condition) to 1 (OFF condition) of circuit 114 when used. The circuit may be configured in manual circuit control mode to be identical to circuit 115 or its inverted form.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-15
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Circuit 115 (Receiver signal element timing (DCE))

Direction: To DTE. This circuit is used with synchronous transmission only. With asynchronous transmission, it is set to 1 . Serial data transmitted on circuit 104 change conditions upon change from logic "1" (OFF condition) to "0" (ON condition) of circuit 115 when used. Circuit 115 is synchronized to the V.110 frame received from the network and is derived from the FMX internal clocks. Circuit 115 (DCE receive bit timing)
Circuits 140, 141 and 142

Operation of these circuits is described in sub-section 4.4.1. Faults No fault is detected from connected equipment (subscriber-to-network direction). The faults detected are relative to multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). Note : The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary. Faults Detected
V.110 frame alignment loss rate adaptation fault, or optionally, fault indications of extension transmitted by frame c.
Consequential Actions
Forward reaction : - Circuit 104 forced to "1" less than 100 ms after detection, - Circuit 109 forced to "1" ("open") 1 second after fault detection with no value locking during entire timeout, if the fault disappears in the meantime, or if circuit 109 is in the forced mode this action is not undertaken, - 10 seconds after fault detection, circuits 106, 107 and 109 (including in mode 109 "forced") are forced to "1" ("open") with no locking of the value during the entire timeout if the fault disappears in the meanwhile, this action is not performed, - Maintenance actions in progress are maintained for 500 ms 100 ms. Backward reaction : - Forcing of bit X in frame V.110 transmitted to the network to "1" Equipment Reaction: - Fail LED lit - Transmission with or without timeout (option programmable by supervision and management system) of the fault indication to the supervision and management system.
Table 4-1 - Effects of V.24/V.28 Card in Low Bit Rate DCE Mode of Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-16
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.3.3.3 - High Bit Rate DCE Operation (48, 56 or 64 kbps)

In medium bit rate operation, all data is transmitted in the V.110 frame (except at 64 kbps). The data signals from the network are transmitted on circuit 104 to the connected DTE and the data signals received from the DTE on circuit 103 are transmitted forward to the network in frame V.110 or directly for the 64 kbps bit rate. Loopback control orders are transmitted in frame "c" which can also carry fault information. Bit c from the four TS16 signalling bits is fully managed by the Card. At the 64 kbps bit rate, control signals are transmitted in bits a, b and d in TS16. At the bit rates equal to 48 kbps, control signals are transmitted in bits X, SA and SB in frame V.110 (table 7 a of ITU-T recommendation V.110), At 56 kbps, control signals can be transmitted as follows by configuring the interface : - either on signalling bits a and b (table 7b of ITU-T recommendation V.110), - or on bits X, SA and SB in frame V.110 (table 7c of ITU-T recommendation V.110). The Card controls interchange circuits 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 114, 115, 140, 141 and 142 on each interface. A functional description of the use of the various interchange circuits is provided in ITU-U recommendation V.24. Interface operation complies with the provisions of paragraph 4 of ITU-T recommendation V.24 and specification ST/PAA/SRE/LRS/3049 of August 1992. Note: the loopbacks mentioned are described in sub-section 4.4.1, all network failures are analyzed in Table 4-3.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-17
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

The signal recieved from the interface on circuit 105 is placed on frame V.110 bit SB for transmission to circuit 109 of the extension and on signalling bit a: - 105 "open"
a = 1 109 "open".
TS16 signalling bit a, or frame V.110 bit SB , depending on interface configuration, is transmitted on circuit 109 towards the interface. The signal received from the interface on circuit 108 is placed on signalling bit b (inverted signal) or, if applicable, on frame V.110 bit SA for transmission to circuit 107 of the extension: - 108 "open"
b = 0 107 "open".
The signal delivered at the interface on circuit 109 is place, in the return mode, on frame V.110 bit X for transmission to extension circuit 106 (MMI option, according to bit rate and adaptation selected). A filter option selected during interface configuration removes signalling transmission errors bits a, b and d from the four signalling bits - (signal filtering criteria : detection of three consecutive signalling bits having the same condition). Note : This filtering is not applied in case of equipment loopback.
Circuit 103 (Transmitted data)

Direction : from DTE. This circuit transmits data towards the network during the 105 = 106 = 107 = "closed" condition (otherwise, circuit 103 is "ignored", that is considered as being in condition "1").
Circuit 104 (Received data)

Direction: To DTE. This circuit transmits data from the network to the subscriber when circuit 109 carries a logic "0" (ON condition). When circuit 109 carries a logic "1" (OFF condition), circuit 104 is set continuously to logic "1".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-18
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Circuit 105 (Request to send)

Direction: From DTE. Circuit 105 indicates whether DTE is prepared to transmit data to the network. The condition of this circuit is analyzed by the interface which responds to DTE via circuit 106. The condition of this circuit (ON = "0" and OFF = "1") is placed in bit a or bit S4 in the V.110 frame. This circuit may be configured into two alternative modes : a. 105 "controlled" : the condition of this circuit is analyzed by the interface and carried on frame V.110. b. 105 "ignored" : the condition of this circuit is not analyzed. Circuit 105 is then considered as being permanently "closed" and bit SB (S4 and S9) of the V.110 frame transmitted to the network is forced to "0" which corresponds to a "closed" circuit 105. This mode corresponds to the case where the connected DTE does not control this circuit. Note : When the link uses the first bit of the 64 kbps support TS (jamming), the condition of bit SB transmitted to the network via frame V.110 is inserted on bit a of the four channel-associated signalling bits (TS16) associated with this 64 kbps support TS.
Circuit 106 (Ready for sending)

Direction : towards DTE. This circuit indicates to the DTE that the FMX is ready to transmit data. The signal of this circuit is inserted in bit X of frame V.110 received from the network, or optionally on configuration (according to selected bit rate and rate adaptation), inserts the condition of circuit 105 with an R1 response time. Timeout or response time R1 can be programmed when configuring the interface in manual circuit control mode. It may have the following values : 0 msec, 25 msec, or 50 msec value to 2 msec.
Circuit 107 (Data set ready)

Direction : towards DTE. When the interface is ready to transmit data, circuit 142 is set to "open", circuit 107 is set to "closed". By configuring the interface, circuit 107 can be "controlled" or "forced" (i"closed").
Circuit 108/1 (Connect data set)

Direction : from DTE. When it is "controlled", this circuit controls signal converter connection to the transmission line. When circuits 107 and 108/1 are in the "open" condition, the DCE ignores all other signals from the DTE. By configuring the interface, circuit 108/1 can be "controlled" or "ignored".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-19
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Circuit 109 (Data channel received line signal detector)

Direction : towards DTE. Circuit 109 in "closed" condition indicates link availability to the DTE. By configuring the interface, circuit 109 can be "controlled" or "forced" ( "closed" condition).
Circuit 114 (transmitter signal element timing (DCE source))

Direction: To DTE. This circuit is used with synchronous transmission only. With asynchronous transmission, it is set to "1". Serial data received on circuit 103 are sampled upon change from 0 (ON condition) to 1 (OFF condition) of circuit 114 when used. The circuit may be configured in manual circuit control mode to be identical to circuit 115 or its inverted form.
Circuit 115 (Receiver signal element timing (DCE))

Direction: To DTE. This circuit is used with synchronous transmission only. With asynchronous transmission, it is set to "1". Serial data transmitted on circuit 104 change conditions upon change from logic "1" (OFF condition) to "0" (ON condition) of circuit 115 when used. Circuit is derived from the FMX internal clocks.
Circuits 140, 141 and 142

Operation of these circuits is described in sub-section 4.4.1.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-20
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Faults No faults is detected from connected equipment (subscriber-to-network direction). The faults detected are relative to multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). Note : The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary. Faults Detected
V.110 frame alignment loss network failure or extension faults transmitted by frame c (bits 10, 11, 12 and 13).
Forward reaction : - Circuit 104 forced to "1"less than 100 ms after detection, - Circuit 109 forced to "1" ("open") 1 second after detection of fault with no value locking as long as the timeout lasts, if the fault disappears in the meanwhile, of if circuit 109 is in the forced mode this action is not performed, - 10 seconds after fault detection circuits 106, 107 and 109 (including in mode 109 forced) are forced to "1" ("open") with no value locking as long as the timeout lasts, if the fault disappears in the meanwhile, this action is not performed - Maintenance actions in progress are maintained for 500 ms 100 ms. Backward reaction : - Forcing of bit X of frame V.110 transmitted to the network to "1" Equipment Reaction : - Fail LED lit - Transmission with or without timeout (option programmable by supervision and management system) of fault indication to supervision and management system.
Table 4-2 - Effects of V.24/V.28 Card-in Medium Bit Rate DCE Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-21
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.3.3.4 - Allocation of Interfaces to Channels

Interfaces are not initially allocated to specific channels (TS). Allocations are indeed different depending on configured transmission bit rates. At 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps transmission bit rates, interface signals use 8 bits and the software allocates the interface N of interest to channel N if possible (if not, an error message is displayed). The allocation is performed by the Supervision and Management System. At transmission bit rates less than or equal to 38400 bit/s, interface signals use 1, 2, 4 or 8 bits depending on the value of bit rate. Allocation of an interface to a channel must be defined by the operator, who specifies the channel number and, at bit rates other than 38400 bit/s, the number of the first bit used. This means that for a given V24/V28 Card : - one interface is allocated to one channel, - two interfaces are allocated to one or two channels, - three interfaces are allocated to one, two or three channels, - four interfaces are allocated to one, two, three or four channels. Example : Interface 1 with 19200 bit/s transmission bit rate: 4 bits used Interface 2 with 9600 bit/s transmission bit rate: 2 bits used Interface 3 with 1200 bit/s transmission bit rate: 1 bit used Interface 4 with 2400 bit/s transmission bit rate: 1 bit used
A total of 8 bits is used for all four interfaces which can therefore be allocated to the same channel as follows : Channel 2 (8 bits) First bit No. 1 5 7 8 Interface No. 1 2 3 4
Allocation rules Interface channel allocations in the normal mode with V24/V28 data transmission must observe the following rules : the interface is not used in management mode, the channel is not in management mode (an option for channels 1 and 2), the interface must not already be used for another channel; otherwise the operator must first deactivate the interface, the number of bits not used on the channel must be enough, the channel is not in the loopback mode on a 64 kbps circuit (error message).
Nota : A port can be allocated to a channel on which circuit loopback has been applied if the allocation is possible (number of first bit and bit rate).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-22
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Compatibility of the first bit number with the V.110 multiplexing mode
At transmission bit rates less than or equal to 4800 bit/s only one bit is used : it can be any bit. At the 9600 bit/s bit rate, two bits are used : the first bit number can be "1", "3", "5" or "7". At the 19200 bit/s bit rate, four bits are used : the first bit number can be "1" or "5".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-23
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
4.3.3.5 - Loopbacks
The V24/V.28 card offers different loopback facilities. These loopbacks can be controlled locally or remotely by the Supervision and Management System or remote controlled. Certain loopbacks can be subscriber-controlled via circuits 140 and 141. The loopbacks are described independently since certain circuits can be forced to fixed conditions. Two types of loopback can be set up: loopback on 64 kbps circuit (high bit rate equipment loopback) controlled by the Supervision and Management System or by the network (frame "c"), loopback concerning the low bit rate link itself and complying with ITU-T recommendation X.150 (loopback is applied only to the link and the medium).
Furthermore, the V.24/V.28 card provides transmission of loop remote control orders (low bit rate) through the network. These loop remote control orders are transmitted : . . on frame V.110 via spare bits E or, for synchronous links at 48, 56 and 64 kbps, via frame "c".
Data, signalling and low bit rate loop control order transmission is provided in the table below according to bit rate:
Bit Rate 38400 kbps 48 et 56 (7c) kbps 56 (7b) kbps 64 kbps
Frame V.110 V.110 V.110 sans
Signalling V.110 V.110 IT16 IT16
Loop Control Order V.110/frame "c" frame "c" frame "c" frame "c"
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-24
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
The following loopbacks offered by each function are: low bit rate loopbacks: . line or interface loopback (local loop 3 for subscriber; B3) . equipment loopback (B2) low bit rate loop remote control orders : . loop remote control order towards the extension, . loopback acknowledgement receipt, high bit rate equipment loopback (circuit equipment loop).
When a loop is established via frame V.110 bits E or frame "c", in case of frame V.110 frame alignment loss (V.110 or "c" depending on the case) the loop is maintained for 0.5 s before release. If, in the meanwhile, frame alignment returns to normal, the loop is maintained or not depending on its indications.
Loopback Application
loopbacks controlled by the Supervision and Management System : . line or interface loopback (B3 or local loop 3 for subscriber) (loop 3b), . equipment loopback (B2) (loop 2b), . extension loopback (loop 2 remote control order), . high bit rate equipment loopback (equipment loopback of 64 (loop 2b). loopbacks controlled by an ITU-T subcriber control order: . line or interface loopback (B3 or local loop 3 for subscriber) (loop 3b), . extension loopback (loop 2 remote control order), remote control loopbacks: . equipment loopback (B2) (loop 2b) via network or extension loop 2 remote control order, . high bit rate equipment loopback (equipment loopback of 64 kbps circuit) (loop 2b) via network-originated remote control order.
kbps
circuit)
All these loopbacks comply with ITU-T recommendation X150. They are shown in Figure 4.3 and their application is described in paragraph 4.4.1. Loopback control orders must not conflict with another loopback operation in progress on the concerned interface (loopbacks are notified via the "Test" and "Loop" LEDs and can be listed via the Supervision and Management System). A priority system is set up for maintenance actions. Priority 1 has the highest priority. Only the control order with highest priority is set up. In case of equal priority, only the first control order detected is set up. Priority 1 : Loops controlled by the Supervision and Management System. Priority 2 : Network-originatedloops controlled by frame c (64 kbps loopback). Priority 3 : Subscriber-originated loops controlled by frame c (useful bit rate loopback) or the loop transmitted by frame V.110. The first control order detected is performed. Priority 4 : Loops controlled by circuits 140 and 141 Loopback operations controlled by the Supervision and Management System are lost in case of power supply failure or card removal.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-25
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
EXTENSION DCE FMX b REMOTE UNIT OR SUBSCRIBER DTE

f
REMOTE UNIT OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER DTE d V24 /V28
DCE Loop 2b path
NETWORK
Extn loop 2
Extn RC
V24/V28 Loop3b Loop2b (B3) (B2) LOCAL FMX a
Loop 3b (B3) (line or interface loopback) Loop 2b (B2) (eqpt loopbck) Loop 2b (eqpt loopback of circuit) Ext RC (Loop 2 ext)
Local or remote control order (Supervision and Management System) or subscriber control order (e DTE)
Local or remote control order (Supervision and Management System) or loop 2 remote control order from extension (transmitter : FMX b or Rem DTE) or Loop 2 remote control order from network Local or remote control order (Supervision and Management System) or network-originated Loop 2 remote control order from the network (bit rate 38.4 kbps) Remote control order by Supervision and Management System to the extension DCE (transmitter FMX a, destination FMX b) or susbcriber control order (transmitter e DTE, destination FMX b)
Figure 4.3 - Local Interface Loop Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-26
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

The loopback facilities provided by the V24/V28 Card depend on the selected Card configuration and environment (see "Loopbacks" in sub-section 4.3.3.4). The following loopbacks are available (see figures 4.4) : line loopback : loop 3b via the user terminal connected to the Card front panel or, for a local DCE interface, by DTE subscriber control order, equipment loopback (B2) via the supervision and management system, equipment loopback (B2) via reception of a loop 2 loopback remote control order from the extension, equipment loopback of circuit (at 64 kbps circuit level) via the supervision and management system or via network-originated Loop 2 remote control order from the network (bit rate 38.4 kbps), extension loop 2 via transmission of a Loop 2 remote control order to the extension via the supervision and management system or via subscontriber control order,
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-27
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Line or Interface loopback (B3 ; local loop 3 for subscriber)

LOCAL UNIT
Loopback controlled By Supervision and Management System or subscriber Control order
SUBSCRIBER DTE 141 105 108 103 104 106 107 109
142 to "0"
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
NETWORK
V.110 Frame set to, a=b=d=1 RC Loop 2
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
Fail Test
LED LIT
Application
a. Via the supervision and management system: - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. b. Under subscriber control: - ITU-U control: . change of circuit 141 to "0" (ON condition). The loopback applied is local loop 3b.
Effects
The signals received from the line at the receiving end of the interface (103) are transmitted to line at the transmitting end of the interface (104). Loopback is applied to control signals (105 to 109 with 106 return and 108 to 107) so as to provide normal interface operation (signal alignment processes described in ITU-T recommendation V.24 remain active. Note : When at least one of the two circuits 107 or 108 is not used by configuration, circuit 107 is not the image of circuit 108 but is forced to the "closed" ("0") condition. In synchronous mode, the transmission clock is always supplied by 114/115 timing.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-28
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Circuit 142 is set to "0" (ON condition) to indicate the maintenance status. Circuit 106 operates normally in response to circuit 105. Circuit 109 in the "1" (OFF) condition locks circuit 104 in the "1" condition. The V.24/V.28 forces a frame V.110 with data bits, SA, SB (and bit a in TS16 if applicable) and X set to "1" through the network. If transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s, the V.110 frame (E bits) contains an extension loop 2 control order. If transmission bit rate is 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps, signalling bits a, b and d are set to "1" and bit c is framed with the message "loop 2 remote-control order" originated by the subscriber. The "Loop" and "Test" are lit.
Removal
a. Case of application by supervision and management system: . Refer to CT User Manual No.N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No.56814480. b. Under subscriber control: - CCITT (ITU-U) control order: . circuit 141 changes to "1" (OFF condition).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-29
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Local equipment loopback control (B2)
LOCAL UNIT Loopback Controlled By Supervision and Management System

Fail Test Loop
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
NETWORK
V.110 frame
Loopback order acknowledgement
104 to "1" 106 to "1" 107 to "1" 109 to "1" 142 to "0" V.110 frame
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
LED LIT
Application
Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals received from the network via frame V.110 are transmitted forward through the network via another frame V.110. The loopback is applied forward of the V.110 framer. If transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s, a loopback control order acknowledgment is transmitted to the extension via the V.110 frame (E bits). If transmission bit rate is 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps, bit c is framed to the network and carries the messages "loopback control order acknowledgment". In the subscriber DTE direction, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to "1" (OFF condition) and circuit 142 is set to "0" (ON condition) to indicate the maintenance status. The "Loop" LED is lit and the "Test" is unlit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-30
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Removal
Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-31
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Equipment Loopback (subscriber)
(B2)
via
Loopback
Remote
Control
Order
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
NETWORK
LOCAL UNIT
"c" frame
104 to "1" 106 to "1" 107 to "1" 109 to "1" 142 to "0" "c" frame
RC loop 2
M U L T I P L E X
Fail Test Loop
RC loop 2
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application
Reception of a loop 2 remote-control order transmitted by the extension.
The remote-control order is transmitted via the V.110 frame (bits E) if transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s; It is transmitted via the "c" frame at 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps bit rates. Nota : For synchronous links at 48, 56 and 64 kbps, this remote control order is identical to loop 2 remote control order from the extension. For links whose bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s, this remote control order is only active if the link uses the first bit of the 64 kbps support TS. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals received from the network via a frame V.110 are transmitted forward through the network via another frame V.110. Loopback is applied forward of the V.110 framer Bit "c" is framed to the network and carries the messages "loopback control order acknowledgement". In the subscriber DTE direction, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to "1" (OFF condition) and circuit 142 is set to "0" (ON condition) to indicate the maintenance status. The "Loop" LED is lit and the "Test" is unlit.
Removal
Information transmitted via the frame "c" depending on transmission bit rate.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-32
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Loop 2 remote loopback control order to the extension
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
V.110 frame
TRANSMISSION
LOCAL UNIT
Fail Test Loop

RC loop 2
RC loop 2
TRANSMISSION
RECEPTION
LED LIT
Application
Reception of a loop 2 remote-control order transmitted by the extension.
The loop 2 remote-control order is transmitted via the V.110 frame (E bits) if transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s ; it is transmitted forward via frame "c" (subscriberoriginating loop 2) in the case of a synchronous 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps bit rate. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals received from the network via a frame V.110 are transmitted forward through the networ k via another frame V.110. The loopback is applied forward of the V.110 framer. The loop 2 remote-control order is transmitted via the V.110 frame (E bits) if transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s ; it is transmitted forward via frame "c" in the case of a 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps bit rate. In the subscriber DTE direction, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to "1" (OFF condition) and circuit 142 is set to "0" (ON condition) to indicate the maintenance status. The "Loop" is lit and the "Test" is unlit.
Removal
Information transmitted via the V.110 frame or frame "c" depending on transmission bit rate.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-33
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
High bit rate Equipment Loopback (Equipment Loopback of Circuit)
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
V.110 frame
LOCAL UNIT
Fail Test Loop

TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application
- Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2b. Note : This loopback can also be controlled by a network-network-originated loop 2 remote control order from the network (frame "c") when function bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s.
Effects
Loopback is applied to the full TS at 64 kbps as well as associated channel-associated signalling (TS16) (bits a, b and d). Loopback is not applied to bit "c" but it carries frame "c" with the loop control order acknowledgement message. In the subscriber DTE direction, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to "1" (OFF condition) and circuit 142 is set to "0" (ON condition) to indicate the maintenance status. The "Loop" is lit and the "Test" is unlit.
Removal
Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. Note : When loopback has been applied via a network-originated loop 2 remote control order, loopback is removed via information transmitted via frame "c".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-34
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Loop 2 remote loopback control order to the extension DTE operation

LOCAL UNIT
Supervision and ManagementSystem or subscriber loopback control
Fail
SUBSCRIBER DTE
LOCAL DCE
RECEPTION
RC loop 2
EXTENSION
TRANSMISSION
Test
Loop
107 to "0" 142 to "0"

TRANSMISSION
RECEPTION
LED LIT
Application
a. Via the Supervision and Management system: - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. b. Under subscriber control: - CCITT (ITU-U) control: . circuit 140 changes to "0" (ON condition). A loop remote control order can be transmitted each card interface to the low bit rate extension destined for the extension low bit rate interface. This remote control order causes equipment loopback on the extension. Note : Loop control orders complying with ITU-T recommendation X.150 controlled by the DTE with addressing phase are not applied.
Effects
The loop 2 remote-control order is transmitted via the V.110 frame (E bits) if transmission bit rate is less than or equal to 38400 bit/s ; it is transmitted forward via frame "c" (subscriberoriginating loop 2 control order) in the case of a 48 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps bit rate. Upon reception of loopback acknowledgement via frame V.110 bits E or frame "c", the "Test" LED is lit and circuit 142 is set to condition "0" ("closed"). At the subscriber end, circuits 105, 106 and 109 operate normally. Note : When at least one of circuits 107 or 108 is not used (by configuration), in case of loopback, circuit 107 is not the image of circuit 108 but it is forced to "0" ("closed").
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-35
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Removal
a. Case of application via the Supervision and Management system: - Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480. b. Under subscriber control : - CCITT (ITU-U) control : . circuit 140 changes to "1" (OFF condition)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-36
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

All types of faults and errors are detected : "Card" level faults and errors : . . . . . . card out of rack (C.Out), fuse fault (FusFlt), watchdog fault (Wdg), replacement by a different card (C.Dif.), adapter card fault (adapter card out of rack or invalid) if the card is in a subscriber shelf (S/assFlt), self-test fault (Stests),
"Port" level faults : . . . . network fault (NF), V.110 frame alignment loss (V110), rate adaptation fault (RteFlt), and extension fault : * local extension fault (LEF), * remote extension fault (REMPF), * remote extension Modem power supply failure (REF), * remote extension Modem unavailable (LSF).
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units (GIE Card) and an alarm is initiated: continuous print message, major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. Connection error, - 5 V failure and "port" level faults cause the "Fail" LED to light up on the V24/V28 Card front panel. The detected fault is then accessible via Supervision and Management System.

This location is performed via the supervison and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-37
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed via the user terminal, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions.
Detected fault Connection error
Probable cause Card sub-assembly out or not available for the card Fault detected by or on the network: - any network equipment - fault on network-to-local equipment link Fault detected by or on the network: - any network equipment - fault on network-to-local equipment link
Remedial action Fit appropriate interface card No local action
Network fault (received via frame "c")
V.110 frame alignment loss (at bit rates < 64 kbps)
No local action
Rate adaptation fault Extension bit rate different from local (at bit rates <4800 bit/s) equipment unit bit rate
Select identical bit rates for local equipment unit and extension
No local action
Extension Fault
Fault detected on extension

Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System manual No. 56814480.
Card interfaces can be configured independently using the Supervision and Management System. Parameter consistency is controlled by the Supervision and Management System. Configuration parameters are: - bit rate,
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-38
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Configuration parameters in low bit rate DCE operation : - configuration of circuit 108 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - configuration of circuit 105 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - option 106 inserts on 105 with response time R1 (0, 25 or 50 ms 2 ms) or 106 controlled (bit X), - configuration of circuit 107 ("controlled" or "forced"), - configuration of circuit 109 ("controlled" or "forced"), - configuration of circuit 140 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - configuration of circuit 141 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - clock 114 = 115 or 115 inverted (if synchronous transmission), - asynchronous or synchronous link, - characteristics of asynchronous links (if applicable) : . data (7 or 8 bits), . number of "stop" bits (1 or 2), . parity (with or without), - allocation of ports on internal channels: . no. of channel, . no. of port first bit on channel, - with or without consequential action on extension fault (forcing on fault), - "notification" of faults to Supervision and Management System with or without timeout (0 or 1 s).
N Configuration parameters for medium bit rate DCE operation:
- clock 114 = 115 or 115 inverted, - with or without signalling filtering, - configuration of circuit 108 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - configuration of circuit 105 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - option 106 inserted on 105 with response time R1 (0, 25 or 50 ms 2 ms) or 106 controlled (bit X) (according to bit rate and rate adaptation selected), - configuration of circuit 107 ("controlled" or "forced"), - configuration of circuit 109 ("controlled" or "forced"), - configuration of circuit 140 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - configuration of circuit 141 ("controlled" or "ignored"), - utilization of tableau 7b or 7c for V.110 framing at 56 kbps, - allocation of ports on internal channeks: - with or without consequential action on extension fault (forcing on fault), - "notification" of fault to Supervision and Management System with or without timeout (0 or 1 s).
Circuit Analysis
The Supervision and Management System (CT or IONOS) can be used to display the instantaneous condition of controlled interchange circuits.
N V.24/V.11(V.10) mode :Circuits 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 140, 141 and 142 be displayed. N X.24/V.11 mode: Circuits C and I can be displayed.
The dsiplayed conditions, deducted from the reading performed for 16 ms, can be : - 0 or closed, - 1 or open, - X if condition not stable.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-39
4 - V.24/V.28 CARD
Parameters Configurable from VT100 terminal

The following parameters can be modified or displayed from a VT100 terminal connected on the V.24/V.28 card front panel : - transmission mode (synchronous/asynchronous), - number of stop bits, number of data bits and parity when transmission is asynchronous.
Modifications are performed interface per interface. An option locking the mode in the asynchronous position (selected using the Supervision and Management System) prohibits transmission mode modification using a VT100 terminal. Modifications made using a VT100 terminal are notified to the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 4-40
SECTION 5 3 64 I CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-2
5 - 3 64 I CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 5.1 - Overview 5.2 - Description 5.3 - Start-up and Operation 5.3.1 - Configuration 5.3.2 - Initialization 5.3.3 - Modes of Operation 5.3.3.1 - General 5.3.3.2 - Operation in 64kbps Data Transmission Including 5.3.3.3 - Loopbacks 5.4 - Maintenance 5.4.1 - Loopback Application 5.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 5.4.2.1 - Alarm Display 5.4.2.2 - Cause of a Fault 5.5 - User Software Description
5-3 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-15 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-3
5 - 3 64 I CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 5-1 - Link Options Table 5-2 - Effects of 3 64 I Card Faults During Normal Operation Table 5-3 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-4
5 - 3 64 I CARD
5.1 - Overview
The 3-64 kbps Interface Card, "3 64 I" injects three 64 kbps channels coded to ITU-T G.703 format from the line, into the 2 Mbps signals routed to common equipment units. In the opposite direction, it provides transmission to line of 3-64 kbps channel extracted from a 2 Mbps signal. The Card supports three separate 64 kbps interfaces. Each interface provides a 64 kbps data channel port including an associated signaling channel. Recall: The terms below as used in this Technical Manual when referring to the 3 64 I Card have the following meanings: - reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, - transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-5
5 - 3 64 I CARD
3Vs J64 Alm Extn Flt Lp2 Norm Lp3 Lp Rem Out Lp
Lp Norm Norm Lp Norm
GREEN LED RED LED YELLOW LED SWITCH
In
1 Alm Extn Flt Lp2 Norm Lp3 Lp Rem Out Lp
In
2 Alm Extn Flt Lp2 Norm Lp3 Lp Rem Out Lp

In

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-6
5 - 3 64 I CARD
5.2 - Description
The Card front panel supports three sets of controls and LEDs from top to bottom. Each set is associated to one port on the card and consists of the following elements (see Figure 5-1): - 2 alarm LEDs: Red "Alm" LED Red "Extn Flt" LED Reception line signal failure. Extension failure: upon detection by the network or the extension. Controls selection remote loopbacks. of normal of line failure
Three-position switch "LP 2/Norm/LP 3" 2 LEDs for loopbacks: Yellow "Lp" LED
operation
or
Reception of a (active loopback).
Loop
remote-control
order
Red "Rem Lp" LED
Receipt acknowledgement control order.
to
remote
loopback
2 manual looping plugs
Control equipment loopback; the line is,interrupted at both the receiving and transmitting ends.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-7
5 - 3 64 I CARD

Before installing the 3 64 I Card into the shelf, check that the Card link options are set correctly.
3Vs J64
Alm Extn Flt Lp2 Norm Lp3 Lp Lp

Rem Out
3Z 2Z 1Z 3Y 2Y 1Y 2X 3W 2W 1W 3V 2V 1V 1X P1
In
Alm Extn Flt Lp2 Norm Lp3 Lp Lp

3R 3P 2P 1P 2R 1R
3T 2T 1T
3U 2U 1U F1
Rem Out
Component - Side View
In
F1 :0.5 A fuse
Front panel
The factory-set configuration is as follows: - signaling circuits corresponding to bits a and b set to "1" for all channels transmitted to line upon failure detection on the extension, or transmitted to the network in the event of a loopback request, - screen earthed, - watchdog active without microprocessor reset, - bit c framed in the presence of a line signal failure. The various modes of operation of the 3 64 I Card are described in S/s 5.4.4. The following tables list the various link options to be selected during start-up and subsequent changes to configuration.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-8
5 - 3 64 I CARD
The values of the signals transmitted in the event of a failure on the extension or upon detection of a loopback request are identical for both wires the states of which are placed in bits a and b in the 2 Mbps frame, although they are specific to each channel. LINK DESIGNATION Values of signaling bits a and b transmitted to line in the event of an extension failure Link Z Link W Link R Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" position 1-2 (Z) position 2-3 (Z)* position 1-2 (W) position 2-3 (W)* position 1-2 (R) position 2-3 (R)*
Values of signaling bits a and b sent to network upon detection of loop 2 or 3 requests Link Y Link V Link P Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" a and b set to "0" a and b set to "1" position 1-2 (Y) position 2-3 (Y)* position 1-2 (V) position 2-3 (V)* position 1-2 (P) position 2-3 (P)*
Link X
Reception signal screen Earth screen Do not earth screen 1X - 2X: linked* 1X - 2X: not linked
Link T
Watchdog Automatic watchdog Manual reset 1T - 2T: linked 2T - 3T: linked*
Link U
Selecting bit c state in the event of a line signal failure Bit c framed Bit c = 1 1U - 2U: linked* 2U - 3U: linked not linked*
33-34 * Factory-set option
Mandatory setting
Table 5-1 - Link Options

NOTE: The front panel switch associated with each channel must be set in the "Norm" position for normal operation; the "LP 2" and "LP 3" positions are used for loopback remote controls (see S/s 5.5.1).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-9
5 - 3 64 I CARD
On power-up, the 3 64 I Card is initialized in successive steps. The results of checks are indicated by front panel LED conditions as follows: a - LEDs remain unlit. Power supply failure: check the fuse and the Power Converter Card. b - No self-test is run; a string of flashing LEDs indicates completion of the initialization process.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-10
5 - 3 64 I CARD
5.3.3 - Modes of Operation 5.3.3.1 - General

The 3 64 I Card is used for the transmission of 64 kbps data coded to ITU-T G.703 format with associated signaling. Links allow the operator to configure the Card mode of operation (signaling bit set value during a loopback remote control order or a forward reaction to a failure routed via frame "c" or bit c; state of bit c in the event of a line signal failure...). The link options are described in sub-section 5.3.1. Loopbacks can be activated by means of the front panel switch, looping plugs or upon reception of remote control orders. Presentation of detected alarms and loopbacks in progress is provided via front panel LEDs.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-11
5 - 3 64 I CARD
5.3.3.2 - Operation in 64kbps Data Transmission Including

For each interface, the signaling circuits (two wires for transmission and two wires for reception) are placed in bits a and b in TS16. Signaling bit c is under control of the Card. Bit d is not used: it is set to "1". Loopback control orders and failure information are transmitted in frame "c". Faults The faults detected are relative to signals coming from the connected equipment (subscriber-tonetwork direction) and multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). NOTE: The "backward" and "forward" terms are defined in the glossary.
Fault detected Signal Failure (SigFail)
Consequential action Forward reaction (network direction): - Data set to "1" (AIS) - Random value for bits a and b (signaling received from the subscriber is sampled at the subscriber is sampled at the interface at the internal FMX rate without using the recovered clock) - Frame "c" with "Loc Flt" message or bit c=1 depending on position of U link option Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction; - "Alm" LED lit - Transmission of FI to common equipment for retransmission (alarm center and operation message).
Fault indication transmitted in frame "c" (bit 10 from the extension) and/or network failure: extension failure
Forward reaction: - Signaling bits a and b set to a common value defined by the position of links Z (channel 1), N (channel 2) and R (channel 3) Backward reaction (network direction): - None Equipment reaction: - "Extn Flt" LED lit
Table 5-2 - Effects of 3 64 I Card Faults During Normal Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-12
5 - 3 64 I CARD
5.3.3.3 - Loopbacks
The 3 64 I Card offers various loopback options: - equipment loopback (loop 2a), controlled via looping plugs, - remote controlled loopback (upon reception of a loop 3 control order), - remote loop 2 or 3 control. The above loopback functions comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150; they are shown in Figure 5-2 and their implementation is described in sub-section 5.4.1.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-13
5 - 3 64 I CARD
REMOTE UNIT OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER EXTENSION Extn RC FMX h 64 kbit/s interface REMOTE UNIT OR SUBSCRIBER Lp2a i 64 kbit/s interface
LOCAL FMX a
NETWORK
FMX b BB Tx Rx
BB MODEM c
Lp3
FMX d X.24/ V.11
X.24/ V.11 MODEM e
FMX f STATION MUX 2 Mbit/s
FMXg SUBSCRIBER MUX
Lp 2a Lp 3
local control order (looping plugs) Remote control order (loop 3) originated by the network (from: FMX h, b, d or f and any higher-order network equipment) or subscriber-originated remote control order (from: FMX e, c or g) Remote control order (loop 2/loop 3) from the local equipment (from FMX a to FMX h)
Extn RC
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-14
5 - 3 64 I CARD

See Figure 5-2. Equipment loopback (loop 2a) via looping plugs
SUBSCRIBER LOCAL NETWORK LOCAL
TRANSMISSION
Line disconnect
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
In
Application - Set the front panel looping plugs to "Lp".
Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signaling corresponding to bits a and b) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. - Loopback is applied to subscriber-end lines with interrupt. NOTE: the loopback condition, which is not detected by the Card, is not displayed via a front panel LED.
Removal - Set the looping plugs back to the "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-15
Out
5 - 3 64 I CARD
Remote loopback control order reception
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK
LOCAL
Loop Rem Lp
RECEPTION
Frame "c"
Frame "c"
TRANSMISSION
Application - Reception of a loop 3 remote control order originated by the network via frame "c". The loopback applied is a local loop 2b.
Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data only) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface (loopback at transcoder level). - Loopback is not applied to bits a and b ; they are set to a random value. - Loopback is not applied to bit c, which transmits the "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement" message. - The "Lp" LED is lit. - The line is loaded at the receiving end. - At the transmitting end, no data signal and transparent transmission of bits a and b.
Removal - Information transmitted via frame "c". - Detection of a frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be immediately removed.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-16
5 - 3 64 I CARD
Loop 2 remote loopback control order acknowledgement
SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK
LOCAL
Loop Rem Lp
RECEPTION
RC Lp 2
TRANSMISSION
Application - Reception of a loop 2 remote control order originated by the network or the subscriber via frame "c".
Effects - Transmission of "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement" to the network via frame "c". - The local equipment takes over from the destination equipment. - Bit c is transmitted forward via 64 kbps signaling bit 2 to the subscriber.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-17
5 - 3 64 I CARD
Loop 2 or loop 3 remote loopback control order transmission
SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK
EXTENSION M TRANSMISSION U L T I P L E X RECEPTION
LOCAL
RECEPTION
RC Lp 2
Loop
Rem Lp
Frame "c"
TRANSMISSION
Loop 2 Norm Loop 3
Application of a loop 2 remote loopback control order - Set the "Lp 2/Norm/Lp 3" switch to the "Lp 2" position.
Effects - The loop 2 remote control order is transmitted via frame "c"; the remote control order originates from the network if the local equipment operates in Station Multiplexer mode, and from the subscriber if the local equipment operates in Subscriber Multiplexer mode. - Bits a and b sent to the network are set to "1" or "0" depending on the selected link option (links Y, V or P). - Reception of the loopback acknowledgement causes the "Rem Lp" LED to light up.
Removal - Set the "Lp 2/Norm/Lp 3" switch back to the "Norm" position.
Application of a loop 3 remote loopback control order - The procedure is identical except that the "Lp 2/Norm/Lp 3" switch is set to the "Lp 3" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-18
5 - 3 64 I CARD

Three types of faults and errors are detected: "Card" level faults and errors: . . . . Card out (C.Out), fuse fault (FusFlt), watchdog (Wdg), Card different (C.Dif.),
"Port" level faults: . . . . line 1 Signal Failure (SigFail) (detection of a signal loss at the receiving end of interface 1), line 2 Signal Failure (SigFail) (detection of a signal loss at the receiving end of interface 2), line 3 Signal Failure (SigFail) (detection of a signal loss at the receiving end of interface 3), extension failure.
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors except the extension failure are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is notified to the Supervision and Management system, major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. "Port" level faults cause LEDs to light up on the 3 64 I Card front panel. A "Alm" LED is lit when a line signal failure is detected on the respective interface. The "Extn Flt" LED is lit in the event of a failure detected by the extension or the network.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-19
5 - 3 64 I CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed on the front panel, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions.
Detected fault Local failure: Signal Failure (SigFail)
Probable cause Fault detected by local equipment on signal received from far-end eqpt: . local equipment failure . far-end-to-local equipment failure
Remedial action Check interface cable
Extension failure
Fault detected by the extension: . extension failure . (far-end) extension subscriber failure (if BB Tx-Rx or 64 kbps data Card). (far-end) extension subscriber-toextension link

Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 5-20
SECTION 6 6PAFC Card
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-2
6 - 6PAFC CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 6.1 - Presentation 6.2 - Description 6.3 - Start-up and Operation 6.3.1 - Configuration 6.3.2 Initialization6.3.2.1 - Power-up Initialization 6.3.2.2 - Configuration via Supervision and Management System 6.3.3 - Utilization 6.3.3.1 - General - Operation 6.3.3.2 - Loopbacks 6.4 - Maintenance 6.4.1 - Implementation Loopbacks 6.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 6.4.2.1 - Alarm Description 6.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED 6.4.2.3 - Cause of a Fault 6.5 - User Software Description
6-3 6-3 6-3 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-10 6-12 6-12 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 6.1 - Front Panel Figure 6.2 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 6.1 - Effects of Faults Table 6.2 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-3
6 - 6PAFC CARD
Red Led
Def
Yellow Led
Mntce
25
13
14
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-4
6 - 6PAFC CARD
6.1 - Presentation
The 6-Programmable Audio Frequency Channel Card (6PAFC) adapts six 64 kbps audiofrequency channel input ports and the associated E&M signalling channels to the equipment. Each channel is associated with two E&M signalling channels and offers 2 or 4-wire audiofrequency operation. NOTE : If the 6PAFC Card is used in a P3 Center type shelf, only three channels may be used. The 6PAFC Card supports six independent protected interfaces. Each individual interface must be configured for the type of channel connected. Configuration of and control access to the 6PAFC Card is performed via a Supervision and Management system which may be: - a Craft Terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the GIE or GIE - P front panel of the equipment (or on the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and GIE card type used), - or the Remote Management System (RMS) which the IONOS Network Management System. REMINDER: The terms below as used in this Technical Manual have the following meanings: - reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, - transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
6.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the front panel of the 6PAFC Card panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 6.1): 2 LEDs for all three card ports: Red "Fail" LED Fail: detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c), or -5V failure or connection error (in the case of a subscriber shelf). Maintenance: equipment or extension loopback. When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation. Not used.
Yellow "Mntce" LED
25-way connector
Fuses:
F101, F102, F201, F202, F301, F302, F401, F402, F501, F502, F601, F602, F701, F702: T 1,25A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-5
6 - 6PAFC CARD

The 6PAFC Card has not link and switch options. Nevertheless it supports a switch which is not used. On initialization or subsequent upgrades, operating instructions (configuration parameters) can be programmed using the Supervision and Management system.
6.3.2 Initialization
The 6PAFC Card is initialized as follows: on power up, initialization followed by self-test, configuration via the Supervision and Management System.

On power up, the Card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are presented via front panel LEDs as follows: a. LEDs remain unlit Check the fuse and the power converter. b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed successfully.
c. Self-test of analog interfaces (reading and writing COMBO Codecs). If no fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a fault is detected, the "Fail" LED flashes: replace the Card. Card operation is described in paragraph 6.3.3.1.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-6
6 - 6PAFC CARD
6.3.2.2 - Configuration via Supervision and Management System

If required, change the following configuration parameters: operation type (function /1/1), . . . . . . . interface type, 2-wire or 4-wire, input level, output level, signalling bits a and b corresponding to E-wires inverted or not signalling bits a and b corresponding to M-wires inverted or not, E-wire position in case of loopback, E-wire position in case of network alarm.
All configuration parameters are maintained in the event of a power failure or if the card is plugged out. The system switches to the last programmed configuration as the operational configuration which becomes effective on power restoral or upon plugging the Card back in.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-7
6 - 6PAFC CARD
6.3.3 - Utilization 6.3.3.1 - General - Operation

The 6PAFC Card offers the TRANSMIC 2G mode of operation. It does not recognize the multiplex mode and always controls frame "c". It can thus operate in equipment configured as an Sb Mux or St Mux. Current alarms and loopbacks in progress are presented visually via front panel LEDs. Loopback application is performed via the Supervision and Management System or remote control order reception. TRANSMIC 2G Operation This mode of operation corresponds to using the MD2G equipment with an aggregate card operated in TRANSMIC 2G mode. In the TRANSMIC 2G mode of operation, the 6-channel Programmable Audio Card is transparent: the analog interface configured for 2-wire or 4-wire operation supports D/A conversion for conversion of digital network signals into analog interface signals. E and M channels are transmitted in signalling bits a and b. Signal power level on input and output interface ports are configured in 0.5 dB steps, as follows: on a 2-wire interface: . . input relative level adjustment from + 2.5 dBr to - 13 dBr, output relative level adjustment from - 2 dBr to - 17.5 dBr,
on a 4-wire interface : . . input relative level adjustment from - 0.5 dBr to - 16 dBr, output relative level adjustment from + 7 dBr to -8.5 dBr,
In this mode of operation, frame "c" is supported.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-8
6 - 6PAFC CARD
Faults Detection of faults relative to the equipment connected is not provided (subscriber-to-network direction). Detected faults are from multiplex output ports (network-to-subscriber direction). Note: The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary.
Faults detected Network fault (c = 1 or unframed different from 0)
Consequential actions Forward reaction : - Positioning of Ea-wires and Eb-wires of the signalling interface in a condition programmed on card configuration. Backward reaction : - None. Equipment reaction : - "Fail" LED lit. - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system.
Table 6.1 - Effects of Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-9
6 - 6PAFC CARD
6.3.3.2 - Loopbacks
The 6PAFC Card offers various loopback facilities: loopbacks controlled via the Supervision and Management System: . . local equipment loopback (loop 2 b), extension loopback (loop 2),
remote-controlled loop 2 b.
Loopbacks comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150. They are shown in Erreur! Source du renvoi introuvable. and their implementation is described in sub-section 6.4.1. In the event of a local equipment loopback or remote-controlled loopback, E signalling circuits are set to a pre-determined condition configured on the interface of interest. Loopback control orders should not conflict with any other current loopback operation on the interface of interest (loopbacks are presented visually via the "Mntce" LED and may be listed via the Supervision and Management System). If the card detects a conflict, an error message is transmitted to the supervision and management system.. Loops controlled by the supervision and management system have priority over loop remote control orders from the network (frame "c"). Loopback operations controlled by the supervision and management system are lost in case of power supply failure, card removal or supervision and management system disconnection.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-10
6 - 6PAFC CARD
EXTENSION
Loop 2b
REMOTE OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER
FMX h
64 I
RC Extn RC Loop 2
REMOTE OR SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK Loop2b
FMX b
AF
AF MODEM c
AF
LOCAL FMX a
FMX d
2 Mbit/s
X24/V11 MODEM e
Loop 2b
Local control order (supervision and management system) network-originated or subscriber-originated remote control order transmitter : FMXb)
RC Extn Loop 2 Subscriber-originated remote control via Supervision and Management System to extension (originating end: FMXa, terminating end: FMXb) in TRANSMIC 2G operation.
Figure 6.2 - Loop Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-11
6 - 6PAFC CARD
6.4 - Maintenance 6.4.1 - Implementation Loopbacks

The following loopbacks are available on the 6PAFC Card (see Figure 6.2): local equipment loopback Extension loopback : : Loop 2b via supervision and management system. transmission of subscriber-originated loop 2 remote control order to the extension via the supervision and management system. Loop 2b via reception of a network-originated or subscriber-originated loop 2 or 3 (Frame "c").
Equipment loopback
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-12
6 - 6PAFC CARD
Local equipment loopback control (Supervision and Management System)
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT RECEPTION frame "c" M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK
Loopback control via Supervision and Management System
Fail Mntce
TRANSMISSION
LOCAL UNIT
Application
Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is not applied to bit c , which carries the message "loop control order acknowledgement". The "Mntce" LED lit. The 2-wire line (or 4-wire lines) is (are) loaded at the receiving end. No signal is transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface. E signalling circuits are set to a predetermined condition configured on the interface.
Removal
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-13
6 - 6PAFC CARD
Loop 2 remote loopback control order to the extension
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT M U L T I P L E X
EXTENSION
RECEPTION RC Loop 2
TRANSMISSION
Frame "c"
RECEPTION
TRANSMISSION
Loopback control via Supervision and Management System
Fail Mntce LOCAL UNIT
Application
Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. Remote control loopback is applied locally to the extension.
Effects
The network or subscriber-originated Loop 2 control order, depending on whether is respectively configured as a St Mux or Sb Mux, is transmitted to Frame "c". On loopback acknowledgement reception, the "Mntce" LED is lit and a notification is sent to the supervision and management system.
Removal
Refer to MMI User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-14
6 - 6PAFC CARD
Equipment loopback upon reception of a remote loopback control order
SUBSCRIBER
EXTENSION
RECEPTION
frame "c"
TRANSMISSION
RC Loop 2
RECEPTION
TRANSMISSION
LOCAL UNIT Loopback controlled via reception of a network-originated Fail Mntce
RC Loop 2
or subscriber-originated Loop 2 or 3 remote control
Application
Reception of a network-originated or subscriber-originated Loop 2 or 3 remote control loopback order transmitted via frame c from the network. The loopback applied is local loop 2b.
Effects
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is not applied to bit c; which carries the message "loop control order acknowledgement". The "Mntce" LED is lit. The 2-wire line (or 4-wire lines) is (are) loaded at the receiving end. No signal is transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface. E signalling circuits are set to a predetermined condition configured on the interface.
Removal
Information transmitted via frame "c". Detection of a frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be removed after a 0.5 s time delay.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-15
6 - 6PAFC CARD

The types of faults and errors are detected: card level faults and errors: . . . . . . . card out of rack (C.Out), card power failure (FusFlt), watchdog fault (Wdg), replacement by a different card (C.Dif.), connection error (out of rack or invalid adapter card) if the card is in a subscriber shelf (S/assFlt), -5 V failure (-5V Fail), self-test fault (S/test),
port level fault: network fault, . Network fault (NF).
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units (GIE Card) and an alarm is initiated: continuous print message, major or minor alarm depending on the selected configuration. Connection error, - 5 V failure and "port" level faults cause the "Fail" LED to light up on the 6-PAFC Card front panel. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected is then accessible via the Supervision and Management System.

This location is performed using the supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-16
6 - 6PAFC CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed via the user terminal, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions .
Fault detected -5 V failure -5V fuse fault
Probable cause
Proposed solution Replace -5V/ 1.25 A (F702) fuse Fit appropriate interface card No local action
Connection error
Interface card out of rack or not available for the card
Network fault
Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment . network-to-local equipment link failure
Table 6.2 - Alarm Analysis

Card interfaces can be configured independently using the supervision and management system. Configuration parameters are:
Interface parameters:
- type of interface, - input relative level expressed in dBr, - output relative level expressed in dBr, - E-wire output condition inversion or not - inversion or not of values read on M-wires, - condition of E-wires on local loopback, - condition of E-wires on network fault detection.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-17
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 6-18
SECTION 7 2w2B1Q CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-2
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 7.1 - Presentation 7.2 - Description 7.3 - Start-up and Operation 7.3.1 - Configuration 7.3.2 - Initialization 7.3.2.1 - Power-up Initialization 7.3.2.2 - Supervision and Management System Controlled Configuration 7.3.3 - Utilization 7.3.3.1 - General 7.3.3.2 - "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Operation 7.3.3.3 - "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation 7.3.3.4 - Interface Connections 7.3.3.5 - Loopbacks in "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Modes 7.3.3.6 - Loopback in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation 7.3.3.7 - Line Tests 7.3.3.8 - Supervision and Management System Maintenance Control Orders 7.4 - Maintenance 7.4.1 - Loopback Application 7.4.2 - Line Testing ("Subscriber U" and "TRANSMIC Extension Operation) 7.4.3 - Alarm Analysis 7.4.3.1 - Alarm Description 7.4.3.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED 7.4.3.3 - Cause of Fault 7.5 - User Software Description
7-3 7-4 7-4 7-7 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-12 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-20 7-30 7-30 7-31 7-32 7-32 7-34 7-34 7-52 7-53 7-53 7-54 7-54 7-56
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-3
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 7.1 - Interconnection of an ISDN NT1 and CT via Two Respective 2w2B1Q Cards Figure 7.2 - Subscriber S. UNIT Interconnection (TRANSMIC Extension operation) Figure 7.3 - Front Panel Figure 7.4 - "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Loop Analysis Figure 7.5 - "TRANSMIC Extension" Mode Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 7-1 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Network U" Operation Table 7-2 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Network U" Operation Table 7-3 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Subscriber U" Operation Table 7-4 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Subscriber U" Operation Table 7-5 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Subscriber U" Operation Table 7-6 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Local Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation Table 7-7 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Remote Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation Table 7-8 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Remote Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation Table 7-9 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Extension Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation Table 7-10 - Alarm Analysis Table 7-11 - Alarm Analysis Table 7-12 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-4
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-5
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
NETWORK
LT
2W 2B1Q CARD
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
2W 2B1Q CARD
NT1
FMX
FMX
Figure 7.1 - Interconnection of an ISDN NT1 and CT via Two Respective 2w2B1Q Cards
NETWORK
REGAT SUNIT
2W 2B1Q CARD
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
2W 2B1Q CARD
REGAT S.UNIT
FMX
FMX
Figure 7.2 - Subscriber S. UNIT Interconnection (TRANSMIC Extension operation)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-6
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.1 - Presentation
The 2-wire 2B1Q Card, "2w2B1Q",provides connection of two 2-wire channels in 2B1Q line code (two binary digits, four binary digits) to the FMX Digital Cross-connect Multiplexer. Each channel transmits two 64 kbps data channels B, one 16 kbps data channel D and 4 kbps LC channel for monitoring and maintenance. The Card supports two independent 2-wire 2B1Q interfaces (U interfaces) providing connection to: either Digital Network Terminations (NT1): one NT1 per interface with remote power supply provided per interface, or Line Termination Card (LT) on a central office exchange switch or PABX: one LT per interface with detection of remote power-feed supplied by CTs, or REGAT subscriber data transmission units (Transfix S. Unit), one S. Unit per interface with remote power feed supplied or not depending on the interface, or equipment which does not need or supply remote power-feed.
In an ISDN transmission system, two 2W 2B1Q Cards must be used at both ends of the 2 Mbps network.Each card must be fitted in a separate FMX so that one interface connected to an CT is associated with one interface connected to an NT1. Figure 7.1 shows the LT-to-2w2B1Q Card connection and NT1-to-2w2B1Q Card connection at both ends of the 2 Mbps network. In TRANSMIC Extension operation, the REGAT S. Unit allows low and medium bit rate remote connection. Figure 7.2 shows the S. Unit / 2w2B1Q Card direct links or links via a repeater (optional equipment used to increase the range two-fold). Configuration and control access to the 2w2B1Q Card is available via a Supervision and Management System which may be: - a Craft Terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the GIE or GIE - P front panel of the equipment (or on the connection panel or the GIE Adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System (RMS) which is the IONOS Network Management System. Reminder: The terms below as used in the Technical Manual have the following meanings: reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-7
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
2W 2B1Q
Fail
Green Led Red Led
Mntce
Yellow Led
Busy
Power
25
13
T P E
14
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-8
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the 2w2B1Q Card front panel support the following control and LEDs (see Figure 7.3): four LEDs for both card ports: red "Fail" LED yellow "Mntce" LED Fail: the "Fail" LED lights up when a failure is detected. Maintenance:the "Mntce" lights up when a maintenance action is detected by the card. Line busy: one port is used for transmitting 2B1Q signals (line busy). Power: the power LED lights up when the U interface remote power feed is detected at least by one of the two detectors ("subscriber U" mode). Not used.
green "Busy" LED
green "Power" LED
1 x 25-way connector
Fuses :
F101, F102, F201, F202, F303 : T1,25 A F301, F302 : T0,5 A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-9
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD

The 2w2B1Q Card contains no link or switch option. During first configuration and subsequent upgrades, configuration parameters may be programmed using the Supervision and Management System.
The 2w2B1Q card is initialized as follows: - initialization on power-up followed by self-tests, - configuration using the supervision and management system if the desired parameters do not correspond to standard configuration (default configuration).

On power-up, the card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are present via front panel LEDs as follows: a. LEDs remain unlit. Check the fuse(s) and the power converter(s). b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed. c. Self-test Seven consecutive functional tests are performed. If not fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a fault is detected, the "Mntce", "Busy" and "Power" LEDs flash: replace the card. NOTE : the "Mailbox" fault may have one of the following two meanings : the "COB" card does not provide the 2 Mbps clock of the internal IC/OC datastream (in this case check and possibly replace the "COB" card), the mailbox unit does not operate properly (in this case replace the 2w2B1Q card),
Faults are coded as follows: Error Code LEDs Mntce Busy Power Fail L: LED lit F: LED flashing L F L L F L F L L F L L F L L F 1 2 3 4 5 6
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-10
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Error code No. 1 2 3
Circuits and functions tested
RAM CPU block data memory. DUART transmission and reception of miscellaneous items. ICC1 transmission of channel LC between the CPU block and U interfaces via interface 1. ICC2 transmission of channel LC between the CPU block and U interfaces via interface 2. Mailbox CPU microprocessor-to-DSP communications. MFP control of card switches and timeouts.
5 6
On first start-up, the interfaces have the following configuration (default parameters): "network U" operation, remote power feeding, use of five V.4 frame timeslots for both ports, interfaces 1 and 2 not connected.
The various types of operation of the card are described in sub-section 7.3.3.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-11
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.3.2.2 - Supervision and Management System Controlled Configuration

If necessary, change the following configuration parameters: mode of operation : "Network U" mode, "Subscriber U" mode (5 TS or 2 x 3 TS format) or or "TRANSMIC Extension" mode (via Other Modes), mode of operation with or without remote power feed,

The 2W 2B1Q Card offers various modes of operation. The user terminal controls selection of: mode of operation for both interfaces with remote power feed option and number of TSs used in the V.4 frame ("network U" and "subscriber U" modes): . . . "network U" operation, "subscriber U" operation "TRANSMIC Extension" operation,
"subscriber U" and "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation on either of the ports, activation or deactivation of both ports.
Loopbacks can be applied via the terminal or upon reception of remote-control orders. The user terminal also controls remote line power feed activation-deactivation and line maintenance test in "subscriber U" and "TRANSMIC Extension" mode. Detected alarms, loopbacks in progress, maintenance line testing, busy conditions and remote line power feed activation-deactivation ("subscriber U" or "TRANSMIC Extension" mode) are presented visually via the card front panel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-12
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.3.3.2 - "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Operation

Both 2w2B1Q Card ports must be operated in the same mode: "network U" mode, or "subscriber U" mode.
In an ISDN transmission system, the above modes allow the card to operate with remote power feedings as follows: in "network U" mode, the ports are connected to Line Termination (CT) Cards, with each CT supplying remote power feed to the corresponding line, in "subscriber U" mode, the ports are connected to Network Termination 1s (NT1s), with each NT1 receiving remote line power feed from the 2w2B1Q Card..
Alternative applications are available in the "network U" and "subscriber U" modes with the 2w2B1Q Card operating without remote power feed. The equipment connected to a port operated in "subscriber U" mode uses its own line power. A FMX 2w2B1Q Card configured in the "network U" mode must always be used in conjunction with a FMX 2w2B1Q Card configured to "subscriber U" mode at the remote of the 2 Mbps network and conversely. Both cards communicate via the modified V.4 frame. The "network U" port/V.4 frame "subscriber U" port assembly forms a repeater (RR) model. The modified V.4 frame transmits the following data: channel B and D data for both ports, channel VC signalling information: monitor message and messages coded with four A bits.
There are two types of monitor message: 2-byte messages MON-0 for transmission of U interface channel EOC data: . . . terminating-end address, data/message indications, 8-bit information item (2B+D loopback, or channel B1 loopback, or channel B2 loopback, or return to normal service, or maintenance status, or impossible to execute),
2-byte messages MON-2 for managing the status of channel LC monitoring bits (ACT, DEA/PS1, FEBE, PS2, NTM, CSO, UOA/AIS).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-13
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Messages coded with four A bits may be as follows: "network U" to "subscriber U" direction: deactivation request (DR), or U-only activation request (UAR), or activation request (AR), or loop A1 activation request (ARL), or transparency indication (AI), or deactivation confirmation (DC), or fault condition not relative to basic access ports (A3), or request to switch off remote power feed (CTD), "subscriber U" to "network U" direction: U interface loss of synchronization (RSY), or multiframe synchronization acquired by U interface (UAI), or activation request (AR), or transparency indication (AI), or U interface signal loss (LSL), or deactivation confirmation (DI), or fault condition not relative to basic access ports (A3).
Channels B and D data, monitor messages and messages coded with A bits inserted in channel VC are transmitted in five or six frame V.4 timeslots selected by the operator: channels allocated to five timeslots as follows: . . . two TSs for two channels B on the first interface, two TSs for two channels B on the second interface, one TS for channels D and VC on both interfaces,
channels allocated to six TSs as follows: . three TSs per interface, including two TSs for transmitting one channel B each and a third TS for transmitting channels D and VC corresponding to the interface (bits not used in the third TS are set to "1").
"Network U" operation

In the "subscriber U"-to-"network U" direction, channels B and D are from the modified V.4 frame and channel LC is reconstituted from "monitor" messages received in the modified V.4 frame. In the "network U"-to-"subscriber U" direction, channels B and D are inserted in the modified V.4 frame, channel LC is converted into monitor messages which for insertion into the modified V.4 frame. The "network U" interface controls the "subscriber U" interface via the A bits in the modified V.4 frame. The 2w2B1Q Card sorts out information transmitted in channel LC and performs coding into A bits. In the "subscriber U"-to-"network U" direction, the card detect A bits and complements channel LC if necessary. The card controls frame "c" used for 3 loopback control orders originated by the network. Interface operated in "network U" mode cannot be connected to a repeater.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-14
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Faults Faults detected are relative to the equipment connected directly to the U interface and to the multiplex (network-to-interface direction). Note: The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary.
Faults detected
U signal loss and U synchronization loss
Consequential actions
Forward reaction (to the network) DR (deactivation request) message transmission via bits A with bit DEA set to "0" in message MON-2, then deactivation control; this reaction is delayed by 480 ms. Backward reaction U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation; this reaction is delayed by 480 ms. Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
Clock slip
Forward or backward reaction None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
CRC error
Forward reaction (to the network) FEBE bit "0" transmission in message MON-2 Backward reaction FEBE bit "0" transmission in channel LC Equipment reaction None
Power failure
Forward reaction (to the network) CTD message (remote power feed switch off) transmission via bits A Backward reaction U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. .../...
Table 7-1 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Network U" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-15
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Faults detected
.../...
Forward reaction Loss of frame V.4 alignment and network fault NOTE : Frame V.4 alignment acquisition or loss is independent for each basic interface. The actions described apply, as the case may be, for the basic interface concerned by alignment loss. Message A3 or LSL or RSY in bits A U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation Backward reaction (to the network) Message A3 (fault condition not relative to basic access ports) transmission via bits A Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. Forward reaction U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation Backward reaction (to the network) None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. Invalid or unstable message in bits A channel Backward or forward reaction None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. Connection fault (fault specific to Subscriber P3 shelf) (adapter card faulty or out of rack) Backward or forward reaction None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
Table 7-2 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Network U" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-16
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
"Subscriber U" operation

In the "network U"-to-subscriber U" direction, channels B and D are from the modified V.4 frame and channel LC is reconstituted from monitor message received in the modified V.4 frame. In the "subscriber U"-to-"network U" direction, channels B and D are inserted in the modified V.4 frame, channel LC is converted into monitor messages for insertion into the modified V.4 frame. The "subscriber U" interface control information is transmitted via bits A in the modified V.4 frame. The 2w2B1Q Card used in" network U" mode sorts out data transmitted in channel LC corresponding to its interface and performs the corresponding coding into bits A. The card controls frame "c" used for 3 loopback control orders originated by the network. Faults Faults detected are relative to the equipment connected directly to the "subscriber U" and to the multiplex (network-to-interface direction). Note: The terms "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary.
Faults detected U signal loss
Consequential actions Forward reaction (to the network) LSL message transmission via bits A to deactivate the "network U" interface; this reaction is delayed by 480 ms. Backward reaction Control of "subscriber U" interface deactivation Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. .../...
Table 7-3 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Faults in "Subscriber U" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-17
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Faults detected
.../... U synchronization loss
Forward reaction (to the network) RSY message transmission via bits A to deactivate the "network U" interface; this reaction is delayed by 480 ms. Backward reaction Control of "subscriber U" interface deactivation Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
CRC error
Forward reaction (to the network) FEBE bit "0" transmission in message MON-2. Backward reaction FEBE bit "0" transmission in channel LC Equipment reaction None.
Loss of frame V.4 alignment and network fault

NOTE : Frame V.4 alignment acquisition or loss is independent for each basic interface. The actions described apply, as the case may be, for the basic interface concerned by alignment loss.
Forward reaction Bit DEA "0" transmission in channel LC; after 40 ms timeout, U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation Backward reaction (to the network) Message A3 (fault condition not relative to basic access ports) transmission via bits A for "network U" interface deactivation Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. .../...
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-18
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Faults detected .../... Message A3 in bits A
Forward reaction Bit DEA "0" transmission in channel LC; after 40 ms timeout, U interface signal transmission interrupt for deactivation Backward reaction (to the network) None. Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
Invalid or unstable message in bits A channel
Backward or forward reaction None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
Connection fault (fault specific to subscriber P3 shlef (adapter card faulty or out of rack)
Forward or backward reaction None. Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-19
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.3.3.3 - "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation

The "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation is used to provide for the extension, via the 2B1Q coding U interface, data timeslots (TSs) and signalling 4-bit bytes of the 2 Mbps frame for the connection of subscriber unit. The REGAT medium rate adaption unit is a subscriber unit which provides matching between V24/V11/V10 or X24/V11 interface and the 2B1Q coding U interface for 48, 56, 64 and 128 kbps bit rates. The REGAT medium rate adaption unit is a subscriber unit which provides matching between the V24/V28 and the U interface (2B1Q coding) for bit rates lower than or equal to 0.6 kbps and bit rates of 1.2 - 2.4 - 4.8 - 9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 - 48 - 56 and 64 kbps. In the case of medium bit rate adaption, the following U interface channels are used to transmit the data timeslot(s):
channel B1 transporting the V110 or X50 bis frame for bit rates lower than or equal to 48 and
56 bps,
channel B1 for channel for 64 kbps, channel B1 and B2 for 128 kbps.
In the case of low bit rate adaption, the data are transmitted over channel B1 (the link always uses the first bit of the supporting TS at 64 kbps). A frame is used by channel D to transmit channel signalling (bits a, b, c and d; bit c is set to "0"). Regardless of the bit rate, signalling is systematically copied and transmitted on the signalling bits of the associated channel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-20
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
The table below describes the transmission characteristics of the data signalling and loop control orders according to the subscriber data transmission unit implemented and the link rate of the link: LOW BIT RATE UNIT: BIT RATE FRAME SIGNALLING USED BY S. UNIT SB (105/109) SA (108/107) X (109 remote or extension) SB (105/109) SA (108/107) X (109 remote or extension) a and b TS 16 LOOPBACK CONTROL bits E4, E5 and E6 or frame "c"
0.6 to 38.4 kbps
V.110
48 and 56 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7a and 7c)
bits E4, E5 et E6 or frame "c"
56 and 64 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7b) and no frame
frame "c"
MEDIUM BIT RATE UNIT: BIT RATE FRAME SIGNALLING USED BY S. UNIT V.110 : SB (105/109) SA (108/107) X50 : a and b TS 16 a and b TS 16 LOOPBACK CONTROL frame "c"
48 and 56 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7a and 7c) or X50 V.110 (recommendations 7b) and no frame
56, 64 and 128 kbps
frame "c"
In V24/V11/V10 and V24/V28 mode, signalling bits a and b will carry the interchanged circuits 105/109 and 107/108 respectively when these bits are implemented. In X24/V11 mode, when the signalling bit a is used, it carries the C/I interchange circuit (a signalling bit b is set to "1" in this case). This information is analyzed by the 2w2B1Q Card before it is inserted in the 2 Mbps frame. The data transmitted by the frame of bit c in the 2 Mbps frame is interpreted via the 2w2B1Q Card and converted to be transmitted in the EOC channel of the U interface.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-21
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
In addition, the EOC channel is used in "message" mode to control maintenance operations specific to the U interface (i.e.: line loopbacks) and in data mode for the following operations:
Subscriber Data Transmission Unit configuration, TRANSMIC type loop control orders (frame c), retransmission of fault indications. y Signalling transmission in channel D
The 16 kbps channel D carries signalling. Four signalling bits called a, b, c and d comparable with the TS 16 signalling of the 2 Mbps frame are used to transmit this signalling in both direction and for each one of the channels available on an S. Unit. A 2ms frame, that is a pattern of 4 bytes, is therefore defined in channel D: BYTE 1 = SYN1 = 7EH BYTE 2 = SYN2 = 7EH BYTE 3 = SIG = abcd 1st channel tuvw 2nd channel
BYTE 4 = BARREL SIG = SIG Bits a, b, c and d (t, u, v and w) therefore carry the channel signalling, whatever the bit rate. Bits a, b and d (t, u and w) received from the S. unit are placed in bits a, b and d of the 2 Mbps frame TS 16 except in the case of a loopback and conversely in the other direction. Signalling bit D is set to "1" by the subscriber data transmission units in normal operation and is transparent (sent onward as such) when loopbacks are applied by the FMX equipment and the S. Units. Bit c is set to "0".
y EOC channel structure

The EOC channel is used in message mode to transmit U interface line loopback control orders and in data mode to transmit the configuration control information between the 2w2B1Q Card and the S. unit. The EOC channel has the following structure:
A2 A1 A0 D/M D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EOC a 1, a2, a3 address bits (available in data mode)
Data (EOC 1 to EOC 8)
Data/Message mode (EOC d/m) ("0/1")
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-22
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
y Communications protocol on the EOC channel
The communications protocol pertaining to operations, maintenance and configuration transfer uses the data mode of the EOC channel (bit D/M (EOC d/m) set to "0"). The data is transferred in the form of a frame in bits D0 to D7 (EOC1 to EOC8). To identify a frame in the data flow received in bits D0 to D7 (EOC1 to EOC8) of the EOC channel, address bits A0 to A2 (EOC a1 to EOC a3) are used to differentiate:
the interframe (A2 A1 A0 = "100"), the first byte in the frame (A2 A1 A0 = "010"), the other bytes in the frame (A2 A1 A0 = "011").
A frame consists of the following four fields:
a 2-byte address field (unused), a 1-byte control field to identify the type of frame: y y y y
data link connection request, reply to a connection request, information, acknowledgement,
an information field less than 60 bytes in length contains the message itself: y y y y y y
configuration read message, configuration message, fault indication message, loopback indication message, fault read message, loopback read message,
NOTE:
A message usually consists of various fields with a well defined function. A message transfer always includes a request and a reply.
a 1 byte control field to check that the frame contains no transmission errors.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-23
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
y U Interface
In "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation, the U interface is in the transparent CT configuration. In the CT configuration, the U interface behaves as a Line Termination (CT). The normal operating status of the U interface for the "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation is complete activation. The activation procedure is as follows:
remote power feed switch off (where remote power feed is used) for approximately 2
seconds,
remote power feed restore (if remote power feed is implemented), after 2 seconds, request for activation to U interface only from the 2w2B1Q Card, complete activation request if the S. Unit is power supplied.
In normal operation, the following two stable conditions are supported:
activation with U interface only corresponding to the S. Unit power supply faults
indication,
complete activation when the S. unit is properly power supplied.

The activation procedure below is systematically reset after detection of the following faults:
expiry of the 15-second activation request timeout specific to the U interface, U interface signal loss, U synchronization loss, S. Unit power supply. y Activation/Deactivation of a U interface
Deactivation
In this status, the U interface port is deactivated and remote power feed of the U interface is switched off. All the maintenance operations and faults transmitted by bit c and normally transmitted to the common equipment units are then inhibited. The "U interface deactivation" indication is reported to the Common Equipment Units.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-24
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD Activation

When the U interface is "activated", the card restores the power feed at the U interface and runs a complete activation procedure (see above). The "U interface activation" indication is reported to the Common Equipment Units. As soon as activation is declared to be complete (total activation), the 2w2B1Q Card retransmits its configuration parameters stored in the EEPROM towards the S. Unit. If after a 15 second timeout activation has not succeeded, the S. Unit is declared unavailable. The card then interrupts the U interface remote power feed for 2 seconds approximately and restarts a new activation procedure. Bit c associated to the link is then sent in frame form with the "local fault" indication. The "U activation fault" error is reported to the Common Equipment Units. The activation procedure will be repeated as long as the U interface fails to be activated or the U interface port has not been deactivated.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-25
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
y Fault
Actions following up to the detection of faults are classified in three categories:
forward reactions for action at the level of the remote S. Unit, backward reactions for action at the level of the extension, equipment reactions for action at the level of the local FMX. a) Local faults
Local faults are detected locally by the 2w2B1Q Card. These faults are related to the local FMX equipment, to the receive 2 Mbps frame and the U interface. Faults detected Consequential actions
Local FMX equipment fault

Connection fault (fault specific to subscriber P3 shlef (adapter card faulty or out of rack) Forward reaction Not applicable. Backward reaction - The data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction. - Bit c associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment reaction - Remote power feed switch off for both ports. - Deactivation of the two U interfaces. - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. - "Fail" LED lit on the card. - U signal loss, U synchronization loss and U activation fault.
Forward reaction None. Backward reaction - The data and channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction. - Bit c associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment reaction - U interface remote power feed is switched off for 2 seconds and then restored. An activation procedure is restarted. - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.. - "Fail" LED lit on the card. .../...
Table 7-6 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Local Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-26
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
b) Remote faults (detected by the remote subscriber unit)

These faults are detected by the subscriber unit connected downstream to the local FMX.
Faults detected .../... - V110 FAL fault
Consequential actions Forward reaction - Not applicable. Backward reaction - None. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.. - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
- Network fault
Forward reaction - Not applicable. Backward reaction - None. Equipment reaction - Fault Indication transmission to Supervision and Management system and S. unit if S. unit bit rate is 48 kbps (for S. unit bit rates < 48 kbps, there is no notification, - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
- S. Unit
Forward reaction - None Backward reaction - The data and channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction. - Bit c associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "Remote fault" indication. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.. - "Fail" LED lit on the card. .../...
Table 7-7 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Remote Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-27
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Faults detected .../... - Remote D signalling failure
Consequential actions Forward reaction Not applicable. Backward reaction - No action on the data and associated signalling. - Bit c associated to the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "remote fault" indication. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
S. Unit Power
Forward reaction The U interface is activated in the U only mode (UOA). Backward reaction - The data and channel-associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction. - Bit c in frame form is sent with the "subscriber equipment power supply fault" indication. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.. - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
Faults detected on S. unit - Signalling on local channel D
Forward reaction None. Backward reaction - No action on the data and associated signalling. - Bit c associated to the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "Local fault" indication. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System.. - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
S. Unit Communications
Forward and forward reaction None. Equipment reaction - FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. - "Fail" LED lit on the card.
Table 7-8 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Remote Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-28
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
c) Extension faults (detected by the extension)

These faults are detected by the equipment connected upstream of the local FMX and transmitted via bit c.
Faults detected - Extension remote faults (c11), extension remote unavailability (c13), extension remote power feed failure (c12) and extension local power feed failure (c10).
Consequential actions Forward reaction Notification message to the remote subscriber S. unit. Backward reaction Not applicable. Equipment reaction FI Transmission to the Supervision and Management System. "Fail" LED lit on the card.
Table 7-9 - Effects of 2w2B1Q Card Extension Faults in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-29
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.3.3.4 - Interface Connections

Each interface connection is performed during its individual configuration (through the Supervision and Management System). The "connected" status of an interface is necessary for its operation, that is, for line activation and alarm monitoring to be possible.
NOTE: When an interface is in the "not connected" status, maintenance operations may not
be performed.
7.3.3.5 - Loopbacks in "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Modes

The 2w2B1Q Card offers in "Network U" and "Subscriber U" various loopback facilities: logic equipment loopback (loop 2c) applied with a loop 3 Supervision and Management System loopback control order, logic equipment loopback (loop 2c) applied with a loop 3 remote loopback control order originated by the network, analog equipment loopback (loop 2b) in "subscriber U" mode, applied with a loop 1A remote loopback control order from the CT.
Loopbacks comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150; they are shown in Figure 7.4 and Figure 7.5 and their implementation is described in sub-section 7.4.1. Loop-3 control takes place at the same time for the channels allocated to both interfaces when these channels are transmitted in five TSs. Loop-3 control takes place separately for the channels allocated to each interface when these channels are transmitted in six TSs.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-30
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.3.3.6 - Loopback in "TRANSMIC Extension" Operation

In the "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation, the 2w2B1Q Card offers two possible loopbacks:
"TRANSMIC" loopbacks, loopbacks specific to the U interface known as "U LINE" loopbacks.
The "TRANSMIC" loop control orders are issued by:
frame c (orders from the network or from the extension equipment), EOC channel used in data mode, or the Supervision and Management System.
The loop control orders specific to the U interface are exclusively issued by the Supervision and Management System.
y"TRANSMIC" loops
The following "TRANSMIC" loops are represented in Figure 7.5 and described in sub-section 7.4.1:
line loopback on the REGAT S. Unit activated by: y loop remote-control originated by the subscriber (circuit 141 of the V24 interface), y switch on the S. Unit, equipment loopback (loop 2b) of the REGAT S. Unit activated by: y a loop 2 remote-control originated by the network or customer (frame "c"; C4 = 0 or 1
and C5 = 0),
y y y y
a loop 2 control order originated by the local Supervision and Management System, a loop 2 control order originated by the remote Supervision and Management System, switch on the remote S. Unit or the extension remote S. Unit (this type of loopback activation is handled as a loop 2 remote-control originated by the network), the loop 2 remote-control originating from the remote extension subscriber (circuit 140 of the V24 interface),
the FMX logic equipment loopback (loop 2c), is activated by: y loop 3 control order originated by the local Supervision and Management System, y loop 3 remote-control originated by the network (frame "c"; C4 = 1 and C6 = 0) or the
extension (Supervision and Management System) if the extension is of the ST.MUX type.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-31
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
yU interface specific loopbacks (U LINE loopback)
"U LINE" loopbacks are as follows:
equipment U1 loopback, repeater U1A loopback, partial U2 loopback (channels B1 and B2).
These loopbacks comply with the C32-11 standard. Sub-section 7.4.1. gives the description of their implementation, including an illustration thereof.
7.3.3.7 - Line Tests

Line testing is available in "subscriber U" and "TRANSMIC Extension" modes only. The subscriber line on each individual interface may be connected to a metallic test bus under Supervision and Management System control (the interface is disconnected from the line being tested). Control access can only be available if the metallic test bus is not already being used by the subscriber line on the other interface or another FMX equipment card. Implementation of line testing is described in sub-section 7.4.2.
7.3.3.8 - Supervision and Management System Maintenance Control Orders

Whatever the mode of operation, the loopback control orders as well as the local Supervision and Management System originated line testing control order are automatically cancelled during the following operations:
configuration parameter change, switching off and removal of the card.

This management concerns each individual port except for the Loop-3 control order in "ISDN Extension" 5TSs mode which concerns both ports simultaneously.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-32
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
NETWORK REMOTE Equipment d
Loop 2c
Loop 2b Loop 2c
EXTENSION
REMOTE EXTENSION Equipment c
FMX to LOCAL unit "Subscriber U" Mode
FMX b Mode "Network U" mode
Loop 2b
Loop 2c Local unit Loop 2c Extension
loop U1A remote-control by the remote extension to the local unit in "subscriber U" mode (originating point: equipment "c", terminating point; FMXa) local loop 3 control (Supervision and Management System) by the local unit or or loop 3 network-originated remote-control local loop 3 control (Supervision and Management System) by the extension or network-originated loop 3 remote-control
Figure 7.4 - "Network U" and "Subscriber U" Loop Analysis

FMX 1 REGAT 1 S. UNIT V24/V11 Int (V24/V28) U Int. Line Loop
Loop 2 (Lp 2 (sub/path))
FMX 2
2M 2M
2f 2B1Q
U Line
U Int. Network
REGAT 2 S. UNIT (data TS + Loop 2 V24/V11 Sig a, b and d) (sub/path) Int U Line (V24/V28) U Int. U Int. Line Loop
2fW 2B1Q Loop 3
(Remote)
Loop 3
(data TS + Sig a, b and d)
(Remote Extension) (Extension)
(Local)
Loop 3 local unit
local loop 3 control order (Supervision and Management System) by local unit or loop 3 network-originated remote-control (frame c, bit 4 and 6) or extension (Supervision and Management System) if the extensions of the ST.MUX type local loop 2 control order (Supervision and Management System) by local unit or loop 2 network-originated remote-control (frame c, bits 4 and 5), extension (Supervision and Management System) or extension subscriber or manual order on remote or remote extension NOTA : For the low-bit rate subscriber unit, this loop can be set up on the 64 kbps circuit and on subscriber bit rate. For the medium bit rate subscriber unit, only the subscriber bit rate loop is available.
Loop 2 (sub/path) remote extension
Line loop
subscriber-originated loop 3 remote control or manual control from the remote unit.
Figure 7.5 - "TRANSMIC Extension" Mode Loop Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-33
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.4 - Maintenance
On the 2W 2B1Q Card, maintenance operations are organized on a priority basis, with the following in decreasing order:
Supervision and Management System locally controlled maintenance operations, maintenance operations controlled via frame "c", Maintenance operations:
. . . subscriber-originated controlled by frame c relayed by EOC channel (loopback at 64 kpbs for a low bit rate unit), transmitted by frame V.100 (low bit rate units only), controlled via keys located on unit front panel. NOTE : The first control order detected is set up. Only the highest priority maintenance operation is set up.
7.4.1 - Loopback Application

The following loopbacks are available on the 2w2B1Q Card (see Figure 7.4 and Figure 7.5):
y "Network U" and "subscriber U" mode of operation

logic equipment loopback: loop 2c upon loop 3 control order reception from the Supervision and Management System, logic equipment loopback: loop 2 c upon loop 3 remote-control order reception, analog equipment loopback in "subscriber U" mode: loop 2b upon loop U1A remotecontrol reception, (from CT) forward transmission of loop remote-control orders received from or transmitted to directly connected equipment.
y "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation line loopback on S. Unit: by subscriber remote-control or switch on the S. Unit, equipment loopback of the S. Unit: loop 2 or customer by loop 2 control order received
from the Supervision and Management System, by loop 2 network-originated remotecontrol, the Supervision and Management System of the extension or extension subscriber or switch on the remote S. Unit or remote S. Unit of the extension,
FMX equipment loopback: Loop 3 by loop 3 control order received from the Supervision
and Management System or loop 3 network-originated remote-control or Supervision and Management System of the extension if of the ST.MUX type,
loopbacks applied to: equipment U1, repeater U1A and partial U2 (B1 and B2) U interface
via a control order received from the local Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-34
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
a) Loopbacks in "Network U" and "subscriber U" modes of operation

Logic equipment loopback upon loop 3 local control order
Loopback control order by Supervision and Management System
REMOTE
LOCAL RECEPTION
2B + D + CV
Fail Mntce Busy Power
SNO
2B + D + CV
TRANSMISSION
Application
Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Handbok No. 56814480. The loopback applied is loop 2c.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-35
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects
The V.4 frame channels transmitted by Common Equipment units at the transmitting end of the card (data channels B and D and signalling channel VC) are rerouted to the receiving end of the card at the level of the DSP circuit. When five TSs transmit data from both interfaces in the V.4 frame, digital loopback is applied to the whole link (two channels B per interface and the combination of channels D and VC are relative to both interfaces). When six TSs transmit data from both interface in the V.4 frame (three TSs per interface), loopback is applied to the individual link selected for loopback (two channels B and the combination of channels D and VC relative to both interfaces). A loopback control order acknowledgement is transmitted in frame "c" TSs 16 associated with the channels B corresponding to the looped interface(s). The '"Mntce" LED is lit. The subscriber line is powered normally in "subscriber U" mode. Transmission of any signal is disabled (message SNO).
Removal
Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Handbok No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-36
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Logic equipment loopback upon loop 3 remote-control order reception
REMOTE
LOCAL RECEPTION
2B + D + CV
LOCAL
frame "c"
SNO
2B + D + CV
TC Loop 3 TRANSMISSION
Application
Reception of a network-originated Loop 3 remote loopback control order transmitted via bits C4 and C6 (C4 = 1 and C6 = 0) of the frame "c" (TS16 corresponding to the first interface channel B in frame V.4).
The loopback applied is local loop 2c.
Effects
The V.4 frame channels transmitted by Common Equipment units at the transmitting end of the card (data channels B and D and signalling channel VC) are rerouted to the receiving end of the card at the level of the DSP circuit. When five TSs transmit data from both interfaces in the V.4 frame, digital loopback is applied to the whole link (two channels B per interface and the combination of channels D and VC are relative to both interfaces). When six TSs transmit data from both interface in the V.4 frame (three TSs per interface), loopback is applied to the individual link selected for loopback (two channels B and the combination of channels D and VC relative to both interfaces), according to the remote control sent by frame "c". A loopback control order acknowledgement is transmitted in frame "c" for the TSs 16 associated with the TSs corresponding to the looped interface(s). The '"Mntce" LED is lit. The subscriber line is powered normally in "subscriber U" mode. Transmission of any signal is disabled (message SNO).
Removal
Data transmitted via frame "c". Detection of frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be removed after a 0.5 sec timeout.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-37
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Analog equipment loopback upon loop U1A remote-control order reception
"Subscriber U" operation
REMOTE
LOCAL UNIT RECEPTION

2B + D + CV,
EXTENSION
REMOTE EXTENSION
LOCAL UNIT
ARL code on frame V4 2B + D + LC
M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK
RECEPTION
M U L T I P L E X
TRANSMISSION "Network U" mode
RC Loop 1A
TRANSMISSION "Subscriber U" mode
Application
Deactivation of the subscriber line connected to the local unit. Transmission of a loop 1A remote-control by the extension remote-end. Reception of the loop 1A loopback control order coded with bits A (ARL data) in the V.4 frame by the local unit.
Effects
The channels transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data channels B and D and monitoring and maintenance channel LC) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. The subscriber line is powered normally. At the transmitting end, looped signals are transmitted to line (transparent loopback).
Removal
Data transmitted by the remote extension and transmitted forward via bits A in frame V.4.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-38
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
b) "TRANSMIC" Loopbacks of the "TRANSMIC Extension" mode of operation Line Loopback on the REGAT S. Unit
Data = Sig a = Sig b = 1 (whatever the bit rate) SA = SB = X =1 (according the bit rate) E4, E5, E6 = Remote Loop 2c of the extension (according the bit rate)
V24/V28
V24/V11 (V10)
141 105 108 103 X24/V11 T G R I 106 104 107 109 142 "0"
Data = Sig a = Sig b = 1 (whatever the bit rate) SA = SB = X =1 (according the bit rate) E4, E5, E6 = Remote Loop 2 of the extension (according the bit rate) Frame "c" (C4,C5 = Remote Loop 2 of the extension ) (according the bit rate)
REGAT S. UNIT
RECEPTION
FMX NETWORK
S U B S C R I B E R
I N T E U R F A C E
U Line
I N T E U R F A C E
M U L T I P L E X
Extension remote loopback acknowledgement : Bite rate less than or equal to 38,4 kbit/s : bits E of the V.110 frame Bit rate greater than 38,4 kbit/s : frame "c" (C8 = 0)
TRANSMISSION (remote) MANUAL SWITCHING ORDER (local unit)
Application
a. By switch
From the REGAT S. Unit, press once on the "LOOP/RESET" low position of the switch; the "LINE" LED starts flashing. Press on the "ACCEPT" top position of the switch to activate the order; the "LINE" LED remains lit up.
b. By subscriber remote-control
ITU-T order y switches circuit 141 to "0" status (closed).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-39
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects The signals received from the line at the receive end of the interface (103 or T) are sent
forward on the line at the transmit end of the interface (104 or R).
Loopback is reapplied to the whole datastream. Loopback is applied to the control signals which operate normally (105/109 and 108/107). The transmit timing clock is always provided by timing circuits 114/115 (synchronous mode of
the lower rate S. Units) or S/B.
NOTE:
For low rate S. Unit asynchronous mode, interchange circuits 114 and 115 are set to "1".
In V24/V11 (V10) or V24/V28 operation: y when at least one of the two circuits 107 or 108 has been configured used, circuit 107 is
set to status "0" (closed),
y circuit 142 is set to "0" status (closed) to denote maintenance status, y circuit 106 operates normally in response to circuit 105, y circuit 109 is set to status "1" (open) to lock circuit 104 in status "1". The V.110 frame data, signalling bits S and X of the V.110 frame when they are used (low
rate S. Unit) and the signalling sent over channel D of the U interface are all set to "1" towards the network.
The loop 2 remote-control order which applies the equipment loopback on the remote
extension S. Unit, is effected via the network and the extension: - by bits E4, E5 and E6 of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the remote S. Unit), - by frame "c" (bits C4 = C5 = 0) when the link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the local FMX).
The equipment loopback of the remote extension S. Unit is acknowledged in exactly the
same way (bits E of the V.110 when the link rate is 38.4 kbps, bit 8 (C8 = 0) when the link rate is > 38.4 kbps).
The "Mntce" LED of the local and extension FMX is lit up. Whatever the implementation, LEDs "Loop" and "Test" of the REGAT S. Unit are lit up. Removal y Implementation by switch From the REGAT S. Unit, press on the "LOOP/RESET" lower position of the switch to
cancel loopback.
y Implementation by subscriber remote-control ITU-T control order y Set circuit 141 to status "1" (open).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-40
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Remote loopback (REGAT S. Unit)
Loopback acknowledgement : BITS E or frame "c" (according to bit rate)
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
NETWORK
S U B S C R I B E R
V24/V28 V24/V11/V10
V.110 FRAMEUR
104 = 106 = 107 = 109 Loop 2 = "1"
ab
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
142 = "0"
X24/V11
I = "1"
M U L T I P L E X
Loop order : bits E or frame "c" (according to bit tate)
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL, EXTENSION SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, REMOTE SWITCH OF THE EXTENSION OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER
R set
(remote)
SWITCH MANUAL CONTROL
SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MANUAL CONTROL
a. By local Supervision and Management System or extension

Refer to CT User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Handbok No. 56814480. If implementation is from the local supervision and management system (this order is sent via the EOC channel in data mode), NOTE: Loopback acknowledgement is made by: bits E of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the S. Unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) frame when the link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the local FMX.
If the application is run from the extension supervision and management system and if the link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this control order is transmitted via the network, frame "c" (bits C4 = 0 or 1 and C5 = 0), then by the EOC channel in data mode) NOTA : Loopback acknowledgement is performed by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-41
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
b. By the network
Bit rate > 38.4 kbps
Reception of a loop 2 remote control order sent by frame "c" (bits C4 = 0 or 1 and C5 = 0)
from the network and controlled by network equipment and sent onward via the EOC channel between the local multiplexer and the remote S. Unit.
Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) (this action is carried
out by the local FMX). Bit rate 38.4 kbps
Reception of a loop 2 "special remote control order sent by frame "c"(bits C4 = C5 = 0)

from the network and controlled by network equipment and sent onward via the EOC channel between the local multiplexer and the remote S. Unit.
Loopback acknowledgement is made by:

bits E of the V.110 frame (this action is performed by the S. Unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) (this action is performed by the local FMX).
c. By the switch
y REGAT S. Unit (remote) From the REGAT S. Unit, press twice on the lower position "LOOP/RESET" of the
switch, which causes the "EQUIP" LED to flash.
Press on the upper position "ACCEPT" of the switch to make the order effective; the
"EQUIP" LED remains lit up.

bits E of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the S. Unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) frame when the link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the local FMX).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-42
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
y REGAT S. Unit (remote extension) From the REGAT S. Unit, press twice on the lower position "LOOP/RESET" of the
switch which cause the "EXTN" LED to start flashing.
Press on the upper position "ACCEPT" of the switch to make the order effective; the
"EXTN" LED remains lit up.
This command is sent:

bits E of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the S. Unit), via bits C4 and C5 in frame "c" (C4 = C5 = 0) when link bit rate is > 38,4 kbps (this action is performed by the local FMX).

bits E of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the S. Unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) frame when the link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the local FMX).
d. By remote-control of the extension subscriber
ITU-T order
sets circuit 140 to "0" status (closed). extension S. Unit.
This control order is managed like the previous control order generated by the remote
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-43
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects The signals transmitted by the transmit Common Equipment unit at the transmit end of the
interface (data and signalling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receive end of the interface; loopback is applied after the V.110 framers of the S. Unit.
The local and remote FMX LEDs are lit up for "Mntce". Whatever the implementation, the "loop" and "test" LEDs of the REGAT S. Unit are "on" and
"off" respectively.
The line is loaded at the receive end. y V24/V11(V10) or V24/V28 mode of operation Timing circuits 114/115 are always transmitted.
NOTE: For the low rate S. Unit asynchronous mode, interchange circuits 114 and 115are set to "1).
At the transmit end, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to status "1" (open) and
circuit 142 is set to status "0" (closed) to denote the maintenance status.
Circuits 140 and 141 are deactivated. y X24/V11 mode of operation The S/B timing circuits are always transmitted. At the transmit end, circuit I is set to "1" (open) and circuit R is in the status
programmed at card configuration ("1" or "0").
y Particular effects intrinsic to implementation by extension subscriber originated loop

to remote-control
On receiving the loopback acknowledgement:

the "TEST" LED of the extension remote S. Unit lights up, circuit 142 is set to closed (binary "0") to indicate the maintenance status.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-44
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Removal y Switch implementation (remote REGAT S. Unit or remote extension). From the REGAT S. Unit (remote or remote extension) press the lower position
"LOOP/RESET" to remove loopback.
y Supervision and Management System implementation (local unit or extension). Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network
Management System Handbok No. 56814480.
y Network implementation. Information transmitted by the network. y Implementation by extension subscriber remote-control. ITU-T order
Sets circuit 140 to status "1" (open).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-45
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Equipment loopback on the 64 kbps path (specific to a low rate REGAT S. Unit)
Loopback acknowledgement : frame "c"
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
NETWORK
S U B S C R I B E R
V24/V28 V24/V11/V10 104 = 106 = 107 = 109 = "1" 142 = "0"
V.110 FRAMEUR Loop 2 ab
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
X24/V11
I = "1"
M U L T I P L E X
Loop control order : frame "c"
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL,
R set
(remote)
SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MANUAL CONTROL ORDER
a. By the local Supervision and Management System

Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) regardless of link rate
(this action is carried out by the local FMX).
b. By the network
Reception of a loop 2 remote control order via frame "c" (bits C4 = 1 et C5 = 0) from the
network and controlled by the network equipment. It is sent onward by the EOC channel between the local multiplexer the and remote S. Unit..
Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) regardless of link rate
(this action is carried out by the local FMX)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-46
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects the entire channel B and the signalling carried over channel D are submitted to a loopback
upstream from the V.110 frame.
The local and remote FMX LEDs are lit up for "Mntce" Whatever the implementation, the "Loop" and "TEST" LEDs of the REGAT S. Unit are "on"
and "off" respectively.
The line is loaded at the receive end. Timing circuits 114/115 are always sent.
NOTE : For the low rate S. Unit asynchronous mode circuit 114 and 115 are set to "1".
At the transmit end, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to "1" (open) and circuit 142 is set
to status "0" (closed) to denote the maintenance status.
Circuits 140 and 141 are deactivated. Removal y Implementation by Supervision and Management System.
y Network implementation. Information sent by the network.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-47
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Logic equipment loopback (FMX)
REGAT S. UNIT FMX NETWORK
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL or EXTENSION SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
(Local Unit)
Manual control order Supervision and Management System
Application
a. By local or extension Supervision and Management System
If implementation is from the extension supervision and management system (this control is
sent via bits C4 and C6 (C4 = 1, C6 = 0) of the frame "c" of the network).
NOTE: The extension loopback function is available only if the extension is of the Station
Multiplexer type (ST.MUX).
b. By the network
Reception of a loop 3 remote-control order sent via bits C4 and C6 (C4 = 1, C6 = 0) of

frame "c" from the network.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-48
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects The data and channel-associated signalling are looped back to the multiplex side. Bit 8 (C8 = 0) of the frame "c" transmits the "loop control acknowledgement" indication to
denote that loopback has been activated.
The data and signalling transmitted to S. Unit are set to "1". The equipment loopback indication is transmitted to the Common Equipment Units. The local FMX controls an equipment loopback on a 64 kbps path (rate 38.4 kbps) or the
subscriber bit rate ( > 38.4 kbps) of the remote S. Unit by via the EOC channel in data mode.
Besides, channels B and D sent to the remote S. Unit are set to "1". The "Mntce" LED of the local and extension FMX is lit up. Removal y Network implementation. Information transmitted by the network. y Supervision and Management System implementation (local or extension).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-49
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
c) U interface specific loopback (line U loopback of the "TRANSMIC Extension" mode operation)
FMX (Loca Unitl) 2f2B1Q U Interface Repeater (optionnal)
Rgie REGAT (distant)
Interface U Loop U2 (B1, B2)
2M
Loop U1
Loop U1A
V24/V11 int
"Mntce" LED: lit C8 = 0
Loop U1A : channels 2B + D Loopback
Loopl U1A (B1, B2): channels B1 + B2 Loopback
Application
This type of loopback can exclusively be implemented from the local Supervision and Management System. Refer to Craft Terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Handbok No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-50
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Effects Loopbacks comply with standard C32-11. The loopback controls are sent via the EOC channel message mode. The table below shows the characteristics of the various U interfaces specific loopbacks.
Loopback
U1
Location
FMX (local unit)
Loop signals
Complete loops 2B+D+CL+SW * Complete loop 2B+D+CL+SW * Partial loop
Testable channels
2B+D + EOC
Loopback type
Not applicable **
U1A
Regenerative repeater S. Unit (remote)
2B+D
Not applicable **
U2.1 & 2
B1+B2
Transparent
frame synchronization word.
** the U interface is deactivated in this type of loopback.
The loopbacks are applied as close as possible to the U interface (the U interface is placed
on the S. Unit side for the U1A loopback).
The U1 and U1A loopback control orders will previously deactivate the U interface if it is
activated.
Bit c transmits the "Loop control acknowledgement" indication to denote a loopback

activation.
The "Line U1 (U1A or U2) loopback" indication is transmitted to the Common Equipment
units.
The "Mntce" LED of the local FMX is lit. Removal

Remote loopback control order forward transmission

The 2w2B1Q Card provides forward transmission of loopback control order that are not intended by converting messages from the modified V.4 frame or the 2 Mbps frame (depending on the mode of operation) into messages for transmission in maintenance channel EOC and conversely.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-51
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
7.4.2 - Line Testing ("Subscriber U" and "TRANSMIC Extension Operation)

Application
Control by Supervision and Management System
Fail
Mntce
BUSY
Power
Effects
Line test control order detection causes the line to be deactivated and remote power feed to be switched off. Line connection to the metallic test bus causes the AIS signal to be transmitted to the network via the V.4 frame corresponding to the line or on the 2 Mbps frame (depending of the mode of operation), in order to disable transmission on the equipment connected to the equipment. The "Mntce" LED is lit.
Removal
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-52
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD

All types of faults and errors are detected:
"Card" level faults: Card out (C.Out), Fuse Fault (FusFlt), Watchdog (Wdg), Card different (C.Dif.), Subassembly Fault * (Subscriber shelf P3) (S/assFlt), Self-test (S/test),
"Ports" level faults: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U loss Of Signal (LoSU), U loss Of Synchronization (LSynU), Power Failure (*) (PwFail), Clock Slip (***) (CkSlp), Network Fault (NF), Frame Alignment Loss V.4 (***) (FALV4), Invalid Message in bits A (***) (Inva.M), U Activation Fault (**) (UactF), Subscriber Terminal Communication Failure (**) (TCommF), Message A3 in bits A (***) (A3), Remote U Line Signal Loss (*) (LSL), Remote U Loss of synchronisation (*) (RSY), Remote Signalling Local Failure (**) (RSLF), Remote Signalling Remote Failure (**) ( RSRF), Subscriber Terminal Power Failure (**) (TPwrF), Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error (**) (TCompE),
"S. Unit" level faults (**): . . . . . . . Network Fault (NF), V110 FAL (V110), Rate Adaptation Fault (RteFlt) (low rate S. Unit), Local Extension Failure (LEF), Remote Extension Failure (REF), Remote Extension Power Failure (REMPF), Remote Extension Modem unavailable (LSF),
Network Fault (NF). If the card (or interface) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by Common Equipment units and an alarm is notified to the Supervision and Management System: major or minor alarm depending on the selected configuration. "Port" level faults cause the "Fail" LED to light up briefly or continuously on the 2w2B1Q Card front panel. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected is then accessible via the Supervision and Management System
(*) (**)
fault only available in "network U" mode. fault only available in "TRANSMIC Extension" mode. (***) fault only available in "network U" or "subscriber U" modes.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-53
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD

The localisation is made by the Supervision and Management System.
7.4.3.3 - Cause of Fault

Detected faults Connection error
Probable cause Interface Card out of rack or not available for the card U interface failure detection: . local unit-to-connected (remote) equipment link failure . remote equipment failure . U interface failure
Solution Fit appropriate Interface Card Check interface cable
U loss Of signal, U loss Synchronization or U Activation Fault ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode)
Power Failure ("network U" mode) Clock Slip ("network U" mode) Frame Alignment Loss V.4 ("Network U" and "Subscriber U" modes) and/or Network Fault
U interface fault detection: Remote unit power feed failure U interface fault detection: Loss of FMX timing circuit synchronization Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment . network-to-local equipment link failure.
No local action No local action No local action
.../...
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-54
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Detected faults .../... Message A3 in bits A ("network U" and "subscriber U" modes) Remote U Line Signal Loss ("network U" mode) Remote Signalling Local Failure ("network U" mode) Invalid Message in bits A ("network U" and "subscriber U" modes)
Probable cause
Solution
Fault detected by the extension: loss of frame V.4 alignment and/or network fault Fault detected by the extension: "subscriber U"-end U signal loss Fault detected by the extension: "subscriber U"-end U synchronization loss Fault detected by or on the network: . invalid message: unknown code on bits A . unstable message: unconfirmed code in bits A fault: any network equipment or network-to-local equipment link Fault detected by the remote equipment: - the "S. Unit type" parameter configuration (low or medium rate) does not correspond with the S. Units physically connected to the port Fault detected on the U interface end: - local remote unit link fault - remote unit fault - U interface fault Fault detected on the U interface end: - local remote unit link fault
No local action
No local action
No local action
No local action
Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode)
Check the real time of the S. Unit connected to the port
Local D signalling ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode)
No local action
Subscriber Terminal Communication Failure ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) FAL 110 ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) Remote Signalling Remote Failure ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode)
No local action
Fault detected by the remote unit: - remote unit fault Fault detected by the remote unit: - remote unit fault - U interface fault - remote local link fault Fault detected by the remote unit: - remote unit fault
No local action
No local action
Check mains connection of the remote unit .../...
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-55
7 - 2w2B1Q CARD
Detected faults .../... Rate Adaption Fault ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode, low rate S. Unit) Local Extension Failure ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) Remote Extension Failure ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) Remote Extension unit Power Failure ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode) Remote Extension Modem Unavailable ("TRANSMIC Extension" mode)
Probable cause
Solution
Fault detected by the remote unit: - the remote S. Unit rate configuration does not correspond to the S. Unit at the other end Fault detected by the extension: - extension local unit fault Fault detected by the extension: - extension remote unit fault
Check rate configuration on every S. Unit
No local action
No local action
Fault detected by the remote unit: - extension remote unit power fail
No local action
Fault detected by the remote unit: - Extension remote link fault
No local action

Card interfaces can be configured independently using the Supervision and Management System. Parameter consistency is controlled by the Supervision and Management System. Configuration parameters are: - interface activation/deactivation, - configuration with or without remote power feed, - mode of operation: . card level (5 TS U network, 2 x 3 TS U network, 5 TS U subscriber), . interface level (U network, REGAT MHBR U TRANSMIC Extension , LBR REGAT TRANSMIC Extension) - in the MHBR or LBR REGAT TRANSMIC Extension mode . configuration with or without repeater, S. unit parameter configuration is performed at the S. unit level.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 7-56
SECTION 8 BBTxRx CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-2
8 - BBTxRx CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 8.1 - Overview 8.2 - Description 8.3 - Start-up and Operation 8.3.1 - Configuration 8.3.2 - Initialization 8.3.3 - Modes of Operation 8.3.3.1 - General 8.3.3.2 - Baseband Circuit Operation 8.3.3.3 - Loopbacks 8.4 - Maintenance 8.4.1 - Loopbacks 8.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 8.4.2.1 - Alarm Display 8.4.2.2 - Cause of a Fault 8.5 - User Software Description
8-3 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-7 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-11 8-11 8-11 8-17 8-18 8-18 8-25 8-25 8-26 8-27
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-3
8 - BBTxRx CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 8-1 - Effects of faults Table 8-2 - Effects of faults Table 8-3 - Effects of faults Table 8-4 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-4
8 - BBTxRx CARD
8.1 - Overview
The Baseband Transmission-Reception,"BBTxRx", Card converts a 72 kbps, 144 kbps or 288 kbps baseband interface for input to the equipment in a datastream at n x 64 kbps, with n = 1, 2 or 4. This card provides the interface for TRANSMIC network baseband extensions. The data transmitted at 72, 144 or 288 kbps is associated with signaling information at a bit rate of 8 kbps (in 64 kbps steps) and remote DC maintenance information. The maintenance information is carried by bits X1, X2, X3 and X4 in frame E/H. BBTxRX card configuration and operation is performed via a supervision and maintenance system which may be: a craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the GIE or GIE - P card front panel of the equipment (or on the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), or the Remote Management System (RMS) which is the IONOS Network Management System. The terms below as used in this Technical Manual when referring to the BBTXRx Card have the following meanings: - reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, - transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
Reminder:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-5
8 - BBTxRx CARD
BB Tx-Rx JRF H/E Rem Extn Net Code 109 103 104 122 142 Extn Rem Loc Loc Loop Loop Loop Cont Loop 2 Norm Loop 3 Extn Rem Trans. Eye/Diff.
Fail Fail
GREEN LED
Fail BER
RED LED YELLOW LED SWITCH
CD TD RD
Trans F/0V
Rcv Eye/0V
Rcv F/0V
Current Trans Rcv

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-6
8 - BBTxRx CARD
8.2 - Description
The Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs from top to bottom (see Figure 8-1): 15 LEDs: Red "JRF" LED Red "H/E FAL" LED Red "Rem Fail" LED General synchronization failure (Jitter reducer unlock failure). Upon detection of "H" or "E" Frame Alignment Loss. Remote failure: upon reception of failure information detected by the far-end modem (bit X1 in "H" frame set to "1"). Extension failure: upon detection of line information routed by the extension via frame c. failure
Red "Extn Fail" LED Red "Net Fail" LED Red "Code BER" LED Green "109 CD" LED Yellow "103 TD" and "104 RD" LEDs Yellow "122" and "142" LEDs Yellow "Extn Loop" LED Yellow "Rem Loop" LED Yellow "Loc Loop" LED Yellow "Loc Cont" LED 2 switches: Three-position switch "Loop 2/Norm/Loop 3" One-position switch "Extn/Rem"
Network failure: upon detection of a network failure information routed via frame c. Upon detection > 10-3 line Bit Error Rate. Lit: line signal received at Unlit: line signal failure at the interface. the interface,
(Transmitted or received) data interchange via the interface (modem). In conjunction with LED "109 CD", indicates the communication link status (TRANSMIC supervision). Receipt acknowledgement of loopback remote control ordered to the extension (loopback is active). Receipt acknowledgement of loopback remote control ordered to the far-end modem (loopback is active). Local loopback active. Indicates local loopback request or loopback remote control order from local equipment. The two switches control activation of a Loop 2 or Loop 3 remote control order to the extension ("Extn" position), or a Loop 2 remote control order to the far-end equipment, or a local Loop 3 ("Rem" position).
NOTE:
The Loop 2 - Norm - Loop 3 switch is activated or deactivated by the supervision and management system. Switch deactivation corresponds to the "Norm" posi tion.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-7
8 - BBTxRx CARD
6 test sockets: "Trans. Eye/Diff." socket "Trans F/0V" socket "Rcv Eye/0V" socket "Rcv F/0V" socket "Current I Trans" socket "Current I Rcv" socket Differential transmission signal. Transmission synchronization. Reception signal. Reception synchronization. Transmission remote maintenance current. Reception remote maintenance current.
FRONT PANEL SWITCH AND LED MANAGEMENT
Fault LEDs:
LED CONDITION/ FAULT SigFail CSF BER3 RAL Rem Equpt Failure (RefmF) Unavailable remote Network Fault (NF) Extension fault Line fault Normal (no fault) Normal condition of connection NOTE: 142 122 104 Rx X X X X X X X X X X X 103 Tx X X X X X X X X X X X 109 LSF E X X X X X X X X A A BER Code X X X A X X X X X E X Res Flt X X X X X X A X X E X Ext Flt X X X X X X X A X E X Rem Flt X X X X A X X X X E X H/E FAL X A X X X X X X X E X GSF
X X X X A A X X E E E
X X X X A E X X E A A
X X A X X X X X X E X
The "104 Rx" and "103 Tx" LEDs are controlled by the card "hardware". "104 Rx" and "103 Tx" when lit respectively indicate the presence of transitions on the data being transmitted and received.
Loopback LEDs:
LED LOOP Local equipment loop Remote control equipment loop Loop remote control to remote BBTxRx Loop remote control to extension Loopback receipt acknowledgement on remote BBTxRx. Loopback receipt acknowledgement on remote BBTxRx. Loc Cntrl A X A A X X Loc Loop A A X X X X Rem Loop X X X X A X Ext Loop X X X X X A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-8
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Position of front panel switches according to loop control orders:

SWITCHES LOOP No loop control order Local equipment loop Loop remote control to remote BBTxRx Loop 2 remote control to extension Loop 3 remote control to extension "Loop 2 - Norm - Loop 3" "Norm" "Loop 3" "Loop 2" "Loop 2" "Loop 3" "Ext - Connec." X "Connec" "Connec" "Ext" "Ext"
A: Lit
E: Unlit
X: Indifferent
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-9
8 - BBTxRx CARD

The BBTxRx card contains no link and switch options. Upon initialization or configuration upgrade, operating instructions (configuration parameters) can be programmed via the supervision and management system. The different BBTxRx Card modes of operation are described in paragraph 8.3.3.
On power-up, the BBTxRx Card is initialized in successive steps. The results of checks are indicated by front panel LED conditions as follows: a - LEDs remain unlit. Power supply failure: check the fuse and the Power Converter Card. b - LEDs flash once, then go off. Timing circuit failure: . isolated fault: Card timing circuit fault, replace the Card, . fault observed also on other cards: FMX timing circuit fault, check the COB Card. cAll LEDs are lit. Microprocessor fault: replace the Card. d - All LEDs flash. The bit rate set via the "S101" microswitch is incorrect. e - No self-test is run: a string of flashing LEDs indicates completion of the initialization process.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-10
8 - BBTxRx CARD
8.3.3 - Modes of Operation 8.3.3.1 - General

The BBTxRx Card allows operation with a baseband circuit. Loopbacks can be applied via the supervision and management system, front panel switches or via remote control order reception. Presentation of detected alarms and loopbacks in progress is provided via front panel LEDs.
8.3.3.2 - Baseband Circuit Operation

The BBTxRx Card is used for transferring data of a baseband circuit as well as maintenance and monitoring information contained in frame "H". Bits "X4" and "X3" (monitoring information) of frame "H" are respectively placed in bits a and b in the four signaling TS16 bits (which may or may not be reversed depending on configuration) relative to the link when the multiplex circuit has channel-associated signaling. Bits X2 and X1 as well as DC remote maintenance information are interpreted. When the corresponding multiplex circuit is type G.704 with channel-associated signaling, the information relative to bits X2 and X1 and to remote maintenance are transmitted forward multiplex-side by "c". To the network, TS16 of the link at N x 64 kbps is repeated N times. To the subscriber, bits X3 and X4 reflect the first half TS16 of the link on the multiplex. Bit d in TS16 is not used: it is set to "1". Loopback control orders are routed in frame "c" which can also contain failure information.
Faults The faults detected are relative to signals coming from the baseband circuit (subscriber-tonetwork direction) and multiplex signals (network-to-subscriber direction). NOTE: The "backward" and "forward" terms are defined in the glossary.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-11
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Fault detected Failure from subscriber: - CSF : Clock Signal Failure and FALE/H: Frame E or H Frame Alignment Loss in the received signal
Forward reaction: - Setting of data (time period < 2 ms) and channel-associated signalling possibly associated (time period < 100 ms) to "1", - Bit "c" associated with the link is transmitted framed with the "local fault" message, - At the interface, bit X1 in frame H is transmitted at "1" (time period < 100 ms 10 %), - Remote mainenance actions in progress, from the far-end, are removed after a timeout of 1 s 10 % if they concern baseband connection. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - LED "109 DSL" switched off. - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system.
- Remote Alarm Indication (RAL) and - Far-end equipment fault,
Forward reaction: - Bit "c" associated with the link is transmitted framed with the "remote fault" message. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system.
- BER3: Execessive error rate on received code
Forward reaction: - At the interface, bit X1 in frame H is transmitted at "1" (a 4 1 s integration period is set up. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system. .../...
Table 8-1 - Effects of faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-12
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Fault detected .../... - Line fault
Consequential action Forward reaction: - Setting of data (time period < 2 ms) and channel-associated signaling possibly associated (time period < 100 ms) to "1", - Remote mainenance actions in progress, from the far-end, are removed after a timeout of 1 s 10 % if they concern baseband connection. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system.
- Equipment unavailable fault
Forward reaction: - Bit "c" associated with the link is transmitted framed with the "subscriber unavailability" message. Backward reaction: - None Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-13
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Fault detected .../... Failure from network or extension - Indication of local fault at extension, indication of remote fault at extension, "farend mode power fault indication(s) at extension, and far-end modem unavailable indication(s) at extension received by bit c
Forward and backward reactions: - No action undertaken or same reaction as for Network Fault indication
Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system. Forward reaction: - Bits X1, X2, X3 and X4 in frame H set to a value determined upon configuration, - Maintenance actions controlled by frame c are maintained for 0,5 s 100 ms Backward reaction: - None. Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system.
- Network Failure (NF): (bit c set to "1" or unframed)
- Internal Card fault (watchdog).
Forward and backward reactions: - None Equipment reaction: - Transmission of fault indication to supervision and management system
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-14
8 - BBTxRx CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-15
8 - BBTxRx CARD
REMOTE OR SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK
EXTENSION
REMOTE OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER
Rmte RC (Lp 2) or Rmte RRC BBTx/RX

MODEM d
Lp 3
Extn RCt (Lp 3)
Extn RC (Lp 2) or Extn RRC

BBTx/RX MODEM c
FMX b LOCAL FMX a
BBTx/RX
BBTx/RX
Lp 3
local control order (switches or supervision and management system) or network-originated remote control order (from: FMX b or any higher-order network equipment) Remote control order (loop 2/loop 3) from the local equipment (switches or supervision and management system) to the extension (from: FMX a, to: FMX b or c) Remote control order (loop 2) from the local equipment (switches or supervision and management system) to remote unit (from: FMX a, to FMX d) Forward transmission of remote control order (loop 2) originated by remote unit to extension subscriber (from: FMX d, via intermediate FMX a, to FMX c) Forward transmission of remote control order (loop 2) originated by network or subscriber to remote unit (from network FMX b or d or subscriber FMX c, intermediate FMX a, to FMX d)
Extn RC
Rem RC
Extn RCFT
Rem RCFT
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-16
8 - BBTxRx CARD
8.3.3.3 - Loopbacks
The BBTxRx Card offers various loopback options: loopbacks controlled by the supervision and management system or via front panel switches: . equipment local loopback (loop 33), . equipment remote (controlled loop 2 to subscriber), . loops 2 and 3 to extension, equipment loopback (loop 3), controlled by the network, transmission of loop control orders: . remote to extension subscriber (loop 2) . network or extension subscriber to remote (loop 2). The above loopback functions comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150; they are shown in Figure 8-2 and their implementation is described in sub-section 8.4.1.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-17
8 - BBTxRx CARD
8.4 - Maintenance 8.4.1 - Loopbacks

See Figure 8-2
Equipment Loopback via local control

SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT NETWORK LOCAL UNIT
Lp Extn Lp Rmte Lp Loc IC Loc Lp 2 Norm Lp 3 Lp 2 Extn Conn
RECEPTION
frame "c"
i=0 AIS TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
LED LIT
Application
a. Via supervision and management system

Refer to Craft terminal Users Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
b. Via Switches Set the "Extn/Rem" switch to the "Rem" position. Set the "Loop 2/Norm/Loop 3" switch to the "Loop 3" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-18
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data and possible channel-associated signaling) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface; loopback applied is local loop 3. - Loopback is not applied to bit c ; which transmits the "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement" message. If a fault persists backward from the loopback, the corresponding indication is transmitted if applicable in frame "c". - The "Loc Loop" and "Loc Cont" LEDs are lit. - At the receiving end, the line is loaded on its nominal impedance and the signal received is ignored. - At the transmission end, an AIS at N x 72 kbps is transmitted to the far-end BBTxRx. - A loop remote control order is transmitted to the far-end BBTxRx via a DC remote maintenance device (the multiplexer maintains AIS transmission at N x 72 Kbps and stops transmitting DC i). Removal a. Via the supervision and management system Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
b. Via Switches Set the "Loop 2/Norm/Loop 3" switch back to the "Norm" position.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-19
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Network-originated remote loopback control order reception
SUBSCRIBER
NETWORK
EXTENSION M TRANSMISU SION L T I P RC Lp 3 L E X RECEPTION
LOCAL UNIT
Lp Extn Lp Rmte Lp Loc IC Loc
RECEPTION
Frame "c"
i=0
AIS
TRANSMISSION
LED LIT
Application Reception of a loop 3 remote control order originated by the network via frame "c". Loopback is of a logic nature and functionally identical to equipment loopback. NOTE: the BBTxRx card does not react: - to this loop if the multiplexer is configured in the Sb Mux mode, - to a subscriber-originated loop 3.
Effects - Signals at the transmitting end of the interface (data and possible channel-associated signaling are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface; loopback applied is local loop 3. - Loopback is not applied to bit c ; which transmits the "loopback control order receipt acknowledgement" message. If a fault persists backward from the loopback, the corresponding indication is transmitted if applicable in frame "c". - The "Loc Loop" and "Loc Cont" LEDs are lit. - At the receiving end, the line is loaded on its nominal impedance and the signal received is ignored. - At the transmission end, an AIS at N x 72 kbps is transmitted to the far-end BBTxRx. - A loop remote control order is transmitted to the far-end BBTxRx via the DC remote maintenance device (the multiplexer maintains AIS transmission at N x 72 Kbps and stops transmitting DC i). Removal Information transmitted via frame "c". Detection of a frame "c" alignment loss causes loopback to be immediately removed.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-20
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Remote loopback control order transmission to extension
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT
NETWORK
EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER LOCAL UNIT TRANSMISSION

Lp Extn Lp Rmte Lp Loc IC Loc Lp 2 Norm Lp 3 Extn Conn
RECEPTION
RC Lp 2 (or RC Lp 3) Frame "c"
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
M U L T I P L E X
RECEPTION
Lp 3 or Lp 2
LED LIT
Application a. Via the supervision and management system Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
b. Via Switches Set the "Extn/Rem" switch to the "Extn" position. Set the "Loop 2/Norm/Loop 3" switch to the "Loop 2" or "Loop 3" position. When the multiplexer is configured in the St Mux mode, it is possible to choose between the transmission of a subscriber-originated loop 2 control order to the extension via bit c and the transmission of a network-originated loop 3 control order. When the multiplexer is configured in the Sb Mux mode, only a subscriber-originated loop 2 control order is possible. Effects Remote loopback control orders are transmitted via frame "c". The "Loc Cont" LED is lit. Reception of the loopback acknowledgement causes the "Extn Loop" LED to light up. Bit X2 is transmitted as "0" to the far-end BBTxRx to indicate that the loopback is applied to the link.
NOTE:
Suppression a. Via the supervision and management system Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-21
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Far-end (remote unit or subscriber) remote loopback control order transmission

SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT NETWORK LOCAL UNIT
Lp Extn Lp Rmte Lp Loc Cl Loc Lp 2 Norm Lp 3 Extn Conn
i=0
RECEPTION
Frame "c"
i=0
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
LED LIT
Application a. Via the supervision and management system Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
b. Via Switches Set the "Extn/Rem" switch to the "Extn" position. Set the "Loop 2/Norm/Loop 3" switch to the "Loop 2" or "Loop 3" position.
Effects The loop 2 remote control order to the far-end BBTxRx is transmitted via the DC remote maintenance device; the BBTxRx card transmits nil current (i = 0) to the far-end while maintaining signal transmission. The "Loc Cont" LED is lit. Bit "c" is transmitted framed and carries the loopback control order acknowledgement" to indicate to the network and extension that a loopback is in progress. If a fault persists upstream from the loopback, the corresponding indication is transmitted, if applicable, in frame "c".
Removal a. Via the supervision and management system Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-22
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Forward transmission to extension of loopback 2 control order (originated by far-end BBTxRx)
SUBSCRIBER
LOCAL UNIT
NETWORK
EXTENSION
SUBSCRIBER LOCAL UNIT

RECEPTION
I=0 Frame "c"
Frame "c" I=0
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
M U L T I P L E X
TRANSMISSION
RECEPTION
RC Lp 2 or X=0
LED LIT
Application When the multiplex circuit is type G.704 with channel-associated signaling, the multiplexer transmits any loop 2 control order from the far-end BBTxRx forward to the extension (via bit "c"). Detection of a Loop 2 control order from the far-end BBTxRx via bit X2 in frame H.
Effects "H" frame bit X2 set to "0" is received from the far-end BBTxRx. Bit "c" is framed towards the network and carries the subscriber-originated Loop 2 control order". Framed bit "c" sent back from the network with the loop control order receipt acknowledgement message. The multiplexer transmits the loopback acknowledgement forward to the far-end BBTxRx by setting bit X2 in frame "H" to "0". The "Extn Loop" LED is lit.
Removal Information transmitted via bit X2. Frame "H" alignment loss.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-23
8 - BBTxRx CARD
Forward transmission of loopback control orders (originated by network or extension subscriber BBTxRx)
SUBSCRIBER LOCAL UNIT NETWORK EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER LOCAL UNIT
RECEPTION
X2 = 0 Frame "c" RC Lp 2 Frame "c" X2 = 0
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
M U L T I P L E X
TRANSMISSION
RECEPTION
LED LIT
Application Detection of a network or subscriber-originated loop 2 control order, transmitted via frame "c", from the extension to the far-end BBTxRx (subscriber).
Effects The BBTxRx card of the local multiplexer transmits nil line current (i = 0) while maintaining data signal transmission. The far-end BBTxRx acknowledges loopback by transmitting nil line current i. Bit "c" is transmitted framed acknowledgement message. The "Extn Loop" LED is lit. and carries the loopback control order receipt
Removal Information transmitted via bit X2. Frame "H" alignment loss.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-24
8 - BBTxRx CARD

The types of faults and errors are detected: - "Card" level faults and errors: . Card out (C.out), . fuse fault (FusFl), . watchdog (Wdg), . Card different (.C.Dif.), . selftest (S/test), - "Port" level faults: . Clock Signal Failure (CSF), . Frame Alignment Loss E/H in the recieved signal (FALE/H), . Remote modem Unavailable (rMU), . Remote Alarm Indication (RAL), . Remote Equipment Failure (RefmF), . Bit Error Rate (BER3)), . Line Failure (LFail), . Local Extension Failure (LEF), . Remote Extension Failure (REF), . Remote Extension Modem Power Failure (REMPF), . Remote Extension Modem unavailable (LSF), . Network Fault (NF). If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is notified to the Supervision and Management System: major or minor alarm depending on the configuration. "Port" level faults and faults self-test cause LEDs to light up on the BBTxRx Card front panel. Fault location is performed via the supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-25
8 - BBTxRx CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed on the front panel, along with the corresponding probable cause and possible remedial actions. Detected fault Signal Failure: SigFail) Frame Alignment E/H (FALE/H), Bit Error Rate (BER3) Probable cause Fault detected by local equipment on signal from far-end eqpt: . local equipment failure . far-end-to-local equipment failure Failure detected by far-end equipment transmitting information to local eqpt: . far-end equipment failure . fault on local-to-far-end eqpt link Network Fault (NF) Failure detected by the network or on the network: . any network equipment failure . fault on network-to-local eqpt link Remote Extension Modem Power Failure (REMPF) Failure detected by the extension: . extension failure . (far-end) extension subscriber failure (if BBTxRx or 3 64 I) . (far-end) extension subscriber-toextension link No local action No local action check BBTxRx Card check interface cable Remedial action
Remote Equipment Failure (RefmF)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-26
8 - BBTxRx CARD

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or to IONOS Network Management Systeme Manual No. 56814480.
Configurable Parameters Card ports are configured using the supervision and management system. Configuration parameters are:
Card parameters:
front panel switch disabling or enabling.
Port Parameters:
line bit rate, value of bits X2, X3 and X4 transmitted in frame H in case of network failure or extension failure, option on the reaction to fault indication relative to extension or network failure received via bit "c", . bits X2, X3 and X4 in frame H set to predefined value, . no action, option on network failure: . data set to "1", . no action on data, option on TS16 signaling bit: . bit b reversed, . bit b not reversed.
Values programmed by default:

bit rate = 72 kbps, bits X2, X3 and X4 set to "0", no action undertaken on reception of fault indication relative to extension or network failure, front panel switches disabled, data forced on network failure, bit b not reversed.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-27
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 8-28
SECTION 9 4 U TRANSFIX CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-2
9 - 4U TRANSFIX CARD
CONTENTS
Pages
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 9.1 - Overview 9.2 - Description 9.3 - Start-up and Operation 9.3.1 - Configuration 9.3.2 - Initialization 9.3.2.1 - Initialization on Power-up 9.3.2.2 - Supervision and Management System Configuration 9.3.3 - Mode of Operation 9.3.3.1 - General 9.3.3.2 - Operation 9.3.3.3 - Port Activation/Deactivation 9.3.3.4 - Loopbacks 9.3.3.5 - Line Tests 9.3.3.6 - Automatic Line Test 9.3.3.7 - Supervision and Management System Control Order Management 9.4 - Maintenance 9.4.1 - Loopback Application 9.4.2 - Line Testing 9.4.3 - Alarm Analysis 9.4.3.1 - Alarm Description 9.4.3.2 - Locating a Fault Displayed via the "Fail" LED 9.4.3.3 - Cause of Fault 9.5 - User Software Description
9-3 9-4 9-4 9-7 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-23 9-23 9-24 9-24 9-25 9-27 9-27 9-41 9-42 9-42 9-43 9-43 9-44
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-3
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 9-1 - Subscriber Unit Interconnection Figure 9-2 - Front Panel Figure 9-3 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 9-1 - Effects of Local Faults Table 9-2 - Effects of Local Faults Table 9-3 - Effects of Remote Faults Table 9-4 - Effects of Remote Faults Table 9-5 - Effects of Extension Faults Table 9-6 - Alarm Analysis Table 9-7 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-4
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-5
NETWORK
REGAT S. UNIT
4U Transfix CARD
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
4U Transfix CARD
REPEATER
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
FMX
Figure 9-1 - Subscriber Unit Interconnection
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-6
9.1 - Overview
The 4 x 2-wire 2B1Q Card (hereinafter referred to as the 4U TRANSFIX card) provides connection of four 2-wire type channels in 2B1Q line code (two binary digits, four binary digits) to the FMX. Each channel transmits two 64 kbps data channels B, one 16 kbps data channel D and 4 kbps LC channel for monitoring and maintenance. This card supports four independent, from a control access point of view, 2-wire 2B1Q interfaces (U interfaces) providing connection to the REGAT subscriber data transmission units (Transfix S. Unit): - Low bit rate, - Medium or high bit rate, - or 2-interface medium and high bit rate. The subscriber unit provides remote connection to low, medium and high bit rate interfaces. NOTE: The ISDN mode of operation with V.5 type connection will be available at a later time.
Figure 9-1 shows the subscriber unit/4U TRANSFIX card links, direct or via a repeater (optional equipment doubling range). 4U TRANSFIX card configuration and control access is performed via the supervision and management system which may be: a Craft terminal (CT) connected locally or remotely on the front panel of the equipment GIE or GIE - P card (or on the connection panel or GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS Network Management System. The terms below as used in the Technical Manual have the following meanings: - Reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction. - Transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
Reminder:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-7
4U
Green LED
Fail
Reed LED
Mntce
Yellow LED
Busy
Pwr
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-8
9.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the 4U TRANSFIX card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 9-2): 4 LEDs four both card ports: 1 red "Fail" LED Fail: the "Fail" LED lights up when a failure is detected by the card, Maintenance: the "Mntce" LED lights up when a maintenance action is detected by the card, Line Busy: the "Busy" LED lights up when at least one of the ports is active or in the activation process, Power: the "Power" LED lights up when the U interface remote power feed is detected by at least one of the 2B1Q ports. T1,25 A, T0,5 A, T0,5 A.
1 yellow "Mntce" LED
1 green "Busy" LED
1 green "Power" LED Fuses: F1001 (+ 5 V): F1301 (+ 53 V): F1302 (- 53 V):
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-9

The 4U TRANSFIX card contains no link or switch option. During first configuration and subsequent upgrades, configuration parameters may be programmed using the Supervision and Management System.
4U TRANSFIX card initialization is performed as follows: - initialization on power-up, followed by self-tests, - configuration via the supervision and management system if the desired parameters do not correspond to standard configuration (configuration by default).
9.3.2.1 - Initialization on Power-up

On power-up, the card is initialized in several successive steps: the results of the different checks are displayed on the front panel LEDs: a. LEDs remain unlit. Check fuse(s) and power converter(s). b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed. c. Self-tests 6 consecutive functional self-tests are performed. If no fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a fault is detected, the "Fail" LED flashes, the fault code is indicated by the "Mntce", "Busy" and "Power" LEDs: replace the card. NOTE: The "Mailbox" fault (no. 5) may have the following two meanings: - the "COB" card does not deliver the 2 Mbps clocks of the IC/OC datastream (in this case check and possibly replace the "COB" card), - the mailbox is inoperative (in this case, replace the 4U TRANSFIX card). Faults are coded as follows: Error Code LEDs Mntce Busy Power Fail A: LED lit C: LED flashing if test fault A C A C A A C A C A A C A A C 1 2 3 4 5 6
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-10
Error code No. 1
Circuits and functions tested
PROM CPU block program memory. RAM CPU block data memory. RAM DSP DSP block memory. DSP DSP software download. DSP Mailbox test. U interface block U interface test.
3 4 5 6
On first start-up, the interfaces have the following configuration (default parameters): - interfaces no.s 1 to 4 "disabled", - remote power feeding, - unit used: medium and high rate unit, - repeater-less operation. Card operation is described in sub-section 9.3.3.2.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-11
9.3.2.2 - Supervision and Management System Configuration

If necessary, modify the following configuration parameters: mode of operation with or without remote power feed, interface enabling/disabling, mode of operation with or without repeater, type of unit used.
9.3.3 - Mode of Operation 9.3.3.1 - General

The 4U TRANSFIX card only has one mode of operation. The supervision and management system can be used to select: the enabling or disabling of each of the four interfaces.
Loopback application may be performed via the supervision and management system or remote control order reception. The supervision and management system may also be used to control line maintenance tests. Detected alarms, loopbacks in progress, maintenance line testing, busy conditions and remote line power feed deactivation/activation are presented visually via the card front panel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-12
9.3.3.2 - Operation
The 4U TRANSFIX card provides connection to subscriber units via the 2B1Q coding U interface by transmitting data timeslots (TSs) and signalling 4-bit bytes of the 2 Mbps frame. The medium and high rate adaptation unit is a subscriber unit which provides matching between a V.24/V.11/V.10 or X.24/V.11 interface and the 2B1Q coding U, for bit rates at 48, 56, 64 and 128 kbps. The low rate adaptation unit is a subscriber unit which provides matching between the V.24/V.28 interface and the 2B1Q coding U interface for bit rates less than or equal to 0.6 kbps and bit rates of 1.2 - 2.4 - 4.8 - 9.6 - 19.2 - 38.4 - 48 - 56 and 64 kbps. The 2-interface medium and high bit rate adaptation unit is a subscriber unit providing matching between two X.24/V.11 interfaces and the 64 kbps 2B1S coding U interface for a 64 kbps bit rate or an X.24/V.11 interface and a U interface for a bit rate of 128 kbps. In the case of medium and high rate adaptation, the U interface channels used to transmit the data TS(s) are: channel B1 which carries frame V.110 or X.50a for bit rates less than or equal to 56 bps, channel B1 for the 64 kbps bit rate, channels B1 and B2 for the 128 kbps bit rate.
In the case of low rate adaptation, data is transmitted over channel B1 (the link always uses the first bit of the supporting TS at 64 kbps). In the case of 2-interface medium and high rate units, the two channels are used independently for each 64 kbps link. Channel D transmits the signalling associated with the channel (bits a, b, c and d; bit c being set to "0") via a frame. Whatever the bit rate, the signalling is systematically copied and transmitted on the signalling bits of the associated channel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-13
The table below provides the transmission characteristics of the data, signalling and loop control orders according to the subscriber data transmission unit used and link bit rate: LOW RATE UNIT: BIT RATE FRAME SIGNALLING USED BY LOOPBACK CONTROL THE UNIT ORDER SB (105/109) SA (108/107) X (109 remote or extension) SB (105/109) SA (108/107) X (109 remote or extension) a and b TS 16 bits E4, E5 and E6 or frame "c"
0.6 to 38.4 kbps
V.110
48 and 56 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7a and 7c)
frame "c"
56 and 64 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7b) and no frame
frame "c"
MEDIUM AND HIT RATE UNIT AND 2 INTERFACE MEDIUM AND HIGH RATE UNIT: BIT RATE FRAME SIGNALLING USED BY LOOPBACK CONTROL THE UNIT ORDER V.110: SB(105/109) SA(108/107) X50: a and b TS 16 a and b TS 16 frame "c"
48 and 56 kbps
V.110 (recommendations 7a and 7c) or X50 V.110 (recommendations 7b) and no frame
56, 64 and 128 kbps
frame "c"
In the V.24/V.11/V.10 and V.24/V.28 mode, signalling bits a and b respectively carry the 105/109 and 107/109 interchange circuits when these bits are implemented. In the X.24/V.11 mode, the signalling bit carries the C/I interchange circuit (signalling bit b in this case is set to "1") when the latter is used. This information is analyzed by the 4U TRANSFIX card before being inserted in the 2 Mbps frame. The data transmitted by the frame of bit c in the 2 Mbps frame is interpreted via the 4U TRANSFIX card and converted for transmission in the EOC channel of the U interface.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-14
In addition, the EOC channel is used in "message" mode to control maintenance operations specific to the U interface (line loopbacks and in "data" mode for the following operations: subscriber data transmission unit configuration, TRANSMIC type loop control orders (frame c), retransmission of fault indications.
y Signalling Transmission in Channel D

The 16 kbps channel D is used to carry the channel-associated 2 4-bit byte signalling bits associated with the 2 B channels. Four signalling bits called a, b, c and d, comparable with the TS 16 signalling of the 2 Mbps frame are used to transmit this signalling in both directions and for each one of the channels available on an S. unit. A 2 ms frame, that is a pattern of 4 bytes, is therefore defined in channel D: BYTE 1 = SYN1 = 7EH BYTE 2 = SYN2 = 7EH BYTE 3 = SIG = abcd st 1 channel tuvw nd 2 channel
BYTE 4 = BARRED SIG = SIG Bits a, b, c and d (t, u, v and w) therefore carry the channel signalling whatever the bit rate. Bits a, b and d (t, u and w) received from the S. unit are placed in bits a, b and d of the 2 Mbps frame TS16 except in the case of a loopback and conversely in the other direction. Signalling bit d is set to "1", by the subscriber data transmission units in normal operation and is transparent (sent onward as is) when loopbacks are applied by the FMX equipment and the S. units. Bit c is set to "0".
y EOC Channel Structure

The EOC channel is used in the message mode to transmit U interface line loopback control orders and in the data mode to transmit configuration control information between the 4U TRANSFIX card and the subscriber data transmission unit. The EOC channel has the following structure:
A2 A1 A0 D/M D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
EOC a 1, a2, a3 address bits (available in data mode)
Data (EOC 1 to EOC 8)
Data/Message mode (EOC d/m) ("0/1")
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-15
y Communications Protocol on the EOC Channel

The communications protocol pertaining to operations, maintenance and configuration transfer uses the data mode of the EOC channel (bit D/M (EOC d/m) set to "0"). The data is transferred in the form of a frame in bits D0 to D7 (EOC1 to EOC8). To identify a frame in the data flow received in bits D0 to D7 (EOC1 to EOC8) of the EOC channel, address bits A0 to A2 (EOC a1 to EOC a3) are used to differentiate: the interframe (A2 A1 A0 = "100"), the first byte of the frame (A2 A1 A0 = "010"), the other bytes of the frame (A2 A1 A0 = "011").
A frame consists of the following four fields: a 2-byte address field (unused), a 1-byte control field to identify the type of frame:
y y y y
-
data link connection request, reply to connection request, information, acknowledgement,
an information field less than 60 bytes in length contains the message itself:
y y y y y y
configuration read message, configuration message, fault indication message, loopback indication message, fault read message, loopback read message.
NOTE:
A message usually consists of various fields with a well-defined function. A message transfer always includes a request and a reply.
a 1-byte control field to check that the frame contains no transmission errors.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-16
yU Interface
The U interface is in the transparent CT configuration. In the CT configuration, the U interface behaves like a Line Termination (CT). The normal operating status of the U interface is complete activation. The activation procedure is as follows: remote power feed switch off (where remote power feed is used) for approximately 2 seconds, remote power feed restore (if remote power feed is implemented), after 2 seconds, request for activation to U interface only from the 4U TRANSFIX card, complete activation request if the S. unit is powered.
In normal operation, the following two stable conditions are supported: activation with U interface only corresponding to the S. unit power supply faults indication, complete activation when the S. unit is properly powered.
The activation procedure below is systematically reset after detection of the following faults: expiry of the 15-second activation request timeout specific to the U interface, U interface signal loss, U synchronization loss, S. unit power supply.
yU Interface Activation/Deactivation
Each port is individually activated or deactivated.
- Deactivation
In this status, the U interface port is deactivated and remote power feed of the U interface is switched off. All the maintenance operations and faults transmitted by bit c and normally transmitted to the common equipment units are then inhibited. The "U interface deactivation" indication is reported to the common equipment units.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-17
- Activation
When the U interface is "activated", the card restores the power feed at the U interface and runs a complete activation procedure (see above). The "U interface activation" indication is reported to the common equipment units. As soon as activation is declared to be complete (total activation), the 4U TRANSFIX card retransmits its configuration parameters to the S. unit. If after a 15-second timeout activation has not succeeded, the S. unit is declared unavailable. The card then interrupts the U interface remote power feed for approximately 2 seconds and restarts a new activation procedure. Bit c associated with the link is then sent in frame form with the "local fault" indication. The "U activation fault" error is reported to the common equipment units. The activation procedure will be repeated as long as the U interface fails to be activated or the U interface port has not been deactivated.
yFault
Actions consecutive to fault detection are classified in three categories: forward reactions for action at the level of the remote S. unit, backward reactions for action at the level of the extension, equipment reactions for action at the level of the local equipment. a) Local Faults Local faults are detected locally by the 4U TRANSFIX Card. These faults are related to local FMX equipment, to the receive 2 Mbps frame and the U interface. Faults Detected Consequential Action
Local FMX equipment fault

- Subassembly Fault* (S/assFlt) (subscriber shelf P3) (incorrect adaptation card or card out of slot) Forward Reaction: - Not applicable. Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - Remote power feed switch off for both ports, - U interface deactivation, - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via the common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card. .../...
Table 9-1 - Effects of Local Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-18
Faults Detected .../... Local FMX equipment fault - U Loss Of Signal(LoSU), U Los Of Synchronization (LSynU), U Activation Fault (UActF)
Forward Reaction: - None. Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - U interface remote power feed switched off for 2s and then restored. An activation is restarted, - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card. Forward Reaction: - Not applicable.
- Current limiter fault
Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - U interface deactivated, - Remote power feed switched off for 30 s, - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card.
Table 9-2 - Effects of Local Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-19
b) Remote Faults (detected by the remote subscriber unit) These faults are detected by the subscriber unit connected forward of the local FMX. Faults Detected V.110 FAL Fault and S. unit bit rate adaptation fault Consequential Action Forward Reaction: - Not applicable. Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card. Network Fault (NF) (bit c to 1 or unframed different from 0) Forward Reaction: - Transmission of FI to S. unit if S. unit bit rate is 48 kbps (for S. Unit bit rates < than 48 kpbs, there is no notification). Backward Reaction: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units. - "Fail" LED lit on card
Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error (TCompE)
Forward Reaction: - None. Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card.
Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF) (fault retransmitted to 4U TRANSFIX card via the EOC channel of the 2B1Q interface)
Forward Reaction: - Not applicable Backward Reaction: - No action on data and associated signalling, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "remote fault" indication.
Table 9-3 - Effects of Remote Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-20
Faults Detected .../... Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF)(fault retransmitted to 4U TRANSFIX card via the EOC channel of the 2B1Q interface) (cont.).
Consequential Action Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card
Subscriber Terminal Power Failure (TPwrF) (fault retransmitted from S. unit via bit PS1 in frame U)
Forward Reaction: - U port activated on U interface only activation mode. Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card.
Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF)
Forward Reaction: - Notification message to remote S. unit. Backward Reaction: - Data and related channel associated signalling are set to "1" in the network direction, - Bit c, associated with the link is sent in the form of a frame with the "local fault" indication. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card Forward and Backward reactions: - None. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units. - "Fail" LED lit on card
Subscriber Terminal Communication Failure (TCommF)
Table 9-4 - Effects of Remote Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-21
c) Extension Faults (detected by the extension) These faults are detected by the equipment connected backward from the local FMX and transmitted via bit c. Faults Detected Extension remote faults (c11), extension subscriber unavailability (c13), 220 V power feed fault of extension subscriber equipment(c12) and extension local power feed failure (c10). Consequential Action Forward Reaction: - Notification message to remote S. unit. Backward Reaction: - Not applicable. Equipment Reaction: - Transmission of FI to supervision and management system via common equipment units, - "Fail" LED lit on card.
Table 9-5 - Effects of Extension Faults
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-22
9.3.3.3 - Port Activation/Deactivation

Each port can be individually activated or deactivated on specific configuration via the supervision and management system. "Activated" status is the status required for the port to be used, that is that line activation and alarm monitoring are possible. NOTE: When a port is in "deactivated" status, maintenance operations and fault indications are inhibited.
9.3.3.4 - Loopbacks
The 4U TRANSFIX card offers the following two loopback facilities: - "TRANSMIC" type loopbacks, - loopbacks with or without integrated tests specific to the U interface called "U LINE" loopbacks. "TRANSMIC" loop control orders are issued by: - frame c (orders from the network or extension equipment), - EOC channel used in data mode, - or the supervision and management system. The loop control orders specific to the U interface are exclusively issued by the local supervision and management system.
y"TRANSMIC" Loops
The "TRANSMIC" loopbacks shown in Figure 9-3 and described in sub-section 9.4.1, are the following: line loopback on REGAT S. unit activated by: y a subscriber-originated loop remote control (circuit 141 of the V.24 interface), y switch on the S. unit, equipment loopback (loop 2) of the REGAT S. Unit activated by: a network or customer-originated loop 2 remote control (frame "c"; C4 = 0 or 1 and C5 = 0), y local supervision and management system-originated loop 2 control order, y remote supervision and management system-originated loop 2 control order, y switch on the remote S. unit or the extension remote S. unit (this type of loopback activation is handled like a customer-originated loop 2 remote control), y a remote extension subscriber-originated loop 2 remote control (circuit 140 of the V.24 interface),
FMX equipment loopback (loop 3) activated by: y a local supervision and management system-originated loop 3 control order, y a network (frame "c"; C4 = 1 and C6 = 0) or extension (supervision and management system)-originated loop 3 remote control if the extension of the St Mux type.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-23
yLoopbacks Specific to U Interface (U LINE loopback)

The "U LINE" loopbacks are as follows: - equipment U1 loopback, - repeater U1A loopback, - partial U2 loopback (channels B1 and B2). These loopbacks comply with the C32-11 standard. Sub-section 9.4.1. gives the description of their implementation and an illustration thereof. These loopbacks may be accompanied by an automatic line test procedure (see 9.3.3.6).
9.3.3.5 - Line Tests

For each port, a supervision and management system control order provides the connection of subscriber line wires on a metallic test bus (the port is disconnected from the line which is tested). This control order is only authorized if the metallic test bus is not already being used by the subscriber line of another port or another FMX card. Line testing implementation is described in sub-section 9.4.2.
9.3.3.6 - Automatic Line Test

Loopbacks specific to the U interface (U LINE Loopback) may be accompanied by an automatic line test procedure. The automatic line test procedure, which lasts 60 seconds, is performed by injecting a pseudo15 random sequence (2 - 1) in the 2 B channels (test at 128 kpbs). The automatic line test procedure is configured using the supervision and management system. During the test procedure, the 4U TRANSFIX card synchronizes itself on the received sequence and counts the errors detected on this sequence. At the end of the test procedure, and depending on the number of errors detected, a message is sent to the common equipment units for retransmission to the supervision and management system. The 4U TRANSFIX card can only run one line test procedure at a time. The procedure to set up the test is as follows: complete deactivation of line, reactivation of line with loopback control order, upon loopback acknowledgement reception, transmission of test sequence, at the end of the test, the line is deactivated again and restored to normal operation. When the port operates with no remote power feed, the test at the level of the repeater is not possible.
NOTE:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-24
9.3.3.7 -
Supervision and Management System Control Order Management
Loopback control orders and line test control orders issued by the supervision and management system are automatically cancelled during the following operations: - configuration parameter modification, - card switch off and removal. This management concerns each interface independently.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-25
FMX 1 REGAT 1 V24/V11V10, S. UNIT

X24/V11 int. V24/V28
FMX 2
2M 2M
4U Transfix
4U Transfix Loop 3
(IT data + Sig a, b and d)
REGAT 2 S. UNIT V24/V11V10,

Loop2 (sub/path)
U Line
U Line
X24/V11 int. V24/V28
Line loop
U Int.
Loop 2 ((Lp2(sub/path))
U Int.
NETWORK
U Int.
Line loop
Loop 3
(IT data + Sig a, b and d)
(Remote)
(Remote extension) (Extension)
(Local)
Loop 3 local unit
local loop 3 control order (supervision and management system) by local unit or network-originated loop 3 remotecontrol (frame c, bit 4 and 6) or extension (supervision and management system) if the extension is of the St Mux type. local loop 2 control order (supervision and management system) by local unit or network or customer-originated loop 2 remote control (frame c, bits 4 and 5), extension (supervision and management system) or extension subscriber or manual order on remote or remote extension. NOTE: For the low bit rate S. unit, this loop may be set up on the 64 kbps circuit and on the subscriber rate. For the medium and high bit rate S. unit, only the subscriber rate is available.
Loop 2 (sub/circuit) extension
Line Loop
Subscriber-originated loop 3 remote control or manual control from remote unit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-26
9.4 - Maintenance
On the 4U TRANSFIX card, maintenance operations are organized on a priority basis with the following in decreasing order: supervision and management system locally controlled maintenance operations, maintenance operations controlled by a network-originated frame "c". NOTE: Only the highest priority maintenance operation is set up.
S. unit loopback priority in decreasing order are the following: supervision and management system locally controlled loop control orders, network-originated frame "c" controlled loop control orders, subscriber-originated loop control orders controlled by frame c relayed by the EOC channel or by keys located on the S. unit front panel or transmitted by the V.110 frame (low bit rate S. unit only), NOTE: The first control order detected is performed.
subscriber-controlled loop control orders (circuits 140 and 141). When a priority loop takes precedence over another loop, this loop is not cancelled but only masked. When the loop with highest priority is cancelled, the initial loop will be set up again if the control order persists.
NOTE:
9.4.1 - Loopback Application

The following loopbacks are available on the 4U TRANSFIX card (see Figure 9-3): line loopback on S. unit: by subscriber remote-control or switch on S. unit, equipment loopback of S. unit: loop 2 by loop 2 control order received from the local supervision and management system, by network - or customer-originated loop 2 remote control, supervision and management system of the extension or extension subscriber or by a switch on the remote S. unit or remote S. unit of the extension, FMX equipment loopback: loop 3 by a loop 3 control order received from the local supervision and management system or by a network-originated loop 3 remote control ore supervision and management system of the extension if the extension is of the St Mux type, loopbacks applied to U1 equipment, U1A repeater and partial U2 (B1 and B2) of the U interface via a control order received from the local supervision and management system. NOTE: These loopbacks may be accompanied by an automatic line test procedure (see 9.3.3.6).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-27
Line Loopback on REGAT S. unit

Data = Sig a = Sig b = 1 (whatever the bit rate) SA = SB = X =1 (according to bit rate) E4, E5, E6 =Remote Loop 2 of the extension (according to bit rate) Frame "c" (C4,C5 =Remote Loop 2 of the extension ) (according to bit rate)
Data = Sig a = Sig b = 1 (whatever the bit rate) SA = SB = X =1 (according to bit rate) E4, E5, E6 =Remote Loop 2C extension remote unit (according to bit rate) V24/V28 FMX V24/V11 (V10) REGAT S. UNIT
141 105 108 103
NETWORK
RECEPTION M U L T I P L E X
S U B S C R I B E R
X24/V11
T G R I 106 104 107 109 142 at "0"
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
TRANSMISSION (Remote) (local unit)

Extension remote loopback acknowledgement: Bit rate less than or equal to 38,4 kbit/s : bits E of the V.110 frame Bit rate greater than 38,4 kbit/s : frame "c" (C8 = 0)
SWITCH MANUAL ORDER
Application
a. By switch
On the REGAT S. Unit, press once on the low position "Loop/Reset" of the switch; the "LINE" LED flashes. For a 2-interface medium and high bit rate S. unit, wait until LED L1 or L2 is lit to select the interface subject to loopback. Press on the high "VAL" position of the switch to activate the control order; the LINE LED remains lit.
b. By subscriber remote control

ITU-T control order
y Set circuit 141 to status "0" (closed).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-28
Effects The signals received from the line at the receive end of the interface (103 or T) are sent forward on the line at the transmit end of the interface (104 or R). Loopback is applied to the whole datastream. Loopback is applied to the control signals (105/109 and 108/107) which operate normally. The transmit timing clock is always provided by timing circuits 114/115 (synchronous mode of low bit rate S. units) or S/B. NOTE: For low bit rate S. unit asynchronous mode, interchange circuits 114 and 115 are set to "1".
In V.24/V11 (V.10) or V.24/V.28 operation: when via configuration, at least one of the two circuits 107 or 108 is not used, circuit 107 is set to status "0" (closed), circuit 142 is set to "0 (closed) to denote maintenance status, circuit 106 operates normally in response to circuit 105, circuit 109 is set to status "1" (open) to lock circuit 104 in status "1".
V.110 frame data, signalling bits S and X of the V.110 frame when they are used (low bit rate S. unit) and signalling sent over channel D of the U interface are all set to "1" in the network direction. The loop 2 remote control order which applies the equipment loopback on the remote extension S. unit is performed via the network and extension: by bits E4, E5 and E6 of the V.110 frame when the link rate is 38.4 kbps (this action is performed by the remote S. unit), by frame "c" (bits C4 = C5 = 0) (this action is performed by the local FMX). when link rate is > 38.4 kbps
The equipment loopback of the remote extension S. unit is acknowledged in exactly the same way (bits E of the V.110 frame when link rate is 38.4 kbps, bit 8 (C8 = 0) when the link rate is > 38.4 kbit/s). The "Mntce" LEDs of the local and extension FMX is lit. Whatever the implementation, the "Loops" and "Test" LEDs of the REGAT S. unit are lit.
Removal
y Implementation by switch:
On the REGAT S. unit, press on the "Loop/Reset" lower position of the switch to cancel loopback. ITU-T control order
y Implementation by subscriber remote control:

-
y Set circuit 141 to status "1" (open).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-29
Equipment Loopback at Subscriber Rate (REGAT S. Unit)

Loop acknowledgement: bits E or frame "c" (according rate)
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
NETWORK S U B S C R I B E R
V24/V28 V24/V11/V10
104 = 106 = 107 = 109 = "1" 142 = "0"
V.110 FRAMER Loop 2 subscriber
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
M U L T I P L E X
X24/V11
I = "1" R set
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL, EXTENSION SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, REMOTE SWITCH OF THE EXTENSION OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER
(Remote)
(local unit)
Loop order:: bits E or frame "c" (according to bite rate)
SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. If loopback is applied via the local supervision and management system (this control order is transmitted by the EOC channel in the data mode). Loopback acknowledgement is performed: by bits E of the V.110 frame when (this operation is performed by the S. unit), link rate is 38.4 kbps
NOTE:
by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) when link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
If loopback is applied via the extension supervision and management system and if link rate is > 38.4 kbps (this control order is transmitted via the network, frame "c" (bits C4 = 0 or 1 and C5 = 0), then by the EOC channel in the data mode). Loopback acknowledgement is performed by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0).
NOTE:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-30
b. By the network
Bit rate > 38.4 kbps Reception of a Loop 2 remote control order sent by frame "c" (bits C4 = 0 or 1 et C5 = 0) from the network and controlled by network equipment and sent onward via the EOC channel between the local multiplexer and the remote S. unit. Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 in frame "c" (C8 = 0) (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
Bit rate 38.4 kbps Reception of a loop 2 "special" remote control order sent by frame "c" (bits C4 = C5 = 0) from the network and controlled by network equipment and sent onward via the EOC channel between the local multiplexer and the remote S. unit. Loopback acknowledgement is made by: bits E of the V.110 frame (this operation is performed by the S. unit), and bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
c. By the switch
y REGAT S. unit (remote)

On the REGAT S. unit, press twice on the Loop/reset lower position of the switch which causes the EQUIP LED to flash. For a 2 interface medium and high rate S. unit, wait until the L1 or L2 LED is lit to select the interface subject to loopback. Press on the upper position "ACCETP" of the switch to make the order effective; the "EQUIP" LED remains lit. Loopback acknowledgement is made by: bits E of the V.110 frame when (this operation is performed by the S. unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) when (this operation is performed by the local FMX). link link rate rate is is > 38.4 38.4 kbps kbit/s
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-31
y REGAT S. unit (remote extension)

On the REGAT S. unit, press twice on the low position Loop/reset of the switch which causes the EXTN LED to flash. For a 2-interface medium and high rate S. unit, wait until LED L1 or L2 is lit before selecting the interface subject to loopback. Press on the upper position "ACCEPT" of the switch to make the order effective, the "EXTN" LED remains lit. This control order is transmitted: by bits E of the V.110 frame when (this operation is performed by the S. unit), link rate is 38.4 kbps
by bits C4 and C5 of frame "c" (C4 = C5 = 0) when link rate is > 38.4 kbit/s (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
Loopback acknowledgement is made by: bits E of the V.110 frame when (this operation is performed by the S. unit), bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) when (this operation is performed by the local FMX). link link rate rate is is > 38.4 38.4 kbps kbit/s
d. By Extension Subscriber Remote Control

ITU-T control order sets circuit 140 to "0" status (closed).
This control order is managed like the previous control order generated by the remote extension S. Unit.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-32
Effects The signals transmitted by the common equipment unit at the transmit end of the interface (data and signalling) are rerouted to the received end of the interface; loopback is applied after the V.110 framers of the S. unit. The local and remote FMX LEDS are lit for "Mntce". Whatever the implementation, the "Loop" and "TEST" LEDs of the REGAT S. unit are respectively lit and unlit. The line is loaded at the received end.
yV.24/V.11 (V.10)or V.24/V.28 Mode of Operation

Timing circuits 114/115 are always transmitted. NOTE: For the low bit rate S. Unit asynchronous mode, interchange circuits 114 and 115 are set to "1".
At the transmit end, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to status "1" (open) and circuit 142 is set to closed status (binary "0") to denote maintenance status. Circuits 140 and 141 are deactivated.
yX.24/V.11 Mode of Operation

The S/B timing circuits are always transmitted. At the transmit end, circuit I is set to "1" (open) and circuit R is in the status programmed on card configuration ("1" or "0").
y Particular Effects Intrinsic to Implementation by Other End S. unit (Loopback not

applied) On receiving loopback acknowledgement: the "TEST" LED of the extension remote S. unit lights, circuit 142 is set to closed status (binary "0") to denote maintenance status.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-33
Removal
y Switch implementation (remote REGAT S. unit ore remote extension).

On the REGAT S. Unit (remote or remote extension) press the lower position Loop/reset to remove loopback.
y Supervision and Management System implementation (local unit or remote).

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
y Network implementation.
Information transmitted by the network.
y Implementation by extension subscriber remote-control.

ITU-T control order. Sets circuit 140 to status "1" (open).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-34
Equipment Loopback on 64 Kbps Circuit (specific to low rate REGAT S. unit)
Loo p a cknowle dgement frame "c"
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
NETWORK
S U B S C R I B E R
V24/V28 V24/V11/V10
104 = 10 6 = 107 = 10 9 = "1 " 142 = "0"
V.110 FRAMER
I N T E R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL
X24/V11
I = "1" R s et
(Remote)
(local unit)
Loo p o rder:: frame "c"
a. By local supervision and management system

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) whatever the link rate (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
b. By the network
Reception of a Loop 2 remote control order via frame "c" (bits C4 = 1 and C5 = 0) from the network and controlled by network equipment. It is sent onward by the EOC Channel between the local multiplexer and remote S. unit. Loopback acknowledgement is made by bit 8 of frame "c" (C8 = 0) whatever the link rate (this operation is performed by the local FMX).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-35
Effects the entire channel B and the signalling carried over channel D are submitted to a loopback upstream from the V.110 frame. The local and remote FMX LEDs are lit for "Mntce". Whatever the implementation, the Loop and TEST LEDs of the REGAT S. unit are respectively lit and unlit. The line is loaded at the receive end. Timing circuits 114/115 are always transmitted. NOTE: For the low bit rate S. Unit asynchronous mode, interchange circuits 114 and 115 are set to "1".
At the transmit end, circuits 104, 106, 107 and 109 are set to status "1" (open) and circuit 142 is set to closed status (binary "0") to denote maintenance status. Circuits 140 and 141 are deactivated.
Removal
y Supervision and Management System implementation (local unit or remote).

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-36
Logic Equipment Loopback (FMX)
REGAT S. UNIT
FMX
Data TSs + (Sig a, b and d)
NETWORK
I N T E U R F A C E
U line
I N T E U R F A C E
M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK REMOTE CONTROL or EXTENSION SUPERVISION AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
(local unit)
Application

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. If application is performed by the extension supervision and management system (this control order is transmitted via bits C4 and C6 (C4 = 1, C6 = 0) of frame "c" of the network). The loopback function applied by the extension is only available if the extension is of the St Mux type.
NOTE:
b. By the network
Reception of a loop 3 remote control order transmitted via bits C4 and C6 (C4 = 1, C6 = 0) of frame "c" from the network.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-37
Effects The data and channel-associated signalling are looped back to the multiplex side. Bit 8 (C8 = 0) of frame "c" transmits the "loop control acknowledgement" indication to denote that loopback has been activated. The data and signalling transmitted to the S. unit are set to "1". The equipment loopback indication is transmitted to the common equipment units. The local FMX controls an equipment loopback on a 64 Kbps circuit (rate 38. kbps) or the subscriber bit rate (rate > 38.4 kbps) of the remote S. Unit via the EOC channel in the data mode. Besides, channels B and D sent to the remote S. unit are set to "1". The "Mntce" LEDs of the local and extension FMX are lit.
Removal
y Supervision and Management System implementation (local or extension).

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-38
U Line Loopback
FMX (local UNIT) 2W 2B1Q U interface
Rgie REGAT (distant)
repeater (optionnal)
loop U1A
U interface V24/V11/V10, X24/V11 intfc, or V24/V28
Loop U1 2M
Loop U2 (B1, B2)
"Mntce" LED: lit C8 = 0
Loop U1A : 2B + D channel loopback Loop U2 (B1, B2): B1+B2 channel loopback
Implementation This type of loopback is applied exclusively via the local supervision and management system. Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. NOTE: These loopbacks may be accompanied by an automatic line test procedure (see 9.3.3.6).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-39
Effects Loopbacks comply with standard C32-11. Loopback controls are sent via the EOC channel in the message mode. The table below shows the characteristics of the various U-interface-specific loopbacks.
Loop
Location
Loop Signals
Testable Channels
2B+D + EOC
Loopback Type
U1
FMX (local)
Complete loop 2B+D+CL+SW * Complete loop 2B+D+CL+SW * Partial Loop
Not applicable **
U1A
Regenerative Repeater S. unit (remote)
2B+D
Not applicable **
U2.1 & 2
B1+B2
Transparent
* frame synchronization word ** the U interface is deactivated in this type of loopback The loopbacks are applied as close to the U interface as possible (on the 4U TRANSFIX card for U1 loopback and in the regenerative repeater as close as possible to the U interface located S. unit side for U1A loopback). The U1, U1A and UZ loopback control orders will previously deactivate the U interface if it is activated. Bit c transmits the "loop control acknowledgement" indicate to denote a loopback activation. If a fault persists upstream from the loopback, the corresponding indication is transmitted in frame of bit c. Partial loops U2 (B1 and B2) are controlled jointly (sequentially one after another) and performed in the S. unit simultaneously on both channels (B1 and B2). NOTE: The loops are accompanied by the S. unit power feed test (bit PS1) whose result(value of bit at time of test) is systematically transmitted to the common equipment units of the FMX (PS1 = 220 V normal power and PS1 = 0 220 V default power)
The "Mntce" LED of the local FMX is lit.
Removal Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. Remote Loopback Control Order Forward Transmission The 4U TRANSFIX card provides forward transmission of loopback control orders which are not intended by converting messages from the 2 Mbps frame into messages for transmission in the maintenance channel EOC and conversely.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-40
9.4.2 - Line Testing

Application Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Fail
Mntce
Busy
Power
Effects Line test control order causes the line to be deactivated and remote power feed to be switched off. When the line is connected to the metallic test bus, an AIS is transmitted to the network via the 2 Mbps frame to disable transmission on the equipment connected to the extension. The "Mntce" LED is lit.
Removal Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-41

Several types of faults and errors are detected: card level faults and errors: . . . . . . Card out (C.Out), Fuse Fault (FusFlt), Watchdog (Wdg), Card Different (C.Dif.), Subassembly Fault (S/assFlt), Selftest Fault (S/test),
"port" level faults: * * * * * * * * * . * * * * * * . U Loss oSignal (LoSU), U Loss of Synchronization (LSynU), U Activation Fault (UActF), Subscriber Terminal Communications Failure (TCommF), Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF), Remote Signalling Remote Failure (RSRF), Subscriber Terminal Power Failure (TPwrF), Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error (TCompE), Current Limiter Fault (LimitF), S. unit level faults: V110 Frame Alignment Loss (V110), Rate Adaptation Fault (TreFlt), Local Extension failure (LEF), Remote Extension Failure (REF), Remote Extension Modem Power Failure (REMPF), Remote Extension Modem unavailable (LSF), Network Fault (NF):
If the card (or interface) is not masked, the faults and errors are detected by the common equipment units and an alarm is initiated: notification to CT and IONOS, major or minor alarm depending on configuration. "Port" level faults cause the "Fail" LED to light briefly or continuously on the 4U TRANSFIX card front panel. The fault detected is then accessible via the supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-42
9.4.3.2 - Locating a Fault Displayed via the "Fail" LED

Fault locating is performed using the Supervision and management system.
9.4.3.3 - Cause of Fault

The table below lists the faults displayed on the supervision and management system along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial action. Faults Detected Card out (C.out) U Loss of Signal (LoSU), U Loss of Synchronization (LSynU) or U Activation Fault (UActF), Probable Cause Interface card missing or not available for the card U interface failure detection: - local unit-to-connected (remote) equipment link failure - remote equipment failure - U interface failure Fault detected by remote equipment: - S. Unit type parameter configuration (low or medium and high rate) does not correspond to the S. unit physically connected to the interface. Fault detected on the U interface end: - local remote unit link fault - remote unit fault - U interface fault Fault detected on U interface end: - local remote unit link failure Fault detected by remote unit: - remote unit fault Fault detected by remote unit: - remote unit fault - U interface fault - remote local link fault No local action Solution Fit appropriate interface card Check connection cable interface-side
Subscriber Terminal Compatibility Error (TCompE),
Subscriber Terminal Communications Failure (TCommF),
Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF), V110 Frame Alignment Loss (V110) Remote Signalling Local Failure (RSLF)
No local action
No local action
No local action
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-43
Faults Detected .../... Current limiter
Probable Cause
Solution
Temporary short circuit following a problem on the port connecting cables Short circuit on the line Excess consumption on defective equipment at end of line Current limiter fault
The fault disappears by itself after 30 s Check the line (try the test transfer function) Check the end-of-line equipment Change the card Check mains connection of remote unit Check rate configuration of each S. unit
Subscriber Terminal Power Failure (TPwrF) Rate Adaptation Fault (TreFlt),
Fault detected by remote unit: - remote unit fault Fault detected by remote unit: - the rate configuration of the remote S. unit does not correspond to the that of the other end. Fault detected by the extension: - extension local unit fault Fault detected by the extension: - extension remote unit fault Fault detected by the remote unit: - extension remote unit power failure Fault detected by remote unit: - extension remote unit unavailability fault
Local Extension failure (LEF), Remote Extension Failure (REF) Remote Extension Modem Power Failure (REMPF) Remote Extension Modem unavailable (LSF)
No local action
No local action
No local action
No local action

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. Configurable Parameters Card interfaces can be configured independently via the supervision and management system. Parameter consistency is managed by the supervision and management system. Configuration parameters are: interface activation/deactivation, configuration with or without remote power feed, configuration with or without repeater, S. unit type (low, medium and high rate), line test (with or without 128 automatic).
S. unit parameters are configured at the level of the S. unit entity.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page-9-44
SECTION 10 6-EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-2
10 - EXCHAN CARD
CONTENTS
Pages
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES
10-3 10-4 10-4
10.1 - Presentation 10.2 - Description 10.3 - Start-up and Operation 10.3.1 - Configuration 10.3.2 - Initialization 10.3.3 - Utilization 10.3.3.1 - General 10.3.3.2 - Exchange-to-Extension Operation 10.3.3.3 - Loopbacks 10.4 - Maintenance 10.4.1 - Loopback Application 10.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 10.4.2.1 - Alarm Description 10.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the Fail LED 10.4.2.3 - Cause of a Fault 10.5 - User Software
10-7 10-9 10-10 10-10 10-11 10-12 10-12 10-12 10-17 10-18 10-18 10-22 10-22 10-22 10-23 10-23
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-3
10 - EXCHAN CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 10-1 - Exchange-to-Extension Connection using one Exchan Card Port Figure 10-2 - Front Panel Figure 10-3 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 10-1 - Effects of Exchan Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 10-2 - Effects of Exchange Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 10-3 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-4
10 - EXCHAN CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-5
10 - EXCHAN CARD
NETWORK
EXCHANGE
Exchan card
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
Subscr card
Subscriber extension
Exchange card FMX FMX
Subscriber card
Figure 10-1 - Exchange-to-Extension Connection using one Exchan Card Port
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-6
10 - EXCHAN CARD
10.1 - Presentation
The Exchange Card, "Exchan", provides connection of six telephone channels to a Central Office exchange switch or a PABX over short distances (about 2 km). The six channel ports are used in conjunction with six corresponding subscriber extension ports supported by the Subscriber Card or 6 channel ports of the Subscriber Z type originating from the Signalling Interface Unit (SIU) equipment, all of which are transmitted through the TRANSMIC network to allow subscriber extension connection to the exchange. The Exchan card can, depending on the card's code number, be used to: - retransmit messages (LF data) from the exchange during the call phase, and in particular the "calling line identification in call phase" service, - detect 12 kHz meter pulse signals, - detec 16 kHz meter pulse signals. The Exchan Card supports six independent telephone interfaces with Z input impedance. Figure 10-1 shows the exchange/Exchan Card and subscriber extension /Subscr Card connections through the TRANSMIC network. Exchan Carch configuration and control access is performed via the Supervision and Management System which may be: a Craft terminal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the GIE or GIE - P front panel of the equipment (or the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), or the Remote Management System (RMS) which is the IONOS Network Management System. The terms below as used in this Technical have the following meanings: reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
Reminder:
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-7
10 - EXCHAN CARD
EXCHAN
Green LED
Fail
Red LED Yellow LED
Mntce
Busy
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-8
10 - EXCHAN CARD
10.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the Exchan Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 10-2): three LEDs for all six Card ports: Red "Fail" LED Fail: detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c), or -5V failure, or connection error (in the case of a subscriber shelf), or extension failure (information transmitted via bits a and b for cards using the 2-bit signalling code). Maintenance: equipment loopback, remote controlled equipment loopback, loopback or loopback acknowledgement receipt is active when the LED is lit. A port is used for each call from the extension or the exchange (line busy). Not used.
Green Busy LED 25-way connector
Fuses:
F1, F101, F102, F201, F202, F301, F302, F401, F402, F501, F502, F601, F602, F701, F702.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-9
10 - EXCHAN CARD

The Exchan Card contains no link or switch option. During first configuration and subsequent upgrades, operating configuration parameters may be programmed using the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-10
10 - EXCHAN CARD
The Exchan Card is initialized as follows: on power-up, initialization followed by self-test, configuration with the user terminal if the standard (default) configuration parameters are not those desired. On power up, the Card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are presented via front panel LEDs as follows: a. LEDs remain unlit. Check the fuse and the power converter. b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed. c. Interface self-test (COMBO codec read and write). If no fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a fault is detected, the Fail LED flashes: replace the Card. On first start-up the interfaces have the following configuration (default parameters): interface impedance: . Input Z: Z reference . Line Z: 600 ### standard transmission level: . Card input level: -6 dBr, . Card output level: -1 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-11
10 - EXCHAN CARD

The Exchan Card must be used when the BMX 264 Cross-connect multiplex operates in TRANSMIC 2G mode. The Exchan Card operates under control of bits a and b (or a only depending on the signalling code used) from the four-timeslot 16 signalling bits. Therefore, unused timeslots and card-out-ofrack timeslots must be configured via common equipment units to subscriber signalling idle code (1 1 0 1 for L1 code and 0 1 0 1 for 1-bit and 2-bit codes) for the card slot of interest. This prevents generation of false (busy, fault) indications by the Exchan Card due to channels not being connected to the multiplex. The Exchan Card receives control access instructions from the Supervision and Management System via the common equipment units; these control access instructions, which are individualized for each port and concern port impedance and transmission level selection, are saved by the common equipment. The Exchan Card controls frame "c" and channel-associated signalling bit "d" is set to "1". Card control access is remote. Detected alarms, loopbacks in progress, and busy line conditions are presented visually via the Card front panel. Loopbacks may be applied via the user terminal or by remote control.
10.3.3.2 - Exchange-to-Extension Operation

This mode of operation provides connection of a telephone extension to a central office switch or a PABX. The exchange uses one channel from the Exchan Card. The telephone extension uses one channel from the Subscr Card in a far-end FMX (network extension), or one channel from the SIU equipment. The exchange FMX/subscriber FMX (or SIU equipment) assembly is viewed as a subscriber terminal by the exchange to which the assembly is connected. Signalling is transmitted via bits a and b (2-bit signalling code) or bit a (1-bit signalling code) from the four timeslot 16 signalling bits. The signalling code on the 2 Mbit/s datastream between the two BMXs or between the FMX and the SIU equipment, is the subscriber code whether 2 or 1-bit respectively without dialling pulse conversion (66/33). 2-bit signalling supports charge metering and battery reversal pulses. The card controls frame "c". The unused signalling bit d is set to "1".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-12
10 - EXCHAN CARD
For each interface, the port impedance Z and transmission plan (or level) can be configured as follows: Impedance Z and transmission level can be configured on each individual interface as follows: interface impedance: . . . . Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: Z reference, Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: 600 Ohm, Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: Z reference, Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: 600 Ohm,
transmission level: . standard level: * input level: -6 dBr * output level: -1 dBr short-distance transmission distance for improved reference equivalent * input level: -4 dBr * output level: -3 dBr . specific input and output levels may be adjusted in 0.5 dBr steps: * input level adjustment range -2 dBr to -7.5 dBr, * output level adjustment range 0 dBr to -5 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-13
10 - EXCHAN CARD
Faults No fault is detected from the exchange. Faults identified are relative to the multiplex signal (in the network-to-exchange direction). Note: The words "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary.
Faults detected Network Failure (NF)
Consequential actions Forward reaction (to exchange). Signalling analysis is aborted (after a 2 msec timeout) after fault detection: signalling state changes are no longer detected; upon fault clearing, signalling analysis is immediately resumed. If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable) and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0). If the interface is engaged in the speech phase: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable) and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0). If the interface is in the ringing phase, the card waits for a ringing interrupt to perform the following action: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0).
Backward reaction (to network) Transmission of signalling bits a and b in the "0" state at the same time as the forward reaction, i.e. upon expiry of the timeout, if any. Equipment reaction "Fail" LED" lit.
Centralized supervisory and HHT messages
Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Table 10-1 - Effects of Exchan Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-14
10 - EXCHAN CARD
Faults detected Extension Fault (a = b = "0" > 2s) (Extension Fault)
Consequential actions Forward reaction (to automatic exchange) If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable) and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0). If the interface is engaged in the speech phase: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable) and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0). If the interface is in the ringing phase from the exchange, the card waits for a ringing interrupt to perform the following action: the interface is set to loop opening condition (unavailable and the unavailability code is sent (a = b = 0).
Backward reaction (to network) None Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. Centralized supervisory and HHT messages Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units. - 5 V Fault Forward reaction (to automatic exchange) None Backward reaction (to network) Transmission of signalling bits a and b set to "0" (extension fault message). Equipment reaction "Fail" LED lit. Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Table 10-2 - Effects of Exchange Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-15
10 - EXCHAN CARD
NETWORK EXCHANGE Loop 2b EXTENSION FMX b Exchange LOCAL FMX Subscriber
REMOTE OR EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER TELEPHONE EXTENSION
Loop2b
Local control (Supervision and Management System) or network-originated remote-control
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-16
10 - EXCHAN CARD
The Exchange Card offers various loopback facilities: loopbacks controlled by Supervision and Management System: . local equipment loopback (loop 2 b), network-originated loopback controlled by frame "c".
Loopbacks comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150; they are shown in and Figure 10-3 and their implementation is described in sub-section 10.4.1. Loopback control orders should not conflict with any other current loopback operation on the interface of interest (loopbacks are presented visually via the Mntce LED and may be listed via Supervision and Management System commands). Loopback may only be applied under Supervision and Management System control to an interface port which is not engaged in a call and in the absence of any incoming call (busy line condition indicated by the Busy LED). Loopbacks under Supervision and Management System control have priority over loopbacks from the network. A priority loopback releases any loopback of lesser priority applied earlier. Supervision and Management System loopback operations are lost in the event of a power failure, the Card being plugged out or the user terminal being disconnected.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-17
10 - EXCHAN CARD

The following loopbacks are available on the Exchan Card (see Figure 10-3): local equipment loopback: Loop 2c controlled by Supervision and Management System, Equipment loopback via reception of network-originated loop 2 remote control order transmitted via frame "c".
Furthermore, the card reacts on receipt of a loopback acknowledgement carried by frame "c".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-18
10 - EXCHAN CARD
Local equipment loopback control

EXCHANGE LOCAL UNIT NETWORK RECEPTION Bit "c" n relooped M U L T I P L E X Supervision and management system loopbackcontrol Fail Mntce Busy LOCAL UNIT
TRANSMISSION
Application
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. 5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2c.
Effects
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, and d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is not applied to bit c, which carries the message loop control order acknowledgement . The Mntce LED is lit. The receiving end of the line is loaded. No signal is transmitted by the interface. The channel interface is in the loop opening condition, and does not respond to the signals transmitted by the interface circuit at the connected exchange.
Removal
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. 5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-19
10 - EXCHAN CARD
Remote Control Equipment Loopback (complete interface only)
EXCHANGE
LOCAL UNIT NETWORK RECEPTION Bit "c" no relooped Fail Network remote-controlled loop 2 transmitted in the "c" frame from the network Mntce Busy LOCAL UNIT
TRANSMISSION
Application
Reception of a network remote-controlled loop 2 transmitted in the c frame from the network.
Effects
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signalling bits a, b, and d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is not applied to bit c, which carries the message loop control order acknowledgement . The Mntce LED is lit. The receiving end of the line is loaded. No signal is transmitted by the interface: The channel interface is in the loop closure condition, and does not respond to the signals transmitted by the subscriber interface at the connected exchange.
Removal
Information transmitted via the c frame. Detection of frame alignment loss causes the loop to be removed after a 0.5 sec timeout.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-20
10 - EXCHAN CARD
Loopback Acknowledgement Reception (complete interface only)

EXCHANGE LOCAL UNIT NETWORK RECEPTION Fail Reception of a loopback acknowledgement on frame "c" (bit 8) Mntce Busy LOCAL UNIT
TRANSMISSION
Application
Reception of a loopback acknowledgement on frame "c" (bit 8). This condition can occur when a loop 2 control order has been transmitted from an intermediate point on the network or when local loopback has been applied to the far-end card.
Effects
The Mntce LED is lit.
- The channel interface is in the loop opening condition and does not respond to the signals of the subscriber interface circuit of the connected exchange for as long loopback acknowledgement reception lasts.
Removal
End of loopback acknowledgement reception on frame "c" (bit 8).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-21
10 - EXCHAN CARD

Three types of faults and errors are detected: "Card" level faults and errors: . . . . . . . Card out (C.Out), Fuse Fault (FusFlt), Card different (C.Dif), Watchdog (Wdg), Selftest (S/test), - 5 V failure (-5V Fail), significant connection fault (S/assFlt) (adapter card out of rack or invalid) displayed to operator is the card is inserted in a subscriber type P3 shelf,
"Port" level faults: . Network Fault (NF), . Local Extension Failure (LEF),
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is notified to the Supervision and Management System: major or minor alarm depending on the selected configuration. Connection error, - 5 V failure and port level faults cause the Fail LED to light up on the 6-channel Exchange Card front panel. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected is then accessible via the Supervision and Management System.
10.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the Fail LED

This location is performed via the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-22
10 - EXCHAN CARD

Detected faults - 5 V Failure (-5V Fail) Connection error
Probable cause -5 V fuse fault Adapter card out of rack or not available for the card Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment
Solution Replace - 5 V/1.25A fuse (F 702) Fit appropriate interface card No local action
Network Fault (NF)
Local Extension Failure (LEF)
Fault detected by the extension:
No local action
10.5 - User Software

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. 5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
Card interfaces can be configured independently using the Supervision and Management System. Configuration parameters are: - connection type (remote extension or PABX connection), - choice of port impedance (Zinput/Zline = 600 ohms/Zref, Zref /600 ohms, Zref/Zref, 600 ohms/600 ohms), - transmission plan (standard transmission plan for short lines, enhancing telephonometry, or adjustable in 0.5 dB steps).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-23
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 10-24
SECTION 11 SUBSCRIBER CARD (SUBSCR)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-2
11 - SUBSCR CARD
CONTENTS
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 11.1 - Presentation 11.2 - Description 11.3 - Start-up and Operation 11.3.1 - Configuration 11.3.2 - Initialization 11.3.3 - Utilization 11.3.3.1 - General 11.3.3.2 - Exchange-to-Extension Operation 11.3.3.3 - Hotline Operation 11.3.3.4 - Port Activation and Deactivation 11.3.3.5 - Loopbacks 11.3.3.6 - Line Testing 11.4 - Maintenance 11.4.1 - Loopback Application 11.4.2 - Line Testing 11.4.3 - Alarm Analysis 11.4.3.1 - Alarm Description 11.4.3.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the Fail LED 11.4.3.3 - Cause of a Fault 11.5 - User Software Description
11-3 11-4 11-4 11-7 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-10 11-11 11-11 11-12 11-15 11-19 11-19 11-19 11-21 11-21 11-25 11-26 11-26 11-26 11-27 11-27
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-3
11 - SUBSCR CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 11.1 - Connection of an Exchange to Three Telephone Extensions Using One Subscr Card Port (telephone extension operation) Figure 11.2 - Hotline Connection of Two Subscriber Extensions Each Using One Subsc Card Port (Hotline operation) Figure 11.3 - Front Panel Figure 11.4 - Loopback Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 11.1 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 11.2 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 11.3 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Hotline Operation Table 11.4 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Hotline Operation Table 11.5 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-4
11 - SUBSCR CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-5
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Telephone extension Subscr card (6 access) Subscriber channel
NETWORK
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
Telephone extension
Exchan or Exch12 card (6 or 12 access) Exchange channel
EXCHANGE
Telephone extension
FMX
FMX
Figure 11.1 - Connection of an Exchange to Three Telephone Extensions Using One Subscr Card Port (telephone extension operation)
NETWORK
Telephone extension Subscriber channel
Subscr card ( access 6)
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
Subscr card ( access 6) Subscriber channel
Telephone extension
FMX
FMX
Figure 11.2 - Hotline Connection of Two Subscriber Extensions Each Using One Subsc Card Port (Hotline operation)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-6
11 - SUBSCR CARD
11.1 - Presentation
The Subscriber Card, "Subscr", provides for connection of six telephone channels to S63, T83, or Exchange battery telephone extensions over short distances (about 2km). Each channel may operate in association with: one subscriber channel transmitted through the TRANSMIC network to provide for connection of several telephone extensions (hotline mode), one exchange channel transmitted through the TRANSMIC network to provide connection of a central office switch or a PABX to telephone extensions (exchange-to-extension mode),
The Subscr Card supports six independent telephone interfaces with Z input impedance. Each interface provides access to three S63 extension sets interconnected in parallel to the telephone channel. In the telephone extension operation mode, the Subscriber Card provides message transmission (LF Data) during the call phase and in particular the calling line identification in call phase service. Figure 11.1 shows the connection of three telephone extensions supported by one channel/Subscr Card to an exchange/Exchan Card or Exch12 Card through the TRANSMIC network. Figure 11.2 shows a hotline connection between two telephone extensions/Subscr Cards equipment through the TRANSMIC network. Subscr Card configuration and control access is provided via a supervision and management system which may be: a craft terminal connected locally or remotely on the GIE or GIE - P card front panel of the equipment (or on the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), or the remote management system which is the IONOS Network Management System. The terms below as used in this Technical Manual have the following meanings:
-
Reminder:
reception direction: interface-to-common equipment direction, transmission direction: common equipment-to-interface direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-7
11 - SUBSCR CARD
SUBSCR
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
Fail
Mntce
Busy
Power
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-8
11 - SUBSCR CARD
11.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the Subscr Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 11.3):
-
Four LEDs for all six card ports: Red Fail LED Fail: detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c), or - 5V failure, or connection error (in the case of a subscriber shelf), or extension failure (information transmitted via bits a and b in the exchange-to-extension or hotline mode of operation with 2-bit signaling code), or line isolation failure (earth applied to one or two line wires), or voltage supply failure from the ring generator. Maintenance: equipment or extension loopback. When lit, the LED indicates loopback activation; or subscriber line connected to FMX test bus (line test function). A port is used for each call from the extension or the exchange (line busy). Power: at least one port is powered. Not used.
Yellow Mntce LED
Green Busy LED
Green Power LED

-
25-way connector
Fuses: F101, F201, F301, F401, F501, F502, F601, F701, F702: T 1,25A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-9
11 - SUBSCR CARD

The Subscr Card contains no link or switch option. During first configuration and subsequent upgrades, operating configuration parameters may be programmed using theSupervision and Management System.
The Subscr Card is initialized as follows:
-
on power-up, initialization followed by self-test, configuration with the user terminal if the standard (default) configuration parameters are not those desired, deactivation of unused ports with the user terminal.
On power up, the Card is initialized in various steps. The results of the various checks performed are presented via front panel LEDs as follows: a. LEDs remain unlit. Check the fuse and the power converter. b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed.
c. Interface self-test (COMBO codec read and write). If no fault is detected, self-test is
transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). If a fault is detected, the Fail LED flashes: replace the Card. On first start-up the interfaces have the following configuration (default parameters): -
exchange-to-extension operation, service access interface impedance: . Input Z: Z reference . Line Z: 600 standard transmission sub-section: . . Card input level: 0 dBr, Card output level: -7 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-10
11 - SUBSCR CARD

The Subscr Card must be used when the 2 Mbps FMX Cross-connect Multiplex (A2S or 2MU card) operates in G.704 mode with channel-associated signaling. The Subscr Card handles bits a and b of the four signaling bits of TS16. Therefore, unused timeslots and card-out-of-rack timeslots must be configured via common equipment units to a signaling idle code of the code used (0101 for the 2 bit codes) for the concerned slot. This prevents generation of false (busy, fault) indications by the Subscr card due to the channels not being connected to the mulitplex or on the respective card if inplugged. The Subscr card receives control orders from the supervision and management system via the common equipment units. These control orders which are individualized for each port and concern mode of operation, port impedance and the transmission level, are saved by the common equipment units. The Subscr card handles frame "c" and bit "d" of the channel-associated signaling to is set to "1". The card is operated in the exchange-to-extension or hotline mode. Detected alarms, loopbacks in progress, maintenance line testing, busy conditions, and the in service condition of at least one port are presented visually via the Card front panel. Loopbacks may be applied via the user terminal or by remote control. The user terminal also controls activation of maintenance line tests.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-11
11 - SUBSCR CARD

This mode of operation provides for connection of a telephone extension to a central office switch or a PABX. The telephone extension uses one channel from the Subscr Card. The exchange uses either one channel of the Exchan or Exch12 card in a far-end FMX (extension). The exchange FMX/subscriber FMX/telephone extension assembly is viewed as a subscriber terminal by the exchange to which the assembly is connected. Signaling is transmitted via bits a and b (2-bit signaling code) or bit a (1-bit signaling code) from the four timeslot 16 signaling bits. Signaling on the 2 Mbit/s datastream between both FMX Cross-connect Multiplexers is 1- or 2bit signaling subscriber code without dialling pulse conversion (66/33). 2-bit signaling supports charge metering and battery reversal (this function is accepted only for Subscr Cards with battery reversal capability). The Subscr Card provides frame c management. Unused signaling bit d is set to 1. Impedance Z and transmission level can be configured on each individual interface as follows:
-
interface impedance: . Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: Z reference, . Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: 600 Ohm, . Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: Z reference, . Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: 600 Ohm, transmission level: . standard level: * input level: 0 dBr * output level: -7 dBr . specific: input and output levels may be adjusted in 0.5 dBr steps: * input level adjustment range - 5 dBr to + 0 dBr, * output level adjustment range - 7.5 dBr to - 2 dBr.
The calling extension gets a busy tone from the interface to which it is connected if the latter is not available (in the event of a fault detection). Faults The only fault from the subscriber terminal detected is the line wire earthing failure. The faults and errors detected at the transmit end of the interface (to the subscriber) are the following: - Bit c activity (5 consecutive bits "c" set to "1"), - network fault ("c" = 1 or unframed different from "0"), - extension fault (a = b = 0). Furthermore, a ring generator voltage fault and a -5 V fuse fault are detectable internally by the Subscr Card. Consequential action is only undertaken on activated interfaces; it is up to the operator to check the validity of links set up.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-12
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Note:
The terms backward and forward are defined in the glossary. Faults detected Consequential actions Forward reaction (to the network) 10 seconds after detecting a fault, (fault confirmation) signaling bits a and b are transmitted as "0" (extension fault message). Backward reaction (to the subscriber) 10 seconds after detecting a fault, (fault confirmation), the port is deactivated (power switched off), the line is restored automatically when the fault disappears. Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Earth To Line Failure (EarthF)
Bit c activity: detection of five consecutive 1
Bit c activity always precedes a frame c event whether this concerns a loopback or network fault. This event has an effect on the telephone call. Bit c activity detection anticipates the reactions which would be undertaken on confirmation of the frame c event. Forward reaction (to the network) Ringing or metering conditions aborted within 2 msec. Respectively, return to idle or conversation condition. - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. Backward reaction (to the subscriber) Frame c event after the above activity: network fault, local fault or loopback Equipment reaction Frame c event after the above activity: network fault, local fault or loopback .../...
Table 11.1 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-13
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Faults detected .../... Network Fault (NF)
Forward reaction (to the subscriber) - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. Backward reaction (to exchange) Signaling bits a and b transmitted as "0" ("extension fault"). Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Local Extension Failure (LEF) (a = b = "0")
Forward reaction (to the network) - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. Backward reaction(to exchange) None Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Ring generator voltage Reaction to the subscriber failure or -5 V Failure (-5Vfail) None Reaction to exchange Transmission a = b = 0 ("extension fault" message) Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Table 11.2 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-14
11 - SUBSCR CARD
11.3.3.3 - Hotline Operation

This mode of operation provides hotline connection of two telephone extensions through the TRANSMIC network. At one end of the network, ther telephone extension uses one channel of the Subscr Card. At the far end, the other telephpne extension uses a Susbcr Card on the FMX Cross-connect Multiplexer (extension). Signaling is transmitted via bits a and b (2-bit signaling) from the four timeslot 16 signaling bits. On the 2 Mbit/s datastream between both FMX Cross-connect is the code subscriber without dialling pulse conversion (66/33). In hotline operation, the Subscr Card does not provide forward transmission of charge metering pulses. Loop DC detection is performed with a 100 ms timeout to prevent errors due to dialling pulses. The Subscr Card provides frame c management. Unused signaling bit d is set to "1". Impedance Z and transmission level can be configured on each individual interface as follows: interface impedance: Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: Z reference, . Input Z: Z reference and Line Z: 600 Ohm, . Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: Z reference, . Input Z: 600 Ohm and Line Z: 600 Ohm, transmission level: . standard level: * input level: 0 dBr * output level: -7 dBr specific: input and output levels may be adjusted in 0.5 dBr steps: * input level adjustment range - 5 dBr to + 0 dBr, * output level adjustment range - 7.5 dBr to - 2 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-15
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Ringing tone and busy tone from the interface connected to the calling extension
The calling extension gets the ringing tone if the called extension is in on-hook. The calling extension gets the busy tone under the following conditions: . . . the interface to the calling extension is unavailable (in the event of a fault detectionexcept line wire earthing), the called extension is in the off-hook condition or unavailable, the called extension has not gone off-hook after a 2 min timeout (the interface to the calling extension interrupts ringing tone code transmission); the calling interface only becomes available upon calling extension on-hook.
When one of the extensions goes on-hook, the other must also go on-hook. If not, the extension that did not go on-hook gets the busy tone during 10 s and the interface becomes unavailable (extension fault indication transmitted a = b = 0). Faults The only fault from the subscriber terminal detected is the line wire earthing failure. The faults and errors detected at the transmit end of the interface (to the subscriber) are the following: Bit c activity (5 consecutive bits "c" set to "1"), network fault ("c" = 1 or unframed different from "0"), extension fault (a = b = 0).
Furthermore, a ring generator voltage fault and a -5 V fuse fault are detectable internally by the Subscr card. Consequential action is only undertaken on activated interfaces; it is up to the operator to check the validity of links set up In particular, for hotline operation, deactivations must be performed at both ends.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-16
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Note: The terms backward and forward are defined in the glossary. Faults detected Earth To Line Failure (EarthF) Consequential actions Forward reaction (to the network) 10 seconds after detecting a fault (fault confirmation), signaling bits a and b are transmitted as "0" ("extension fault" message). Backward reaction (to the subscriber) 10 seconds after detecting a fault (confirmation of fault), the port is deactivated (power switched off), the line is restored automatically when the fault disappears for more than 10 seconds. Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units. Bit c activity: detection of five consecutive 1s Bit c activity always precedes a frame c event whether this concerns a loopback or network fault. This event has an effect on the telephone call. Bit c activity detection anticipates the reactions which would be undertaken on confirmation of the frame c event. Forward reaction (to the subscriber) Analysis of the signaling code is aborted after a 2 ms timeout: current condition aborted during fault and on switching to unavailable condition. - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. Backward reaction(to exchange) Transmission a = b = 0 ("extension fault" message) unless a loopback acknowledgement is received (in this case ab = 01) Equipment reaction Frame c event after the above activity: network fault, local fault or loopback. .../...
Table 11.3 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Hotline Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-17
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Faults detected .../... Network Fault (NF) (The network fault has priority over an extension fault if both types occur simultaneously)
Consequential actions Forward reaction (to the subscriber) Analysis of the signaling code is aborted after a 2 ms timeout: current condition aborted during fault and on switching to unavailable condition. - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. Backward reaction (to exchange) Transmission of bits a and b as "0" ("extension fault message) unless a loopback acknowledgement is received (in this case ab = 01). Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Local Extension Failure (LEF) Forward reaction (to the subscriber) (a=b="0") Analysis of the signaling code is aborted after a 2 ms timeout: current condition aborted during fault and on (The signaling code a = b = 0 is switching to unavailable state. an integral part of the - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected: subscriber code, it is a transient busy tone transmitted upon extension off-hook, condition used during certain - If the interface is in the ringing, answering, or speech phases of the call (dialling, phases: the busy tone is transmitted by the interface. clearing etc.). Its analysis as an alarm is linked to a time Backward reaction to exchange) criterion. In hotline operation, it None characterizes the unavailable condition (time it takes for two Equipment reaction Fail LED lit callers to on-hook). A 10Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units. second timeout, applied independently of the call phase, beyond which received condition a = b = 0 becomes an alarm has been retained.) Ring generator voltage failure or-5 V Failure (-5Vfail) (If the - 5 V and ring generator faults are simultaneous, only the - 5 V fault is detected). Reaction to the subscriber None Backward reaction (to exchange) Transmission of signaling bits a = b = 0 ("extension fault" message) Equipment reaction Fail LED lit Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Table 11.4 - Effects of Subscr Card Faults in Hotline Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-18
11 - SUBSCR CARD
11.3.3.4 - Port Activation and Deactivation

Line powering may be removed (deactivation) or restored (activation) on each individual interface port via the Supervision and Management System or to restore the power of the line (put into service). If an active interface is used for a call (busy line), confirmation is requested before deactivating it. When unlit, the Power LED indicates that all card ports are inactive. It is lit in any other case. Active/inactive interface conditions are saved in the event of a power supply failure or Card removal.
The Subscr Card offers various loopback facilities: loopbacks controlled by the supervision and management system, local equipment loopback (loop 2c), network-originated controlled by frame "c".
Loopbacks comply with the ITU-T recommendation X.150; they are shown in Figure 11.3 and their implementation is described in sub-section 11.4.1. Loopback control orders should not conflict with any other current loopback operation on the interface of interest (loopbacks are presented visually via the Mntce LED and may be listed viathe supervision and management system). Loopback may only be applied under supervison and management system control to an interface port which is not engaged in a call (busy line condition indicated by the Busy LED). Loopbacks under the supervision and management system control have priority over loopbacks from the network. A priority loopback releases any loopback of lesser priority applied earlier. Loopback operations under supervision and management system control are lost in the event of a power failure, the Card being plugged out disconnected by the supervision and management system.
11.3.3.6 - Line Testing

The subscriber line on each individual interface of the supervision and management system may be connected to a metallic test bus (the interface is disconnected from the line being tested). Control access can only be available if the metallic test bus is not already being used by the subscriber line on another interface. If the line is used by a call (line busy), confirmation is requested before the order can be initiated. Implementation of line testing is described in sub-section 11.4.2. Subscriber line testing on an interface is lost in the event of a power failure, the Card being plugged out being disconnected by the superivisonand managment system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-19
11 - SUBSCR CARD
EXTENSION
EXTENSION REMOTE UNIT OR SUBSCRIBER UNIT
BMX b Exchange channel
EXCHANGE
NETWORK Loop 2c TELEPHONE EXTENSION Subscriber channel LOCAL FMX BMX c
TELEPHONE EXTENSION Subscriber channel
Loop 2c
Supervision and management system control order or network-originated remote control.
Figure 11.4 - Loopback Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-20
11 - SUBSCR CARD

The following loopbacks are available on the Subscr Card (see Figure 11.4): local equipment loopback: loop 2c via supervision and management system control order, equipment loopback with the reception of a network-originated loop 2 remote control via frame c.
Furthermore, the card handles the reception of a loopback acknowledgement carried by frame "c".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-21
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Local equipment loopback control
TELEPHONE EXTENSION
LOCAL UNIT RECEPTION (Bit "c" not loopedback) M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK Loopback controlled by supervision and management system
LOCAL UNIT Fail Mntce Busy
TRANSMISSION
Power
Application
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2c.
Effects
-
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface Loopback is not applied to bit c, which carries the message loop control order acknowledgement. The Mntce LED is lit. The line is no longer powered. No signal is transmitted by the interface: upon going off-hook, no tone will be heard by the extension subscriber.
Removal
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-22
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Equipment loopback control order

TELEPHONE EXTENSION
LOCAL UNIT RECEPTION (Bit "c" not loopedback) RC Loopl 2 TRANSMISSION M U L T I P L E X
NETWORK
LOCAL UNIT Fail Mntce Busy Power
Network originated loop 2 remote control order transmitted by frame "c" from the network
Application
Reception of a network-originated Loop 2 remote control loopback order transmitted via frame c from the network.
Effects
The signals transmitted at the transmitting end of the interface (data and signaling bits a, b, d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. Loopback is not applied to bit c, which carries the message loop control order acknowledgement. The Mntce LED is lit. The line is no longer powered, and the interface transmits no signal; if the subscriber goes off-hook, nothing is heard.
Removal
Information transmitted via frame "c".
- Detection of a frame c alignment loss causes loopback to be removed after a 0.5 s timeout, and scanning of frame "c".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-23
11 - SUBSCR CARD
Loopback Acknowledgement Reception

TELEPHONE EXTENSION LOCAL UNIT
RECEPTION
LOCAL UNIT Fail Mntce Busy Power
Loopback acknowledgement transmission via frame "c" (bit 8)
TRANSMISSION
Application
Reception of a loopback acknowledgement carried by frame "c" (bit 8). This condition may occur when a loop 2 control order has been issued from an intermediate point on the network or when a local loopback has been applied to the far-end card.
Effects
The Mntce LED is lit. - The line is normally powered: if the subscriber off-hooks, the busy signal will be heard.
Removal
End of loopback acknowledgement reception by frame "c" (bit 8).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-24
11 - SUBSCR CARD
11.4.2 - Line Testing

Application - Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480. - If line testing is not already applied on another interface and after confirming whether the line is busy, line testing is applied: the line testing activation screen is displayed.
Supervision and management system control Fail Mntce Busy Power
Effects The interface port is deactivated. In the event of an incoming call from the network, the line is free, but does not answer. The Mntce LED is lit.
Suppression Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-25
11 - SUBSCR CARD

The types of faults and errors are detected: Card level faults and errors: . . . . . . . . card out of rack (C.Out), fuse failure (fuse + 5 V ; F701) (FusFlt), different card (C. Dif.), watchdog failure (Wdg), self-test (S/test), - 5 V fault (fuse - 5 V ; F702) (-5V Fail), connection fault (S/assFlt) (adapter card out of rack or invalid), significant and displayed to operator if card is inserted in a P3 subscriber type shelf ring generator voltage fault (50HzFail),
Port level failures: . . . network failure(NF), local extension failure (LEF), earth to line failure (EarthF).
If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is initiated:notification to craft terminal and remote management system, major or minor alarm depending on the selected configuration. Connection error, - 5 V failure, ring generator voltage failure and port level faults cause the Fail LED to light up on the Subscr Card front panel. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected is then accessible via the supervision and management system.
11.4.3.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the Fail LED

Fault locating is performed usingthe supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-26
11 - SUBSCR CARD

The following table lists the faults displayed via the user terminal, along with the corresponding probable causes and possible remedial actions. Detected faults - 5 V Failure (-5V Fail) Probable cause -5 V fuse fault Solution Replace - 5 V/1.25A fuse (F 702) Fit appropriate adapter card
Subassembly Fault *(S/assFlt) Adapter card out of rack or not available for the card (Subscriber shelf P3) Network Fault (NF) Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment . network-to-local equipment link failure Local Extension Failure (LEF) Earth To Line Failure (EarthF) Fault detected by the extension: Earth applied to one of the line wires Failure detected by the local equipment Subscr Card: - insufficiant call signal rms voltage, - or 53 V power loss
No local action
No local action Check the line
Ring generator voltage failure 50 Hz Failure (50HzFail)
Replace Subscr Card
Table 11.5 - Alarm Analysis

Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System User Manual No. 56814480.
Card ports may be configured independently by the supervison and management system. Configuration parameters are: mode of operation (exchange-to-extension, hotline), port service status, port impedance (Zinput/Zline = 600 ohms/Zref, Zref /600 ohms, Zref/Zref, 600 ohms/600 ohms),
transmission level (standard transmission level or adjustable in 0,5 dB steps.).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-27
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 11-28
SECTION 12 12- EXCHANGE CHANNEL CARD (EXCH12)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-2
12 - EXCH12 CARD
CONTENTS
Pages
CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES LIST OF TABLES 12.1 - Description 12.2 - Description 12.3 - Start-up and Operation 12.3.1 - Configuration 12.3.2 - Initialization 12.3.3 - Utilization 12.3.3.1 - General 12.3.3.2 - Exchange-to-Extension Operation 12.3.3.3 - Loopbacks 12.4 - Maintenance 12.4.1 - Loopback Application 12.4.2 - Alarm Analysis 12.4.2.1 - Alarm Description 12.4.2.2 - Locating a Fault Presented via the "Fail" LED 12.4.2.3 - Causes of a Fault 12.5 - User Software Description
12-3 12-4 12-4 12-7 12-9 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-17 12-18 12-18 12-20 12-20 12-20 12-21 12-21
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-3
12 - EXCH12 CARD
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 12-1 - Subscriber Extension-to-Exchange Connection using an Exch12 Card Figure 12-2 - Front Panel Figure 12-3 - Loop Analysis
LIST OF TABLES
Table 12-1 - Effects of Exch12 Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 12-2 - Effects of Exch12 Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation Table 12-3 - Alarm Analysis
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-4
12 - EXCH12 CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-5
12 - EXCH12 CARD
NETWORK
Subscr card (6 access) Subscriber card
EXCHANGE Exchange card
Exch12 card (12 access)
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
FMX
Subscr card (6 access) Subscriber card FMX
Figure 12-1 - Subscriber Extension-to-Exchange Connection using an Exch12 Card
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-6
12 - EXCH12 CARD
12.1 - Description
The Exch12 Card provides connection of 12 telephone channels to a Central Office exchange switch or PABX over short distances (about 2 km). The 12 channel ports are used in conjunction with six corresponding exchange ports transmitted through the network to allow subscriber extension connection to the exchange. This card supports twelve independent telephone interfaces with Z input impedance. The Exch12 Card provides message retransmission (LF Data) from the exchange during the call phase and in particular the calling line identification in call phase service. Figure 12-1 shows the exchange/Exch12 Card and the subscriber extension/Subscr Card links across the network. Configuration and control access to the Exch12 Card is available via a Supervision and Management System which may be: - a Local Termainal (CT) connected locally (or remotely) on the GIE or GIE - P card equipment front panel (or on the connection panel or on the GIE adapter card depending on the type of shelf and on the type of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System (RMS) which is the IONOS Network Management System. REMINDER : the terms below as used in this Manual have the following meanings : - Reception direction : Interface-to-common equipment direction - Transmission direction : common equipment-to-interface direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-7
12 - EXCH12 CARD
EXCH12
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED
Fail
Mntce
Busy
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-8
12 - EXCH12 CARD
12.2 - Description
From top to bottom, the Exch12 Card front panel supports the following controls and LEDs (see Figure 12-2) :
three LEDs for all twelve Card ports : 1 red "Fail" LED Fail : - 5 V failure, detection of a network failure (information transmitted via bit c) or extension failure. Maintenance : equipment loopback, remote control equipment loopback or reception of a loopback acknowledgement, loopback or loopback acknowledgement reception is active when the LED is lit. A port is used for each call from the extension or the exchange (line busy).
1 green "Busy" LED
The Exch12 Card supports two fuses : T1,25 A (F1 on + 5V power supply + 5 V and F2 on - 5 V power supply).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-9
12 - EXCH12 CARD

The Exch12 Card contains no link or switch options. During first configuration and subsequent upgrades, operating configuration parameters may be programmed using the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-10
12 - EXCH12 CARD
The Exch12 Card is initialized as follows: - initialization on power-up followed by self-test, - configuration with the Supervision and Management System if the standard (default) configuration parameters are not those desired. On power-up, the card is initialized in several successive steps ; the results of the different checks performed are presented via the front panel LEDs as follows : a. LEDs remain unlit. Check the fuse and power converter. b. Alternately flashing LEDs indicate that initialization has been completed. c. Self-test. 4 self-tests are performed successively. If no fault is detected, self-test is transparent to the operator (no LED flashes). Fault coding is performed as follows: Fault Code LEDs "Fail" "Mntce" "Busy" * : LED flashes for 10 s. 1 C* C* 2 C* C* C* C* 3 4 C**
** : permanent flashing LED.
Fault code no. 1 2 3 4
Circuits and Functions Testeds SICOFI 1 (port 7, 8, 9 and 10) write/read control registers SICOFI 2 (port 1, 2, 11 and 12) write/read control registers SICOFI 3 (port 3, 4, 5 and 6) write/read control registers RAM write/read
On first start-up the interfaces have the following configuration (default parameters) : - interface impedance : . input Z : 600 , . line Z : Zref, - short distance transmission level for improved reference equivalent: . card input level . card output level : - 3 dBr, : - 4 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-11
12 - EXCH12 CARD

The Exch12 Card is used when the FMX 2 Mbps multiplex (A2S (A2S - IV) or 2MU card) operates in the G.704 mode with channel-associated signalling. The Exch12 Card operates under control of bits a and b from the four TS16 signalling bits. Therefore, unused timeslots and card-out-of-rack timeslots must be configured via common equipment units to signalling idle code (0101 for the 2-bit code) for the card slot of interest. This prevents generation of false (busy, fault) indications by the Exch12 Card due to channels not being connected to the multiplex or by the corresponding card in case of removal. The Exch12 Card operates under the control of the Supervision and Management System via the common equipment units. These control orders, which are individualized for each port and concern line impedance and transmission plan selection, are saved by the common equipment units. The Exch12 Card does not control frame "c" and channel-associated signalling bit "d" is set to "1". The Card is operated in the exchange-to-extension mode. Detected alarms, loopbacks in progress and busy line conditions are presented visually via the card front panel. Loopbacks may be applied via the Supervision and Management System.

This mode of operation provides connection of a telephone extension to a central office switch or PABX. The exchange uses one channel from the Exch12 Card. The telephone extension uses one channel from the Subscr Card in a far-end FMX (extension). The exchange FMX + subscriber FMX + subscriber extension assembly is viewed as a subscriber terminal by the exchange to which this assembly is connected. Signalling is transmitted via bits a and b from the four TS16 signalling bits. The signalling code on the 2 Mbps datastreams between the two FMXs is the subscriber code without dialing pulse conversion (66/33). The card does not control frame "c". The unused signalling bit d is set to "1".
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-12
12 - EXCH12 CARD
Input impedance Z and transmission level can be configured on each individual interface as follows : - input impedance: . input Z : 600 ohms and line Z : Z reference, . input Z : 600 ohms and line Z : 600 ohms, - transmission level, . short distance transmission level for improved reference equivalent * input level : - 3 dBr, * output level : - 4 dBr, . specific: input and output levels may be adjusted in 0.5 dBr steps * input level adjustment range - 2 dBr - 7.5 dBr, * output level adjustment range 0 dBr - 5 dBr.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-13
12 - EXCH12 CARD
Faults No fault is detected from the exchange. Faults identified are relative to the multiplex signal (subscriber to exchange direction). Note : the words "backward" and "forward" are defined in the glossary. Faults Detected Network Fault Consequential Actions Forward Reaction (to exchange). Signalling analysis is aborted immediately after fault detection (2 ms timeout): signalling state changes are longer detected, upon fault clearing, signalling analysis is immediately resumed. - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). - If the interface is in the speech phase : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). - If the interface is in the ringing phase, the card waits for a ringing interrupt to perform the following action : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). Backward Reaction (to Subscriber) Transmission of signalling bits a and b in "0" state ("extension fault") message at the same time as the forward reaction (after expiry of timeout if any). Equipment Reaction Fail LED lit. Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
Table 12-1 - Effects of Exch12 Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-14
12 - EXCH12 CARD
Faults Detected Extension Fault (a = b = "0" > 2 s)
Consequential Action Forward Reaction (to Exchange) - If the interface is idle when the fault is detected : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). - If the interface is in the speech phase : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). - If the interface is in the ringing phase from the exchange, the card waits for a ringing interrupt to perform the following action : the interface is set to the loop opening condition and the unavailability code is transmitted (a = b =0). Backward Reaction (to Subscriber) None Equipment Reaction "Fail" LED lit. Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units. Forward Reaction (to exchange) None Backward Reaction (to subscriber) Transmission of signalling bits a and b in "0" state. ("extension fault" message). Equipment Reaction "Fail" LED Lit. Transmission of FI to FMX common equipment units.
- 5 V Fault
Table 12-2 - Effects of Exch12 Card Faults in Exchange-to-Extension Operation
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-15
12 - EXCH12 CARD
NETWORK EXCHANGE Loop 2c
EXTENSION
REMOTE EXTENSION SUBSCRIBER SUBSCRIBER POSITION
BMX b Exchange channel Subscriber channel
LOCAL FMX
Loop 2c
Supervision and Management System Control or network-originated remote-control
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-16
12 - EXCH12 CARD
The Exch12 Card offers the following loopback facilities: - loopback controlled by the Supervision and Management System : local equipment loopback (loop 2c). This loopback complies with ITU-T recommendation X.150 and is shown in Figure 12-3 with its application described in paragraph 12.4.1. Loopbacks are notified via the "Mntce" LED and can be listed under Supervision and Management System control. Furthermore, loopbacks may be applied by the Supervision and Management System to an interface port not engaged in a call from the subscriber extension and in the absence of any incoming call (busy line condition indicated by the Busy LED). Loopbacks controlled by the Supervision and Management System are lost in the event of power failure, card removal or Supervision and Management System terminal disconnection.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-17
12 - EXCH12 CARD

The loopback available (see Figure 12-3) on the Exch12 Card is local equipment loopback (Loop 2c applied via the Supervision and Management System).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-18
12 - EXCH12 CARD
Equipment Loopback
EXCHANGE LOCAL UNIT NETWORK
RECEPTION (Bit "c" not relooped)
TRANSMISSION
M U L T I P L E X
Loopback controlled by the supervision and management system
Fail
Mntce Busy
Application
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual No. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480. The loopback applied is local loop 2c.
Effects
- The signals transmitted at the transmitting end (speech channel digital data and signalling bits a, b, c and d) are rerouted to the receiving end of the interface. - The "Mntce" LED is lit. - The receiving end of the line is loaded. - No signal is transmitted by the interface. - The channel interface is in the loop opening condition and does not respond to signals transmitted by the subscriber interface circuit at the connected exchange.
Removal
Refer to Craft terminal User Manual no. N5681515XXXX or IONOS Network Management System Manual No. 56814480.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-19
12 - EXCH12 CARD

Three types of faults and errors are detected: - card level faults and errors: . Card out (C.Out), . Fuse Fault (FusFlt) (+ 5 V fuse;F1), . Card Different (C.Dif.), . Watchdog (Wdg), . Selftest (S/test), . - 5V Failure (-5 Fail) (- 5 V fuse;F2), - port level faults: . Network Fault (NF), . Local Extension Failure(LEF). If the card (or port) is not masked, possible faults and errors are detected by common equipment units and an alarm is initiated : CT (and RMS) notification of major or minor alarm depending on configuration. - 5 V failure and port level faults cause the Fail LED to light up on the Exch12 Card front panel. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected is then accessible via the Supervision and Management System.

Fault locating is performed using the Supervision and Management System.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-20
12 - EXCH12 CARD
12.4.2.3 - Causes of a Fault

The following table lists the faults displayed via the Supervision and Management System, along with the corresponding probable causes and remedial actions.
Faults Detected
Probable Cause
Solution
- 5 V Failure (-5 Fail)
- 5 V fuse fault
Replace F2 (T1,25 A) fuse
Network Fault (NF)
Fault detected by or on the network: . any network equipment
No local action
Local Extension Failure (LEF)
Fault detected by the extension
No local action

Card interfaces can be configured independently via the Supervision and Management System. Configuration parameters are: - connection type (remote extension or PABX connection), - interface impedance selection (input Z/line Z = 600 ohms/Zref or 600 ohms/600 ohms), - transmission level (short distance transmission level for improved reference equivalent or transmission level adjustable in 0.5 dB steps).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-21
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 12-22
SECTION 13 CONFERENCE CARD (CONF)

13.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-2
13 - CONFERENCE CARD
CONTENTS
Pages CONTENTS/LIST OF FIGURES/LIST OF TABLES 13.1 - Overview 13.2 - Description 13.3 - The different types of bridge 13.4 - Analog data channels processing 13.4.1 - Analog channel data TS processing 13.4.2 - Analog channel TS16 half-byte signaling 13.4.3 - Analog data channel fault management 13.4.4 - Processing priorities applied to the signaling bits of the TS16 half-bytes of analog channels 13.5 - Low bit rate digital channel processing 13.5.1 - Low bit rate digital channel data processing 13.5.2 - Low bit rate digital channel V110 signaling processing 13.5.3 - Low bit rate digital channel fault management 13.5.4 - Processing priorities applied to the V.110 signaling bits of low bit rate digital channels 13.6 - Medium bit rate digital channel processing 13.6.1 - Processing of data TSs on medium bit rate digital channels 13.6.2 - Processing of TS16 signaling on medium bit rate digital channels 13.6.3 - Medium bit rate digital channel fault management 13.6.4 - Processing priorities applied to TS16 signaling bits on medium bit rate digital channels 13.7 - Looped and protected linear networks (LPN) 13.8 - Protection override 13.9 - Commissioning and operation 13.9.1 - Configuration 13.9.2 - Initialization 13.9.2.1 - Initialization on power up 13.9.2.2 - Use 13.9.3 - Interpretation of alarms 13.9.3.1 - Alarm display 13.9.3.2 - Locating the fault displayed by the "Fail" LED 13.9.3.3 - Origin of the fault 13.10 - Description of the user software 13-3 13-5 13-7 13-8 13-11 13-11 13-12 13-12 13-13 13-14 13-14 13-15 13-16 13-16 13-17 13-17 13-17 13-17 13-17 13-19 13-25 13-26 13-26 13-26 13-26 13-27 13-28 13-28 13-28 13-28 13-29
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 13-1 - Functional situation of the CONFERENCE card in the FMX Figure 13-2 - Front panel Figure 13-3 - Organization of a looped and protected linear network (LPN)
LIST OF TABLES
Table 13.1 - Interpretation of alarms
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-3
CONFERENCE CARD
CS 2 Mbit/s streams CE Digital or analog channels ACCESS CARD CS
CE 2 Mbit/s streams CE CS AGGREGATE CARD 2 Mbit/s To remote FMX 2 Mbit/s HDB3
COB CARD
Switching matrix
Figure 13-1 - Functional situation of the CONFERENCE card in the FMX
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-4
13.1 - Overview
The CONFERENCE card (CONF) is used in linear networks, in conjunction with the FMX drop/insert features of the FMX, to set up the following functions: - broadcasting, - uploading, - broadcasting and uploading, - conferencing, of data which may be digital (data channels carrying signals from computer terminals) or analog (data channels carrying audiofrequency signals PCM encoded with A law compression). The CONFERENCE card physically occupies the position of an access card in the FMX, but functionally it is a common unit connected to the FMX cross-connect (COB card) via the CE and CS internal digital streams (see Figure 13-1 - Functional situation of the CONFERENCE card in the FMX). The COB card is used in particular to set up bidirectional connections for 64 kbit/s data time slots and TS16 signaling half-bytes (whatever the bridge data rates) between the participants of the various bridges and the CS and CE internal digital streams of the CONF card. The card is designed to receive an internal frame (CE/CS) at 2 Mbit/s from the COB card's switching matrix, and return an internal frame at 2 Mbit/s to the COB card when processed. Functions carried out - 64 kbit/s analog channel data: . analog conference bridge with no telephone signaling management (off-hook, ringing, dialing, etc), . and protection of the digital conference bridge in a looped linear network (Looped and protected linear network: LPN). - Digital channel data at rates from 600 bit/s to 19200 bit/s (V.110 frame) and 64 kbit/s: . digital broadcast bridge with backward channel, . digital upload bridge, . digital broadcast/upload bridge, . digital conference bridge, . and protection of the digital conference bridge in a looped linear network (Looped and protected linear network: LPN). Functional characteristics The CONFERENCE card can be used to handle: - 20 low bit rate digital channels (V.110 frame) or medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) capable of distribution over the 30 time slots of the CE/CS internal frame. Restrictions concerning the number of bridges are as follows: . if there is no conference bridge; eight broadcast and/or uploading bridges, . if there is a conference bridge; six bridges including a maximum of three conference bridges. The participant number of a digital conference bridge is limited to 10, - 24 analog channels (among TS1 to TS 15 and TS17 to TS31) of the CE/CS internal frame. NOTE: The number of analog bridges is restricted to 12. The TS transfer time between CONF card input and output is less than the time occupied by three 125 s frames.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-5
CONF Def Fail Red LED
Figure 13-2 - Front panel

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-6
Configuration and operation The CONF card is configured and operated via a supervision and management system which may be: - a Local Craft Terminal (LCT) connected locally (or remotely) to the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or to the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of subrack and on the type of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS network management system.
13.2 - Description
The front panel of the CONF card has a red "Fail" LED (see Figure 13-2 - Front panel). This LED indicates one of the following faults: - Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) on a channel for the analog bridges, - loss of V.110 frame alignment (V.110) on a channel for the low rates (600 to 19200 bit/s) digital bridges. The CONF card is fitted with a 25 A T1 fuse (F1).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-7
13.3 - The different types of bridge

The broadcast, upload and broadcast/upload bridges are one-way links between a master participant and several slave participants. In the case of a conference bridge, the links between all the participants are bidirectional.
Analog bridge participants:

Each "analog" participant occupies one TS of 64 kbit/s data and one signaling TS16 half-byte of the CONF card's CS and CE internal digital streams.
Low and medium bit rate digital bridge participants:

In the case of low bit rate digital bridge (600 to 19200 bit/s), each "digital" participant, depending on the bit rate of the bridge, occupies one, two or four bits of a 64 kbit/s data TS of the CONF card's CS and CE internal digital streams. NOTE: A 64 kbit/s data TS can carry several digital participants up to a maximum of eight bits of the TS.
In the case of medium bit rate digital bridge (64 kbit/s), each "digital" participant occupies a 64 kbit/s data and a signaling TS16 of the CONF card's CS and CE internal digital streams. Broadcast bridge protocol A unidirectional link is created between a master participant and several slave participants, with the master participant broadcasting information to the slave participants. In the master to slave direction, the CONF card receives from the CS digital stream the data from the master participant and broadcasts it on the slave participant data of the CE digital stream. In the slave to master direction, the data of one of the slave participants in the CS digital bit stream is retransmitted on the master participant data of the CE digital bit stream (this slave participant represents the backward channel of the broadcast bridge. The signaling process is the same as the data TS process described previously.
BACKWARD CHANNEL (BACKWARD CHANNEL CHOSEN BY OPERATOR) [TSmr = TSslave3, TSslave2 or TSslave1] [TSmr] MASTER [TSm] = BACKWARD CHANNEL CHOSEN BY OPERATOR
SLAVES
1 [TSm] [TSslave1]
2 [TSm] [TSslave2]
3 [TSm] [TSslave3]
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-8
Upload bridge protocol A unidirectional link is created between a master participant and several slave participants, with the master participant uploading information from all the slave participants. In the master to slave direction, the CONF card sends an IDLE signal in the slave participant data and signaling of the CE digital bit streams; the master participant data and signaling received from the CS digital bit stream are not used. In the slave to master direction, the CONF card receives the CS digital bit stream containing the data from all the slave participants, in practice the "sum" (see below, definitions of analog and digital data summing operations) and retransmits the result in the master participant data of the CE digital bit stream. The way the signaling from the slave participants received in the CS digital bit stream is processed is functionally identical to the way the data TSs are processed (see below, definition of signaling summing operation).
BACKWARD CHANNEL [TSmr = TSslave1 [TSmr] MASTER [IDLE] = "AND" OR "OR" BOOLEAN LAW OR ALGEBRAIC SUMMING TSslave2 TSslave3]
SLAVES
1 [IDLE] [TSslave1]
2 [IDLE] [TSslave2]
3 [IDLE] [TSslave3]
Broadcast and upload bridge protocol The broadcast/upload bridge is a combination of the two bridges described previously. In the master to slave direction, the CONF card receives the master participant data from the CS digital bit stream and broadcasts it on the slave participant data in the CE digital bit stream. In the slave to master direction, the CONF card receives the data from all the slave participants in the CS digital bit stream, calculates its sum and retransmits the result in the master participant's data of the CE digital bit stream. The associated signaling process is functionally the same as the data TS process described previously.
BACKWARD CHANNEL [TSmr = TSslave1 [TSmr] MASTER [TSm] = "AND" OR "OR" BOOLEAN LAW TSslave2 TSslave3]
SLAVES
1 [TSm] [TSslave1]
2 {TSm] [TSslave2]
3 [TSm] [TSslave3]
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-9
Conference bridge protocol Bidirectional links are created between all the participants of the conference bridge. For each of the conference bridge participants, the CONF card calculates the sum of the data from the other bridge participants (data received from the CS digital bit stream) and retransmits the result in the CE digital bit stream. The associated signaling process is functionally the same as the data TS process described previously.
TS 1 TS 1 + TS 2
+ +
TS 2 + TS 3
TS 3
TS 1 + TS 3
TS 2
Analog channel data summing The sum of the analog channel data is calculated by the "algebraic" summation of the analog channel data TSs, which firstly involves converting each of the data TSs into a uniform PCM code (decompression according to the linear encoding law), then calculating their algebraic sum, and finally converting the result according to A law compression. Digital channel data summing The sum of the digital channel data is calculated by a Boolean operation which entails applying a logical "AND" or "OR" operator to each bit of the participant data at the bridge. NOTE: The choice of logical operation can be configured individually for each bridge.
Summing of data TS signaling The sum of the signaling associated with the data TSs is calculated by a Boolean operation which entails applying a logical "AND" or "OR" operator to each of the signaling bits from the bridge participants. NOTE: The choice of logical operation can be configured for each bridge, and individually for each of the signaling bits. For the 64 kbit/s rate, the operations on the signaling involve the half-bytes carried by TS16 (bits a, b, c and d). For rates from 600 to 19200 bit/s, these operations are the same, but concern bits SA (SA bit = bits S1, S3, S6, S8 of the V.110 frame), SB (bit SB = bits S4, S9 of the V.110 frame) and X of the V.110 frame.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-10
13.4 - Analog data channels processing

The CONF card processes: - the 64 kbit/s data TSs (TS1 to TS15 and TS17 to TS31 of the CS and CE internal digital bit streams) which carry an audiofrequency signal, PCM encoded according to A law compression, - and the related TS16 half-bytes which carry signaling bits a, b, c and d. This process is merely used to set up the analog conference bridge with no telephone signaling management (off-hook, ringing, dialing, etc). This type of operation can be used to connect four-wire terminals (or two-wire terminals) via the "6PROAF" card, or ordinary telephone lines to the conference bridge via the "Subscriber" card. NOTE: The "Subscriber" card must be used in "Extension-to-Extension" operation and the CONF card must be set to send a constant 01 code (bit a = 0 and bit b = 1) on each of the TS16 signaling bits of the CS digital bit stream corresponding to the participants connected to the "Exchange" card. In these conditions, all the participants are, when they have lifted their handsets, connected to the conference bridge ("Subscriber" card in the "conversation" state). In the case where particular 2-wire telephone sets (local power supply, in-band signaling management, ...) connected to the "6PROAF" card are used, and by analogy with the "Subsriber" card, the 2-wire interface input and output levels of the "6PROAF" card must be set to 0 dBr for the input and -7 dBr for the output.
13.4.1 - Analog channel data TS processing

The processing carried out on the analog data with respect to the conference bridge entails an algebraic summing operation. This algebraic sum is, where necessary, associated with additional processes such as squelch and AGC attenuation, described below. Squelch: Squelch concerns all of the analog data TSs from the CONF card and represents a low level threshold from which the received analog data is replaced by silence. After A law decompression, the content of the analog data TSs is compared with the squelch threshold. When the value is below the squelch threshold, the content is replaced by a "silence" level (0). The low level threshold, which is common to all the CONF card's analog data channels, can be adjusted within a range varying from -40 dBr to -68 dBr in 2 dB steps. NOTE: The squelch function can, however, be disabled (in other words, no low level threshold). Automatic gain control (AGC) attenuation: AGC attenuation is applied only to the result of the algebraic sum of each of the CONF card's analog bridges, and represents a limitation on the high level. After A law decompression, the algebraic sum of the conference bridge's analog data must be calculated as far as the capabilities of the uniform PCM encoding. If the sum exceeds the peak maximum level, an automatic gain control based attenuation process is implemented. The high level threshold, which is common to all the CONFERENCE card's analog conference bridges, can be adjusted within a range varying from -12 dBr to + 3 dBr in 1 dB steps. Also, each of the analog data TSs received from the CS digital bit stream can be configured individually to the "Idle" or "Active" state (in the "Idle" state, the content of the analog data TS is forced to 0).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-11
13.4.2 - Analog channel TS16 half-byte signaling

The processing applied to the signaling TS16 half-bytes (bits a, b, c and d) concerning the analog conference bridge involves performing a logical "AND" or "OR" operation. Also, for each of the analog channels, signaling bits a, b, c and d can be configured individually at the input and the output of the summing logical operator. The various configurations are as follows: - Signaling bit received set to fault code at the Boolean input; this process, which follows detection of the AIS fault on the data TS, causes the signaling bit received from the CS digital bit stream to be replaced by a permanent state which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit received set to idle code at the Boolean input; this idle code causes the signaling bit received from the CS digital bit stream to be replaced by a permanent state, which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit received set to status mode at the Boolean input ("Active" or "Idle") ; the "Active" status mode enables the signaling bit received from the CS digital bit stream to be recognized, and the signaling bit active code can be configured as "Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)". - Signaling bit transmitted set to idle code at the Boolean output; this idle code causes the signaling bit sent in the CE digital bit stream to be forced to a permanent state, which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit transmitted set to status mode at the Boolean output ("Active" or "Idle"); the "Active" status mode enables the signaling bit to be transmitted in the CE digital bit stream, and the signaling bit active code can be configured as "Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)".
13.4.3 - Analog data channel fault management

The only fault concerning analog data channels is the detection of an all "1" state (AIS signal) on the CS received data TSs. The fault appearance and disappearance indications are indicated on the red "Fail" LED on the front panel of the CONF card and reported to the general units of the FMX. If the reception of an AIS signal is detected on at least three consecutive data TSs, the content of that data TS is replaced by a "silence" level and the signaling bits contained in the TS16 associated with the channel are replaced by their respective "AIS fault" codes. NOTE: The "AIS fault" code can be configured individually to 0 or 1 for each of the signaling bits a, b, c and d.
Conversely, detection of the disappearance of the AIS signal on three consecutive data TSs causes the data contained in the data TSs and the signaling TS half-byte to be taken into account.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-12
13.4.4 - Processing priorities applied to the signaling bits of the TS16 half-bytes of analog channels
The priority, in ascending order, applicable to processes performed in receive mode (at the boolean input) on the signaling bits of the TS16 half-bytes of analog channels is as follows: - active code of the signaling received ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)") when the signaling received is in "Active" status mode, - replacement of the receive signaling with its fault code ("0" or "1") on detection of an AIS fault, - replacement of the receive signaling with its idle code ("0" or "1") on configuration in idle mode. The priority, in ascending order, applicable to processes performed in transmit mode (at the boolean output) on the signaling bits of the TS16 half-bytes of the analog channels is as follows: - active code of the transmit signaling ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)") when the signaling transmitted is in "Active" status mode, - replacement of the transmit signaling with its idle code ("0" or "1") on configuration in idle mode. The various processes performed are detailed in the figure below.
INPUT BOOLEAN PROCESSING
CS
ACTIVE CODE ("Normal" or "Complement")
FAULT CODE ("0" or "1")
IDLE CODE ("0" or "1")
"AND" or "OR" BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN OUTPUT PROCESSING
ACTIVE CODE ("Normal" or "Complement")
IDLE CODE ("0" or "1")
CE
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-13
13.5 - Low bit rate digital channel processing

The CONF card supports bit rates from 600 bit/s to 19200 bit/s (V.110 frame) only, and sets up broadcast, upload, broadcast/upload and conference bridges. The digital upload, broadcast/upload and conference bridges can be applied only in networks that use an addressing protocol to ensure unique data transmission at any given time to avoid message collision. In accordance with Recommendation V.110, the structure of the digital data channel depends on its bit rate. This is summarized below. - For the 600 bit/s, 1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s and 4800 bit/s rates, the intermediate bit rate (V.110 frame bit rate) is equal to 8 kbit/s and occupies one bit in the 64 kbit/s data TS of the CE/CS digital bit stream. This 8 kbit/s stream can occupy any single bit position of the 64 kbit/s TS. - For the 9600 bit/s rate, the intermediate bit rate (V.110 frame bit rate) is equal to 16 kbit/s and occupies two bits in the 64 kbit/s data TS of the CE/CS digital bit stream. 16 kbit/s stream can occupy bit positions (1, 2), (3, 4), (5, 6) or (7, 8) of the 64 kbit/s TS. - For the 19200 bit/s rate, the intermediate bit rate (V.110 frame bit rate) is equal to 32 kbit/s and occupies four bits in the 64 kbit/s data TS of the CE/CS digital bit stream. This 32 kbit/s stream can occupy bit positions (1, 2, 3, 4) or (5, 6, 7, 8) of the 64 kbit/s TS. Consequently, a 64 kbit/s data TS of the CE/CS digital bit stream can contain several digital data channels, and these digital data channels can belong to different bridges.
13.5.1 - Low bit rate digital channel data processing

The logical "AND" or "OR" operation performed on the low bit rate digital channel data entails carrying out the following processes for each of the bridge participants: - extraction of the data contained in the V.110 frame received from the CS digital bit stream, - calculation of the "AND" or "OR" Boolean, - insertion of the result in the V.110 frame sent in the CE digital bit stream. Also, the data on each of the digital channels received from the CS digital bit stream can be individually configured. The configuration parameters are: - configuration of the data default code; this process which follows detection of the "V.110 LFA fault" replaces the data received from the CS digital bit stream with a permanent state, which can itself be configured to "0" or "1", - configuration of the data idle code; this idle code replaces the data received from the CS digital bit stream with a permanent state, which can itself be configured to "0" or "1", - configuration of the data status mode ("Active" or "Idle"); the "Active" status mode enables the data received from the CS digital bit stream to be recognized.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-14
Specific features of the processes according to bridge type:

Broadcast bridge The logical "AND" or "OR" operator is not implemented and the data configuration parameters (default code, idle code and status mode) concern only the MASTER and RETURN participants. Upload bridge The data from the MASTER participant received from the CS digital bit stream is in all cases configured to the "Idle" state; only the value of the idle code (0 or 1) can be modified. Conference bridge The boolean law applied to the data is a logical "AND" and the value of the idle and default codes are set to "1".
13.5.2 - Low bit rate digital channel V110 signaling processing

As for the data, the logical "AND" or "OR" operation performed on the low bit rate digital channel signaling requires the following processes to be carried out for each of the bridge participants: - extraction of the signaling bits contained in the V.110 frame received from the CS digital bit stream, - calculation of the "AND" or "OR" Boolean, - insertion of the result in the V.110 frame sent in the CE digital bit stream. Also, for each of the low bit rate digital channels, signaling bits SB, SA and X can be configured individually at the input and output of the summing logical operator. These various configurations are as follows: - Signaling bit received set to fault code at the Boolean input; this process, which follows detection of the V.110 LFA fault, causes the signaling bit received from the CS digital bit stream to be replaced by a permanent state, which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit received set to idle code at the Boolean input; this idle code causes the signaling bit received from CS digital bit stream to be replaced by a permanent state, which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit received set to status mode at the Boolean input ("Active" or "Idle"); the "Active" status mode enables the signaling bit received from CS digital bit stream to be recognized, and the signaling bit active code can be configured as "Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)". - Signaling bit transmitted set to idle code at the Boolean output; this idle code causes the signaling bit sent in CE digital bit stream to be forced to a permanent state, which can be configured to "0" or "1". - Signaling bit transmitted set to status mode at the Boolean output ("Active" or "Idle"); the "Active" status mode enables the signaling bit to be sent in CE digital bit stream , and the signaling bit active code can be configured as "Normal (signaling bit") or "Complement (signaling complement)". NOTE: The signaling bits carried by the TS16 half-bytes associated with the 64 kbit/s TSs are forced to a = b = d = 1 and c = 0. Bit "c" of the low bit rate digital channels is managed only in looped and protected linear networks).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-15
Specific features of the processes according to bridge type:

Broadcast bridge The configuration parameters that concern only the MASTER and RETURN participants are: - configuration of the signaling fault code in reception, - configuration of the signaling bit to idle code in reception, - configuration of the signaling bit to active code in reception when the signaling received is in "Active" status mode. Upload bridge Signaling from the MASTER participant received from the CS digital bit stream is in all cases configured to the "Idle" state; only the value of the idle code (0 or 1) can be modified. The configuration parameters concerning the boolean input concern only the SLAVE participants and those relating to the boolean output concern only the MASTER participants. Broadcast/upload bridge The configuration parameters relating to the boolean input concern only the SLAVE participants and those relating to the boolean output concern only the MASTER participants.
13.5.3 - Low bit rate digital channel fault management

The fault concerning digital data channels at bit rates of up to 19.2 kbit/s is detection of the V.110 loss of frame alignment (V.110 LFA). The fault appearance and disappearance indications are indicated on the red "Fail" LED on the front panel of the CONF card and reported to the general units of the FMX. If a V.110 LFA fault occurs, the data and signaling received from the V.110 frame of the CS digital bit stream are replaced by their respective "V.110 LFA fault" codes.
13.5.4 - Processing priorities applied to the V.110 signaling bits of low bit rate digital channels
The priority, in ascending order, applied to the processes performed in reception (at the boolean input) on the V.110 signaling bits of low bit rate digital channels is as follows: - active code of the receive signaling ("Normal" (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)") when the receive signaling is in "Active" status mode, - replacement of the receive signaling with its fault code ("0" or "1") on detection of the V.110 LFA fault, - replacement of the receive signaling with its idle code ("0" or "1") on configuration in idle mode. The priority, in ascending order, attached to the processes performed in transmission (boolean output) on the V.110 signaling bits of low bit rate digital channels is as follows: - active code code of the transmit signaling ("Normal" (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)") when the transmit signaling is in "Active" status mode, - replacement of the transmit signaling with its idle code ("0" or "1") on configuration in idle mode. The various processes performed are detailed in the figure in section 13.4.4.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-16
13.6 - Medium bit rate digital channel processing

The CONF card processes the data timeslots at 64 kbit/s and the associated signaling TS16 half-bytes, and sets up the broadcast, upload, broadcast/upload and conference bridges.
13.6.1 - Processing of data TSs on medium bit rate digital channels

The processes and configuration parameters applied to the data TSs of medium bit rate digital channels are the same as those applied to the data TSs of low bit rate digital channels (see section 13.5.1).
13.6.2 - Processing of TS16 signaling on medium bit rate digital channels

The processes and configuration parameters applied to the signaling TSs of medium bit rate digital channels are the same as those applied to the signaling TSs of low bit rate digital channels (see section 13.5.2).
13.6.3 - Medium bit rate digital channel fault management

No faults relating to the medium bit rate data channels can be detected by the CONF card.
13.6.4 - Processing priorities applied to TS16 signaling bits on medium bit rate digital channels
The processing priorities applied to the TS16 signaling bits of medium bit rate digital channels are the same as those applied to the signaling TSs of low bit rate digital channels (see section 13.5.4)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-17
(MC1 or MC2 [TSt])
Main channel 2 Main channel 1 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s (MC2[CSt]) (MC1[CSt]) MC1 [CSt] = MC1 or MC2 [TSt] MC2 [CSt] = MC2 or MC1 [TSt]
(MC1 or MC2 [TSt])
TECHNICAL STATION (TSt)
CENTRAL STATION (CSt)
LOOP 1
Secondary channel 1 2 Mbit/s (SC1 [CSt]) 2 Mbit/s Link equipment
Secondary channel 2 2 Mbit/s (SC2 [CSt])
LOOP 2
2 Mbit/s Link equipment
LOCAL PARTICIPANTS
DATA TERMINAL
DATA TERMINAL
WORKSTATION
DATA TERMINAL
DATA TERMINAL
Local channel MC2 or MC1[TT] MC1[CT] MC2[CT] MC1 or MC2[TT]
FMX
FMX
MC1 or MC2[TT] LOOP 1 SC1[CT]
FMX
FMX
MC2 or MC1[TT] SC2[CT] LOOP 2
FMX
Figure 13-3 - Organization of a looped and protected linear network (LPN)

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-18
13.7 - Looped and protected linear networks (LPN)

a) General Protection is applied to the analog and low and medium bit rate conference bridges. Digital conference bridge protection is applied to the looped linear network comprising: - Technical Stations (TSts) which are mainly responsible for interconnecting the terminals, and - a Central Station (CSt) which is also responsible for interconnecting the terminals as well as protection procedure management. The looped and protected linear network (LPN) comprises one or two protection loops in accordance with Figure 13-3 - Organization of a looped and protected linear network (LPN). The two protection loops are handled entirely independently and are used to maintain troublefree operation of the LPN given two simultaneous breakdowns (one on each loop) along the linear network. The protection protocol applied to a loop is implemented from bit "c" of the TS16 signaling associated with the MAIN channels of the technical station and the Central Station (bit c = 1; network fault appearance indication and bit c = 0; network fault disappearance indication). Protection on the Central Station operates in automatic changeback mode with the option of forcing to the MAIN channel or channels and to the SECONDARY channel or channels. NOTE: In the case of low bit rate digital data channels, it is vital for the data TSs used to set up the interconnections between the Technical Stations and Central Station of the LPN to be exclusively reserved for transporting the MAIN and SECONDARY channels (only one MAIN or SECONDARY channel in an interconnecting TS of the LPN).
b) Construction The LPN comprises two different kinds of node: - Technical Station (TSt), - Central Station (CSt). The TSt comprise LOCAL, MAIN 1 and MAIN 2 participants. Their respective roles are: - The LOCAL participants which generate the "useful data". NOTE: The other participants (MAIN 1 and MAIN 2), described below, are the participants that enable the transmission of the "useful data" between the various LOCAL participants located along the linear network.
- A MAIN 1 participant (MC1[TSt]) which comprises the first main interconnecting channel from the TSt and used to provide the link with the CSt of the LPN. - A MAIN 2 participant (MC2[TSt ]) which comprises the second main interconnecting channel from the TSt and which also provides the link with the CSt of the LPN.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-19
The Central Station comprises the LOCAL, MAIN 1 and SECONDARY 1, MAIN 2 and SECONDARY 2 participants. Their respective roles are: - The LOCAL participants which generate "useful data". - A MAIN 1 participant (MC1[CSt]) which comprises the first main interconnecting channel from the CSt and which is used to provide the link with the TSts of loop 1 of the LPN. - A MAIN 2 participant (MC2[CSt]) which corresponds to the second main interconnecting channel from the CSt (in an LPN with two protection loops) and which is used to provide the link with the TSts of loop 2 of the LPN. - A SECONDARY 1 participant (VS1[CSt]) which comprises the first secondary interconnecting channel from the CSt and which is used to protect loop 1 of the LPN. - A SECONDARY 2 participant (VS2[CSt]) which corresponds to the second secondary interconnecting channel from the CSt (in an LPN with two protection loops) and which is used to protect loop 2 of the LPN. c) Operation
Analog and Low bit rate digital channel

In normal operation, the CSt sends data on the MAIN channel and handles only data received over the same channel (the data and signals received over the SECONDARY channel of the CSt are forced to their respective idle statuses). In protection mode, the CSt sends data over the MAIN and SECONDARY channels and handles data received over both channels. The CSt protection function is implemented following detection of the "Network Fault" (bit "c" = 1) or SIA or V.110 LFA fault (depending on bridge nature) on the MAIN interconnecting channel of the LPN network loop. "Network Fault" management only concerns reception over Terminal (TS) and Central (CSt) stations. The "Network Fault" is declared by the CONF card: - on detection of an AIS in the case of analog channels , or - on detection of a V.110 loss of frame alignment in the case of low bit rate digital channels (600 to 19200 bit/s). Detection of the appearance or disappearance of the fault is retransmitted on bit "c" of the transmit TS16 associated with the MAIN channel concerned. NOTE: The bit "c" calculated by the logical "OR" Boolean, because of the summing law specific to the protected conference bridge, is available at each node (TSt or CSt) of the LPN. The boolean "OR" summing of bit "c" along the LPN does not take into account the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants (bits "c" associated with these participants are forced to "0" in transmission and in reception). In the case of an LPN comprising two loops, the boolean summing of bit "c" for loops 1 and 2 is totally independent at CSt level.
The protection function regarding the "Network Fault" item differs according to the site where it is implemented: - On the CSt, it is used to: . declare the appearance and disappearance of the "Network Fault" (AIS or V.110 LFA) on the MAIN channel, . detect, in reception and on the MAIN channel, the "network fault" indication (bit "c" = "1"), . and to manage the switching function that is intrinsic to the protection function.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-20
- On the TSts, it is used: . to provide local detection on the MAIN channels of the appearance and disappearance of the "Network Fault" (AIS or V.110 LFA), . and send it to the CSt via the "c" bit associated to the MAIN channels. The sequence of events along a loop of the LPN providing management of the protection procedure on the CSt is described below. On detecting an AIS or a V.110 loss of frame alignment (loss following a V.110 frame fault or a loss of the 2 Mbit/s signal) on reception from the MAIN channel of a TSt, the following actions are undertaken: - the "c" bit is forced to "All1" in the transmit direction of the same MAIN channel and also of the opposing MAIN channel, - data and signaling information received from the MAIN channel with the fault is replaced by the respective idle code, - the same idle code is sent in the data and signaling on the MAIN channel with the fault (the MAIN channel with the fault is in this way virtually disconnected from the LPN), - detection of the network fault (bit "c" = 1) on receiving the TS16 half-byte associated with the MAIN channel of the CSt leads to the simultaneous transmission of the data and signaling to both MAIN and SECONDARY channels of the CSt, so avoiding any part of the linear network from being isolated following a single breakdown in the protection loop. On detection of an SIA or a V.110 loss of frame alignment (loss following a V.110 frame fault or loss of the 2 Mbit/s signal) in reception from the CSt's MAIN channel, the following actions are undertaken: - the "c" bit is forced to "All1" in the transmit direction of the CSt's MAIN channel, - data and signaling received from the CSt's MAIN channel is replaced with the respective idle code, - "useful" data and signaling is sent to the CSt's SECONDARY channel and the same idle code is sent to the CSt's MAIN channel. On disappearance of the AIS or V.110 loss of frame alignment on reception from the MAIN channel of a TSt or the CSt, the following actions are undertaken: - bit "c" is forced to "All0" state in the transmit direction of that same MAIN channel and also of the opposing MAIN channel in the case of a TSt, - data and signaling received over that MAIN channel is taken into account, - "useful" data and signaling information is sent over that MAIN channel, - detection of the disappearance of the network fault (bit "c" = 0) on reception of the TS16 halfbyte associated with the CSt's MAIN channel leads to transmission of the data and signaling to the MAIN channel and of the idle code to the SECONDARY channel. This way, the protection loop is virtually opened by setting the SECONDARY channel to an appropriate idle state. NOTE: The appearance of the "Network Fault" must be confirmed for at least 800 ms to be taken into account and cause the protection function to be implemented, and for the LPN to be returned to normal configuration 100 ms after it disappears.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-21
The following figures summarize the various processes carried out in function of the channels type:
Low bit rate digital data channel situation (600 to 19200 bit/s):
LOCAL CHANNEL
Transmission
Reception
VP2 V.110 frame
Local V.110 frame

Detection of V.110 LFA
"c" forced to "0" "c" forced to "0"
Local V.110 frame

Transmission
"c" forced to "1"
VP1 V.110 frame

BOOLEAN "AND" ON DATA, "AND"/"OR" ON SIGNALLING (SB, SA and X) AND "AND" ON "C" BIT
"c" forced to "1" Data = "1", Signaling (SB, SA and X) = idle code = "0" or "1".
Reception
MAIN CHANNEL 2 (to CSt secondary channel)
MAIN CHANNEL 1 (to CSt main channel)
VP2 V.110 frame

Reception
VP1 V.110 frame

Transmission
TECHNICAL STAION (TSt) OF A LOOP OF AN LPN
In the absence of a V.11 LFA fault in the LPN protection loop, interconnection between all the participants of the conference bridge is handled solely by the CSt's MAIN channel (the CSt's SECONDARY channel is virtually disconnected of the LPN). The MAIN 1 channel of the TSt is virtually disconnected (the receive and transmit data and signaling are forced to their respective idle states) from the LPN following detection of the V.110 LFA fault. In this case, the CSt's MAIN channel interconnects the conference bridge participants located upline from the defective equipment. Interconnection of the conference bridge participants located downline from the defective equipment and the local participants of the defective equipment is handled by the CSt's SECONDARY channel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-22
Analog data channel situation:
LOCAL CHANNEL Local V.110 frame Transmission Reception
VP2 V.110 frame
Local V.110 frame

Detection of V.110 LFA
"c" forced to "0" "c" forced to "0"
Local V.110 frame

Transmission
"c" forced to "1"
VP1 V.110 frame

BOOLEAN "AND" ON DATA, "AND"/"OR" ON SIGNALLING (SB, SA and X) AND "AND" ON "C" BIT
Reception
VP2 V.110 frame

Reception
VP1 V.110 frame

Transmission
TECHNICAL STATION (TSt) OF A LOOP OF AN LPN
In the absence of a AIS fault in the LPN protection loop, interconnection between all the participants of the conference bridge is handled solely by the CSt's MAIN channel (the CSt's SECONDARY channel is virtually disconnected of the LPN). The MAIN 1 channel of the TSt is virtually disconnected (the receive and transmit data and signaling are forced to their respective idle states) from the LPN following detection of AIS fault. In this case, the CST's MAIN channel interconnects the conference bridge participants located upline from the defective equipment. Interconnection of the conference bridge participants located downline from the defective equipment and the local participants of the defective equipment is handled by the CST's SECONDARY channel.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-23
Medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) digital data channels
No faults relating to the medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) data channels can be detected by the CONF card. Only the 2 Mbit/s cards which carry the MAIN interconnection channels of the Terminal (TS) and Central (CSt) stations can be used to detect faults (LSL, FAL or MFAL) and transmit a "1" value signal in place of the channel-associated data and signal (bits a, b, c and d) for all the connections multiplexed in the faulty 2 Mbit/s stream. The protection procedure relating to the 64 kbit/s digital conference bridge is based on signaling bits c and d associated with the 2 Mbit/s MAIN interconnection channels of stations TS and CSt. The sequence of events occuring along the looped protection network (LPN), enabling CSt level protection management, is described below. On detection of a "1" bit received over the MAIN channel of a CSt, the following actions are undertaken: - forcing of the "c" bit to "all1" in the transmit direction of the MAIN channel where the d bit is at "1", and also in the transmit direction of the opposite MAIN channel, - replacement of the data and signaling (bits a and b) received over the MAIN channel where the d bit is at "1" by their respective idle code, - transmission of the same idle code in the data and signaling (bits a and b) of the MAIN channel where the d bit is at "1" (thus virtually disconnecting the MAIN channel where the d bit is at "1" from the LPN), - detection of the Network Fault ("c" bit = 1) received in the TS 16 quartet associated to the CSt MAIN channel leads to the simultaneous transmission of data and signaling (bits a and b) to the MAIN and SECONDARY channels of the CSt, so as to avoid isolation of part of a linear network following a single break in the protection loop. On detection of the "1" bit received over the MAIN channel of the CSt, the following actions are undertaken: - forcing of the "c" bit to "all1" in the transmit direction of the MAIN channel of the CSt, - replacement of the data and signaling (bits a and b) received over the MAIN channel of the CSt by their respective idle code, - transmission of the same idle code in the data and signals (bits a and b) of the MAIN channel and simultaneous transmission of the "useful" data and signals to the SECONDARY channel of the CSt. Upon the disappearance of the "1" bit received over the MAIN channel of a TS or the CSt, the following actions are undertaken: - forcing of the "c" bit to "all0" in the transmit direction of the same MAIN channel and also of the opposite MAIN channel in the case of a TS, - registering of the data and signals received over this MAIN channel, - transmission of the "useful" data and signals received over this MAIN channel. - detection of the disappearance of the Network Fault ("c" bit = 0) received in the TS 16 quartet associated to the CSt MAIN channel leads to the transmission of data and signaling to the MAIN channel and the idle code to the SECONDARY channel. This virtually opens the protection loop by setting the SECONDARY channel at an appropriate idle status. Note: The "d" bit associated to the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants is forced to Transmit and Receive. The "d" bit associated to the MAIN participants of the TS and CSt is managed only in Receive and is forced to "0" in the Transmit direction. The Boolean "OR" sum of the "c" bit along the LPN does not take into account the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants (the "c" bits associated with these participants are forced to "0"for Transmit and Receive). In the case of an LPN consisting of two loops, the Boolean "OR" sum of the "c" bit for loops 1 and 2 is totally independent at the CSt.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-24
The following figure summarizes the different processes carried out in a TS for medium bit rate (64 kbit/s) digital data channels.
LOCAL CHANNEL
Transmission VP2 data TS and TS 16
Reception
Local data TS and TS 16

Detection of bit "d" = "1"
"c" and "d" forced to "0" "c" and "d" forced to "0"
Local data TS and TS 16

Transmission
"c" forced to "1" and "d" to "0"
VP1 data TS and TS 16

BOOLEAN "AND" ON DATA, "AND"/"OR" ON SIGNALLING (A, B and D) AND "AND" ON "C" BIT
"c" forced to "1" Data = "1", Signaling (a and b) = idle code = "0" or "1".
Reception

Reception
"c" forced to "1" Data = "1", Signaling (a and b) = idle code = "0" or "1".

Transmission
TECHNICAL TERMINAL (TT) OF A LOOP OF AN LPN
13.8 - Protection override

The Protection override function applies only to the MAIN and SECONDARY CST channels. It can be used to disable the switching procedure inherent to the protection function in order to impose a single transmission channel (in the case of an LPN comprising two protection loops, each with its own forced operation).
Override on the CST MAIN channel:

Only the data and signaling on the MAIN channel are processed by the CST. The data and signaling on the SECONDARY channel are forced to their respective states. If an AIS or V.110 LFA fault or a bit d = "1" is detected on the MAIN channel, only the data and signaling received on that channel are forced to their respective idle codes (transmit data from the CST is always transmitted over this MAIN channel).
Override on the CST SECONDARY channel:

Only the data and signaling on the SECONDARY channel are processed by the CSt. The data and signaling on the MAIN channel are forced to their respective states. If an AIS or V.110 LFA fault or a bit d = "1" is detected on the SECONDARY channel, only the data and signaling received from that channel are forced to their respective idle codes (transmit data from the CSt is always transmitted over this SECONDARY channel).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-25
13.9 - Commissioning and operation 13.9.1 - Configuration

The CONF card has no straps or configuration switches. On initialization or on a change of configuration, the operating instructions (configuration parameters) can be programmed using the supervision and management system.
The CONF card is initialized as follows: - initialization on power up, followed by a self-test, - configuration using the supervision and management system.
13.9.2.1 - Initialization on power up

On power up, the card is initialized in a number of successive stages; the results of the various checks are reflected by the front panel LED: a. LED remains off. Check the fuse and the converter. b. Self-tests. Five functional self-tests are performed in turn. If no faults are detected, the self-tests are transparent to the operator (the LED lights briefly then remains off). If the LED remains on permanently, the microprocessor of the CPU block has failed to start up; power down the card and reinitialize it. If the fault remains, change the card. If a fault other than the microprocessor fault is detected, the fault code is indicated by the number encoded by the flashing of the "Fail" LED; in this case, replace the card. The fault codes are: Fault code "Fail" LED Flashing regularly One flash Two flashes Three flashes Four flashes Five flashes 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-26
Fault code No 1 2 3 4 5 6
Circuits and functions tested RAM Data memory of the CPU block DSP N 1 Analog channel microcontroller DSP N 2 Digital channel microcontroller DSP N 3 Telephone switching process microcontroller MFP Port of the multi-function peripheral (MFP) circuit EEPROM Memory for saving configuration parameters programmed by the supervision and management system
On first initialization, the card is set to the following (default) configuration: - no bridge created, - no channel created. The default value of the parameters displayed for the management and monitoring system depends on the type and nature of the bridge.
13.9.2.2 - Use
Modify the configuration parameters listed in section 13.10 from the supervision and management system.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-27
13.9.3 - Interpretation of alarms 13.9.3.1 - Alarm display

Faults and errors detected are: - "card" level faults and errors: . card absent (AbsC), . fuse blown (DefFus) (+5 V fuse; F1), . different card (CDif), . watchdog fault (CdG), . self-test fault (Atests), - "participant" level faults and errors: . channel AIS fault (AIS) for analog bridges, . channel V.110 LFA fault (V.110) for low bit rates digital bridges (600 to 19200 bit/s). If the card (or port) is not masked, the faults and errors are processed by the common units and an alarm is transmitted to notify the LCT (and the data management system) of a major or minor alarm according to configuration. The "participant" level faults cause the "Fail" LED on the front of the CONF card to light. The alarm corresponding to the fault detected can then be accessed via the supervision and management system.
13.9.3.2 - Locating the fault displayed by the "Fail" LED

The fault is traced using the supervision and management system.
13.9.3.3 - Origin of the fault

The following table lists the faults displayed on the supervision and management system and specifies their probable origins and possible solutions. Faults detected +5 V fault "Participants" fault Probable origin +5 V fuse blown on card Network level fault Proposed solution Change fuse F1 (T1, 25 A) No local action
Table 13.1 - Interpretation of alarms
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-28
13.10 - Description of the user software

Refer to the LCT user manual N N5681515XXXX or the IONOS network management system user manual N 56814480.
Configurable parameters
The card parameters can be configured from the supervision and management system. The configuration parameters can be configured are: - nature of bridge (ANALOG or DIGITAL).
For ANALOG bridges:

The CONF card sets up CONFERENCE type analog bridges with or without protection. The configuration parameters that affect all of the "analog" participants of the CONF card are: - squelch low level threshold (between -40 dBr and -68 dBr in 2 dB steps) and absence of low level threshold, - AGC attenuation high level threshold (between -12 dBr and +3 dBr in 1 dB steps). The configuration parameters that individually concern each CONFERENCE type analog bridge are: - the Boolean* law on each of the signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("AND" or "OR" individually for each bit), - bridge service status (Inactive or Active). - the type of protection on the analog conference bridge ("None", "Simple" or "Double"), the nature of node ("Technical station" or "Central station") and the MAIN and SECONDARY participants, and protection override at CSt level (choice for single loop type protection = "None", "Main channel 1" or "Secondary channel 1"; choice for double loop protection = "None", "Main channel 1" or "Secondary channel 1" and/or "Main channel 2" or "Secondary channel 2"). The configuration parameters that individually concern each of the "analog" participants are: - the position of the data TS in the CONF card's CE/CS digital bit streams ("TS1 to TS15" and "TS17 to TS31"), - the signaling received fault* code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits a*, b*, c* and d* ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received idle* code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received active* code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("Normal" (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted idle* code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted active* code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit),
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-29
- the signaling transmitted status mode * at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits a, b, c* and d ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), - the status* of the data TS at the input of the summing function ("Active" or "Idle"). * : In the case of a conference bridge with protection, the bits "c" associated with the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants of the LPN's TSts and CSt are not processed (the bits "c" associated with these participants are forced to "0" in transmission and in reception). The configuration relating to the bits "c" associated with the MAIN channels of the LPNs TSts and the CSt cannot be modified. It is set as follows: - boolean law = "OR", - fault code = "1", - active code = "Normal", - status = "Active". In the case of a conference bridge with protection, the fault codes for bits a, b and d of the MAIN and SECONDARY participants on the LPN's TSts and CSt do not exist.
For low bit rate DIGITAL bridges:

The CONF card sets up the following types of digital bridges: - BROADCAST WITH RETURN, - UPLOAD, - BROADCAST-UPLOAD, - and CONFERENCE. NOTE: In the case of the 64 kbit/s digital data channels, the a, b and d signaling carry as follows: - bit a = 105/109, bit b = 108/107 complement and bit d = remote 109 complement/106. However, the CONF card processes bits a, b and d without taking into account the operations of the complement bits. The result of the Boolean processing of the b and d bits with regard to the terminals is as follows: - for Boolean "AND" law, 107 of a terminal = OR of the 108 of the other terminals (idem for remote 106/109). In this case, a terminal which sets its 108 circuit at open (binary value "1") imposes open status on the 107 circuit of the other terminals, - for Boolean "AND" law, 107 of a terminal = AND of the 108 of the other terminals (idem for remote 106/109). In this case, a terminal receives it open 107 circuit (binary value "1") only when the 108 circuit of all the other terminals is open. In the case of the low bit rate digital data channels, the a, b and d signaling carry as follows: - bit a = 105/109, bit b = 108/107 and bit d = remote 109 /106. In order to obtain identical terminal-to-terminal operation to that of the 64 kbit/s digital data channels, the CONF card systematically complements the SA and X signaling of the 2 Mbit/s CE/CS internal bus for transmission and reception. The "Boolean law", "default code" and "idle code" configuration parameters concern the SA and X signaling complement.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-30
BROADCAST WITH RETURN type digital bridge The configuration parameters that individually affect each BROADCAST WITH RETURN type digital bridge are: - bridge bit rate ("0,6 Kbit/s", "1,2 Kbit/s", "2,4 Kbit/s", "4,8 Kbit/s", "9,6 Kbit/s", "19,2 Kbit/s" et "64 Kbit/s"), - the MASTER participant, - the RETURN participant, - the others SLAVE participants, - the bridge service status (Inactive or Active). The configuration parameters that individually affect each of the digital participants of a BROADCAST WITH RETURN type digital bridge are: - the position of the TS in the CE/CS digital bit stream ("TS1 to TS15" and "TS17 to TS31"), and the number of first bit (chosen according to the digital channel's bit rate). The configuration parameters that individually and only affect MASTER and RETURN participants of a BROADCAST WITH RETURN type digital bridge are: - the signaling received fault code for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received idle code in reception for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode for each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), - the idle code for reception data ("0" or "1"), - the default code for reception data ("0" or "1"), - the satus mode for reception data ("Active" or "Idle"). UPLOAD type digital bridge The configuration parameters that individually affect each UPLOAD type digital bridge are: - bridge bit rate ("0,6 Kbit/s", "1,2 Kbit/s", "2,4 Kbit/s", "4,8 Kbit/s", "9,6 Kbit/s", "19,2 Kbit/s" et "64 Kbit/s"), - the MASTER participant, - the others SLAVE participants, - the Boolean law applicable to data ("AND" or "OR"), - the Boolean law affecting each of signaling bits ("AND" or "OR" individually for each bit), - the bridge service status (Inactive or Active).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-31
The configuration parameters that individually affect the MASTER participant of a UPLOAD type digital bridge are: - the signaling received idle code for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode for each of signaling bits ("Idle" ; this parameter is not configurable), - the idle code for reception data ("0" or "1"), - the status mode for reception data ("Idle" ; this parameter is not configurable), - the signaling transmitted idle code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted active code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted status mode at the Boolean output of each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), The configuration parameters that individually affect SLAVE participants of a UPLOAD type digital bridge are: - the signaling received fault code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received idle code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), - the signaling received active code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the data received idle code at the Boolean input ("0" or "1"), - the data received default code at the Boolean input ("0" or "1"), - the data received status at the Boolean input ("Active" or "Idle"). BROADCAST-UPLOAD type digital bridge The configuration parameters that individually affect each BROADCAST-UPLOAD type digital bridge are: - bridge bit rate ("0,6 Kbit/s", "1,2 Kbit/s", "2,4 Kbit/s", "4,8 Kbit/s", "9,6 Kbit/s", "19,2 Kbit/s" et "64 Kbit/s"), - the MASTER participant, - the others SLAVE participants, - the Boolean law applicable to data ("AND" or "OR"), - the Boolean law affecting each of signaling bits ("AND" or "OR" individually for each bit), - the bridge service status (Inactive or Active).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-32
The configuration parameters that individually affect the MASTER participant of a BROADCASTUPLOAD type digital bridge are: - the signaling received fault code for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received idle code for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode for each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle"), - the data reception idle code ("0" or "1"), - the data reception default code ("0" or "1"), - the data reception status mode ("Active" or "Idle"), - the signaling transmitted idle code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted active code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted status mode at the Boolean output of each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), The configuration parameters that individually affect SLAVE participants of a BROADCASTUPLOAD type digital bridge are: - the signaling received fault code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted idle code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted active code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted status mode at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit), - the data received idle code at the Boolean input ("0" or "1"), - the data received default code at the Boolean input ("0" or "1"), - the data received status mode at the Boolean input ("Active" or "Idle"). CONFERENCE type digital bridge The configuration parameters that individually affect each CONFERENCE type digital bridge are: - bridge bit rate ("0,6 Kbit/s", "1,2 Kbit/s", "2,4 Kbit/s", "4,8 Kbit/s", "9,6 Kbit/s", "19,2 Kbit/s" et "64 Kbit/s"), - the participants, - the Boolean law applicable to data ("AND" ; this parameter is not configurable), - the Boolean* law affecting each of signaling bits ("AND" or "OR" individually for each bit), - the type of protection for the analog conference bridge (None", "Simple" or "Double"), the node type ("Technical station" or "Central station") and the MAIN and SECONDARY participants, as well as protection override at the CST level (choice for single loop type protection = "None", "Main channel 1" or "Secondary channel 1"; choice for double loop type protection = "None", "Main channel 1" or "Secondary channel 1" and/or "Main channel 2" or "Secondary channel 2"). - the bridge service status (Inactive or Active).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-33
The configuration parameters that individually affect the participants of a CONFERENCE type digital bridge are: - the signaling received fault code* at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received idle* code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling received active* code at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling received status mode* at the Boolean input for each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle"), - the data received idle code at the Boolean input ("1" ; this parameter is not configurable), - the data received default code at the Boolean input ("1" ; this parameter is not configurable), - the data received status mode at the Boolean input ("Active" or "Idle"), - the signaling transmitted idle* code at the Boolean output for each of signaling bits ("0" or "1" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted active* code at the Boolean output for each of signaling ("Normal (signaling bit)" or "Complement (signaling bit complement)" individually for each bit), - the signaling transmitted status mode* at the Boolean output of each of signaling bits ("Active" or "Idle" individually for each bit). * : in the case of a conference bridge with protection, the bits "c" associated with the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants of the LPN's TSts and CSt are not processed (the bits "c" associated with these participants are forced to "0" in transmission and in reception). The configuration relating to the bits "c" associated with the main channels of the LPN's TSts and the CSt cannot be modified. It is set as follows: - boolean law = "OR", - fault code = "1", - active code = "Normal", - status mode = "Active". In the case of a conference bridge with protection, the fault code of bits SA, SB and X of the MAIN and SECONDARY participants of the LPN's TSts and CSt do not exist. In the case of a conference bridge with protection of the 64 kbit/s digital data channels, only the reception d bit associated with the MAIN participants of the TS and the CSt is managed (the d bit associated with the LOCAL and SECONDARY participants is forced to "0" in transmission and reception, along with the transmission d bit associated with the MAIN participants.)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 13-34
SECTION 14 Intelligent Access Device Board (IADB)

14.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-2
14 - IADB CARD
CONTENTS
Pages CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES 14-3 14-3
14.1 - OVERVIEW 14.2 - DESCRIPTION 14.3 - COMMISSIONING 14.3.1 - Configuration 14.3.2 - Commissioning 14.3.3 - Use
14-5 14-5 14-6 14-6 14-9 14-9
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 14-1 - Front panel Figure 14-2 - Configuration straps on the card
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-3
14 - IADB CARD
IADB
Status Status
Two-colour LED Pushbutton
Abdn Abort
RAZ
Reset
Liais Link
Term
Figure 14-1 - Front panel
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-4
14 - IADB CARD
14.1 - Overview
The intelligent access device board (IADB) is a concentrator/multiplexer, X.25 bridge/router and Frame Relay that uses MEGAPAC standard software. IADB card in not supervised by FMX. This card can be installed in any of slots 3 to 14 of the FMX12 or P3 Subscriber shelf or in any of slots of the FMX 4 shelf. The IADB offers the following connection options: - two asynchronous ports used, exclusively, for connecting configuration and statistics consoles, - two synchronous links (SUBTYPE XIO in MEGAPAC terminology) used for X.25 and high bit rate Frame Relay type connections, - two multi-protocol links (SUBTYPE SCC (MIO) in MEGAPAC terminology) used for medium bit rate, bit synchronous (X.25 or Frame relay) or asynchronous type connections, - and an Ethernet port. The IADB is seen by its internal software as a MEGAPAC/MEGABOX configuration comprising: - a CPU-E card, - an MIO asynchronous/synchronous half-card, - an Ethernet 10BT card. The IADB card can therefore run any software developed for the CPU-E card or the MEGABOX SL. The software version used for the IADB board is version 600 A or a more recent version. The configuration manual for the 600 A software which is used to configure the various ports of the board has document reference 05.045.451.
14.2 - Description
The front panel of the board has, from top to bottom, the following monitoring and control components (see Figure 14-1) : - one three-colour "Status" LED : software activity indicator; . orange microprocessor in the HALT state, . on steady normally configuration fault, . off power supply fault, - one "Abort" pushbutton : Pressing the "Abort" pushbutton causes all current operations to be shut down and the status of the board's registers to be displayed on the configuration console, . the board shuts down all communication processing operations, . the configuration port remains available and the status of the registers is displayed, . the "Status" LED is on steady. To restart the board, press the "RESET" button or execute the configuration mode's "boot" command. indicates a board
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-5
14 - IADB CARD
- one "RESET" button
: Pressing the "RESET" button causes the system to be reinitialized. All current calls are disconnected. The "RESET" button has the same effect as the "boot" command, when used in configuration mode. The board executes a "System Restart".
- one green "Link" LED
: indicating the status of the Ethernet link . on Ethernet link OK, . off Ethernet link fault.
- one "Term" connector
: configuration terminal connecting.
14.3 - Commissioning 14.3.1 - Configuration

Before you install the IADB card in the subrack, check the hardware configuration.
DS1
S1
P1
E761 S2
1X 4X
E751
1Y 4Y
E601
13Z 10Z
DS2
7Z 4Z 1Z
P2
F851
MX551
E101
MX554
BT 101 J1
The card is equipped of one fuse ; F851 : HR5 4 A.
Figure 14-2 - Configuration straps on the card

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-6
14 - IADB CARD
Channel XIO1 configuration: Configuration set to DTE mode, external clock. Channel XIO2 configuration (straps E601): DTE mode, external clock:
E601 13Z
10Z
7Z
4Z
1Z
DCE mode, internal clock (factory configuration):

E601 13Z
10Z
7Z
4Z
1Z
Channel MIO1 configuration (straps E751): Asynchronous interface:

E751 1Y
4Y
Synchronous interface, internal clock:

E751 1Y
4Y
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-7
14 - IADB CARD
Synchronous interface, external clock (factory configuration):
E751 1Y
4Y
Channel MIO2 configuration (straps E761): Asynchronous interface:

E761 1X
4X
Synchronous interface, internal clock (factory configuration):

E761 1X
4X
Synchronous interface, external clock:

E761 1X
4X
Stack (strap E101) (factory configuration):
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-8
E101
14 - IADB CARD
14.3.2 - Commissioning
For any maintenance or physical configuration work on the card, you must disconnect the power supply system via: - the "on/off" switch (M/Ar) on the +5 V/-5 V/+53 V/-53 V converter, - the "O/I" switch on the 100/220 V mains power supply, - the "on/off" switch (M/A) on the -48 V battery converter. 1. The equipment is powered down. All the straps on the board are correctly set. Connect an asynchronous terminal (set to 9600 bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit) to port A of the 25-way Sub-D "Term" connector on the board front panel via the right cable (see below). 2. The equipment is powered up. The indicators are flashing. The terminal displays: hh/mm/ss dd/mm/yy SYSTEM RESTART press "RETURN" and log into the configuration system by entering the command "BE00". The response is "BASE" which represents access to the configurator. You can now configure the link descriptors, the resources and the various tables concerning the board (refer to the 600 A software configuration manual, reference 05.045.450).
14.3.3 - Use
Asynchronous ports:
the asynchronous ports available on the female 25-way Sub-D "Term" connector on the front panel are programmed via the MEGAPAC software to 9600 bit/s with 8 data bits, one stop bit and no parity bits and V.24/V.28 interface mode. They provide access to the "configuration" and "statistics" functions. Control signals are not managed, but the XON/XOFF protocol is supported. Ports A and B are in DTE mode so a terminal can be connected locally. To connect a modem to the control port you will need a special cable. Port A uses resource EI00(0) by default. It is via this port that system register status information is displayed when the ABORT button is pressed. By default, this port is also used to display call status information. This port is also the one used to restart the system in the event of a crash due to a major problem (configuration error, for example). Port B uses resource EI01(1) by default. This port can be used, for example, to display system statistics.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-9
14 - IADB CARD
The pin-out of the "Term" connector and the connecting cable are given below.
Term
1
TXA RXA BCL1 BCL1 BCL2 GND BCL1
14
TXB RXB
BCL2
13
25
IADB card side (Term)
Terminal side
L = 1.80 m
6993400 1 Cable 2 Cable number 3 3 25-pin HE 502 connector 4 9-way female HE 502 connector
Wiring diagram
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 14
TXA RXA BCL1 BCL1 BCL2 GND BCL2 BCL1
1 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5
22
25 13
Synchronous ports (SUBTYPE XIO in MEGAPAC terminology):

The two XIO ports (XIO1 and XIO2) are linked to X.24/V.11 type interfaces. Port XIO1 (PSO1), for connecting the host FMX, has a DTE interface and uses only an external clock. Port XIO2 (PSO2) has a strap-programmable DTE/DCE interface. The clock (internal or external) is chosen independently of the interface type (DTE or DCE).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-10
14 - IADB CARD
Synchronous or asynchronous ports (SUBTYPE SCC (MIO) in MEGAPAC terminology):

The two MIO ports (MIO1 and MIO2) are linked to V.28 type interfaces in synchronous or asynchronous DTE mode. A set of straps is used to select: - in synchronous mode, the direction of the clock (incoming or outgoing), - in asynchronous mode, the assignment and direction of two optional, additional supervision functions. Bit rate limitations are as follows: - 115.2 kbit/s in asynchronous mode, - 19200 bit/s in synchronous mode.
Ethernet port:
The interface used is a 10BaseT interface. A female SUB D/RJ45 adapter is used to provide a standard 10BaseT interface. The green LED on the front panel of the board indicates the status of the "LINK", in other words, the status of the 10 Base T link. In normal operation, the LED should be on.
Data backup
The lithium battery (3 V, 500 mAh) backs up data in SRAM memory. It also maintains the real time clock if a power outage occurs. The battery has a life (in backup mode) of about 6000 hours. In normal operation, strap E101 should be fitted. In storage, this strap must be withdrawn (factory configuration). In this case, the system configuration and any downloaded software will be lost.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-11
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 14-12
SECTION 15 ADPCM CARD (ADPCM)

15.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-1
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-2
15 - ADPCM CARD
CONTENTS
Pages CONTENTS/LIST OF FIGURES/LIST OF TABLES 15.1 - Overview 15.2 - Description 15.3 - Commissioning and Operation 15.3.1 - Configuration 15.3.2 - Initialization 15.3.2.1 - Initialization on power up 15.3.3 - Use 15.3.3.1 - General 15.3.3.2 - PCM and ADPCM Speech Channel Allocations 15.3.3.3 - Signaling Processing 15.3.3.4 - PCM Law Type 15.3.3.5 - Fault Reaction 15.3.4 - Interpretation of Alarms 15.3.4.1 - Alarm Display 15.3.4.2 - Locating the fault displayed by the "Fail" LED 15.3.4.3 - Origin of the fault 15.4 - Description of the user software 15-3 15-5 15-7 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-9 15-9 15-9 15-16 15-16 15-16 15-17 15-17 15-17 15-17 15-18
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 15-1 - Functional location of the ADPCM card in the FMX Figure 15-2 - Front Panel Figure 15-3 - PCM and ADPCM Channel Allocations in Internal datastreams (32 kbit/s transcoding) Figure 15-4 - PCM and ADPCM Channel Allocations in Internal datastreams (16 kbit/s transcoding)
LIST OF TABLES
Table 15-1 - Allocation of the 20 PCM and 20 ADPCM Channels in Internal datastreams (32 kbit/s transcoding) Table 15-2 - Allocation of the 24 PCM and 24 ADPCM Channels in Internal datastreams (16 kbit/s transcoding) Table 15.3 - Interpretation of alarms
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-3
15 - ADPCM CARD
ADPCM CARD
CS 2 Mbit/s streams CE CS
CE 2 Mbit/s streams CE CS AGGREGAGE CARD: - 1-2Mbps port (2MU), - 4-2Mbps port (A2S). To remote FMX 2 Mbit/s HDB3
COB CARD
Analog channels
ACCESS CARD: - 6-exchange port (Exchan), - 6-subscriber port (Subscr), - 12-exchange port (Exch12), - 6-programmable audio frequency channel (6PAFC) - 1-2Mbps port (2MU), - 4-2Mbps port (A2S).
Switching matrix
Figure 15-1 - Functional location of the ADPCM card in the FMX
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-4
15 - ADPCM CARD
15.1 - Overview
The ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) card carries out compression and decompression of the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) coded voice channels using the ADPCM algorithm. This optimizes the 2 Mbit/s streams when the FMX interfaces are via 6-programmable audio frequency channel (6PAFC), 6 or 12-exchange port (Exch or Exch 12), 6-subscriber port (Subscr) cards, or are remoted over 2 Mbit/s (A2ME or A2S) cards. The ADPCM card physically occupies a port card slot in the FMX, but is functionally a Common Equipment Unit connected to the COB card (see Figure 15-1). This card is designed to receive a 2 Mbit/s internal frame from the COB card switching matrix, and transmit a 2 Mbit/s internal frame back to it after channel compression/decompression. The ADPCM card codes the 64 kbit/s PCM channels into 32 or 16 kbit/s ADPCM channels and decodes 32 or 16 kbit/s ADPCM channels into 64 kbit/s PCM channels. Functional characteristics The processing capacity depends on the choice of compression algorithm which determines coding at 32 or 16 kbit/s. The number of full duplex channels processed per 2 Mbit/s frame equals: - 20 with 32 kbit/s ADPCM coding, - and 24 with 16 kbit/s ADPCM coding. The data transfer time between ADPCM card input and output does not exceed one 125 s frame in each transmission direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-5
15 - ADPCM CARD
ADPCM Def Fail Red LED

TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-6
15 - ADPCM CARD
Configuration and operation The ADPCM card is configured and operated via a supervision and management system which may be: - a Local Craft Terminal (LCT) connected locally (or remotely) to the front panel of the GIE or GIE - P card of the equipment (or to the connection panel or the GIE adapter card depending on the type of subrack and on the type of GIE card used), - or the Remote Management System which is the IONOS network management system.
15.2 - Description
The front panel of the ADPCM card has a red "Fail" LED (see Figure 15-2). This LED indicates an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The ADPCM card is fitted with a 1.25 A T1 fuse (F1).
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-7
15 - ADPCM CARD
15.3 - Commissioning and Operation 15.3.1 - Configuration

The ADPCM card has no straps or configuration switches. On initialization or on a change of configuration, the operating instructions (configuration parameters) can be programmed using the supervision and management system.
The ADPCM card is initialized as follows: - initialization on power up, followed by a self-test, - configuration using the supervision and management system.
15.3.2.1 - Initialization on power up

On power up, the card is initialized in a number of successive stages; the results of the various checks are reflected by the front panel LED: a. LED remains off. Check the fuse and the converter. b. Self-tests. Four functional self-tests are performed in turn. If no faults are detected, the self-tests are transparent to the operator (the LED lights briefly then remains off). If the LED remains on permanently, the microprocessor of the CPU block has failed to start up; power down the card and reinitialize it. If the fault remains, change the card. If a fault other than the microprocessor fault is detected, the fault code is indicated by the number encoded by the flashing of the "Fail" LED; in this case, replace the card. The fault codes are: Fault code "Fail" LED Flashing regularly One flash Two flashes 1 X 2 X 3 X
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-8
15 - ADPCM CARD
Fault code No 1 2 3
Circuits and functions tested RAM Data memory of the CPU block DSP Channel microcontroller EPIC TSs Switching Matrix
On first initialization, the card has no default configuration:
15.3.3 - Use 15.3.3.1 - General

The ADPCM Card provides: - processing of 20 channels coded in PCM format in 20 TSs at 64 kbit/s and 20 channels coded in ADPCM format in 10 TSs at a rate of 32 kbit/s. - processing of 24 channels coded in PCM format in 24 TSs at 64 kbit/s and 24 channels coded in ADPCM format in 6 TSs at a rate of 16 kbit/s. Modify the configuration parameters listed in section 15.4 from the supervision and management system.
15.3.3.2 - PCM and ADPCM Speech Channel Allocations

Principle of PCM/ADPCM transcoding Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) quantizes each new speech channel sample into 8 bits every 125 s for 64 kbit/s bit rate. The ADPCM coder uses an adaptive differential coding scheme with an adaptive predictor. The estimated value is compared to the received sample to reduce the number of bits representing the sample to 4 in the case of 32 kbit/s bit rate or to 2 in the case of 16 kbit/s bit rate . The ADPCM coder thus transmits a signal representing the difference between the speech channel sample and a predicted value, resulting in increased transmission channel capacity.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-9
15 - ADPCM CARD
PCM-to-ADPCM coding: The 8-bit quantized sample produced by a non-linear compression law (A law in Europe) again is linearized into 14 bits. The estimated value is compared to the linear 14-bit input to produce a differential signal. The signal is adaptively quantized for transmission of the received sample code. A reverse adaptive quantizer is reset to the ADPCM-coded value to produce a quantized differential signal. The estimated signal value is added to the quantized differential signal to restore the input signal. The adaptive predictor, which affects both the restored signal and the quantized differential signal, provides an input signal estimation. ADPCM-to-PCM decoder: By the same process as with coding, a signal is restored by adding the estimated value to the quantized differential signal. The quantized signal is produced by a reverse adaptive quantizer which is reset to the ADPCMcoded value. The estimated value is supplied by an adaptive predictor. The restored signal is converted into the PCM-coded speech channel sample through A or law linear PCM code conversion and synchronous coder control. Transcoding Each 2 Mbit/s internal datastream is organized into 32 timeslots, TS0 to TS31. Speech channels are carried by TS1 to TS15 and TS17 to TS31. 32 kbit/s transcoding The allocations of the 20 PCM channels and 20 ADPCM channels to internal datastream TSs from the COB Card into internal datastream TSs transmitted to the COB Card after transcoding is given in Table 15-1, and the corresponding diagram is available in Figure 15-3. The relevant connections in common equipment units are selected by the operator according to Table 15-1. Two ADPCM channels are always added into a TS in the following format: Bit 7 A3 (MSB) Bit 6 A2 Channel A Bit 5 A1 Bit 4 A0 (LSB) Bit 3 B3 (MSB) Bit 2 B2 Channel B Bit 1 B1 Bit 0 B0 (LSB)
16 kbit/s transcoding The allocations of the 24 PCM channels and 24 ADPCM channels to internal datastream TSs from the COB Card into internal datastream TSs transmitted to the COB Card after transcoding is given in Table 15-2, and the corresponding diagram is available in Figure 15-4. The relevant connections in common equipment units are selected by the operator according to Table 15-2. Two ADPCM channels are always added into a TS in the following format: Bit 7 A1 (MSB) Bit 6 A0 (LSB) Bit 5 B1 Bit 4 B0 Channel B Bit 3 C1 Bit 2 C0 Channel C Bit 1 D1 Bit 0 D0 Channel D
Channel A
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-10
15 - ADPCM CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-11
15 - ADPCM CARD
Internal datastream from COB card TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 CHANNEL 1 2 3A,3B 4 5 6A, 6B 7 8 9A, 9B 10 11 12A, 12B 13 14 15A, 15B 17A, 17B 18 19 20A, 20B 21 22 23A, 23B 24 25 26A, 26B 27 28 29A, 29B 30 31 PCM PCM TYPE 8 bits 8 bits
Internal datastream to COB card TRANSCODED CHANNELS 17A 17B 18, 19 20A 20B 21, 22 23A 23B 24, 25 26A 26B 27, 28 29A 29B 30, 31 1, 2 3A 3B 4,5 6A 6B 7, 8 9A 9B 10, 11 12A 12B 13, 14 15A 15B ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 8 bits x 2 4 bits 4 bits 13, 14 15 10, 11 12 7, 8 9 4, 5 6 30, 31 1, 2 3 27, 28 29 24, 25 26 21,22 23 18, 19 20 TS 17
APDCM 4 bits/chan PCM PCM 8 bits 8 bits
ADPCM 4 bits/chan PCM PCM 8 bits 8 bits
ADPCM 4 bits/chan ADPCM 4 bits/chan PCM PCM 8 bits 8 bits
Table 15-1 - Allocation of the 20 PCM and 20 ADPCM Channels in Internal datastreams (32 kbit/s transcoding)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-12
Internal datastreams received from COB Card
IT
8 9 16 24 31 12 15 17 10 11 13 20 22 28 0 23 26 29 14 18 19 21 25 27 30
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
20-64 kbit/s PCM channels
20-32 kbit/s ADPCM channels
IT
AB
8 9 10 17 20 26 11 12 13 14 16 18 19 25 27 28 15 23 29 21 22 24 30
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
AB
31 0 1 2
AB
3 4 5
AB
6 7 8
AB
9 10 11
AB
12 13 14
AB
15 16
Figure 15-3 - PCM and ADPCM Channel Allocations in Internal datastreams (32 kbit/s transcoding)
Internal datastreams sent to COB Card
15 - ADPCM CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-13
15 - ADPCM CARD
Internal datastream from COB Card TS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D 5 6 7 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D 9 10 11 12A, 12B, 12C, 12D 13 14 15 17 18 19 20A, 20B, 20C, 20D 21 22 23 24A, 24B, 24C, 24D 25 26 27 28A, 28B, 28C, 28D 29 30 31
Internal datastream to COB Card TRANSCODED CHANNELS

4A 4B 4C 1, 2, 3, 5 4D 8A 8B 6, 7, 9, 10 8C 8D 12A ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM PCM ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 8 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 2 bits/chan 28 28 27, 29, 30, 31 22, 23, 25, 26 24 17, 18, 19, 21 20 24 20 12 12 11, 13, 14, 15 6, 7, 9, 10 8 1, 2, 3, 5 4 8 4
CHANNELS
PCM PCM PCM
TYPE
8 bits 8 bits 8 bits
TS
ADPCM 2 bits/chan PCM PCM PCM 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits
ADPCM 2 bits/chan PCM PCM PCM PCM PCM PCM 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits
11, 13, 14, 15 PCM 12B 12C 12D 20A 20B 20C ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM
17, 18, 19, 21 PCM 20D 24A 24B ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM
22, 23, 25, 26 PCM 24C 24D 28A ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM
27, 29, 30, 31 PCM 28B 28C 28D ADPCM ADPCM ADPCM
Table 15-2 - Allocation of the 24 PCM and 24 ADPCM Channels in Internal datastreams (16 kbit/s transcoding)
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-14
Internal datastreams received from COB Card
IT
0 8 10 12 20 24 11 13 14 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 0 1 2 3
15
30
31
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18 t
20A 20B 20C 20D
24A 24B 24C24D
28A 28B 28C 28D
4A 4B 4C 4D
8A 8B 8C 8D
12A 12B 12C 12D
24-64 kbit/s PCM channels

17 18 1921 21 23 2526 28 29 30 31
24-16 kbit/s ADPCM channels
20A 20B 20C
20D 24A 24B
24C 24D 28A
28B 28C 28D
4A
4B
4C
1 2 3 5
4D 8A
8B
6 7 9 10
8C 8D 12A
12B 12C 12D

11 13 14 15
IT 8 20 24 28 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
t
Figure 15-4 - PCM and ADPCM Channel Allocations in Internal datastreams (16 kbit/s transcoding)
from next frame
Internal datastreams sent to COB Card
15 - ADPCM CARD
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-15
15 - ADPCM CARD
15.3.3.3 - Signaling Processing

The IT16 signaling quadribits associated with the 64 kbit/s PCM channels can transport bits a, b, c and d. The transmission capacity of an IT16 associated with a 32 kbit/s ADPCM channel is limited to 2 bits. This two bits can be assigned to transmit: either, the two signaling bits a and b, or, signaling bit a and maintenance bit c. NOTE: This choice is made on a channel-per-channel basis from the supervision and management system.
The transmission capacity of an IT16 associated with the four 16 kbit/s ADPCM channel is limited to 4 bits. This four bits can be assigned to transmit: either, signaling bit a for the four channels, or, maintenance bit c for the four channels. NOTE: This choice is made, channel per channel, from the supervision and management system. Whatever the channel coding rate, multiframe alignment signal imitation is not permitted. Scrambling as described in ITU-T recommendation G.761 is used. For the IT16 quadribits relating to the channels transcoded from ADPCM to PCM, the non-transmitted a, b and c bits are set at "0" or "1" by the operator from the supervision and management system. Bit d is set at "1".
15.3.3.4 - PCM Law Type

Only the A law is used to quantize a voice sample over 8 bits.
15.3.3.5 - Fault Reaction

For a backward fault, the ADPCM card detects the AIS fault received in the ADPCM signaling quadribits before scrambling. The AIS fault must be confirmed for one second before taking consequential action. The consequential action consists in the operator transmitting bit c at "1" in each PCM signaling quadribit concerned (the other bits [a and b] are transmitted with a set fault code ["0" or "1"]) from the supervision and management system. For a forward fault, the ADPCM card detects the AIS fault received in the PCM signaling quadribits. The detection criteria and consequential action are identical as for the backward direction.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-16
15 - ADPCM CARD
15.3.4 - Interpretation of Alarms 15.3.4.1 - Alarm Display

Faults and errors detected are: - "card" level faults and errors: . card absent (AbsC), . fuse blown (DefFus) (+5 V fuse; F1), . different card (CDif), . watchdog fault (CdG), . self-test fault (Atests), - and the AIS fault (AIS). If the card (or port) is not masked, the faults and errors are processed by the common units and an alarm is transmitted to notify the LCT (and the data management system) of a major or minor alarm according to configuration. The AIS fault causes the "Fail" LED on the front of the ADPCM card to light (the alarm corresponding to the fault detected can then be accessed via the supervision and management system).
15.3.4.2 - Locating the fault displayed by the "Fail" LED

The fault is traced using the supervision and management system.
15.3.4.3 - Origin of the fault

The following table lists the faults displayed on the supervision and management system and specifies their probable origins and possible solutions. Faults detected +5 V fault AIS fault Probable origin +5 V fuse blown on card Network level fault Proposed solution Change fuse F1 (T1, 25 A) No local action
Table 15-3 - Interpretation of alarms
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-17
15 - ADPCM CARD
15.4 - Description of the user software

Refer to the LCT user manual N N5681515XXXX or the IONOS network management system user manual N 56814480.
Configurable parameters
The card parameters can be configured from the supervision and management system. The configuration parameters can be configured are:
For the card :

- the coding bit rate: 32 or 16 kbit/s.
For each channel :

- activation/none-activation of AIS fault detection, - choice of signaling bits: for the 32 kbit/s coding rate: bits "a and b" or "a and c", for the 16 kbit/s coding rate: bits "a or c", - choice of idle status of none-transmitted signaling bits ("0" or "1"), - choice of idle status of signaling bits in event of a fault ("0" or "1"). NOTE: The signaling bits idle codes are applied in both transmission directions.
TM - N56815140304 Volume 2 Page 15-18
Networks and Telecommunications Division Le Ponant de Paris - 27, rue Leblanc - 75512 PARIS CEDEX 15 - FRANCE Tel. : +33 1 55 75 75 75 - Fax : +33 1 55 75 31 91 http : /www.sagem.com
Sige social : 6, rue dIna - 75783 PARIS CEDEX 16 - FRANCE - S.A. au capital de FRF 210 502 900 - 562 082 909 RCS PARIS

FMX Sagem

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

FMX Sagem

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SAGEM FMX

64 and n x 64 kbit/s Digital Cross-Connect Multiplexer

No reproduction without the written consent of

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-1

These sub-racks should only be installed by authorized personnel. Fire shield X X

The sub-rack casing acts as a fire shield.

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-2

HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST

September 1998 November 1998

All pages All pages

All pages (tome 1 only)

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-3

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-4

HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ?

This Technical Handbook comprises two volumes.

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-5

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-6

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-7

HANDBOOK CHANGE LIST HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ? PAGE INDEX

0-1 0-3 0-5 and 0-6

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-8

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-9

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-10

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-11

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-12

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-13

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-14

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-15

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-16

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-17

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-18

2W/4W ADPCM AF AIS AISrem

BBTxRx BER BER/ FAW

CE CEU Clk Fail COB CONFB CRC

: Data Circuit-terminating Equipment : Degraded Minute : Data Terminal Equipment

: E-wire A, E-wire B : Electro-Magnetic Compatibility : Errored Second

: Frame Alignment : Frame Alignment Loss TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-19

FAW Flt Ind

: Frame Alignment Word : Fault Indication

GIE (GIE - P) GSF GTR

: High Density Bipolar 3 : Hand-Held Terminal

IADB IC Int Clk

: Intelligent Access Device Board : Input Channel : Internal Clock

: Local Oscillator : Line Signal Failure : Loopback

MA, MB MFAW MM MMC

: M-wire A, M-wire B : MultiFrame Alignment Word : Machine-Machine (Interface) : Man-Machine Communications

PABX PC PCM PWR Fail

SbMux SELV TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-20

: Subscriber Multiplexer : Safety Extra Low Voltage

SES SIG SRC StMux

: Telecommunications Network Voltage : Time Slot

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-21

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 0-22

SECTION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-1

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-2

Subscriber D a ta T ran sm ission U n it

Figure 1.1 - FMX System Applications

V ide o c o n fe r en cin g S y ste m

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-3

1.2 - Functional Description

TM - N56815140305 Volume 1 Page 1-4